CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY *iia^?M?.i;. ,9,?...'!,']?.. G/eek language. „,. 3 1924 031 307 444 olin.anx ^ Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031307444 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE ALPHEUS CROSBY, PROFESSOK OP THB GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERAHTRB UO DARTMOUTH COIXEGB. ^SCHTLUS. TWENTY-FODETH EDITION. BOSTON: PHILLIPS, SAMPSON, AND COMPANY. 1859. "The Language of the Greeks was truly like themselves, it v\:i- oonformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. • • ♦ * The Greek Tosgue, from its propriety and universality, is made for all that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and under every Form of writing'' — Harris's Hermes, Bk. III. Ch. 5. " Greek, — the shrine of the genius of the old virorld ; as universal as our race, as Individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of inde- fatio-able strength, with the complication and the distinctness of nature herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exoUid- ed ; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the niind like English ; with words lilce pictures, with words like the gossamer film ^f the sum- mer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and the intensity of ^schylus ; not compressed to the closest by Tliucydi- des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun- ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean toonh of Demosthenes!" — '^"'"•ylg"'" ^tndjj "f ibf. Qreel^ Classic Poets, Gen. Introd. Entered according to Act of (Jongress, m the year 1846, by Alpheus Crosby, in the Clerk's office of the District Court of the District of New Hampshire. CAMBRIDGE: UNIVERSITY PRESS. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books ; viz. a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scien- tific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The volume from which the elements of a. language are first learned be- comes to the, student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be changed in the course of his study without a material derangement of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The familiar remark, " It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the first book put into the learner's hands, it should also be the last to leave them," though applying most happily to grammatical study in general, was made by its accomplished author with particular refer- ence to the manual used by the student. In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students ; and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate' the prin- ciples of the lang-uage more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully, than has been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size. At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by the reduction of the most important principles to the form of concise rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many valuable works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through a cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the understanding and the memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult the advantage even of the beginner by a false representation of the language, or by any departure from philosophical accuracy of state- ment or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always better than false- hood, and science than empiricism. To secure, so far as might be, the double object of the work, it has been constructed upon the following plan. First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensive rules and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the student. For convenient examples of the care with which brevity and simplicity have been here studied, the reader will permit me to refer him to the rules of syntax, as presented to the eye at a single view in T[ 64, and to the elementary tables of inflection and formation. Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his- torical development, as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the present state of philological science, would permit. The student who thinks wishes to know, not only lohat is true, but lohy it is true ; and to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason is often like the silver cord of ^olus, confining a vast number of facts, which otherwise, like the, enfranchised winds, are scattered far and wide beyond the power of control. Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting the language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given to the contrary ; believing that the grammarian has no more right than the author to use indiscriminately, and without notice, the vocabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, — " A party-color'd dress Of patch'J and pye-ball'd languages." The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine them in their connection, have been all cited from classic authors in the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest Attic writers, beginning with .SCschylus, and ending with iEschines. It was also thought, that the practical value of "such examples mio-ht be greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose works, as those of a model-u-riter, should be most frequently resorted to ; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a com- panion to his grammar, in which he might consult the passages re- ferred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice I could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and amono his writings, the Anabasis. Refelrences also abound in the Etymology ■lilt chieflv in respect to i)Ul'Ull!lf HUtl fll'ilHL'llB ftmiB" , The subject of euphonic laws and changes has received a larger share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not larger than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language, " Whose law waa heavenly beauty, and-whose breath Enrapturing music.'* The student will allow me to commend to his special notice two principles of extensive use in the explanation of Greek forms ; viz. the precession of vowels (i. e. the tendency of vowels, in the progress of language, to pass from a more open to a closer sound ; see §§ 28, 29, 44, 86, 93, 118, 123, 259, &c.), and the correspondence be- tween the consonants v and or, and the vowels a and s (§§ 34, 46. /S, 50, 56-58,60,63. R.,84, 100.2, 105, 109, 132, 179, 181,200,201, 213, 248./, 300, &c.). In treating of Greek etymology, I have wished to avoid every thing like arbitrary formation ; and, instead of deducing one form from an- other by empirical processes, which might often be quite as well re- versed, I have endeavoured, by rigid analysis, to resolve all the forms into their elements. The old method of forming the tenses of the . Greek verb one from another (compared by an excellent grammarian to " The House that Jack built "), is liable to objection, not only on account of its complexity and multiplication of arbitrary rules, but yet more on account of the great number of imaginary forms which it re- quires the student to suppose, and which often occupy a place in Bis memory, to the exclusion of the real forms of the language. To cite but a single case, the second aorist passive, according to this method, is formed from the second aorist active, although it is a general rule of the language, that verbs which have the one tense want the other (§ 255. /3). Nor is the method which makes the theme the foundation of all the other forms free from objection, either in declension or in conjugation. This method not only requires the assistance of many imaginary nominatives and presents, but it often inverts the order of nature, by deriving the simpler form from the more complicated, and commits a species of grammatical anachronism, by making the later form the origin of the earlier. See §§ 84, 100, 256. V., 265. In the following grammar, all the forms are immediately referred to the root, and the analysis of the actual, as obtained from classic usage, takes the place both of the metempsychosis of the obsolete, and of the metamorphosis of the ideal. Those parts of Greek Gramm,ar of which I at first proposed to form a separate volume, the Dialects, the History of Greek Inflection, the Formation of Words, and Versification, I have concluded, with the VI PREFACE. advice of highly esteemed friends, to incorporate in this ; so that a single volume should constitute a complete manual of Greek Grammar. To accomplish this object within moderate limits of size and expense, a very condensed mode of printing has been adopted, giving to the volume an unusual amount of matter in proportion to its size. I thank my printers, that, through their skill and care, they have shov?n this to be consistent with so much tjrpographical clearness and beauty. It has also been found necessary to reserve for a separate treatise those parts of the first edition which were devoted to General Grammar, and which it was at first proposed to include in the present edition as an appendix. I submit to this necessity with the less reluctance, because a systematic attention to the principles of General Grammar ought not to be deferred till the study of the Greek, unless, in accord- ance with the judicious advice of some distinguished scholars, this should be the first language learned after our own ; and because the wish has been expressed, that these parts might be published separ- ately for the use of those who were not engaged in a course of classical study. I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning who have so kindly encouraged and aided me in my work. Among those to whom I am especially -indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while I am writing, to a post which he wdll so much adorn, will not, I trust, withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in which he has won for himself so enviable a distinction ; Professors Felton of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, Sanborn, my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of An- dover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden, Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude without the acknowledgment of my deep obhgations to previous la- borers in the same field, to the great living, and to the great DEAD — Eequiescant in pace ! It is almost superfluous that I should mention, as among those to whom I am most greatly indebted the honored names of Ahrens, Bemhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Kiihner, Lobeck, Mait- taire, Matthise, Passow, Rost, Thiersch, and Vigor. A. C. Hanover, Oct. 13, 1846 PREFACE TO THE TABLES. The following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram- mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater conven- ience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular ar- rangement are too obvious to require remark ; nor is it less obvious, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume. The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been con- structed, are -the following : — I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram- matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which as- sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of nine forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declension, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weariness of the teacher's ear? With the ellipses in the following tables, the par- adigms of neuter nouns contain only eight forms, instead of the twelve which are usually, and the fifteen which are sometimes, given ; and the paradigms of participles and of adjectives similarly declined contain only twenty-two forms, instead of the usual thirty-six or forty-five. See 1 4. n. To give the forms just as they appear upon the Greek page, that is, without abbreviation and without hyphens. A dissected and abbreviated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young student to mistake, and familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, with fragments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were sep- arated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less ; but they are usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so that they contain, sometimes a part of the affix, sometimes the whole affix, and sometimes the affix with a part of the root. Hyphens are useful 1 VIU PREFACE TO THE TABLES. in the analysis of forms, but a table of paradigms seems not to be the most appropriate place for them. In the following tables, the affixes are given by themselves, and the paradigms are so arranged in col- umns, that the eye of the student will usually separate, at a glance, the root from the affix. in. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine grammarians. Hence, for example, 1 . The first perfect active imperative, which has no existence in pure writers, has been discarded. 2. For the imaginary imperative forms Xaza&i, tI&iji, 8ido&i, Sdxvv&i-i have been substituted the actual forms I'ffuj, tI&u, dldov, Sily.vv. 3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions or dialectic peculiarities. Thus, povXsvhoiaav and /Sovlivonav, ^ovlsvaaig and ^ov).£vasias, i^s^ovlsvxsiaav and e/^s^ovXsvxsaav (^ 34) ; ^ovXsviaOotaav and ^ovliviaQav, pov'Kiv&drjaav and (iov- Xsv&sIev (•][ 35) ; stl&rjv and iii&ovv (^ 50) ; ■^s and '^a&a, sas- xai and 'iaiai (T[ 55). 4. The second future active and middle, which, except as a eupho- nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly rejected. IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impression, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and -pluperfect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ; when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and pluperfect ; eighty-five, which have the second aorist active ; fifty, which have the second aorist and fature passive ; and forty, which have the second aorist middle ? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most fully the statis- tics of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all praise has gathered, from all'the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight verbs which have the second perfect, one hundred and forty-five which have the second aorist active, eighty-four which have the second aorist passive and fifty-eight which have the second aorist middle. And, of his PREFACE TO THE TABLES. IX catalogue of nearly eight hundred verbs, embracing the most common verbs of the language, only fifty-five have the third future, and, in the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight. To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the vener- erable shade of Tvjitca, but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes' bed to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned. The actual future of TUJrtta is not n5i//o), but TVuirjaoj, the perfect passive is both TSTVfiiiai and ieiutiuj^uki, the aorists are in part dialectic or poetic, the first and second perfect and pluperfect active are not found in classic Greek, if, indeed, found at all, and the second future active and middle are the mere figments of grammatical fancy. And yet all the regular verbs in the language must be gravely pronounced defective, because they do not conform to this imaginary model. In the following tables, the example of Kiihner has been followed, in selecting ^ovXbvco as the paradigm of regular conjugation. This verb is strictly regular, it glides smoothly over the tongue, is not lia- ble to be mispronounced, and presents, to the eye, the prefixes, root, and affixes, with entire distinctness throughout. This is followed by shorter paradigms, in part merely synoptical, which exhibit the dif- ferent classes of verbs, with their varieties of formation. From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writ- ing Greek, to employ the form in -fis&ov, little suspecting that it is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere invention of the Alexandrine grammarians? The teacher who meets with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, " to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see again." In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the op- tative, this form does not occur at all ; and, in the remaining tenses, there have been found only five examples, two of which are quoted by Athenseus from a word-hunter {ovo[icno9i^Qag), whose affectation he is ridiculing, while the three classical examples are all poetic, oc- X PREFACE TO THE TABLES. curling, one in Homer (H. V. 485), and the other two in Sophocles (El. 950 and Phil. 1079). And yet, in the single paradigm of lujiio), as I learned it in my boyhood, this " needless Alexandrine, " " Which, like a wounded snalce, drags its slow length along, " occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, that is, almost nine times as often as in the whole range of the Greek classics. With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used, so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu- ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the grammar, and with other exercises. 2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference, than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. 3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. 4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, tiU the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, " the words," in the expressive language of Milton, " like so many nimble and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places." ' In the present edition, the Tables of Inflection have been enlarged by the addition of the Dialectic Forms, the Analysis of the Affixes the Changes in the Root of the Verb, &c. Tables of Ligatures, of Derivation, of Pronominal Correlatives, of the Rules of Syntax, and of Forms of Analysis and Parsing, have also been added. Some references have been made to sections in the Grammar. A. C. Hanover, Sept. 1, 1846. *** The volume of Tahles contains pp. i, ii, vii -xil, 9-84. CONTENTS. TABLES. I. Tables of Orthogeapht and Orthoepy. A. At.phabet, B. Ligatures, Page. . 9 10 C. VoCAii EuaaENTS, Page. 11 II. Tables of Etymology. Introdactoiy Eemaxks, A. Tables of Deolension. I, Affixes of the Three Deden- sions, .... n. Analysis of the Affixes, . in. Nouns of Declension I. A. Mascoline, tx/aIcss, vawr>j;, TaiQ^uxs, • • • B. Feminine, trxidj ^vqos, Dialectic Forms, IV. Nouns of Declension II. A. Masculine and Feminine, Xoyas, ^iifioSt o^osj voos, veto;, B. Neuter, itZkov, ^rs^av, ^wo- ptov, offT&ov, etvwys&iVj . Dialectic Forms, . V. Nouns of Declension III. A. Mute, 1. Labial, yi-^, ipxs-v^, 2. Palatal, xo^a^j aJ'^, ^a- 3. Lingual. a. Masculine and Femi- nine, 'jraTsj vrovSj ava^, Xx^'s, y-Xils, /3. Neuter, trijfice, ^us, Tl-jrit^, xs^as, CVS, . B. Liquid, T«e, x^'e> • • «, • 1* 12 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 Syncopated, 'jrarn^y avti^f jKwrjj^, xu/uVf a^voSf « C. Liquid-Mute, Sefo^wv, 'Ocrjys, . • D. Pme. a. Masculine and Feminine, i-TT-ZivSj (iovs, y^aus, vauSj /3. Neuter, ruxi^Sj ckirrv, yi- Dialectic Forms, . VI. Irregular and Dialectic De- clension, ZsvSj OiSiVou?, VXads, VtoSf vauSf depUf a'TTlo;, tT^tuSj vn. Adjectives of Two Termina- tions. A. Of Declension II., attxosi dyn^ccos, ... B. Of Declension III., apptiVf tuXX^IS, Vl-TTOUS, ffottp^St j«£i- ^aiVj .... vm. Adjectives of Three Termi- nations. A. Of Declensions II. and I., ipiXios, ffo(po;j . . • Contracted, x^^'^-^s, ^i-^rXaeS) B. Of Declensions III. and I., 17 17 18 19 19 19 20 21 21 22 22 23 zil CONTENTS. C. Of the Three Declensions, Homeric Forms of troXiJf, Page. IX. Numerals, i7s, oVSus, Sw, a/t- X. Participles, ^ov\i6iavj r/f^aaivj ^BtvaVj Kt^eaiVj > • * ^ovSt %v;, . . ■ • XI. Substantive Pronouns. A. Personal, lya, iri, oS, , B. Reflexive, IfiavToVj trexu- vov, la-vToVf • • ■ C. Reciprocal, ix>.»XeaVf . D. Indefinite, Ssr».cis, " . Ch. 5. TheVekb. I. Agreement, II. Use of the Voices, A. Active, B. Middle, . C. Passive, III. Use of the Tenses, Pago 325 327 329 329 332 333 336 337 344 346 347 348 352 353 354 356 358 A. Definite and Indefinite, 360 B. Indefinite and Complete, 364 C. Future, . . 36i rv. Use of the Modes, . 367 A. Intellective, . . 367 As used in sentences, I. Desiderative, . 372 n. Final, . . .374 m. Conditional, . 375 rv. Eelative, . . 378 V. Complemeutaiy, 378 B. VoUtive, . . .381 C. Incorporated, . 381 I. Infinitive, . . 385 n. Participle, . 390 in. Verbal in -rics, . S96 Ch. 6. The Paeticle, . 396 A. The Adverb, . .397 B. The Preposition, . 397 C. The Conjunction, . . 400 D. Concluding Eemarks, 40J BOOK IV. PROSODY. Ch. 1. QUANTTTT, . I. Natural Quantity, • II. Local Quantity, Ch. 2. Veksification, A. Dactylic Verse, B. Anapaestic Verse, , C. Iambic Verse, . D. Trochaic Verse, E. Other Metres, . Ch. 3. Accent, . Indexes, 410 411 414 416 421 423 425 427 428 429 I. General Laws, . . 431 II. Accentual Changes, . 432 Contraction, &c., , 432 Grave Accent, Anastrophe, 433 ProcUtics, Enclitics, . 434 III. Determination of Accent- ed Sj'Uable, . . 435 In Declension, . , 435 In Comparison, Conjugation, 439 In Particles, . . 440 441 GREEK TABLES. I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. Hi. A. The A'lphabet. i 10-12, 17-22.] Forma. Roman Numeral Order Large. Small. Letters. Name Power. I. A a a "Alcpa Alpha 1 II. B /J,6 b SiJTa Beta 2 III. r y.^ g,n rajifia Gamma 3 IV. A d d AiXTOt Delta 4 V. E £ e "E ijiXXov Epsilon 5 71. Z Sii z Zijra Zeta 7 VII. II V e ~'Hia Eta 8 VIII. ^,6 th OrJTa Theta 9 IX. I I i 'laxa Iota 10 X. K X c Kanna Kappa 20 XI. A X 1 Adfi^Sa Lambda 30 XII. M 1" m Mv Mu 40 XIII. N V n Nv Nu 50 XIV. s 1 X SI Xi 60 XV. O 6 "O [iixgov Omicron 70 XVI. n 31, rs P III Pi 80 XVII. p 9. P r 'Pm Rho 100 XVIII. 2 a, S s Siyfia Sigma 200 XIX. T r,l t Tav Tau 300 XX. r V y 'r ipiXov Upsilon 400 XXI. (p

u&at 24^ 8ia OS oa et') ft 5" % (St QM 3 ax D JUL dv av ^ xav u ini ^ xriv ^ a 4 TTJS dj av np TO hj 7iv ^ TOV %} xal r tSv ^ i iW vv M. XI •am VTtO IT 3.] OETHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 11 H 3. C. Vocal Elements. I. Vowels, Sibiple and Cobipound. Simple Vowels. Diphthongs in i. Diphthongs in v. [§5 24-28.] Class I. II. III. IV. V A O S U I Orders. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. I Short, 1. d *■) n El V [Proper, 5. dv ov sv [Improper, 6. dv av tjv II. Consonants. [Long, 2. d ; Proper, 3. di [ Improper, 4. d o ta 01 to V V ill ill [§§49-51.] A. Consonants associated in Classes and Orders. Class m. Linguals. Class I. Class II. Orders. Labials. Palatals. 1. Smooth Mutes, rt a t 2. Middle Mutes, ^ y S 3. Rough Mutes, q) x ^ 4. Nasals, n y v 5. Double Consonants, ip ^ I B. Additional Semivowels. k g a CONSONANTS (Second Akrakgement). C Smooth, jt, K, T. ( Mutes, < Middle, (3, y, 8. { Rough, q>, X-, *• Semivowels, {L^^f^^^'/;.^.^'?'^ Double Consonants, yj, |, ^. Single Consonants, nasal . III. Breathings. r§ 13.] Rough Breathing, or Aspirate ( ' ). Smooth or Soft Breathing ( ' ). 12 TABLES. [fl 4- II. ETYMOLOGY. ^ 4. Remarks. I. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome to teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application of rule, the tables of paradigms have been constructed with the fbllovping ellipses, which will be at once supplied from general rules. 1. In the paradigms of declension, the Voc. sing, is omitted whenever it has the same form with the Nom., and the following cases are omitted throughout (see § 80) ; a.) The Voc. plur., because it is always the same with the Nom. (S.) The Dat. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen. y.) The .3cc. and Voc. dual, because they are always the same with the Nom. c5.) The j3cc. and Voc. neut.^ in all the numbers, because they are al- ways the same with the Nom. 2. In the paradigms of adjectives, and of words similarly inflected, the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers, and in the J^om. dual ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine (§ 130. @). 3. In the paradigms of conjugation, the Isi Pers. dual is omitted throughout, as having the same form with the 1st Pers. plur., and the 3d Pers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers. dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc- tive (§ 212. 2). For the form in -fisS-ov, whose empty shade has been so multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the rank and file of numbers and persons, see § 212. N. 4. The compound forms of the Perfect passive subjunctive and optative are omitted, as belonging rather to Syntax than to inflection §234,637). II. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (IT 28), which may be thus read ; " The tense is formed from the root by affixing ," or, " by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude form, )." In the application of this table, the forms of the root must be, distinguished, if it has moie than a single form (§ 254). III. In the table of translation (IT 33), the form of the verb must, of course, be adapted to the number and person of the pronoun ; thus, lam planning, tkou art planning, he is planning, &c. For the middle voice, change the forms of " plan into the corresponding forms of » delib- erate ; and, for the passive voice, into the corresponding forms of " he planned. " IV. The Dialectic Forms, for the sake of distinction, are uniformly printed in smaller type. In connection with these forms, the abbrevia- r„^,f„!i'«^"?<„^;.„•!T':J'fc™^I^.^•A.^'-^'>i""eUtt., Attic; BcEot. and B., Bosotic ; Comm., Common ; Dor. and D Doric • En and E , Epic; Hel., Hellenistic; Ion. and I., Ionic; Iter, aad It Itprativi.- O., Old ; Poet, and P., Poetic. " "' "''rative , V. A star f) in the tables denotes that an affix or a form is wanting Parentheses are sometimes used to inclose unusual doubtful n r supplementary forms. In ITIT 29, 30, the k and & of the tense's'io'n''' Z dropped in the second tenses (§ 199. II.), are separated by a hvnhoS fl'„^ the rest of the affix. ?=» Hyphen from fl 5, 6.] DECLENSION. 13 A. Tables of Declension. U 5, I. Affixes of the Three Declensions. Dec. I. Deo. II. De( .III. Masc. Fem. M. F. Neut. M. F. Neut. Sing. Nom. as, tjg a, 7j f OS \ OV 9 \ * Gen. ov ag, m { ov OS Dat. ?? V ' 9 I - Ace. ttV, 11V ov V,IX V Voc. a, ri s' \ ov * * Plur. Nom. at, 01 1 a fS 1 a Gen. wv USV mv Dat. ais ois ^ or{v) Ace. as ovg a as a Voc. ai 01 a sg a Dual Nom. a (0 e Gen. aiv oiv oiv Dat. aiv oiv oiv Ace. S m £ ' Voe. a at s IT 6. II. Analysis of the Affixes. [The figures in the last column denote the declensions.] Flexible Endingi Connecting Towels. | ] Dec. I. Dec. n. Dec. m. Sing. Nom. «W * Gen. aM * Dat. «W * Aee. «W * Voc. «-(')) o(s) # Plur. Nom. a * Gen. a » Dat. a « Ace. a * Dual Nom. a » Gen. a » <:. Fern. 1, *. Neut. 2,1/; 3, ». (o^-) Off. 2 and Mase. 1, o. I. V, «. Neut. 3, «. m ig. 1 and 2, s. Neut, a, av. {iai). 3, aX. 1 and 2, i;. {vg) as. Neut. a. 3, oiv. 14 TABLES. ■FIRST DECLENSION. [n'j'-s- fl 7. HI. Nouns of the First Declension. A. Mascuuhe. i, Steward, i, sailor, o, son of Atreus. »', Mercury. S. N. zautae vavxm 'Aigildrjg AiQilSov Argils J] 'AtquStiv 'AzgslSrj ArguSai 'Axgs'iSav jy.Totfiiaig vaviccig 'AigelSctig ' Egfiiaiq^t'Egjicug d. rooGgvov, A. zafi'iag vavTug AigilSug Eg^sug, Egjiag raSgvd D-vr f- '- 3- r^- «^ '- 'r^ ^ iJ, ro)6gva .S\.Tauia vavia ArgsiOa Egusa, Egua . ^ J' ,'. . TCtiitatv vavraiv Azguoaiv Eg/isaiv, Egfiaiv -y J' ,- B. FliaUINlKE. IN. TK/itaf vavxrig G. TUflloV vaviov D. zajila vavxrj A. V. xafilav xajxla vavxTjV vavxa N. G. xafiiai xotaiiav vavxai ravxcov S, Mercury. S, north wind. Egfiiag, Egfir]g_ l^oggag Eg/xiov, "Egiiov ^og^a • [Egnia, '^Egfijj^ §oggq 'Egfiittv, 'Egfiijv ^oggav Egiisa, '^BfV ^ogga 'Egfiiai, ' Eg^tu 0, Goiryas. 'Egfjecov, 'Egfimv N. rw6gvag c V , shadow. T}, door. ri, tongue. »5, honor. ri, mina S. N. aula ■&VQtt yXaaau xiiij (ivda. (iva G. axtag &vgSg /XcSaar}g xinng (ivdug. (ivag D. axia ■&vga yXataarj xifiy livda, (iva^ A. axidv &vgav yXaaaav Ttflfjv fivaSv, fivav P. N. axial &vgai, ylwaaai xijial fivdat, piai G. axtwv ■&vgav yXtoaaav Xl/iWV fivawv. fivm D. axiaig ■&vgaig yXaaaaig xifiatg [ivdaig, /ivatg A. axtdg &vgag yXaaaag xi[iag /ivdag. jivag D. N. axia &vga yXaaaa XI fid l^vda, fiva G. axiatv &vgaiv yXioaaaiv Tifiaiv fivdaiv. fivaiv ^ S. Dialectic Fokms. S. N. G. cSsj Ion. vs ' TxfiitiSj fio^tis. 9iSj Dor, as ' vocuTccSt 'Ar^Ei'Saff. Old, a * IvTtoTa^ fitjTiSTu. aj Ion. J) • {TKi^t ^v^yj' K, Ion. J) • Ep. a^yj^Ejt], Kviffffn. J?, Dor. a • !, Dor. s- 'Arislia, MisiiXxS. _ Old, d ■ vift.(i)a^ Aix&. '•"' Old, xiov • 'Ariutim. Ion. iu, ■ 'Ar^uViaiv, S-u^im. Dor. S, . 'ATfjiSSj, ^u^m. tt.is, Old, a.WL ■ v«^™,,,, »6iam Ion. ^n, ys . di^ri,,^ ^|„,j A. as, Ion. tas (masc.) ; S^^^.Vsif Dor. &s . Morbus, ,6f.,p&,. ^ol. a„ ■ rcc)s ■nfcx!s. fl 9, 10.] SECOND DECLENSION. 15 ^ O. IV. Nouns of the Second Declension A. Masctjuiie and Feminint:. 6, word. 0, people. r],way. o^mind. o, temple. S. N.^Ao/os G. Xoyov Xoya loyov Xoyc loyoi Xoyav loyoig loyovg ioyio Xoyoiv D. A. V. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. dij^og drj/iov drjfiov dij/xe Srijiwv Srjjioig di^jxovg drjfioiv oSog oSov odiS 6S6v odi oSol oflcuv odolg oSovg oSoi tddlv roog, vovg voov, roll voca, via J'OOV, vovv vol, vov rooi, vol yorar, ydjy vootg, volg voovg, vovg vobi, Via vooiv, volv vaog, ysros riiov, red vaia, vsco vaov, viBiv, vt(o vaol, vc(o vuiSv, vtwv vaolg, vsag vaovg, rtwg vua, vsu) vadlv, viwv B. Neutee. S. N. G. D. P. N. G. • D. D. N. G. TO, Jig. lb, wing, to, part, to, lone avxov avxov li§oiv xoqaxav (fXfipl xoQa^i q>Xi§ag xoQuxag (fXi^s q>Xs^dtv xogdxotv alyoiv alyog alyl aiya alysg alymv alyag xoqaxE aiys qiuXayS cpdXayyog (faXayyi cpdXayya (palayyeg (paXdyyiav cpaXttySi cpdXayyag tgixl iglx« jgixig jgiX^v &giil jglxag (pdXnyys zglxt qiaXdyyoiv Tgtxolv 3. LINOUAL. a. Masculine and Feminine. 6, ■^y child. 6,foot. 6, sovereign, rj, grace. S. N. naXg G. naiSog D. naiSi A. naiSa V. nai P. N. TialSsg G. naldtav D. naial A. naiSag D. N. Tialds G. nalSoiv novg TtoSog jioSl TloStt noSeg nodiav noal noSag nods noSoiv avai livaxTog avaxTi avaxta ava avaxjeg avaxrav avail, uvaxjag avaxTE avaxxoiv Xugig xdgXiog xdgm xXsig xXsidog xXslSI xdgija, xttg'" xXiida, xXslp Xagmg Xaghcov xdgioi Xdgnag xdgiTs Xaghoiv 13. Neuter. TO, body. TO, light, to, liver, to, hoi^ S. N. aa^d (fag rindg xigag G. awfiSiog (parog findiog xigarog, D. awftccTi, q>mil iJTiaTt xigaxi, P. N. awfiaTa qiwxa xBgaog, xigai, rjnara xigara, xsgaa. xXsidsg, xXeig xXeidav xXuai xXudag, xXtig xXclde xXeidolv TO, ear. ovg xigug taxog xiga mil, Or. oajiazmv cpwiwv 'nnttrmv xegatwv xtgdwv, xmwv mxwv T). nMlinni fnmnr. Vi-rrnni vKnZ^, -. ~- D. awfiaai qiaiai iJTiaai xiguai D. N. awfiars (pars ^jnais xsgaxt, xsgae bial 1 xegci ajs ri • , ■ , i , ^ / ' — s—=, x£ga TOTS U. acofiaroiv cpcotoiv rjuaxoir xegaxoiv, xegdoiv, xcgi^v ^jgiv H 12 13.] THIRD DECLENSION. 17 ^ IT IS. B. Liquid. ( 5, Jiarhour . 0, deity. ri,nose. o, least, i a, orator. ■^jhana s. N. Xtfl^V Salfim ' gtg -d-Tig QT^xaig %tlg ^ G. Xi/zivog Saijxovog gXvog ■&r]g6g grjxogog Xngog D. kt[iivi Saifiovi. glvl &riQi g7]Xogi Xugi A. li[i£va Salfiova qiva &rjgu grjxoga xCiga V. Scu/ioy giv gvtog p. N. li/iheg daifiovsg givsg &rjgsg QTjXogsg Xugig G. lifisrcov Saijiovtav glvav ■&i]gmv grjxogmv Xiigoif D. Xifiiai Sal/ioai qtol &rjgai grjxogai Xigai A. li/xcvag Saifiovag givag -diigag grjxogag Xugag D N. Xifiht dal/iovs give &^gs gijxogs Xetge G. i-ifiivoiv SatjioVQiv QifoXv Qrigoiv gr\x6goiv X^goiv Syncopated. 0, father 0, man. ri, mother. 6, 71, dog. ,fj,lamb. S. N. najriQ avjg- ^ ^ liTixrig XV03V {afivog) G. TittTigog, naxgog avdgog, ardgog ^T/rgog Kvvog agvog D. naiigi, naxgl dvigi, dvdgl fi-ijxgl xvvt agvl A. naTsga aviga, uvdga (trjxsgi )( xiiva agva V. nateg avsg I^^^^Q xvov P. N. Tiatigsg avsgsg, avSgfg firjXEgeg xvvsg ctQVeg G. narigtov avigaii, arSgoji' ff>]Tfgii)v xvvav agvav D. A. nargaai narigag ttvSgaai fii^xgaai, xval dvigag, lirdgag fiijxigag Kvrag agvaat ■ agvag D. , N. Tzarsgs avigs, civSgE (irjxigi B XVVS Sgvs G. narigoiv avcgoiv, avSgdlv firjxigi nv xvvolv dgvdiv ^13. C. LiQuiD-Mum 0, lion. 0, tooth ;. 6, giant. ■^,rmfe. 0, Xenophon. S. N. lifiiv oSovg ytyUg da/tag Sivo(pav G. leovjog odovTog : ylyavxog Sdftagxog SEVoq>a)Vxog D. XSOVTI oSo'vTt ytyavzi Safiagxi StvocpmvTi, A. XiovTa odovTa ylyavxa ddfiagxa SiVO(f)mvxtt ■V. Uov ylyav P. N. Uovreg odovieg yiyavTsg dd/^agxig ri, Opus. G. Xiovxav oSovjaiv yiydvzwv da/xagjcov S. N. ' Onovg D. liovai odovai yiyixai Safiagai G. = Onovvxog A. XiovTug odovTUi ; ylyavxag Sdfiagxag D. ' Onovvxi D . N. Movzi odovTs ylyavxe ddfiagxs A. ' Onovvxa G. XiOVtOlV oSoVtoiv yiyavToiv Saftdgroii t 2' * 18 TABLES. [fl 14. II 1 4. D. Pdbe. a. Masculine and reminine. 0, jackal. 0, hero. b, weevil. o,ri^sheep. o, fish. , S. N. ^co's riQmg mg olg tx^vg G. -d^ioog ^QOiog xCog olog Ix&vog D. &(i!i: fiQoii {jlQV) "^^ "'' ix^^i A. &Kia riqaa, Tjqa xiv oiv Ix&vv V. Ix&i P. N. &(asg 7]QWSg xtig oitg, olg Ix&vfg, Ix&vg G. &ti(av rjQiiuiv xtwv olav ix&v(av D. &caal iJQaiai xXal olal Ix&vai A. &(aag fiQwag, rjgcog xtag olag, olg ix9vag, Ix&vg D. N. &ae ^Qcos xte ols i-X^^^> I'X^^ G. -d^caoiv rjgoooiv xtoXv oioXv Ix&voiv 0, knight. 0, ^, ox. fj, old woman, fj, ship. S. N. iTinEvg 3ovg ygavg vavg imttag poog ygaog viag D. Inni'C, Inml j3o'i ygu'C vri'C A. Innia ^ovv ygavv vavv V. innsv ^ov ygav P. N. innieg, Innsig ^oeg ygaig vijtg G. i-Tine'av jSoav ygaav rsav D. iTuiEvai j3ovai ygaval vavai A. mnidg, mniig §6ag, ^ovg ygaag, ygavg yaO? D. N. iJiTih §6e ygae vijs G. Innsotv ^oolv ygaoXv vedlv 6, aibit. ,], city. ^, trireme. S. N. n^xv? n6}Xg rgt-^gr,? G. nrixetog ^ noUmg tging^og, tgirjgovg D. nrjxu, nrixei Ttokn, noUi Tgi^gfi, jgi'^ou ^- "V" ''°^'' rg^r,g,a, tgcrjgr, V- ^VXV noXi rg,;jg,g P. N. ni!ixssg, ^,J; ^^""J- S. K. Zz6s, Ziv (Dor.) OlV'^^vs ^Xoy; G. Ato's, Zmos, Zdvh 0;SiVoS.f, O/'SiV.y O.h^oUo, -a, -£-«, i Xay D. A»', ZW, Z^v; Oi%V.S/, [(poet), [D.-.,, -a,A.-»,v, rxou A. Ai'«, Z«v«, ZSva 0;SiVoS«, 0;SiVot;v [-^v, V. -«, -a 1 Xflm. V za OiSiVflw [(Ep. and Ljt.) TXou Attic. 0, sow. Homeric. , S. K. vios vlos G. vlov, Viios vlavf vToSf vhos A. uiov WAV, via, vii& Doric. «, sftip. Ionic, vay? (was) v^ys (v^y?) vat V9}'t vccvv (yav) Vijctj vea, v«uv P. N. Wtf/, vh7$ G. vi^irv, ul£&;y D. vtoTs, vViiri A, t/ioy?, w/Er? fio/v, vl'tuv va.&iy violffi, vioitru viouSf vices ^ Vi&XS V9]£S, V££f VYie^y^ vieuv vautrij yaitriTi v/ivirfj v«£ff'o'/j Hifftn^ yxets viicis, viag [yccvipi Attic, roy spear. Homeric. Homeric, ro, ^ave. s. G. "^o^xrasj ^o^os (poet.) ^og/', Jo^£/ (poet.) Soyjfl? ff^ios, (TTiTos ff-JfUOVS p. G. ^o^aTiov Sfl'ew (poet.) 0, knight, S. N". i^vrtvs G. IcTTvios D. /ViT^i' A. /VcTiJa HOMKRIC PaeADIGMS. ^oXiosy ^roXtos, TToXtos (^^okivsTh.eog.')t ^oXnos (■JToXT Hdt.), crra^fij* croAe/, woAjji* ^cXiv, TToXtV P.-N". iVsr^E?, /Vw£?> waXiE? (iraxr? Hdt.), G. iVcrsJiUK CTflX/wV D. Ir-^ivtri ^oXiiffffi (jroXUirt Pind., sroA/o-v Hdt.) A. /Vr^as woA,/atf (toAf? Hdt.), -roXus^ 0, ?77ysses. «'j Patroclus. S. N. *OSy(r«y'f, *OSy(r£y? n^^rgs^xXof G. 'OWfl-flof, 'Oi^vffirUst 'Otuamsy 'O^uinv^ VLecr^'oKXov A. 'O^va-eryixy 'OSyiro-EaB, 'OJyff-wa, V. 'OSt/fl-ff-fiy, 'OSi/fl-ey n< :raX}]E; •ToXuets iLxT^oxXtix XlecT^axXs fl 17.] ADJECTIVES. yl IT 1 y. VII. Adjectives of Two Terminations. A. Of the Second Deculnsion, 0, ^ (unjust) 10 0, ij (unfading) to ayrjgaog, ayrjgas ayrjQaov, ayrjqmv (xyTjgdov, ay^QCO ayrjQOKa, ayrjgto ayr/gaov, ayi^gcap, ayr]gco S.N. adtxog G. advKOV D. adix(a A. aSixov V. adixs P.N. aSixoi G. aSixcov D. adixotg A. adlxovg D.N. adlxoi G. adlxoiv ctdixov ayrjgaa, ayngia S.N. G. D. A. V. P.N. G. D. A. D.N. G. ttSixa ayrjgaoi, ayrfgm ayrjgaiov, ayrigtav aytjgaoig, ayrjgas uyrjgaovg, uyrjgaig ayrjgaoi, ayrjgto ayrjgaoiv, ayrigmv B. Of the Tkekd DECtENSioiT. 0, fj (male) to o, ^ (pleasing) to o, rj (Iwo-footed) to ivxagig ivxagi EvxagXrog svxdgiti ivxdgna, evxagiv Evxagi aggrjv aggsv aggsvog aggevi aggiva aggsv uggsveg ag^sva svxagiisg aggsvcov evxagiTav aggsat cvxagiat aggsvag iv/dgLTag dlTIOVV OiTiovg dlnodog dinodt SinoStt, S'movv dinov svxagtTct aggsvs agqivoiv sv/agits evxaghoiv SlnoSig dmoduv Sinoai dlTzodag dlnods dmodoiv 8lno8a 0, rj (evident) to S.N. G. D. A. V. P.N. G. D. A. D.N. G. aacprjg aatpsg aacpiog, aacpovg aaqiEi', aacpu aaq)ia, aacprj aacpsg 'o, ■^ (greater) to ftstfcav ixii^ov jxsl^ovog fiii^ovi fis'iiova, fiei^ca fist^ov aaq)hg,aacpsig aaq>ca, aacprj fid^ovig, {id^ovg iid^ova, (itl^w aaqiitav, aacpmv jiulovmv aacfiai fxelSoai, aaqisag, aacpBig (lutovag, [iil^ovg aucfht acxcpr] fislSovs aatfioiv, auqidlv fiu^ovoiv 22 TABLES. [!Ilt*. H 18. -viii. Adjectives of Three Terminations. A. Of the Seoohd and Flkst Declensions. {friendly) rj TO 6 {wise) c TO s. N. cpiliog cpiXia cplXiov aocpog ao(fri aoqio> G. (piXiov qiMag aoq)ov aotfijg D. cfiUm (fiXlct aocfw aoqijj A. (flliov (filiav aoq)6v aotprjV V. (pihs aocpi p. N. (fiUoi qiiUai qiiXia aocpol aocpai ao(fa G. cpiXlmv (fillwv aocpav aocpwy D. (fiUoig (filial? aoqJoXg aoq>atg A. (fiVtovg (piUag aocfovg aoqiag D . N. cpiXlto q)iUa aocpco ao(fa G. (fiUoiv cfiUaiv {golden) Contracted. c aoifdlv aocfttiv TO S. N. XQvaeog, XQ'iioov? XgvaiS, xgvaj^ XQvamv, Xgvaow G. Xgvasov, x§vaov Xgvasag, xgvaijg D. XQVaim, XQ^oa^ Xgvaia, Xgvafj A. xgvasov, x§v<^°vv Xgvaittv, Xgvaijv P. N. Xgvasoi, xQ^oot Xgvacai, Xgvaai Xgvasa, xgvaa G. XQvaitav, xgvawv Xgvaiav, Xgvaav D. XQvaioig, XQvadig Xgvaiatg , xgvaajg A. Xgvaiovg, xgvaovg Xgvaiag, Xgvaag D. , N. Xgvasco, xg^om xgvaia, Xgvaa G. Xgvasotv, xg^ooiv 6 {double) XgvoEaiv, c , xgvaalv TO S. N. SmXoog, diTilovg SiTiXori, SmXij dmXoov, , dmXow G. SmXoov, dinXov SinXorig, diTtXrjg D. SinXoa, SmX^ SmXori, SmXfi A. dinXoov, dmXovv SLTtXorjr, 3i7iXijv P. N. SmXooi, StTiXol dmXoai, SiTiXai SmXoa, dmXa G. di-nXooiv, dmXav SunXoar, SmXwv D. dmXooig, dinXoig diTiXoatg, dinXuXg A. SmXoovg, diTiXovg Smloug, diTiXag D. N. dinXoa, SinXta SmXoa, dmXa G. SmXooiv, dmXoiv dmXottiv, SmXaXv fl 19, 20.J ADJECTIVES. 23 1 1 1 "• B. Of, the Thied and Fikst DecIiEnsions. {black) c TO 6 {all) V TO s. N. i^ixa? fiilaiva (idXdv nag . naaa Tiav G. jjeXayog ficXaivrjg TiavTog JiaojjS D. fiHavi ftiXaiVT] naVTi naatj A. [lekava fiiXatvav ndvxa naaav p. N. fiiXavsg lidXaivai jiiXava ndvTig Ttdaai ndvxa G. lielavav [likaivrnv ndvTtov naaav D. liilaai. [lAttlvaig naai ndaatg A. [lilavag (likaivag Tidvtag ndaag D. N. fiskavs (iskalva ■ ndvxB ndaa G. fiiXdvotv jxsXaivaiv ndvToiv ndaaiv 1 1 5 {agreeable) rj TO 6 {sweet) c TO S. N. zagtsts Xaghaaa Xagkv ^8vg ^Siia riSv G. XagUvTOg Xagte'aatjg '^dsog ^fc'as D. XagUvTV Xotgdaar] ^de'i, ■^dst ftdda A. Xagisvia XagisaaSv fiSvv riduav V. XUqUv ridv - P. N. XaqliVTsg Xagleaaai XagltvTa 1 fiShg, r)5ug fjdiiai fjSitt G. XagisVTwv Xagisaamv tjdscov 7j8hU>V D. Xaqhai Xagtdaacttg rjdiai fiSdaig A. ZaghvTug Xagdaaag •^dsag, ^d: iig rjdclag D. N. XaghvTS Xagtdaaa ■^8ss rjdiia G. XaqiivTOiv Xagdaaaiv fidioiv rjdsiait 1 1120 '. C. Op the Three Declensions. {great) rj TO {much) c 11 * TO S. N. [liyag /iiyakri (tsya TcoXvg noXXri noXv Q. fteyukov fuydXrig noXXov noXXrig D. fieyalia fiEydXrj noXXm TioXXfj A. l^£/av fityaXrjV noXvv noXXr\v V. fisyalgf- {many) P. N. fisyakoi (lEydkai, fi isydXci noXXol noXXai noXXd G. jieyakiav fxsydXmv TioXXmv noXXmv D. fisydXoig fisyaXaig noXXolg noXXalg A. fieyalovg [isydXixg noXXovg noXXdg D. , N. G. fi^ydlo} /xeydloiv jiiydXa fifydXaiv 24 TABLES. NUMERALS. [^20,21 Homeric Forms of u-sXw. S. N. -jraXuSf 'PfovXvs {TflXXof cra^XjJ ^oXu, ^ovXVf ^okXof G. woXios ^oX^?? D. QoraXET Msch.) {TaXXiy iToXX^ A. ^oXvVj ^ouXuv waXXav troX^sJv, trtfwXuv P. N. troXUsj vroXtis voWoi ^oXXal (!riiA.£«.ffl30li.) mXXi G. uroXia/v •^FoXXmv ^aWoiuVj ^oXXiuv D. iTtfXEir/, -eW;j -Ucfft •jroWoiffl, -tits •jroXy^ffi A. OT-dXtaf, sTfl^er? •ffoWttvi •TfaXXa.i S. {mild) ^ TO P. o\ al Tti N. 71 g a s ngasia Tigaov ngaoi, ngaitg ngaiiai ngtxia G. ;rga'ou ngauag ngaioiv ngauwv D. nqam ngada A. jr § « y ngaslav 71 g do tg, ngaiai ngdovg, ngaiig ngaiiaig ngaiai ngauag fl 3 1 . IS. Numerals. M. (one) F. N. M.(noone)F. N. M., Twne, S. N. £tj [ila tV ' ovdfig oyds/ila ovSh ' P. ovSivcg G. syoV |i"as ovSsvog ovds/iiSg ovdevwv D. hi /iia ovdsvl ovSefii^ ovSdra ovdsfilav oidiai A. IVa filav ovSivag Ep. Dor. Ion. Ep. Late. Ion. Late. Ion. N. his, Ks fli, Is, ^ ov^iU ovoif/,iyi ou^iv ov^Xfz-oi, N. -a G. firns, im D. /y jct/jjj i^ OVOdfJLUV A. ^/jivj 7«v ev^iva ol^ifittiv CV^afiOUS, F. -Efltf M. F. N., too M.F.N-.,JoiA. aoiot, -at. -a D. N. A. dvo, dv(a G. D. SvoXv, dvsiv (Att.) P. D. dval (rare) Ep. Ep. Ion. G. D. A. M. F. (three) N. P. N. Tgeig Tgla G. jgiwv D. TQwi A. zgitg Poet. afi^m a/icpoTv CUUV oaioTs, -oitfl, "huiitffl M. F. (four) ~Sr Ttaaagsgr rsTTugsg xiaaaga, lizzaga Ttaadgatv, rixTagav ziaaagni, TdxTagat Ttaaagag, ihzugag Ion. Tetro-t^tSj Dor. tstc^ss and rirropiSf jEoI. and Ep. inVufEs, &c. ; Dat., Ep. and in late prose, Ter^Siri, ^122.] PARTICIPLES. 25 {advising) S. N. ffovksvav G: ^OvksVOVTOS D. PovXiVOVTl A. ^ovXivorxa P. N. ^ovXivovxig G. ^ovXiVovxmv D. ^ovXsvovai A. ^ovXsvoVTag D. N. ^ovXsvons G. ^ovXcvovzoiv ^33. X. Participles. __1. Present Actire. ^ovXsvovaS ffovXsvovarjg fiovXsvovoTi ^ovXevovaav ^ovXsvovaai ^ovXevovaav ^ovXsvovaaig ^ovXsvovaag PovXsvovaH ^ovXsvovaaiv TO fiovXsvov ^ovXsvovTa 2. Present Active Contracted. {honoring) S. N. jlfiaaiv, rifiav G. Ti/idovTog, Ti/iavTog D. Ti/iaOVTl, TljiaVTI, A. Tifiaovra, Tifimrja P. N. TifidovTsg, TifimvTsg G. TtfiaovTiov, Tifiavrmv D. Tijidovai, xiiiaai A. Ti[ido>Tag, Tifimviag D.N. TifidovTt, rtfiavTs G. XlfiaOVTOlV, XlfllOVTOLV 1J TO xi/iaovaS, xijxaaa xijidov, xtfiav xiiJ.aovar]g, xifj.toaijg xifiaovaj], TifKaat; xijiaovadv, xi/iwaciv xijiaovaai, xinaaai Ttfidovxa, Tifiuvxa TifiaovaaVi xifitaaav xt/xaovaaig, xijiwaaig xtftaovaag, xijxaaag xtfiaovad, rifuaaa Tijittovaaiv, xifiwaaiv S.N. G. D. A. P.N. G. D. ~A. D.N. G. 3. Liquid Future Active. {about to show) fj cpavav '(pavovott (pavovnog (pavovarjg (parowTi iparovarj cpavovvxa cpavovaav 4. Aorist II. Active. (pavovvTsg (pavovaai cpavovvxtav qiavovaav q>avovai cpavovaaig cpavovrrag (pavovaag tpavovvxs cpavovaci < qtavovvxoiv cpavovaaig 3 TO {having left) ^ to (pavovv Xmrnv Xmovaa Xmov XunovTog Xinovarjg Xmovxi Xmovari Xmovxa Xmovaav (pavovvxa Xinovreg Xmovaat XiTiovxa Xmovxiav Xmovaav XiTtovai Xmovaaig Xinovxag Xmovaag Xmovxs Xiixovaa XiTtovxoiv Xinovaaiv 26 TABLES. [1122. 5. Aorist I. Active. 6. Aorist Passive. {having raised) •^ to 6 {having appeared) ^ to S.N. aQag uQaaa agav (pavdg (pavilaa G. aQttVTog aqaarig cpavivzog (pavilarfg D. aQavxb agaarj tpavivTi, (favdarj A. ttQaVTtt Sgaaav cpavevra (favtlaav qtavsv P. N. SgavTSg Sgaaai, Sgavia cpavivreg cpaveiaai (pavivra G. agavToiv aqaaav (pavivxaiv (pavsiacov D. agaai aqaaaig (fapstai (pavuanig A. agavTug agaaag (favivxag cpavilaikg D. N. agavxe G. agavTOiv agaaa agaaaiv (pavsvTS cpavBtaa cpavivioiv cparelaaiv 7. Perfect Active. 8. Perfect Active Contracted. {knoiuing) fi to o {standing) rj to S. N. iidiag elSiita sldog iaicog toiraaa karcog, lords G. et^oTO? sidviag iazooTog eaTaarjg D. etdoTi ilSvla iazwri earwaTj A. clSoTtt eidvlay eatcora ioTciiaav P.N. dSoug eldvlat tldoza iazoorsg eazaaai. iazSza G. elSozBiv slSviar iazazav eariaacov D. eldoai lidvlaig ^ iazaai eazcooaig A. tidozag cidviag iazmzag eazcoaag D.N. eldozs Bidvici iazaxs eazaaa G. cldozoiv ilSviaiv kazwzoiv iazdoaaiv 9. From Verbs in . {having given) n S. N. Sovg Sovaa G. Sovzog dovarjg D. 5ovii Sovarj A. Sovza dovaav P. N. SovTig dovaai G. Sovzav dovaav D. Sovai dovaaig A. dopzag Sovaag D.N. 3oVrf dovaS G. dovzoiv dovaatv zo dov dovxa Having en, terea) »j TO dig Svaa 3«v dvvzog dvarig Svm dvarj Svvza Svaav dvvztg Svaai dvvt Svvzav Svaav Svai Svaaig Svvzag dvaag Svvzs Svaa dvvzoiv dvaair 1I23.J PRONOUNS. 27 U 33. XI. Substantive Pronouns. [To those forma which are used as enclitic, the sign t is affixed. The itaX{v)f aq)ag D.N. G. via aqxa acpav Homeric Forma. agico'i'vf S. N. G. D. A. 'i/iio, Ifiua, Ifitv, trv, Ti/iiJi i-\t irf'/»t D., Urfi M. ■•pi\ D., «' D. iavxotg, avxoig A. JavTovs, «i/Tovs F., of herself, iavzrig, avxriQ iocvxr], avxfj launjV, avxi^v eavxav, avxuv iavxalg, avxaig iavxag, «vt«s asavxrjg, aavxrjg asavxfj, aavxjj aiavTi^v, aavxrjV Vfimv avxav Vfiiv avxaig Vfiag ttvxag N., of itself, iavxo, avxe kavxu, avxa New Ionic. S. G. IfiiajUTou D. tfit&tvTa A. liAiaUTOV S. G. luturau D- Iwyrw A. ioiurov ifileijvrTis tuuTns tiitVTiJ la/vrm tfEuvrov ffiaiVTCji fftOJUTOV P. tajUTOjv iaiVToTiri ffsaivrm 3d P. S. G. OLUrairaij -aj, D. -ai, -a, A. -oVj -ay, -a • P. Go aliravTaiVy D. -Oi?, -«/f, A. -wj, -a?, -«, Dor. C. Eecipkocai,. M. (0/ one another) F. N. M. N. F. P. G. wAiTjirav D. aXXi^Xoig A. kAXtJAovs aXX'^Xav aXX'qXaig aXX'^Xag D. A. aXXrjXa ,G. dXXi^Xotv aXXr]Xa P. G. aXXaXwv Dor. aXXaXm Dor. D. G. aXXs7X«/i> Ep. D. ^XAosXd/ff'/a -o;s aXXecXaiin, -ccts A. ^XXosA-ouf aXXaXa; »XXaX£ Dor. D, Indefinite. M. F. N., sMcA a owe. N. G. 0, 1), TO oiiva To5, TJj? duvog D. TM, T^^ StlVt A. Tov, xrjv, TO Setva M. P. 0! 5tii'£s iwc dclvtov * Tovg dttvag ^124.] II 34. XII S.N, G, D, A, P.N. G. D. A. D.N. G. S. N. 6. D. A. N. G. D. A. M. (the) ■ 6 . TOV . TW , TOV e Ot T0)» xdtg zovg TO) TOtV Article. F. C TTJg TJj TtjV at tav late TttS £ Ttt xalv jiH 'aT>. roTo E., Tai D. Tas D. t5 D. pkonouns. [. Adjective Pronouns. A. Definite. Itcrativo. same, self) F. avriig avral avtmv avTaig aviag uvTaiv 29 p. N. Tcl E. D. Ttita-t 0. Twff, res D. T06» D. T«i E. D. Ta&tv 0., tSv D. Tottirs 0. '^''"" M. (eery, s aVTog avTov avia , -, avTov avToi avTav avToig avTovg aVTO) aVToiv ahnu I. N. aVTO avta r' -Uv I. oti/Ta D., •£>! I. osurS; D., -£j)j I. atlTa D., -£>; I. aurosv D., -e»j» I. Belative. M. (who) F. ., erSsxct, eleven. ivSixarog, eleventh. 12.^aKiSj many tim£s. anai, once. Slg, twice. xQig, thrice. x£xgd7iig,four times, Tievxdxtg i^dxig iTTxdxig oxzaxig ivveaxtg, ivvdxig dsxaxLg slxoaaxig ixttxovxdxig XtXiaxig [ivgidxig III. Substan- tives. woiTortis, quarUity, number, Ixtyornsi fewness. fiovdg, monad. dvdg, duad. xQidg, triad. xexQag, tetquxivs Txsvxdg iSdg i^Sofidg oySodg iwidg dsxdg slxdg ey.arorxdg XiXidg jiVQidg fl 26, 27, 28. CONJUGATION. 33 C. Tables of Conjugation. Relations. 1. Definite. IT S6. I. The Tenses classified. I. Pkimakt. Time. 1. Present. 2. Future. 'i. Indefinite. 3. Complete. Pkesent. am ujTitin' 1 write. Perfect. I have written. 1 shall be writing. Future. ygdipBi, I shall write. I shall have written. II. Secondabt. a Fast. Imperfect. tyqa(fov, I was writing. AORIST. eygaijja, I torote. Pluperfect. iysygatfuv, I had written. 1. Actual. Isdicative. ygaq>ti>, I am writing. IT ST. II. The Modes classified. A. Substantive. Infinitive. yqcKfCiv, To write. I. DISTINCT. A. Intellective. «. Present. Subjunctive. yqu^ta, I may write. B. VoLrnvE. Imperative. • ygdift, Write. n. incorpokated. 2. Contingent. /8. Past. Optative. ygdqiot/ii,, I might write. B. Adjective. Participle. ygdqxov, WritiTig. IT 2 8. III. FOKMATION OF THE TenSES. Tenses. Affixes. Active. Middle. Passive Present, a,fM eftutj ftai Angm. iMPEBirECr, ev, r ifiVV, fitit Future, tfai ffO/iUt hyuifM Fur. n., ^rofitxt Angm. Aorist, jra tfUftVil dii> Augm. AoR. n.. or, y S/im, fitit >1» Eedpl. Perfect, xa fiat Eedpl. Perf. n.. a Angm. Eedpl. Pluperfect, Xllt lim Augm. Eedpl. Pluperf. n.. sir. Eedpl. Fdt. Perf. ttli m 34 ' TABLES. [fl 29. H 39. IV. Affixes of the Present. Imperfect. Nude. Euphonic. Nude. Euphonic Ind. S. 1 (II, ft) V ov 2 s eig g £S 3 ai{v) et. * t{r) P 1 fiiv ofiev fiiv ofisv 2 TS ITS TE £I£ 3 rat{v), 5m{v) ovai{v) aav ov D. 1 jU£v Ofisv litv Ojiev 2 jov eiov rov ciov 3 lOV , tlOV TIjV iTrp) Subj. S. 1 w 2 SS 3 J2 1 toiuv 2 IJTS 3 <»at(»') D. 1 Inf. (0[lSV 2 ijiov 3 JITOV Opt. S. 1 Irjv ~ 01(11 2 trig , O'S 3 I?) 01 P. 1 Irjfisv, tfisp oifisv 2 I'jjrs, tTS oiTS 3 irjoav, Isv oiev D. 1 Irjfisv, Xjisv oi/iiv 2 irjTOV, Xtov oiTOV 3 i^Ti]V, iTijV olxrjv [mp. S. 2 -d^i, g, c e 3 10) hoi P. 2 TE £TS 3 TCdcroi;', yirav STCoaav, ovxcov D. 2 10)' trov 3 Tiov izmv Part. N. yr?, vxaS, v av, ovaa, ov G. vioj, vrCTJjf oVTOg, ovaijg !129.] CONJUGATION. 35 Active Voice. Future. Ind. S. 1 2 aiLs 3 ff£l 1 2 D. aofitv asTs 3 aovai(v) 1 aofisv 2 aETOI' 3 asjov Subj. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 1 2 3 D. Opt. S. 1 aoifii 2 aoi$ 3 aoi P. 1 aoifisv 2 aoiTE 3 aoiEV D. 1 aoificv 2 aoiTov Imp. S. D. Inf. Part. N. G. aovTog Aorist. aa aSg ai{v) aats aav aarov aotTrjV 00) ar) aaai{v) am [lev arjTov arjTor attifii aaig, aeias aai, aEis(y) auifiev adire aatsv, asiav aaifitv aanov Perfect. Pluperfect. 3 aohijv aahrjv x-eiv, K-tj it-cig x-ei, X-SlflSV x-cne x-eiaav, x-iaav X-Slfl8V n-fiTOy »-ujr}v auTS [tuv aaTaaav, aav- aatov aatwv x-a x-Sg x-e{v) X-ttllW x-ajs x-aai{v) K-KftEV x-aiov x-axov (x-to) («-b) fX-Ulft£v) {x-ciiai-v) (x-Wjwev) {x-rjTov) (K-ijToy) Sx-oi/it) x-oig) (x-ot) (x-one) (x-oiEy) {x-oifisv) {x-oiTov) {x-ohi}v) (x-£IO)) (x-eie) {x-ituaav, ]c-oi^(u>') (x-ETO)') (x-ETMJ') aag, aaaa, ami x-taq, x-via, x-og aavTog, adarjg x-orog, x-vlag 3b [1130. HSO. V. Affixes of the Pres. Imperf. Perf. Plup. Nude. Euph. Nude. Euph. ]nd. S. 1 fiai, ofiai, ixr]v ofiriv [laL [irjv 2 aai, ai V' *' ao, ov aai ao 3 TBI siat TO £10 T«t TO P. 1 2 fisda ofie&a ea&s [iS&Ol a&e OjiE&a, ca&e a&B a&c 3 vrai OVTttl vto OVTO viai, VTO D. 1 2 fis&a a&ov ofiE&a sa&ov a&ov ojie&a ea&ov lj.E&a i^s&a a&ov a&ov 3 a&ov sa&ov a&9)V ia&riv a&ov a&rjv Subj . S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 1 2 3 c>i[iai V rjTtti, c6[is&a i]a&s avrai oifis&a fjO&OV ria&ov (fisvog a) (/xdvog 11?) (/usVos fi) {ftivoi w[iEv) {fiEVOi tije) Xfisvot loat-v) (jUeVm WflEv) {[iivca riTov) {fXEVW TiTOv) Opt. S. 1 IflTj* oiutjv {fiivog eVtjv) 2 10 010 {fiivog il'rjg) 3 ito OITO {fiBvog tt'jj) P. 1 2 3 l/xs&a la&t IVTO oi/it&a oia&s OiVTO - {[livoi s'irjfiEv) {[iivoj, ft'ijis) {(lEvoi cl'rjanv) D. 1 2 3 la&ov olfis&a Oia&ov oia&tjv {fiivco sl'rjfiEv) {flEVlO £l'7)T0y) {fiivca ElrjTTiv) Imp. S. 2 3 ao, a&co ov ea&Di ao a&to P. 2 a&s eaS-g a&e 3 o&iaaav, a&aiv sa&toaav, ia&eov a&maav, a&mv D. 2 a&ov ta&ov a&ov 3 a&iav ia&tav a&cav Inf. a&ai ea&ai, a&ai Part. N. flEVOg, -7], -ov ofiBvog, ■ -J), -ov liivog, -n, -ov G. (livov, -rig ofiivov, -T/S [ispov,^g 11 3tJ ••J CONJUGATION. 37 Middle AND Passive Voices. / Fut. Mid. Aor. Mid. Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. Ind. S. 1 aofiai aafirjv &-riv &-riaofiai 2 ai], an aai &-n? &-^at], &-^asi 3 asiai aaxo &-n &-riafttti P. 1 aofie&a aafisS-a &-riii£v &-r]a6iie&a 2 aea9s aaads &-t)JS &-^aEa&s 3 aovxai aavTO &-rjaav &-^aovxai D. 1 ao/ze&a adfied-a &-rjftsv &-ria6(iE&a 2 asa&ov aaa&ov &-i}Tor &-riasa&ov 3 asa&ov ada&rjv &-rjT7jV &-riasa&ov Subj, , S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 1 2 3 acojiai arj aio/is&a arjaS-s aiaviai aca^s&a aria&ov arjo&ov &-(a &.f,g &.fl &-aii£v ■5--5JTS &-wat{v) &-afiiv &-riTov &-TJTOV Opt. S. 1 aolfiijv aai[ir]v &-Elrjv &-tjaoi[iriv 2 aoio aaio &-iirjg &-riaoLO 3 aoiTo aairo &-slrj &-riaoixo , P. 1 aoijxsd-a aalfi£&a &-Elrjfiiv,&- ■UjltV &-rjaol(is&a 2 aoLO&s aaia&s &-tir]zs, &■ SITS &-riaoLa&s 3 aoivTo aairto &-iir](jav,&- ■tlsv &-riaoiVTo D. 1 aoijxs&a aai[i£&a &-uriiisv,&- sijisv &-rjaolji(&a 2 aoia&ov aaia&ov &-drjTOV &-riaoia&ov 3 croj'afl-ijv aaia&rjv &-£f^fr]V &-r]aola&i]V Imp- S. 2 3 P. 2 a oil ada&iit aaa&s &-riTi, &-riT(a &-1]TS 3 ada&taaav, ada&cov &-'^t(aaai', ■&-ivTiav ' D.2 aaa&ov &-riTOV 3 ada&cov &-ijTiav laf. aia&ai aaa&ai &-rjvai &-riasa&ai Part. N. aofisvog ad/isvog &-sig,&-£lad,&-it 1 &-rja6jisvog G. aofiivov aa/isvov 4 &-sVTog, &-: uarjg &-riao(ii,ivov 38 [IT 31. ■oidioji-tM ■aAHEaadmi •ij^puooas •Aivmu^ a. h b S. b •aidiOjliBj ■aAiaiugui •©Ai^Bjaduii ■jCai!paoo8s ^ — ^v-> 4. - •XJBIUIJJ i/ » ^-^ 3 g s g ii is 3 a -< * * * * •aippiU pm 3AI10V isuoY ^ >8 -8 '8 ■8IPP!H pttE 3AI10V isuoy a s 3 s a s a a a ■ajnin J puis lussaJd S S S S 3 5 5 5 5 ■3AissE(j asnov •frf- UI sqja^ JO gViioy R R ^ ^ K ^ R R ^ •irf- UI sqj8A JO aippiw i' ■aAiiOxAraag a R R a sr a a K R o i 2 R •iri- UI sqjoA JO jjadmi puB -sajj •aAissEj[ 'jjadnij pue '-JJO^ '■Joy ****** * * * •aAHSV josjjadnij .. = = .? . = = •BAjjoy losjjgj ■'IPPIW P"« 3AI10V isuoy 5a -a ^>s >« >a ;8 JS IS [^ -sjiiin^ puE 'joajiadoii 'juassjj — - — ' •OAissEj joojjsdnij puE lOBjjaj ■aOBjJsdmi pue luassj^j ****** ***** r^- •OAlssEj ajmnj b b la tit b b S: s: K- S- R R- Vb -f^i 'i ■^ ■^ -^ b b b b fe R- K- R R R '^ '^ ^ ^i ^ 1 ■gAissEj jsiioy ^l. 'i. '^ ':»i ^^ ':ii « « « « « S ■9A110V losjaadnij puB lospoa K M :^ N K A K .-< :« ;^ ;^ ■9TPPIW PU'S QAiioy 'isijoy puB sinin^ fa b b b V> b b fe b b Q CQ Ph ^32.] CONJUGATION. 39 1-5 1 il-;< ^s a; ■ a ^ "=• ■ :fi,s CO in I I-H s o 'low s fe " •: . ^ . . . „ 111=.- £ W kS ^ w hS « ,. ~- fe 3" fa xw •J f 14 S ■». "S J » ^«> vjj is E i f Js £"8 '8 « . 5a. S- 1 ,8 != '5 E Q- . I • "! ^ J J .- • 8 t a W fl tS Q 5 S « " i>l ■! dg1,2 ^_ _- ° ^ ^ so a .1 S .5 ,S ,§ 8 => 9 '2 . S'8 ™Mftp' M 3 D. S S g g ,5, i" 3" '3^8 on S § 8 S » . 8 3 ^ ~ i-r 8 g I'l ^ J =* s p ^3 d. •i a a ^ 8" .^^3 .,="* b * f. .- s . a S -8 a a — ■ ;.!a .e-a W '^ -3 8 H § -S S""^ 'a- ?" 99 6 "i 03 - s ~ 3 . 8 1^ i 'a SJ ti -?- 3. a-3-« ^ Jap S a ^P ^ ■s'l a s.'l «! '§-.S- M 5- ^ la =i. a •> SOkP 3 a" ^3 fl A, £"!- ~3 !a ij 'a -fi s" ^ 8- § .1- ^ 8 «■ I ^-;8 -»_ ^. § =r 3 8" 3 a'la" "^ 5 .& S.C5 (^ ^ C-1 40 TABLES. [^33. 5 33. VIII. The Active Voice of the Ind. S. I / 1 2 Thou, You 3 He, She, It P. I We 2 Ye, You 3 They D. 1 We two 2 You two 3 They two Present. am planning, or plan. J Subj. S. 1 J 1 2 Thou, You 3 He, She, It P. 1 We ■ 2 Fe, You 3 TAey D. 1 We two 2 You two 3 TViey too J Opt. S. 1 J 7 2 TAoM, rbw 3 i/e, She, It P. 1 We 2 Ye, You 3 r/jey D. 1 We two 2 YoM too 3 They two J Imp. S. 2 Do <7jom ") 3 Let him P. 2 l>o you 3 Zie< o yoM too 3 Let them two _ Infinitive, may plan, can plan, or plan. might plan, should plan, would plan, could plan, or planned. be planning, or plan. Imperfect. was planning or planned. To be planning, or To plan. Participle, Planning, ^33.] CONJUGATION. 41 Verb ^ovXsva (\ 34) translated. Future. Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect shattplan, or will plan. planned, have planned, had planned, or plan. have planned, had planned. may plan, may have planned, can plan, can have 'planned, plan, or haveplanned. might plan, might have planned, should plan, should plan, should have planned, or would pldn, would plan. wmcld have planned, could plan, could have planned, plan, or haveplanned. plan, or have planned. To be about To plan, or to plan. To have planned. To have planned- Abouttoplan. j ^pSS""^' ^''"'"^ P^"''""^- 4* 42 TABLES. [fl34. T[ 34. IX. Active Voice of th£ Ind. S. Present. 1 ^ovXsvio 3 ^ovlsvEi 1 ^ovXsvoiiev 2 ^ovXevsxs 3 ^ovXsiovaii D. 2 ^ovXsvsTov 3 Subj. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 2 D. Opts. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 Imp.S. 2 3 P. 2 3 D. 2 3 Infin. Part. ^ovXniu) ^ovXivrjg fiovXiVTj ^0V).tVCOflM> ^ovXsviaai ^OVISVTJTOV ^ovXsvoifii ^ovXsvoig ^ovXtvoifiev PovXtVOlTE iSovXsvoiev ^ovXsvotrov PovXsvobriv ^ovXsve ^ovXivitto ^ovXevEzs ^ovXsvhcoaav fiovXevorttov jSovkiVSTOP ^ovXevsTav ^ovXsmiv ^ovXsvmv Imperfect. e^ovXevor i^ovXsvsg i^ovXsvs i^ovXevo/i^ i^ovXsvsTt i^ovXcvov i^ovXmistov i^ovXtvirrjV Future. ^ovXsvato ^ovXevaetg ^ovXivau PovXivaofiw ^ovXevaere ^ovXsiaovai ^ovXsvoeiov §ovXtvqoim PovXsiaoig ^ovXcvaoi ^ovXsvaoifitv ^ovXfvaoLTe ^ovXtvaoicv ^ovXivaoiTov fiovXsvaohrjv PovXivauv §avXtvamv Tr34j REGULAR CONTOftATION. 43 Regular Verb povXsvca, to plan. to counsel. Aorist. ifiovXsvaa i^ovXcvaas i^ovXsvas Perfect. PiPovXevxa PePovXsvicag PsPovXevxs Pluperfect. ijSepovXfvxeiv ipsPovXsvxtig iptPovXevxei ipovXtvaafitv i^ovXevaciTS i^ovXivaav PspovXBvxafisv PePovXsvxttie PePovXsvxaai iPspovXtvxeifisv ips^ovXevxens i^tPovXcvx tiaav, ificpovXevxtaav i^ovXsvaaTov i§ovXiv ygdxjjto Opt. yQaffOifii, ygoapoijii ygdyjaifii Imp. ygtt(ps ygdyjov Inf. YQOKfUV ygaipuv ygdijjai ysygaoiiixi ygdfOfiaL tygaipdfijjv ysygdifiofiai, Subj. ygcKfoiiiai ygdifiafiai Opt. yQa(f>oiiir]V ygatfjoljxrjv ygayjaifirjv ysygaipoiiiTjV Imp. ygaifov ygdifiai, Inf. yQtt(pta&ai ygdifisa&at ygaipaa&txi, yiygdifiia-d-ai Part. ygatfofiEvog ygaxpo^ivog ygayidjiivog yeygaifjoiisvog Imperfect. 2 Aor. Pass. 2 Fut. Pass. Ind. iyga(p6[irjv iygdr]v ygacpT^ao/iai, Subj. yga(p& Opt, ygatpdtjv ygatfrjooijitjv Imp. ygd(ft}-&i, Inf. ygoKftivai ygacp'^aea&ai Part. ygacfdg ygaqtijaofisvog Perfect, Ind. Imp. Inf. Plupebfecjt. S. 1 yiygajijiai yeygdcfOai iytygdnfiriv 2 yiygaifiai, ydygaipo eyiygaxjio 3 ysyganxat yeygdcp&m Part. iyiygauTO P. 1 yiy^d/xfisd-a ysygafifiivog iytygdfiiis&a 2 yiyga(f&s ysygaqi&s syiygacp&s 3 ysygccjAfiivoi ysygdcp&aaav, yeygaiifiEfot, r a f ysygdcp&(ov [i)aav D. 2 ysygaffd-ov yiygacp&ov iyiyg«(f&ov 3 yiygdq>&(av iysygdqid-Tiv 48 [^37. H 3 7. Labial. 2. Aeina), to leave. Active Voice. Present. Imperfect , Future. 2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect. Ind. Xiina tXsLTiov Xdijiw XiXoma iXsXolnsiv Subj. Kdnia Opt. Xunoijxi Xdifiot/ii I Imp. Xiins Inf. XUTICIV Xdipuv XiXomivai, Part. lelncov Xdifimv XtXoiTidg AoRisT n. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. S. 1 timov XtTTOl XlnoiiJi XlTlslv 2 iXinig Xlnrii Xlnoig Xlns 3 elms Xlnri XlnoL XlTliTCO Part. P. 1 iXino'^sv XinwjMtv Xinoifiiv Xmm 2 iXlnm XinrjTB XinoiTS Unets Xmovaa 3 'ilinov Ximxtav X'moiiV Xmhaaav, Xntovjav Xmov D. 2 iXmsTOV XiiirjTov XlTlOlTOV Xiittiov Xmovjog 3 eliTihrjV XmohrjV Xmhav Xinovarjg Middle and Pass iVE Voices. Pi-esent. Future Mid. Perfect. Aorist Pass. Ind. Xunofiai Xdijjofitti XiXufjjiai cXslcp&rjV Subj. Islnaifiai, J.fJljp5-M Opt. Ximolfirjv Xsiij/oliirjv Xsifp&drjV Imp. Isinov XeXsiipo Xdif&riTi Inf. Idnsa&ai, Xdifisa&ai. XeXu(f&ai Xucf&rivai Part. litn6[j.svoi r Xsiifiofiivog XsXsififiivog Xucf&dg Imperfect. 3 Future. Pluperfect. Future Pass. Ind. iXunofitnv XsXdi liai ni&cofiai niia&w Opt. nsi&oifirjv nsLoolfiTjv ni&olnriv mia&driv naa&riaolfiriv Imp. Tisl&ov ni&ov nd'a-d-rjTi, Inf. nd&sa&Ui ndoEO&ai m&ia&ai mia&rivai nua&riamd-ai Part. 7i£i&6fisrog Imperfect. nsiaojxevog ni&oiiivog Perfect. neta&dg nsia&r]a6fisvog Pldperfect. Ind. Imp. Inf. S. 1 ji£7i£ia^at nsTiua&ai, imndaiiriv 2 nsTisiaai nijisiao insTisiao 3 nimiaTai 7i£7ida&0) Part. insituoTo P. 1 mnuajic&a usTisia/iirog iTtSTtda/js&a 2 nimia&s ninna&t iTiinuad £ 3 nETtuafiivoi nsnda&aaav. itEnsiaiiivoi \uai TtsTtda&av [riaav D. 2 ninua&ov ninua&ov ininua&ov 3 nsnda&Kiv inenda&riv 1[ 40.J MUTE VERBS. 51 Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Ind Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. S. 1 H 4©. 2. Kofii^(o, to bring. ' (Middle, to receive.) Active Voice. Present. KOlxl^OijXi XOfll^UV xofil^av Imperfect. Future. xofiiam xoiilaoifii xoftiasip xo/iiaiav Aorist. EXOjUiaa KOfiiaio xofiiaaifii xofiiaov xofilaai, xofilaag Present. xo/xlSo/iai xo[il£(Ofiai, xofii^oiiirjv xofii^ov xoiil^sa&ai, xo/iiio/ievog Imperfect. ixofiiifljiriv Future Mid. xofiiaojiai xofiiaolfiriv xofilasa&ai xofiiaoiievog Perfect. Kixofiia/iat XEXo/iiao xsxofilad-ai xsxojiiaiiivog Attic Future. Aorist Mid. ixo/wjdfirjv xofxiaafiai xofuatxliiriv x6(iiaaL xoiiiaaa&ai xoiiiaafitvog Pluperfect. sxsxo/iia^rjv Perfect. xsxojjixa xexo^ixsvai xexojxixwg Pluperfect. ixexofdxiiv Middle and Passive Voices. Aorist Pass. ixojxia&rjv xojxia&a xojxia&EirjV xojj.la&rjTi KOiiiad-^vat xo^iia&ilg Future Pass. xofiia l^riaoiiai, xojXLa&r}aoi[iriv xofiia&riaEa&ai xoiiia&riaojisvog Kcnvz, Middle. Ind. XOfllCO 2 xojiiug 3 xoixiii P. 1 XOfllOVltSV 2 xojxietts 3 xofiiovai D. 2 xoiticnov Inf. xojxislv Part. xofiiav xoiiiovaa. XOfllOVV xoiiiovvxog Ind. xoinovfiai xofii-si xoiiishai XOfllOVflC&Ol xoiiiua&s xofiiovvTai xofiiua&ov Inf. xoiiiua&tti, Birt. 52 TABLES. [^41. 11 41. XII. (B.) Liquid Verbs. Present. Ind. Biyyi).i.ia Subj. ayyslXm Opt. ayyeXXoifii Imp. SyyeXls Inf. ayysU,uv Part. ayyiXXav 'AyyiXka, to announce. Active Voice. Imperfect. 2 Aorist. Perfect. TJyysXxa Pluperfect. tjyyikxeiv s. Ind. 1 ayytXta 2 ayyAslg 3 ayysXsi P. 1 ayytlovfiiv 2 ayysXstxs 3 ayycXovai D. 2 ayytXtixov 3 Ind. S. 1 ijyysiXa 2 ijyysiXag 3 rjyyuXs TjyyeXxivaii TjyysXxwi Inf. Part. uyyiXilv ayysXav ctyysXovaa ayysXovv ayysXovvxog ayyiXovarjg rjyysXXov riyytXov ayyiXco ayyiXoi^i SyyeXs ayyAuv ayyiXiiv FOTHBE. OpU ayysXotfii,, ayyeXolijV ayyeXolg, ayysXoirjg uyysXot, ayysXoit] ayyiXot/isv, ayyEXolrj/iEV txyysXolts, ayyEXolrjzs ayysXoisv ayyiXolxov, uyysXolrjXOV ayyiXolxrjV, ayyeXot-^xriv AOBISP I. Subj. Opt, Imp. ayyuXtxi ayyUXaijii. ayysiXrjg ayyslXaig, ayyclXsiag ayyuXov ayyilXi] ayydXai, ayydXeis ayyiiXdxoj V. 1 riyyilXafiiv ayydXaiiiv ayydXaijiiv 2 r\yydXaxe ayyslXrjXS uyyeiXaixs ayydXaxs 3 ijyyciXav ayydXaai ayydXauv, ayydXuav ayysiXdxtaaav, ayyuXavxav D. 2 riyydXaxov ayydXrjxov ayydXaixov ayydXaxov 3 fjyysiXaxrjV ayysiXalxrjv dyysiXdicov Inf. dyyEtlai. Vait, ayydXas,-^oo',-<'V ' G.-arxog,-dar}g. Middle and Passive Voices. Present. Ind. ayydXXo[iai Subj. ayyiXXoijiai Opt. ayysXXoifitjV Imp. ayytXXov Inf. ayyiXXsa&ai Part. ayyeXXofiEvog 2 Aor. Mid. rjyyeXoiirjV dyyiXiafiai dyyEXoi/xrjv ayyeXov ayysXia&ai ayyiXoiiSvog 1 Aor. Pass. r)yyiX&r]v ayysX&m ayyiX&slrjv ayyiX&rjxi ayyiX&ijvai ayytX&ilg 2 Aor. Pass. ijyysXtjV ayysXa ayyiXdrjV ayysXrj&i ayyiXTjvai ayyiXdg IT 41.] LIQUID VERBS. 53 Imperfect. Opt. Inf. Part. Ind. 1 ayysXov^ai 2 ayytlij, ayyelu 3 ayytlshai, 1 ayyclovfie&u 2 ayyeXua^s 3 ayysXovvtai, 2 ayyElHa-&ov 3 1 Future. ayytl&riaoiittL ayysX&Tjaoli^rjV ayyeX&riata&ai ayycX&riaofibVog 2 Future. ayyeXriaoiiai, ayyilijaoliirjv ayyslijasa&ai ayysltjaojjfSvog P. D. S. FoTUKE Middle. Inf. ayyeXcla&ai Opt. ayysXolfirjv ayyiloio ayysXoiTO ayyiXoifis&a ayyiXdta&s ayyiXdlvTO ayysXota&ov ayysXola&r]V AoRisT I. Middle, Part. ayysXov/ievog ayyiXovfiivT) ayysXov/icvov (xyyeXovfiepov ayysXovfisvriq Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 1 rjyysiXaftrjv ayyclXafiai ayysiXui^ijv 2 7)yydX(a ayyilXrj ayyciXaio ayyuXai 3 riyyilXazo ayyilXrjjai, ayyuXano ayyuXaa&m 1 riyyuXaiis&a ayyeiXoofis&a ayyeiXal/ieS-a 2 riyydXaa&s ayysiXrja&s ayydXaia&s 3 TjyydXavxo ayytiXtavtai ayyu IXttlVTO D. 2 fjyysiXaa&ov ayysiXrja&ov 3 TjyyeiXda&TjV Inf. ayydXaa&ai. ayyiiXaa&s ayysiXaa&maav, ayyiild(i&av ayyuXaia&ov ayyziXaa&ov ayysiXala&rjv ctyysiXda&oiv Part. ayysiXdfisros. Ind. S. 1 riyyiXjiOiv 2 ijyyEXaai, 3 ^yyeXtai, P. 1 ■^yyeX/is-d-a 2 ^yysXd'S „ , 3 TiyysXidvoi, uai riyysX&aiaav, I ^yyiX&cov D. 2 7]yytX&ov ^yysX&ov 3 riyyiXd-av 5* Fekfect. Imp. TjyysXao tjyyeX&co ijyysX&B Inf. rjyyiX&at Part. 7)yysX[iivog PtUPEKPECI. rjyyiXfis&a n^yytX&s rjyyeX/jEVoi riaav riyyeX&ov -rjyyiX-d-rjv 54 TABLES. [1142. H 4:3. Liquid. 2, Oaivco, to show. (2 Perf. and Middle, to appear.) ACTIVB ; Voice. Present. Future. Aorist. 1 Perfect 2 Perfect Ind. qiaivto qiara yrival(irjv Imp. qiaivov (p^vai Inf. cpaivEa&ai (paveia&ai Cf-qvaa&ai, Part. (paivo^evos (fttvovfiBvog (frivdfi£vog 1 Aor. Pass 2 Aor. Pass. 1 Fut. Pass. 2 Fut Pass. Ind. icfar&rjv ItfdvrjV qsav&rjaofiai (pur^aofiai Subj. (fttv&a qiaro) Opt. qsav&sitjv cpaviiijv (pav&rjaolfiTjV cpavijooifirjv Imp. dv&ai i7is(fda/j,r}v 2 nifpuvaai Ttiifavao iniq>ttVBO 3 nscpapxai mcpav&b) Part i7ti(favjo P. 1 7C£cpdafis&a nicpaaiisvog eu£q>daii£&a 2 Ttiifav&s nicpav&s iniqittv&s 3 nscpaa/^svoi '. ual nscpdv&aaav, nscpdv&cov nsq>aafxevoi, rjaoiv D. 2 nsq>av&ov ■nsqiar&ov inE(f>av&ov 3 7it(pdv&cat ijtEcpdvSi^v IT 43.] DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS. 55 H 4:3. XIII. (C.) Double Consonant Verbs. 1. Av^c3 or av^dvco, to increase. Active Voice. [nd. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Present avia, avis, avSsir, avSov, __ Imperfect. avSttVO) avSdvoifii, avSavs aviavstv avSdviav Future. aviriaoiiii av^i^asiv avS^aiuv Aorist. Tjv^Tjaa ttv^Tjaov avSijaai, fjvSov, Perfect. i]virj»a rjvSriKsvai, tjvSrjxwg Pluperfect rjv^i^xsiv Middle and Passive Voices. ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Present avSoi^rjV, av^ov, ttv^saS-ai, aviofisvog. Imperfect. rivittvoinrjv aviavoftai avidvajxai avSavoiii'TjV avidvov ttv^dvsa&tti tiv^o/xriv. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Perfect rjv^rjiiai, i]vir]ao rjv^rja&ai, rjvSrjiiivog Pluperfect, IjvSl^jATjV Future Mid. avSi^aouai: av^aolfirjv avSi^aea&ai, av^aonsvog Aorist Pass. riv^Tjd-rjV aviri&a avSrj&Sifjv avi^S^tjTi, av^rj&rivab av^rj&iig Aorist Mid. rjvirjadjiTjv avi^aiofiai avirjaaiij.rjv avSrjaai av^riaaad-av avSrjadjxevog Future Pass. avSrj&r]aoftai avSr]&r]aoliJ,rjV av^rj&f'jaEa&ai, avir]&7ja6iJi,iVog H 4:4. 2. Perfect Passive of xdy,7tTC3, to bend, and lAi/^ra, to convict. Indicative. S. 1 xExafifiai, iXriXeyfiai 2 xixajufitti. iXriXsylai 3 xixafinrai cX^Xsyxrai P. 1 xsxdfifis&a i).TiliyfiS&a 2 xexafKp&s iXriXsyx&E 3 xixttftfisvot ii.7]Xsyfievoi D. 2 xixa(i(f&ov iXili.syx&ov Imperative. xixa[i^io iXrjkiySo xsxdiJ.q)&bi,&'C. ilriliyx&(a,Sl.C Infinitive. xexd/iqid-ai e).TjXsy;i&aif Participle. xsxafijisvog ikijXsyfiivos 56 TABLES. [^45. H 45. XIV, s. '. (D.) Pure Verbs, i. Contract 1. Tlfidca, to honor. Active Voice. Pbksent Ind. Pbhsent Sdbj. TIjUft) TljlttTi Tijiazov hlfiag hlfia 1 tifidio, 2 Ti[iatig, 3 Tifiau, P. 1 Tifiaofiev, 2 TljiaSTS, 3 Tifidovai, D. 2 TlfiaSTOV, Imperfect. S. 1 hlfiaov, ht/ioiv 2 iri/iaig, ' ' 3 hlixas, P. 1 iTifidoficv, 2 hifidere, D. 2 hi/idsTov, hifidrov 3 hifiasrrjv, hiftaTrjV Present Imp. S. 2 xlfias, i/jua 3 Tifiothca, '^ P. 2 ti[idetE, 3 XijiaiTwaav, ■cifiaoVTiov, D. 2 TtfldsTOV, 3 Tijiasrav, Future. Ind. TijUijffo) Subj. Opt. tiiiriaoijii Imp. Inf. ti^riauv Part xifn^aav xifidw, tifim Tifiapg, Tiiiag Tifidri, Tifia Tifidcoftsv, Tifxco/iev TijxdrjTS, rijidrs Ti-i^daai; Tifimai Tij/drjTov, Ti/iazov Present Opt. Tifidoifii, Tiftwfii, Tifiwrjv Tijiaoig, Ti/jmg, Ti/imrjg Ti[iaoi, Tifico, ri/iarj ■tlfldoiflW, TLflWfliV, Tlfl[Ot][lSV Ttftaoize, Ti/jwTS, tijUwijts TlfldoUVj ILfi^SV TlfldoUVj ILfi^SV rifiaohijv, Ti^tixriv, XLjitarixriv Tifiaxs Ti/idxtaaav, TL/IWVTIOV Tiftdtov Tilidztav Aorist. hifitjaa xifiriaa Tt/irjaaijii tlfirjaov riff^aag riftdtiv, Tifiaohrjv, rifxaitiv, Present Inf. Present Part. Tifidtov, Tifiav Tifiaovaa, jifioyaa TLixdov, Tl/lOOV G. TifidovTog, Ti/iSvTog xifiaovarig, xi^toarjg Perfect. Texijirjxa xstijirixivaii xtxifiTjxug Pluperfect. hnijixiXELV 1145.] CONTKACT VERBS, 57 Middle and Passive Voices. Fk£B£n1! Inc. S. 1 Tifidofiai, 2 Tijidri, 3 TifiasTai, P. 1 Tijiaoni&a, 2 TlfldiO&t, 3 Tijiaovxai, D. 2 Ttjidsa&ov, Impebfect, S. 1 hifiaofiinv, 2 iTljldoV, 3 hifidsTO, P. 1 itifiaojis&a, 2 hi(idia&s, 3 hifiaovTo, D. 2 hLjidsa&ov, 3 6Tifiaia&rjv, Present Subj. ■ti(ioi[iai Tijxazai, ■ti/iwfis&a rijida&s Tifiaa&ov izTfia ixLixdjo hifiaa&t hifiaa&ov iTt[idaS->jV FaESEII!! S. 2 tiftdov, 3 jiftciia&ia, P. 2 tifiaEa&s, 3 Tifiaia&aaav, xifiaia&av, D. 2 Tifidia&ov, 3 Tifxaia&wv, Future Mid. Ind. TifiT^aoiiai, Subj. Opt. rijiriaoliirjv Imp. Inf. Tifi-^asa&ai, Part, xijiriaofiivog 3 Future. Ind. TiTiiiYiaofiav Opt. TSTifirjaoifiTjV Inf. xstijiriaia&ai Part. xsTifiTjaojisvog Imp. xijxm xifiaa&io xifida-d'S Tijxda&uaav, xi[ida&iov xijida&ov Tifida&av Aorist Mid. ixiiiriaajiriv xi,[iJjatOfiai xi[irjaaijA,rjV xifitjaai xtfii^aaa&ai TiHrjaa[isvog xt^atofiai, Xlfldrj, xifidtjjai,, xijiaa^i&a, xifjdrjo&s, xindatvtai, xi/jHa/iai xijja xijidxai xifta)fi£&a xti^da&e xifibivxat xijxdrja&ov, xifida&ov Present Opt. xtfiaoifirjv, xifidoio, TLfidoixo, xtjiaolfis&a, TLjidoia&s, Tijidomo, xijidoia&ov, xifiDcoia&rjV, xifitafiriv xijimo xifiaxo xifimfiB&a xijAwa&s xifimvxo xifiwa&ov xififia&rjv Pbesekt Inf. xifidsa&ai,, xiftda&ai, Present Part. xijiao^ivog, xifico^svog xtfiaofiivri, xifitofihrj xifiaofisvov, xifitijiivov Perfect. xntfirjfiai xnlfiTjao xaxlliria&ai xsxifirjfidvog Pluperfect. hixifirifirpi Aorist Pass. ixijj.rjd'TjV xijirj&ia XLjj,ri&sir]V xifnj&rjxi, xi/iTj&ijvai xijxrj&ilg "Future Pass xi/Mrj&i^aofjrt xi.iirj&riaoijj,r]v xi/itj&i^asa&ai xijirj&riaojisvog 58 [^46. 1146. Contract. 2. 0iUg}, to love. Active Voice. Present Iho. Present Sdbj. S. 1 cpdeoo, 2 cptXhti; 3 (ptXui, (pdico, (fddjjg, cpdijj, (pda (fdjij (pdfi P. 1 (ptXsoiisv, 2 (fiXhrs, 3 qiiXiovai, (J)(AoJI/U£V q)deo]/isv, cfdiriTS, cfdmai, (fdmfisv (fdrJTe qidwai D. 2 ifiXhxov, qjlAElTOV qidirjTov, cpdrjtov IMPEE.FECT. Present Opt. S. 1 i(flXtor, 2 icflXEsg, 3 icpUss, itflXovv iq>lXug icplXei CfiXioifii, cpdoifit, cpiXsoig, q>iXoTg, (fiXioi, cpiXol, (fdolriv cpdoltjg (pdoltj P. 1 icpiXiojxcv, 2 icpiXisTS, 3 scpiXsov, iq>iXov(tiv iqiiXuTS icpiXovv (fdioifiiv, (piXoifitv, cpiXdooTs, (piXdirs, (fiXioicv, (fiXdlev qidolrj/xj^ ifdolrjTe D. 2 iqidssTOV, 3 iqtiXuTTjV, icfiXshov i(flXilT7jV g>tXi (pdi -.oitov, (pdohov, -.ohriv, (pdohrjv, (fdolriTOV qidof^rrjv Present Imp. Present Inf. S. 2 9at£, 3 qodEETOj, (plXziy (piXtha fdiuv, (fduv Present Part. P. 2 qr)ti££TS, 3 (fiXthaaav, (flXiOVTUV, qiiXuTS cpiXdraaav, qiiXovvTav cfditav, (fdiovaa, (pdiov. (pdwv (fdovaa ffdovv O. 2 (fiXisTov, 3 qiiXshttiv, (fiXttxov cpiXshav G. (pddovTog, g)d£0i5(j»;?, qsdovvTOg cfdovarjg Future. Aorist Perfect. Pluperfect. Ind. (fiXriaa Subj. Opt. (fiX'^aoi/ii, Imp. Inf. (fiXrioBiv Part. (piXiqamv idE6i^s9a, 2 (pdd(a&s, 3 (pdiorrat. (pdoviii&a qidsla&s (pdovvrai qodfco'iUE^ct, qoUe'jjo&E, qotXwjiE^-a D. 2 cpdhaS-ov, (fdua&ov 9)iiE?)ff5-o)', (fdr)a&ov Imperfect. Present Opt. S. I icpdsofiriv, 2 eqjtAEOW, 3 i(pdBSTO, i(pdovii-riv i(fdov ^ ECjpiAsiTO (pdiolfirjv, qidioio, cpdioiJO, cpdoi/iTjV (fdoLO (fdoixo P. 1 icpdsSfis&a, 2 idela&wv Present Part. (fdao^tivog, (fdnvfxcvog cpdio/iivr], qidov^ivrj cpdiofisvov, cpdov^fvov Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Perfect. Aorist Pass. Ind. (fdrjaoiiai Subj. Opt. (fdniaoljiriv Imp. Inf. q)drtaM&ai Part, (fdrtaojitvog iffdriaaiiriv (fdriaiajitti rpdmaaifiriv (fiXriaai (fdrjoaa&tti (pdrjadfisvog 7ie(fdr]jxai nstp'driao Tisqidrja&ai, Ttiffdri^ivog iq)d-^&i}V ifdrj&a q)drj&slTjV tpd^&rjTi, qidrj&^rai, (pdrj&slg 3 Future. Pluperfect. Future Pass. Ind. nsqid'^aofiai Opt. Ttstpdijaoiiiriv Inf. nscpdriata&av Part. jiEcpdrjOojisrog emqidrifxrjv cpdrjS'^aofiui, cpdrj&tjaoijjrjv iiaiy Solfirjv dm Solo dov doa&ai, 3 l'5oTo daxai doXzo 86ad-co Part. P. 1 lS6[ie&a 2 l'5oad£ dtofis-d-a 8ol[is&a dma&s 'ddlaS-s dSa&s dofiivog 3 I'SoVTO daviai dotvTo SSa&coaav, doa&mv D. 2 tSoa&ov Sma&ov ddta&ov Soa&ov 3 idoa&tjv Soia&tjV Soa&tav Fut. Md. Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. Perfect. Pluperfect. Ind. Sdao/iai Subj. Opt. dmaolftijv Imp. Inf. daasa&ai ido&rjV do&riaofiai do&a So&sirjv do&riaoijiriv do&tjTl ' do&ijvai So&rjasad-ai, Ssdofiai idedojiijv dddoao dsdoa&ai Part, 'daao/isvog dod-slg do&tja6jj.svoe dsdoftspog 68 TABLES. [IT 52. T[ 52. Verbs in-^wj. 5. Jaixvvfii, to show. ACTIVE VOICE. Present. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. s. 1 Ssixvvixi ^fJXTOOl dsixvvoifii, 2 dsixvvg 5Ei«yiJ»)? dsixvvoig SEiKyC _ 3 Sdxvvai 5£(XJ'j5)J Seixvvoi Suxvvzia p. 1 Sslxyvfiiv Ssixvvtoiisv Ssixrvoijjcv 2 Sdxvvre SsixvvrjTE dsiXVVOLTS SdxVVTB 3 ^EtxyiJaai, duxvvaai Suxviioiiv Ssixvmaaav, ^ElXl'lioi dsixvvviav D. 2 SuHVVTOV dsLxvvrjTov dsixvvoitov Ssixrvtov 3 dsixrvolrrjv SuKviiav Inf. SsiK^wat Part. 5f«(>'iJj,-i'cr«,-w' G Imperfect. .-■ivxogr'ioinq. iS. 1 iSdxvvv, iSslxvijov P. iddxvv^BV D. 2 idslxvyg, e^tfaytiss idsixvvTS iddxvvxop 3 iStixvv, £5£tH»"i;£ iSdxvvaav iSsixPvjiiv Future Jst'lco. Aorist I'^Eila. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Present. Intl. Subj. Opt. Imp. s. 1 Silxvvfiai, ^fixww/iat 5£iZ»'D0t;UJJ>' 2 Suxvvaai ^EtK^UlJ ^ftXl'lJoJO Sslxvvao 3 Silxvviai Seixwjjtki 5£l)t)'l5oiTO deixvva&(o p. 1 dsixvvjxs&a dsixvvw/is&a Ssixvvol^i&a 2 dslxvva&s Ssixvv7]a&e ■ Suxvvoia&e 8dxvva&e 3 ddxvvyiai. Suxviavxai dsiXVVOlVTO Stixvva&Biaav_ dstxvva&iov D. 2 Sdxvva&ov duxvvi]a&ov dsixvvoia&ov Sdxvva&ov 3 Ssixvvoia&rpi Suxvia&iav Inf. , JSslxvvaS-m. Part. Ssixvvfitvog. Imperfect. S. 1 idstxvvfiijv P. iSuxvvfisS a D. 2 iddxvvao iddxvva&e " i •Sdxvva&ov 3 iSdxvvTO iSdxvvvTO i ■dsixvva&rjv Fut. Mid. Sdioiiai, Aor. Mid. iSulafiriv. Perf. Siduyfiai. Pluperf. iSiSdyfiijv. Aor. Pass. iSdx&rjv. Fut. Pass. Sux&n- aofiai. 1153.] VERBS IN -III,. 69 H 59. 6. 0j^jWt, fo say. Present. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. S. 1 cpri(il, rifii (fw (palrjv qjdva^ 2 m?, qpfl's d&i 3 cprjai Vfl, (paaxta eqiijv, ecpaaxov (prjOia, igw Subj. (pa, (pdaxcn Opt. q>alrjv, (paaxoi/xi * igdifu, igolri* Imp. cpa&i. (pdaxs Inf. cpdvai, (pdaxiiv (priasiv. igsiv Part. (fag, cpdcaxcov (p'^amv, igwv 1 Aorist. 2 Aorist.' Perfect. Pluperfect. Ind. f'qpijaa. elita einov tVgijxa slgi^xEiv Subj. (ptjaio. siTiia cVnco Opt. cp'^aaifii, sVnaiiii eVtioi/ii Imp. * einov slTti Inf. (frjaai. slnai slnstv elgtixivttii Part. q>VO«S> sVnag dndv clgijxdg MmsLis AND Passive Voices. Pres. Inf. (pda&ai,, Part. ' Imperf. iqxxaxoiifjv " Perf. sVgrniai, Plup. elgi^[ir]V, 3 Fut. eijjjcto- (im, Aor. Pass, ig^rjd^iiv, iggs&nv, Fut. Pass, grj-d-'^ao/iai. 70 TABLES. [IT 54 D S P. 1 54. Verbs in -fii. 7. "Tijfii, to send. ACTIVE VOICE. Present. Ind. Subi. Opt Imp. Inf. isirjv livai lilri Ihw Part islr}(iiv, uiftsv lug leirjTS, hits I'etb Idr/aav, litsv Utcoaav, livxiav leiTjToy, lelrov isrov isirixifv, Ishriv Ihav AORIST I. Ind. Subj. * a * * 1 'irj/ji Z irjg 3 I'jjffi 1 i's^sv 2 VSTS 3 laai, lelai 2 isTOV 3 Imperfect. Ind. 1 Xr]V,'iovv {'ictv) -fjiici ■^xag Subj. la '■V lojflSV iwai Itjtov 2 irjg, istg 1,7), ISt 1 'ie/isv 2 'ins 3 isaav D 2 Xitqv 3 IsrrjV Future, ■^aco JJXS rixafisv rjxars VJ V AORIST II. Opt. Imp. s'iriv cXijg i'g s'lr], Sec. STO) st[isv aifisv SITS TITS slaav (iai Infc ilrai Part. sig IITOV JjTOV slTrjV Perfect, slxa. Ind. is/iai isaai,, lirj isxai, &c. szs sTiaaav, svxay tf sxov Eitav Pluperfect, eXxslv. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Present. Opt. Imp. Inf, hifiriv, lotfiijv Isa&ai Xsto, isixo, &c. Subj. lijxai &c. lOlO I'otrq &C. isao, lov lia&m &C. Part. Ufisvog Imperfect. 1* I isfirjv 2 isao, low 3 isxo &c. Aorist II. Middle. Ind. tXfirjV siao slxo &C. Subj. JL rjxat, &c. Opt. Imp. oio olxo &c. ov i'a&io &c. Fut. Mid. Tjooiiai. 1 Aor. Mid. ■^xd/irjv. Perf. sl/xai, tifirjv. Aor. Pass, t'i&riv. Fut. Pass. iO-riao^ai. Inf. i'aSai, Part. E/isvog Plup. II 55.] VERBS IN -[tl. 71 S. 1 D. S. D. Ind. Ufll 2 tig, ei 3 i(nl 1 iajiev 2 lazs 3 slai 2 ioTOV 3 1 55. 8. Eifxi, to be. Present. Subj. Opt. Imp. to eI'jjv tJTS tl'jJTS, SItS mat sVrjaav, ilev 1JT0V Imperfect. 1 rjv, ■)], Tjiir^v 2 1]?, fja&a 3 ■^v 1 ■^/t£V_ 2 ^T£, ^OTe 3 ijaav 2 ^Toy, ■^aioj' 3 7ixr)V, fjaTrjv s'irjiov, tixov Ind. saofiai sari, sasi iasT'ai,, i'ajai, iaoiie&a sasa&s saoviai sasa&ov cats tazaaav, taxcav, ovjory EOTOV I'ffiojy Future. Opt. iaoifir}V EOOIO taoiTO iaoifis&a saoia&^e taoiVTo eaoiad-QV iaola&tjv Inf. Part. ortog oi/aijs Inf. 'daea&ai Part. , iao/isvog iaojiivrj iaofisvov Ind. S. 1 Ififi'iB. 2 Jsl. liriri P. 3 hri D. P. 1 £J>£V I. Ifiiv P. S. 1 hr'E. Eirxdy It. ■ui. ^a I. Subj. S. 1 V»I. 3 JnE. i'jjff'i E. P. 1 i^fsD. 3 e^trj I. Opt. S. 2 tIncioi'P. 'im;, , 3 hi I. Dialectic Poems. Present. Imp. .S. 2 Uc, lirita P. Inf. E^ey E. ^jUEVOSi E, VjUjUEV p. E^jUEVOSi E. ^. «^sv D. eT^ev D. e/^evix/ D. M. P. N. Impeefect. S. 2 Us P. Jilir^a E. E^f I. 3 rivii E. S<.) I. S. 3 E>I» I. ^0'XS It. p. 1 fifjcts D. 2 Vosrfi I. P. 3 Part. Xoit I, Xovifa I. lortTdt D. Eoy I. Gen. iOVTOS I* tUVTOS D. gVav I. P. fiWasp P. \trxov It, tottrav I. GiicKra !E. 72 TABLES. VEEBS IN -/M(. [II 55, 56 Dialectic Foems of tl/tl, to be. FuTOBE Ind. 1 %ffifefi.Bc.t "Et, S. 3 'iffivxt E. P. 1 IffOfcsir^u P. 2 iffictt I. iffenTOii E. iffffof/,t6tt> E, %ffffiiti E. Ifl-firra/ D. 2 %ffff&ffh E. Wj, P. lo-ff-Erra/ D. 3 ttrirovrai E. Iff-iT^ D. liTflUVTa/ D. p. D. Ind. 1 CI;U( 2 EIS, Et 3 ciai 1 l>tfV 2 1X8 3 IHot 2 Vtov 3 1156. 9. ETiu,togo. Subj. I'o) '?/ l'a)[isv Vrjxe Vcoai, VrjTOV Present. Opt. Imp. t'oi Voijisv I'oixs I'ouv loiTOV loltrjv Inf. livai I'&i (ft) I'tw Vts Vtcoaav, lovjcov, Vtcov irov Xtwv Part Itav iovaa lov S. 1 fjuv, TJot (^'i'of) 2 ijsig, fiua&a 3 J/'6l(>') P. 3 Pltipeefect II., or Imperfect. P. jjsi[tiv, ■ijfiev D. ijsns, rJTS tjsitov, ■fixov ^Eoav rjshrjv, jjxrjy Middle {to hasten). Present, I'sixai. Imperfect, h'firiv DlALEOnO FOKMS. Peeseht. Subj. 1 s7a,P. 2 IriirSx E. 3 '/jin E. 1 SOfiSV E. Imfeefeot. Ind. S. 2 fTs I. sTirfo E. S. Opt. S. 3 ih E. ;P. Inf. ?^E» E. D. "fiSVXt £. I'fifiEVClt El 7v«i P. S. I 7/aI. 3 mi I. ;>E. isE. P. 1 fo^sv E. 3 iV«» E. «iVav I. ^Vflv E. D. 3 Ins E. Mm. Pat. s'/rifiai, Aor. iirii/i>ija^s xa&rja&s xd&oia&s xd&rja&e 3 xd&tjVTai xd&aivTai xhiJoij'to xa&ija&iaaar,«a-&'^a&iov D. 2 xd&ria&ov xd&ijo&ov xd&oi.a&ov xd-&'i]a&ov 3 xa&ola&TjV xa&i^a&biv Pluperfect. S. 1 ixa&Tjfirjv, xa&r]jX7jv P. 1 ixa&rijii&a, xn&'^fic&a 2 ixd&tjao, xa&iiao 2 ixd-&rja&£, xa&rja&s 3 ixa&TjTO, xa&i]aTO 3 ixa&rjvro, xa&ijvTo D-. 2 ixd&ria&ov, xa&ria&ov D. 3 ixa&'ija&riv, xa&^aOijv H 60. Ksi/xai, to lie down. Present or Perfect. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. In£ s. 1 xsi/iai X£'0)f -"f, -IS (-sos), -i»«I -/"I. 2. The Effect or Object, in -|Ka. 3. The Doer, in -tjjj, -tjjj, -tw^, (F. -Tg/a, -T£l^X, •TQiS, -Tr?,) -£US, -OJ. 4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in -Tjigiol", -Tpoy, T^S, ■ II. Feom Adjectives, expressing the Abstract, in -/« (^-u&, -oix), -ms, -rutti, -oj (-£os), -as. A. KODMS. [§§30S-313.] III. From Other Nouns. 1. Patrials, in -rtis (F. -tI's), -ii$ ^^•-'^> ... 2. Patronymics, in -iS«ff, 'cc^tis, -laSns (F. -fs, -af, -!■«;), -I'laii, (F. -luvri, ~ivn). 3. Female Appellatives, in -l"?, -aiva, -fiia, -o'ira (^-TTci). 4. Diminutives, in -rov (-ISiov, -a^Mv, -uXXioi', -uSg/ac, &c), -IS, -lotus, -ix^vv, -ccxvt}, -vk\t;, -uXos, occ. 5. Augmentatives, in -ofv, -atvia, -ac^* B. Adjectives. [§§ 314-316.] L From Verbs ; in ixis, -rifitos, -[iuv, active ; -ros, -tios, -vos, pas- sive ; ~1fi,Qs, Jitness ; -a^os, -as, &c. II. From Nouks ; in -Xos (_-xios, -nas, -etos, -0105, -vias), belonging to; -ixos, -Kos, -eixos, -ec'iicos, relating to ; -sos, -"f»of, -en, material; -ms ("r), time or prevalence ; -7vos, -vivos, -covas. patrial ; -^os, -l^os, -wgaf, -aXlos, -TjXos, -aXos, -us, -eootjs, fulness or quality. III. From Adjectives ahd Ad- verbs. 1 . As from Nouns. 2. Strengthened Forms ; Com- parative, Superlative. C. Pronouns. [§ 317.] D. Verbs. [§§ 318, 319.] I. From Nouns ahd Adjectives ; in -iai, -ivu, -a.(a, to be or do ; -oeo, -ttivu, -tvat, to make; -it,ot, -k^oj, imitative, active, &a. ; -m with penult strengthened, active, &c. E. Adverbs. [§§320-322.] II. From Other Verbs ; in -irsiu, -taot, -au, desiderative ; -^u, -cku, &c., frequentative, intensive, incep- tive, diminutive, &G. , Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives. 1 . Genitives, m-h]i, place whence ; -so, place where; -us, &o. 2. Datives, in -a/, -oSt, -xn, -So-'!, place where; -*?, -tt, -ctt, -T, way, place where, time when ; &c. 3. Accusatives, especially Neut. Sing, and Plur. of Adjec- tives. II. Derivatives signifying 1. Manner, in -us, -vitov, -Sav, -Sjjf, -a^nv, -Sa, -/, -£', -s- 2. Time when, in -n, -iko., 3. Place whither, in -e-e* 4. I^umber, in -aKts^ III. Prepositions WTTH their Cases. IV. Derivatives from Preposi- tions, or Prepositions with- out Cases. 78 TABLES. [IT 63. ^63. II. Pronominal [Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals Negative. Relative. So o Orders, I. H. III. IV. V. VI. Interrog. Indef. Objective. Subjective. Definite, Indefinite Positive, fis i 'riSt euris, fi^TtSi os, oirris, . no2; no2, cuius, i^yitiU, 'onos, ohtotfLOSj firiooi/xoSt Compar., ^otsqos ; ^ort^os^ ovhiTi^osj fATjtirtgos^ ocrortQost oi/^oiroTBQoSf fivihovortgost .Superl., ^offTos i e^oirros. Quantity, woffos i vrairoSf airosj o-^offosj offanoSf Quality, ^oTas i ^oiog, evvilavaSj oiogj o-ffoToSj eu^etfiivosj /iti^ecfiivosj n^ixoSf o^nXixeg, Age, Size, ^tjXiKas i Country, jraSacraf % Day, ^offrato; i Whence, ^ohv % wa^ev, Where, 9tou \ iTdi/, fi^^oVf ov, ey^«, ov^xfAOu, fiti}^ecfioUf effu^eVj Whither, Wfl? ; fTa/, vro.axoV. - roSi, IxatrToStj ^ecvToStj etVTO^i. tKU&t, Ixeca-ra^^o^tj ^BtVTX^O^t, aXXoh, ITi^uSly Ixari^cdh, Kfifparz^aiSij aXT^ec^oSi. ly^^^s. \v7ttvSo7, ixacrrotX''^i 'jeUtrtx.xoiy KUTOin. iKilffit txatrrax^^h OfAOffSf iTi^utrij Xxari^atn, ^fitpoTS^a/ffi. T^\ vavTi/, r^i, iravTjj, 0/«J7, eeXX)]. ixE/'vj?. IxaffTuxPi a'avTa;^;^, aXX«;t;J. Ir^e»j,^ \xc6ri^^t «jW^flTe^>). r&^Si as. oSratSy SSi, Wavrwf, OflSf, KuraiS' ixiivusj axravroiSt JVaij, KkXa/fm Toieost rciurii. fTavToms, ofitaia/St aXTioiait, Xri^us, Xxetri^uSy afctpaTtQafS* Totrccvra^oiif ve^vra^Zs' TJ, r^de. TOTij ixa^rori. tt'avTartt aXXort. TUfixeef TTjiiKituraf vmixaSu Ttifcosj rttfAOVTeSf riots, VO(PQtt. roifeixiSj ToffetuTecxtSj voureixtSt ixairraxts^ ixaT6^dxiSt KfAfpare^dxis* Derivative Verbs, troa-ou, outivoa/j irs^oioai (from IrB^oTdSj omitted above), oftatou, liroai, dy.Xotou, ouityi^ait afii,(porSQi%ai, Ixart^su, aWd-fftruj &c. 80 TABLES. M 64 HI. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. M 64;. I. An Appositite agrees in case with its subject. § 331. II. Tile Subject of a finite verb is put in the Nominative. § 342. III. Substantives independent of grammatical construction are put in the Nominative. § 343. General Rule for the Genitive. The Point of Departure and THE Cause are put in the Genitive. § 345. IV. Words of separation and distinction govern the Genitive. § 346 V. The comparative degree governs the Genitive. § 351. VI. The origin, source, and material are put in the Genitive. § 355 VII. The THEME OF discourse or of thought is put in the Genitive. § 356. VIII. Words of PLENTY and want govern the Genitive. §357. IX. The whole of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive § 358. X. Words of sharing and touch govern the Genitive. § 367. XI. The motive, reason, and end in view are put in the Genitive § 372. XII. Price, value, merit, and crime are put in the Genitive. § 374. XIII. Words of sensation and of mental state or action govern the Genitive. § 375. XIV. The TIME and place in which are put in the Genitive. § 378. XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and giver are put in the Genitive. § 380. XVI. An ADJUNCT defining a thing OR property is put in the Gen- itive. § 382. General Rule for the Dative Objective. The Object of Ap- proach AND OF Influence is put in the Dative ; or, An Indirect Object is put in the Dative. § 397. XVII. Words of NEARNESS and likeness govern the Dative. § 398. XVIII. Tlie object of influence is put in the Dative. § 401. General Rule for the Dative Residual. An Attendant Thing OR Circumstance, simply viewed as such, is put in the Dative. § 414. XIX. The means and mode are put in the Dative. § 415. XX. The TIME and place at which are put in the Dative. § 420. General Rule for the Accusative. An Adjunct expressing Direct Limit is put in the Accusative. § 422. XXI. The direct object and the effect of an action are put in the Accusative. § 423. Adverbs op swearing are followed by the Accusative. § 426. Causatives govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. § 430. The same verb often governs two accusatives, which maybe, — (I.) The direct OBJECT and the effect in apposition wilh each other; as with verbs of ma/d7ig, appoint- ing, choosing^ esteeming^ naming, &c. — (II.) The direct object and the effect, not in apposition; as with verbs of doing, saying, &c. — (HI.) Two objects differently re- lated, but which are both regarded as direct ; as with verbs of asking and requiring, of clothing and unclothing, of concaaling and depriving., of persuading and teaching, fee. §§ 434-436. An PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 81 XXII. An adjunct applying a word or expression to a takticular PART, PROPERTY, THING, Or PERSON, is put in tl5e Accusativs. § 437. XXIII. Extent of time and space is put in the Accusative. § 439. XXIV. The Accusative is often used adverbially, to express de- gree, MANNER, ORDER, &C. § 440. XXV. The CoMPELLATivE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. § 442. XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case. § 444. XXVII. The Article is prefixed to substantives, to mark them as definite. § 469. XXVIII. A Pronoun agrees with its subject in gender, number, and person. § 494. The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the antecedent is a Genitive or Dative, and the relative would properly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. % 526. XXIX. A Verb agrees with its subject in number and person. § 543. The Neuter Plural has ita verb in the singular. § 549. The Passive Voice has for its subject an object cf the Active, commonly a direct, but sometimes an indirect object. Any other toord governed by the Active remains un- changed wiih the Passive. The subject op the Active is commonly expressed, with the Passive, by the Genitive with a preposition. § 562. ' action is ranrawntad bv the $ °^*'°''° Tenses, as (o.) continued or prolonged, action is representea by me ^ ^^^.j^^^ ^ ^^ ^ momentary or transKnt, $ (b.) a habit or continued course of conduct; (c.) doing at the time of, or until an- I 0.) a single act; (c.) simply doTie in its own time; 5 other action ; (d.) begun, attempted, or designed; (e.) introductory. > r- g™ -„ . ( Id.) accomplished ; {e.) conclusive, j^sou-o/*. The generic Aorist often supplies the place of the specific Perfect and Pluperfect 5 680. The Thdicative expresses the actual; tho Subjunctive and OriAiivE, the contingent. §537. Present contingemcv is expressed by tho primary tenses ; past contingency, by the secondary, § 589. The Subjunctive, for the most part, follows the primary tcTises ; and the Optative, the secondary. § .^92. Supposition as fact is expressed by the appropriate tense of the Indicative ; supposi- tion that may become fact, by the Subjunctive ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Optative ; and supposition contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Indicative. S 593. The Optative is the distinct mode appropriate to the oratio obliqua in past time. § 608. XXX. The Infinitive is construed as a neuter noun. § 620. The Infinitive often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, excla- mation, or question. § 625. XXXI. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the .Accusative. j626. XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTANTIVE are put absolute in the Gen itive ; anjMPERSoNAL participle, in the Accusative. § 638. The Interjection is independent of grammatical construction. § 645. XXXIII. Adverbs modify sentences, phrases, and words; particularly lerbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. § 646. XXXIV. Prepositions govern substantives in the oblique cases, and diark their relations. § 648. XXXV. Conjunctions connect sentences and like parts of a sentence §654. 82 TABLES. [U 65. IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. ^ 65. A. Of Words. Common Proper Abstract Collective Irregular &o. ■ KouN 1) of the 2 Y Dec, 3) , from Nom.~ Toe. Sing.) Plur. V Dual) the subject of — , governed by — , the Gen. of — , the Dat. of — , the Aco. of — , &o.,_ - Rule. Remarks. Pos. ) is an Adjective [in the Comp. > Degree, from — (compare),^ Sup. ) of 2 >• Terminations (decline^ : t„ j j * ' n Root — , Affix — ; I ^ ' ' [Compounded of — , j ' ' fNom.") Sing.") Maso. ") . .,, Jn„„ I Pi„H IT.™ I. agreemgwith — |L- ; uZl S:;. I ' ■- "i--'*. ^r • '^'- '^■*- }■ Personal "1 Reflexive I is a Relative | Pronoun, of the 2 &o. J 3 Akticle 1) 2 >- Pers. 3) , from — — — (de- rn ■ A f _ 1 Nom.") Sing.") Masc") dine) ; L^^^"''™ "°™ 'J Root — , AfSx — ; the Gen. }■ Plur. }■ Fem. }■ : ^' [Compounded of-,] &c. j Dual) Neut.) rthe subject of- ) , .^^ . ^ .^ Subject \ ^,. -< governed by — , >■ Rule. [It refers to — as its . •' , y , Rule; (agreeing with — , &o.,) ^ and connects — to — .] Remarks. Transitive Vekb, Intransitive " Deponent " Barytone " Contract " Verb in /n, &c., from (canjitgaU [Derived from ' [Compounded tres.] FOKMS OF ANALYSIS. 83 Pres. "1 Impf, 7I.2 fct - -} . P"-fi. -J Affix - ; th. fl^_ 1 Aor. cSbc. (if finite) the 2 > Pers. Plur. ^ , agreeing with 3) Dual) (vary and mfiect) ; Ind. Subj. .Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Act. >-Mid, Pass, ;] 0/ Inf.) having for its subject -, and {f^g'^f .!!,^'.. Norn.") Sing.") Masc") . .., (if Part.) the Gen. i- Plur. I Fem. I ; '^'f'"^ ^"^ T' „ &c. )DualJNeut.| '^'^'^''''''"'""'■''y'^'-' Bule. Semarks. Interrogative Indefinite is an Demonstrative Complementary &c. Place Time ' Advekb of Manner Order &c. Pos, , [in the Comp, Sup ip. > ) gree, from - (compare),^ ^CompoL^drof -.] ^"^'^y'^S -, Eule- refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to — .] Remarks. De. [It ■ is a Peeposition, h„ fl a f !_T governing — , and marking its relation to — , Eule. Bemarks. Copulative "1 Conditional I ^ „ , [Derived from — , ] . IS a ^ , . > CoNJTOtcnoN, h„ j j p H connect- Complementary ( [Compounded of — ,J &o. J ing — to — , Eule. Remarks. is an Interjection, h„ i h f '— 1 ^°'^ independent of gram- matical construction (§ 645). Remarks. Notes (a) When declension in full ig not desired, gi7e the Nom. and Gen. in Sub- stantives and iu Adjectives of L Term., and the different formg of the Nom. in Adjectives of 2 or 3 Term. (6) In conjugating, give the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf (if in use), to which it is also well to add the 2 Aor. if used, (cj The term " vary " is used above in a specific sense, to denote giving the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the terise ; and the term " in- flect," to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course, takes the place of this), (d) After completing the formula above, which, to avoid confusion and consequent omission or delay, should always be given in the pre- scribed order, add such Remarks as may properly be made upon Vc\QfoTm, signification^ and «ee of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citing, from the Grammar, the appropriate rule, remark, or note, (e) Some particulars in the forms above, which do not apply to all words, are inclosed in brackets. 84 TABLES. ANALYSIS. [^ 66, 67. T[06. B. Of Sentences, I. Describe the Sentence, f t T , 11 ^f $ Declarative, J Actual, ^ Posi \ n- .- » ) ''i^^""^^^^' \ Interrogative, i Contingent, } Nag- I, J, 5 Simple, ; ^'«t'"*^^' < vnntivp $ Positive; "»^ ^ Compound, < ( Volitive, J Negative; f Incorpor 3 ; ( connected by — to - \ following by sin J - . J 1 ,1. . ° ^„ „ 5 Substantive, f Incorporated in the sentence as a < Adjective. llTf 'X . J u . — - 5 Coordinate Sentence. ative ; C connected by — to , as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office Adjective pellative ) Adverb ject ^ , modified by the Appositive y . Show how these are mod- dicate simple succession. ( Substantive. of a < Adjective. ( Adverb. II. Analyze the Sentence into its Logical and GTammatical Divisions, its Primary and Secondary Parts, ^c. Compellative ) Simnln J ^™* The Logical Subject > is , containing the r' „Vm,,^.i I Grammatical Sub- Predicate S ^.ompouna i p^^ Adjective \ ) Adverb i > , modified by the Appositive \ . ) Adjunct t Dependent Clause j ijled, and analyze Subordinate or Incorporated Clauses, until ike Sentence is ex- hausted. H 67. C. Of Metres. I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written. n. Describe the particular Verse. Iambic ^ Monometer f Acataleclic ^ 1 i It is Dactylic > Dimeter > Catalectic > , consisting of 2 [ Feetj which WB &c. ) &c. ) d:c. ) &c. ) riWa^r 1 Pentliemim, ) . The CiEsura is the fS „ J HephtHemim, > after . [tern. J Pastoral, &c., > ni. Analyze by [Dipodies a-nd] Feet. Dactyl, ) 1 ) , - , Nature, ) is a Spondee, V the 2 f Syllable ^?"2 { by Position, \ Knle. &c., 5 &c. 5 *"">" > &c., ) INTRODUCTION. § 1 . The Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal races ; the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric, and the jEolic. These races spoke the same general language, but with many dialectic peculiarities. The Ancient Greek Language (commonly called simply the Greek) has been accordingly divided by grammarians into four principal Dialects, the Attic, the Ionic, the Dokic, and the ^OLic. Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and jEolic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended, and united by no common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties of the Doric or jEolic were separated from each other by dif- ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in common from the other dialects. Of the jffiolic, the principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, according as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was characterized as the stricter or the milder Doric ; the former prevailing in the La- conic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the latter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, Rhodian, and some others. § @. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the mother country in refinement; and the first development of Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions, was among the Asiatic lonians. This development was Epic PoETKY, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 8 86 INTRODUCTION. would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city^ and those poetic licenses which are always allowed to early- minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed, and critics are unknown. Epic poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac, of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon were two great masters ; and this again by Ionic Prose, ir which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrateb, who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets, the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle Ionic, and that of the prose-writers, the New Ionic. § 3. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera- ture was the jEolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains of Alcaeus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short- lived, and we have scarce any thing remaining of the dialect except some brief fragments. There arose later among the jEolians of Boeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which Pindar was the most illustrious ornament. As writing, however for the public festivals of Greece, he rejected the peculiarities of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the basis consisted of words and forms common to the Doric and iEolic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universal- ly familiar Epic. He is commonly said, but loosely, to have written in the Doric. § 4. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, were gradually rising to such political and commercial impor- tance, and to such intellectual preeminence among the states of Greece, that their dialect, adorned by such dramatists as jEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, by such phi- losophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such orators as Lysias, ^schines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the edu- cated classes in all the states. It became the general medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, which will be here- after noticed, the universal language of composition. This diffusion of the Attic dialect was especially promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court language. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and received many additions ; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation of the Common Dialect or Language. The Attic and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in DIALECTS. 87 any essential feature, and may properly be regarded, the one as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or later form, we find written nearly the %vhole that remains to us of ancient Greek literature. It may claim therefore to be re- garded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of Greek study. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods ; the Old^ used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle, used by Xenophon and Plato ; and the New, used by the Orators and the later Comedians. The period of the Com- mon dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjec- tion of Athens to the Macedonians. § 5. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon- uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it- self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timseus, &c.), in Mathematics by the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his successors, and in Pastoral Poetry by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus. § 6. To the universality acquired by the Attic dialect, an exception must be made in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their sev- eral compositions. The jEolic and Doric held such a place in Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an -lEolo-Doric hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long m, which formed so marked a characteristic of those dialects, and which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical effect. Pastoral Poetry was confined to the Doric. The Dra- matic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic was the standard dialect. § 7. Grammar flourished only in the decline of the Greek language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dia- 88 INTRODUCTION. lects with little precision. Whatever they found in the old Ionic of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later cultivated ^olic, Doric, or even Attic, than to the new Ionic, they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dialects. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irregular or pe- culiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming the regular form y.oivov, common, though perhaps this form was either wholly unused, or was found only as a dialectic variety. On the other hand, some critics used the appellation xoivog as a term of reproach, designating by it that which was not pure Attic. In the following Grammar, an attempt will be made to exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the Greek in its standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common usage ; and afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It will not, however, be understood that -every thing which is ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through- out, or is found in no other. This applies especially to the Doric and iEolic, vi;hich, with great variety within themselves (§1), are closely akin to each other ; so that some (as Mait- taire) have treated of both under the general head of Doric ; and in the following Grammar some forms will be simply men- tioned as Doric, that also occur in the .ffiolic. By the term .55olic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the cultivated iEolic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually con- fined to the language spoken (though, according to Herodotus, with four varieties) by the lonians of Asia Minor and the adja- cent islands. § 8. It remains to notice the modifications of the latei Greek. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi- barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculiarities of their native tongue. These are termed Macedonia, or, sometimes, from Alexandria, the prin- cipal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of later Greek culture, Alexandrine. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was employed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of the Christian. When so employed by na- tive Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called 'MXrjviaTtjg (from eXXrivl^to, to speak Greek), this form of the language has been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. Its pecu- liarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the fathers, and through the difflision of Christianity exerted a greal general influence. DIALECTS. 89 Another influence modifying the Greek came from the lan- guage of the Roman conquerors of the world. Of necessity, the Greek, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and jElian, and the- precepts of a class of critics, called Atticists, was continually becoming more and more impure. The language of the Byzantine period was especially degenerate. Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Eccle- siastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different dis- tricts and islands of Greece has produced the Modern Geeek, or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East, Romaic. This language has been es- pecially cultivated and refined within the present century, and has now a large body of original and translated literature. § O. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a series of compositions, not only including many of the highest productions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly three thousand years. 8* BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. ^schylus, Prom. Vinct. CHAPTER 1. CHAEACTEES. [ITTT 1, 2.] ^10. The Greek language is written with twenty-four letters, two breathings, three accents, four marks of punctuation, and a few other char- acters. 1. For the Letters, see Table, 5 1. Remakes. 1. Double Fohms. Sigma Jinal is written g ; not Jinal, a ; as, aidaig. In compound words, some editors, without authority from manuscripts, use g at the end of each component word ; thus, jigogsigtpsQstg.- The other double forms are used uidifTerently ; as, ^ovg or Sov^ 2. LiGATtTRES. Two Or more letters arc often united, except m recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (liga- tQra, tie) ; as, f^ for xal, S for ov, eS" for aQ-, ? (named ail or inlyfia) for ax. For a list of the principal ligatures, see Table, IT 2. § I 1. 3. Numeral Power. To denote numbers under a thousand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, as exhibited in the table, with the mark ( ' ) over them ; as, d 1, I 10, 1/3' 12, QKY 123. The first eight letters, with Vau, rep- resented the nine units ; the next eight, with Koppa, the nine tens ; and the last eight, with Sampi, the nine hundreds. The thousands were denoted by the same letters with the mark he- neath • as, s 5, / 5,000, x/ 23, xy or x,/ 23,000, ^ncafid 1841. CH. 1.] LETTERS. BEEATHINGS. 91 Notes, a. Van, in its usual email form (r), resembles the ligature for er J§ 10). Hence some editors confound them, and employ 2T, as the large form if Vau, to denote 6. ;8. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, ac- cording to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of Homer are marked ; as, "IXiaSof, A, Z, ii. The Iliad, Books /., FZ, XXIV. y. Another method of WTiting numerals occurs in old inscriptions, by which 1 denotes one, II (for IIbdts) five, A (for Asxa) ten, H (for Hsxccror, § 22. a) a hundred, X (for 'X.lXioi) a thousand, M (for Mv^isi) ten tho usand . II drawn around another numeral multiplies it by five. Thus, MX5]h[H]5[ AAIII = 12,676. § 12. 4. Roman Letters. By the side of the Greek letters in the table (^ 1), are placed the Roman letters which take their place when Greek words are transferred into Latin or English ; as, Kvxkaiijj, Cyclops. Notes, a. The letter y becomes /(, when followed by another palatal ; but, otherwise, g ; as, a.yyt>.os, Lat. angelus, Eng. angel ; trvynor^, syncope ; xd^uyl^j larynx ; AjyTvcc, jEgina. fi. The diphthong m becomes in Latin s, Phcedrus ; Bciairicc, Bceotia ; Nerxaf, JVUus ; Aa^eTos, Darius ; Mri^ttx, Medea ; Mava-x, Musa , 'Eii^iihta, mthyia. A few words ending in aim and mx are excepted ; as, M.ciix, Maia, Tj«i«, Troia or Troja ; so also Ala?, Ajax. y. The improper diphthongs a, ti, ai, are written in Latin simply a, e, o ; as, Q^KKV, Thrace, "Aj&ns, Hades, Q^^ffffct, Thressa, utri, ode. But in a few compounds of cilri, w becomes ikla " ju. Note. If a or j receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and is followed by a single consonant or ^, it is protracted in the penult, but abrapt in any preceding syllable ; as, Hyia, ix^rl^a • y^dfiTt, fiXiu, 'A^mxTas. From this rule is excepted x in any syllable preceding the penult, when the vowel of the next syllable is s or < before another vowel (both without the ictus), in which case a is protracted ; as, Tariai, vsavias, yccXsofAuofiia^ia. 94 PRONUNCIATION. [bOOK I. 2." Diphthongs. The diphthongs are, for the most part, pronounced according to the prevailing sound of the same corn- binations in our own language ; st like ei in height, ov like oi in ioil, VI, like ui in quiet, av like au in aught, iv and tjv like eu in Europe, neuter, ov and wv like ou in thou ; at is sounded_ like the affirmative ay [ah-ee, the two sounds uttered with a single impulse of the voice), and vi like whi in while. Thus, EiSvla avToi, nX^vaov/iat, Tjviov, &ojV[ia, viog. 3. Consonants. The consonants are pronounced like the corresponding letters in our own alphabet, with the following special remarks. y, X, and X ^s always hard in sound : y being pronounced like g in go (except before a palatal, -where it has the sound of ng in Img, § 49) ; x and % like c in cap, and ch in chaos, i. e. like k ; as, yitos, ciyyas (pron. ang-gos), S- has the sharp sound of th in thin ; as, 9-eo;. (T has the sharp sound of s in say ; except in the middle of a word before ft, and at the end of a word after « staftm, where it sounds like z; as, irSirai • xefffio^j rris, as. The Erasmian method differs from the English chiefly in sound- ing a protracted like a in father^ i protracted like i in machine^ n like ey in tfiey, ay like ou in our^ ov like ou in ragout^ vi like our pronoun we^ and ^ like a soft dz, HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. §21. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the Phoenician is abundantly established both by historical and by internal evidence. According to common tradition, letters were first brought into Greece by Cadmus, a Phoenician, who founded Thebes. In illustration, we give the com- mon Hebrew alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phoenician, placing the corresponding Greek letters by the side. It should be remarked, however, that the forms of the letters in both alphabets have undergone much change. It will . be noticed that most of the Oriental names of the letters, when transferred to the Greek, require modification in accordance with the law respecting final letters (§ 63), and that this is commonly effected by adding a. Hebrew. Greek. Hebrew. Gr eek. E-s Aleph A a Alpha h Lamed A X Lambda 2 Beth B s Beta n Mem M /^ Mu J Gimel r 7 Gamma J Nun N V Nu n Daleth A S Delta D Samech 2 (T Sigma n He E E E (psHon) V Ayin (micron) 1 Van F F Vau s Pe n •jr K I Zayin Z ? Zeta V Tsade 3 ? Xi n Hheth H >J Eta P Koph ? Koppa a Teth ^ Theta 1 Resh P e Rho 1 lod I 1 Iota w Shin '^ San or Sampi D Kaph K X Kappa n Tan T T Tan 96 HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. [bOOK I § 22. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of time important modifications. a,. The original Phoenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The Greeks, therefore, employed as such those letters which were nearest akin to vowels ; viz. A, E, F, H, I, and 0. In the transition of these letters into vowels there appears to have been nothing arbitrary. A, as the soft or entii'ely open breathing, naturally passed into the most open and deepest of the vowels. E and H, as weaker and stronger forms of the palatal breathing, natm'ally became signs of the shorter and longer sounds of the palatal vowel e ; in like manner, the lingual breathing I passed into the lingual vowel z, and the labial breathing F into the labial vowel u (compare i and y, or in some languages j, and also u and v or w); appears to have been originally a nasal breath- ing, and was hence employed to represent the vowel most akin to a nasal, o. The aspirate use of E and F still continued for a period, and hence these letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the addition of ■v^rxoj, smooth; thus "E i/.7Xov, ''T ^Txiv. It wiH be observed that the last of these letters, when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in form, and was put at the end of the old alphabet. The aspirate use of H prevailed stiU later, even to the period of the highest Greek refinement, and when at length it had yielded to the vowel use, the grammarian Aristophanes of Byzantium, who flourished at the court of Alexandria, about 200 years B. C, is said to have divided the old character into the two mai-ks, h for the rough, and -\ for the smooth breathing. These marks were abbreviated to ^ j or ■" n^ and were afterwards rounded to their present forms, ' '- To the same Aristophanes has been ascribed the first use of marks of accent and punctuation. /3. The sibilants 2, S, and "^ exchanged places in the alphabet ; so that H came after N, "7) after 11 (hence called 'Sa/ijrT^the S which stood next to Pi), and 2 after P. y. To the Phcenician alphabet, the Greeks added the aspirates and X, the double consonant Y, and the sign for long o, fl. These new letters they placed at the end. In distinction the short o was now termed "0 /uk^ov, small O; and the long o, ^fl'/^iyx, great O. The names of the other new letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them ; thus, or, XT, as, in English, be, ce. S. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also and "Z), which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 in their proper places in the alphabet, but '^ at the end. Thus employed, they were termed Episema (i'jrltrtjf/.ov, sign, mark). See ^ 1, § 11. F was also named from its foi-m the Digamma, i. e. the double gamma ; and from its being longest retained among the JSolians, the ^olic Digamma. It is still found upon some inscriptions and coins. In Latin it commonly ap- pears as V ; thus, ^i'Sm, video, to see, FcTros, vinmn, wine. Its restoration by Bentley to the poems of Homer has removed so many apparent hiatuses and uTegularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. The general law in respect to the disappearance of F, appears to be the following : Before a vowel or an initial j , it is usually dropped, or becomes otic of the common breathings ; but otherwise, it usually passes into the cognate vowel v ; thus, /SoFo'?, /SoF', /3«F£5 (Lat. bovis, bovi, boves) become Hois, lief, Hits ; but /3oFs, lioFv, fiiF, /3»Fir/ be- come /3»5f, Hmv, Bm, lim^i (<1[ 14). on. 2.] VOWELS. 97 § 33. The alphabet in its present complete form was first adopted bj the lonians (of. § 2), and hence termed 'laivixx yixpftara. In Attic in- scriptions it was first used in the archonship of Kudides, B. C. 403. The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoemcians, fi:om right to left ; and then alternately firom left to right and right to left (as it was termed, ^i>urr^(i?, and es and oo commonly form, not ij and to, but the closer diphthongs u and ov, which are hence termed the corresponding diphthongs of s and o. /5. Contraction more frequently exhibits some attenuation of vowel sound. See §§ 31 - 37. This naturally appears less in the earlier than in the later contractions. Compare ^aaiXrjg with ^aadug (§ 37. 2). Note. A eimilar tendency to pass from a more open to a closer sound ap- pears in the general law for lie formation of diphthongs (§ 25. 2). II. Union of Syllables. ^30. The most important changes belonging to this head ave, A. Contraction, which unites two successive vowels in the same word ; B. Cra- sis (xQoiijis, mingling), which unites the Jinal and initial vowels of successive words ; and C. Apos- trophe or Elision, which simply drops a final vowel before a word beginning with a vowel. In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are written separately. This union is termed synizesis (jrvnZ,ws, placing together), or syn- ecphanem (tmiK Tif/,a.s^ TifAa. (2.) «; <«-, ys^aa y&Qx. eca. ?) fivda. flV^> aai ffi/, fcvdai fcvoii. (^3.) aa w, rifixofczv TlfZCDfitV. Exceptions. a. The closer « tak< aot ova. «;t;fi« '^X^^ TlfAO.Oi rtf/itu. rtfidoifii OUOtTOS oioo-ns oviXuri. (4.), The closer jj takes the place of « in the contract forms of fom- every-day verbs ; viz. ^ruidu, to hunger, Sii^asi, to thirst, ^^aaiixi, to . Mse, and ^dai, to live; as, ^rstvauv vrtiv^v, x^asa3-at ^^ntf^xt. Add the verba Kvoiai, (fiAtiat, and •^a.u • the Subjmictive of verbs in -fii, as, /Vra?) (from 'ItrTvi' /ii) iVtj • and the liquid Aorist (see § 56). /3. In adjectives, a before a and « is absorbed ; as, ii^rXia ii^rXx, 'SirXixi %f7rXa.7, oi9r?LC7i awX^. y. In ouaf, ear^ the Nominative singular becomes nSs by an absorption of the a, but the other forms are contracted according to the rule ; as, diris, Zra,. S. For the change of oii Into i», in verbs in -ou, see § 37. 3. < , § 34. Remarks. 1. «, taking the place of v before a ,(§ 50) is contracted like e ; thus, in the Ace. plur., (Ao'p'oj'ff, Xo- yoag) Xoyovg, {/Xoiaaavg, ylcoaaaag) yXaaaug, {oivg) oiag oig, iz9v- ng Ix^vg, TioXiug noXeig, ^oag §ovg, fid^ova'g (^/xil^oag) fni^ovg ' in themes of Dec. III., (i'rg, sag) lig, {cpavivig, cpavsag) (puvtlg, {oSovxg^ oSong') oSovg, (glvg, Qtctg) Qig ' in feminine a4jectives and par- ticiples, ((pavsvTaa, cpaviaaa) q)ttvuatt, {ayoviaa, uyoaaa) ayovan ' in the 3d pers. plur. of verbs, {^ovXevovoi, ^ovXsvoaat) ^ovXiv- nvai, (il&srai) Ti&iuai xi&nai, {SiSovai) Sidoaai didovai, [dii~ xvwai) ScinvvSai Snxrvai. Notes. «. By a similar contraction with /Boa; fiovs, we find also vxx; mu; and yjaoj; y^xvs (If 14). In like manner vxSs occurs in the Nom. plur. by contraction from mi;, but only in late writers. 102 VOWELS. CONTRACTION. [book I. (5. For x''^''S x»5f, see § 116. S. For Kxk/his, Oudktis, see § 109. /3. § 35. 2. When a long is contracted with an O sound, there is usually inserted before the to an e, which, however, is not regarded in the accentuation as a distinct syjlable ; as, vuog (iw?) vi(og (U 9), MsviXdog MsviXimg, 'AiQciSSo 'AtqiISiw (fl 8). So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (§§ 48. 1, 242. a), when a is short. § 36. III. (1.) «a becomes r}, and (2.) bs, si. (3.) £ and o, with o, form ov ; but (4.) with other O sounds are absorbed. (5.) In other combina- tions not already given (^ 32, 33), s is absorbed. Thus, ^ become Of \ 1 Decome OE i (1.) s« «3 r£/;^;£a Tiizy}- on Ot, aTe; OiS' '? ?j ;te«'r^ xm' iov cv, ^iXEflPfl-i (piXeuo-i, (2.) « eij iTfl^-EEff vroXsiS' 00) a,, S«Xow ^tjXej, £E/ £/, ^jX&EJy (ptXsTv. «y Vi VdOf vf Ea £'» xXtiiS kXus. 001 Olj V00i yo7. I 3.) £fl SW, i..0f7. oi flU, SjjXoEre Ot]X0VTB. (5.) £«/ m. Xivffim X^vifccT, cu ov. fisXiTOEIS fiiXtrovs* tri «) (plXiUTt (piXn'Ti. 00 OVf vQo; VQVS* ej) ?» ) and cii, except in the Infinitive, become m (i. e. the o and i miite, absorbing the ti and e) ; as, JjiXoii JjiXor, SjiXoe;; J»- X«j. But S»)XflE/i' (Infin.) ^;]Xai/v, ^i^oris (from ^i'SojfAi) ^iSms (§ 33). 4. In the termination of the second person singular passive, ek; is con- tracted into s) or e/, and sja/ into jj ; as, {iovXtvuti (iouXtuy or ^ovXtvu^ ^ovXzvtjati ovXEvn, 5. For special contractions of s in the augment, see §§ 188, 189. Semabk. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might take place according to the preceding rules ; particularly in nouns of the third de- clension, and in dissyllabic verbs in -b&i. B. Ceasis. ^38. Crasis (1.), for the most part, follows the CH. 2.J 103 laws of contraction, disregarding, however, an i final, which, according to the best usage, is not even subscribed. But often (2.), without respect to these laws, a final, or (3.) an initial vowel is entirely absorbed. Crasis occurs mostly in poetry. It is commonly indicated by the coronis ( ■ ) (§ 16), except when this mark is excluded by the rough breathing ; as, rifui, ei/tsi. When an initial vowel has been absorbed without any further change, the words are more frequently separated in writing ; as, c'l '/ml. The same is sometimes done when a final vowel has been absorbed. And, hence, cases are often referred to aplueresis and apostrophe which properly belong to crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate rough, when the second word is aspirated, see § 65. For the accent, see Prosody. § 39. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub- ject to crasis are the following : a. The article; thus, for (1.) iX, Wl. euxy ov^l. For n agETH, KQirn- ei Ifioif OVfiOU a.1 ayaB-eti, &ya9-at. a^vts. OVQVIS. TOU aVTOVf Tothrov. ra ii^S, ry ifi^, TUfAM, TVlf/.^. rod nfAsri^ov, B-^fciri^ov. (.2.) Ml, av«f, or, less (3.) o' oTvos, uvos. Attic, ^vsjg. ot Iftoiy ot ^fzoU T^ «vSg/, Tav^Qt- ToV vSctTOS, B-ou^aTo;. Notes. 1. The neuter forms vo and Ta are especially subject to crasis thus, for (1.) TO IvCCVTiOVf TouvayTiev, For TO, oV^a, ^3^Xa. TO OVOflXf ToSvofi.it. (2.) TO ^XjJ&^ff, raXviBis- TO ifiKTlOy^ S-fli^ar/ov. (3.) Ta atffx^d. T^ffXili. 2, In crasis, Vts^o?, other, retdns the old form Mtg^os • thus, for (2.) 'iripoSi aTiQos- For toV Iri^ov^ B-utI^ov. TO tTtPov, B-aTSQcy. tm erfigy, S-«T£gy. § 40. /?. The conjunction xotl^ and; thus, for (1.) Koi aVy xoii lav xa) Ivj xa) EX, xeiVj xax. For xk) 0, xa) 0*1, (2.) xa) s/, Ko.) fly. xe/, xoh. Xa.) 6T£Q0Sy xett iiTay xa,ra. xett utTa, (2, 3.) xai h ayxovffXt XVTTO. X^yxo^'^'^ y. A few other particles ; thus, for ^Toi a^a, TlTd^Ot. f/,£VTXV. For f/.titi^o) \vj 5rao Ifl-r/v, f£9}di^6a *f. vrev *ffTtv. ouToi aga, ouTcc^a, fiT} UQOt. w ayaBU '^Qov^yov. Z ^yctBL a *vBQei)9rs. 104 VOWELS. APOSTROPHE. [bOOK I. S. Some forms of th^ pronouns ; thus, for iya ottoit ly^x. For E(poge/, otKpo^ei. lyu iuf^a.1. iy^ficct. ov 'iviKa^ ovvijcitf. li.o\ eSoxe/, fiiOUdOKU. orou ivixcCf o^-ouvixx. a6k ItTTiVj traSiTTiv. a ac, & Ifti, olv, a/^E. The few cases which remain are best learned from observation. C. Apostkopi-ie, or Elision. § 41. Apostrophe afifects only the short vowels d, e, i, and o, and sometimes, in poetry, the passive terminations in ai (and perhaps oi in the enclitics [XOL, COL, Toi). In monosyllables (except the Ep. pa, and a few rare or doubtful cases), f only is elided. For the mark of apostrophe, Bee § 16. For the accentuation, see Prosody. Elision is most common, 1.) In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use; as, acp ittvxov (for ano saviov, ^ 65), eii ixilvov, y.ax tfis, and, in composition (where the sign ' is omitted), avigxofiai, Sulavvoi, Tidgsifii.' aXk iyw, dg ovv, y ovSiv, /laX av^od' 6 {ois 6),Tdx aV. 2.) In a few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc- currence ; as, Tovr Si.Xo, Tam ijBr] " yiron «»', £a&' onov {salt onov), Xiyoiji Sv, oiS on, (prifi lyw. <5i 42. Eemaeks. k. Elision is less frequent in ;, than in the other shqjt vowels above mentioned. Particularly, it is never elided by the Attics in *£jj or oTi (which might then be confounded with SVe) ; and never in the Epic Ifffft (2d person singular of uf^t). It Ls never in prose, and very rarely ui Attic poetry, elided in the Dative singular, which might then be confounded with the Accusative. The forma which take v paratiogic (§ 66) are not ehded in prose, except Iitt;. /3. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found chief- ly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus is more carefully avoided, its use is far more extended. In respect to its use or omis- sion in prose, much seems to depend upon the rhythm of the sentence, the emphasis, the pauses, and the taste of the writer. There is, also, in this respect, a great difference among manuscripts. DIALECTIC VAEIATIONS. § 43. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly referred to the heads of Precession, Union or Resolution, Quantity, and Insertion or Omission. § 44. I. Precession prevailed most in the soft Ionic, and CH. 2.J DIALECTIC VAKIATIONS. 105 least in the rough Doric and jEolic ; while the Attic, which blended strength and refinement, held a middle place. E. g. 1. Long a, for the most part, is retained in tlie Doric and .£oIic, but in the Ionic passes into ti ; while in the Attic it is retained after i, i, j, and {», but otherwise passes into ti (§ 29). Thus, Dor. 'dfii^d, Att. itfii^d^ Ion. i^tjd • Dor. ^oifjLoSf vayoy uxur&s, Att. and Ion. ^nfAss, ^nyrt^ uxuths • Dor. and Att, ffo^'id, r^ayfiizj lon. ffo^ivty flrg«y^«. So, even in diphthongs, Ton. vjjyj, y-Qvvst for vaJf, yiaus, and in Dat. pi. of Dec i., -tin, -ris, for -aim, -xis. Note. The use of this long a produced, in great measure, the Doric feature called .KruafffAos, broad pronunciation^ wliich was imitated by the Attics in the lyric parts of their drama (§ 6). 2. Short a is retained by the Doric in some words, where, in the Attic, it passes into e ; and in some (particularly verbs in -aa/) by tiie Attic, where it becomes s in the Ionic. Thus, Dor. r^a^af, "A^T&fusy oxdE, tp^acri, Att. r^s^of, "A^n/iis, oTS, ip^sffi • Att. 0faftf, ipoiTaaij rstrirce^ss^ es^ffTiVy lon. o^iuj ^mria, 3. In nouns in -is, -s«s, the characteristic e commonly passes, in the Ionic, into i throughout ; as, rixis, its, ii (contracted into r according to § 29. a), jv, je;, ia/Vy tffiy tag (contr. tsj- 4. As the long of t and o, or the contraction of es and to or »e, the stricter Doric prefers the long vowels u and a to the closer diphthongs u and on ; while, on the other hand, the Ionic is particularly fond of protracting e and a to £1 and ou or ot. Thus, Dor. x^$* SwXfls • Gen. of Dec. n., tS a^etvu • In£n. Eu^wv, ^oii^vv, vwuTi • for ;^si^y JoyXaf, Tou oti^avoVj iv^zTv, ^ai^ttVy viTvovv. Ion. ^s7y0Sj ftovveSt ^oitt, for %ivoSj ftovoSj ^oee. Att. xo^oSt ovofAUj o^os ' Ion. xoupos, evye/ioj au^os ' Dor. ku^os, uvofjLit^ a^es' Both the Doric and Ionic have av for ojy, therefore, contracted from lit. 5. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels (§ 28) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of the dialects, the Ionic has a more open sound than the Attic, or the Attic than the Doric or .^olic ; Att. 'asl, 'aeros. Ion. aht, ahras * Att. xaof, xXaai, Ion, and Com. xa.iu, x\a,iu ' Att. ^2x0;, Ion. BaJxos • Ion. r^asra;, Ta/jtyai^ /liya^osi Att. T^Sfrof, TSfcya/, /iiys^os ' Ion, appajdea;, Att, oppaioiat • Ion, fiSffa/ilipiay Att, ftt^rift^^ia • Dor, and Ep, uJ, Att. il • Dor. S-vaffxea, Ion. and Att. dv^trxAr, .^ol. ^salffxat ' Att. ffT^aroSi /3^a;;^£ai;, ^apoecXje, .^ol. ffT^oTogj ^po^sus, ^epSa- >.is • Att. ovofiosj ^oL ovv/ia • Att. l^fTETfiv, .^ol. o^-nrau § 45. n. Union or Resolution. A. The Contraction of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and' least in the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are also dialectic diiferences in the mode of contraction, which, for the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g. 1. In contracting a with an sound, the Doric often prefers S to the clof*r 41 ; in the first declension, regularly. Thus, Dor. 'Ar^tiii, t2v S^u^ 5» (^ 8), TIflfl-£/Sap, -ayos, iTE/ySyr/, ^tu^siveiftes, sr^Srw, for 'Ar^iilou (uncontracted '£0), ray Bt/^eay (-a«y), Iltftf-E/SftTy, -ajyos (-«wy, ^dayes), ^sivuvti (-aoyri), "Sia-jrityu- tiiy (-«fl/4sy), v^uTos {^-iiLras). A like contraction appears in proper names in -\do5 \ as. Dor. MEvEXa;, for 'iS.iyiX&os. 106 VOWELS. [book I. 2. For the contraction of n and »» or os, see § 44. 4. 3. With the Ionics and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of ei and iau is into so, instead of m. Tliis use of so for »u Bometimes extends to cases where tliis diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, ipi^iu- /it)i, ipiXiv, ifiid, Bi^sus, for (piXiZfuy (-m/«£v), ^iXau (-Mu), l/mu (-")i ^'{""s (-e»;) • IS/aaiEu, lSEolio often employs xi and oi, for a and ou ; as, Ace. pi. txis ri/ixis, nh w- l^ois, for rx; ri/^a.;, toI; tio/rnvs • Nom. Sing, of adj. and partic. fiiXmi, ri'^'ms, rv^anrxt 'i^oiffxt for ^eXaj, rv^KSt rv-^siiroij %xovrra • 3d pers. pi. of verbs, fxirl, Ktiirrcitri, for ipHiri, x^ua-mviri. The Doric has here great variety, both employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though » were simply dropped before o-), the common diphthongs of contraction (§ 34), and the iEolio diphthongs; thus. Ace. pi. T£;g»a; and Tix'&s (Theoc. 21. 1) ; nus xCxaus and to; xixo; (Theoc. 4. 11) ; A and nh o"^! Motiiro!, Mwa-x (Theoc), MdTitx (Find.), and Laconic MZx ■ ISTom. sing, of partic. f^ilrxis (Find. 01. 2. 108), l^Mo. (lb. 73). So, likewise, a for oir before r in ixalra, Theoc. 11. 78. 6. The Ionic use of mi/ for xv in a few words, appears, at least in some of them, to have arisen from a union of a and a to form a ; thus, for toiwto, luauTOVj ffSxVTodj XxwroVt Ion. voihTa, lfx,z&)vroUj trtuurov^ taiUTou, from to xiiTo, ifiio ctvTcVf trio aiirovj Xo avrcv. In the reciprocal pronouns, the oiv passed into the other cases. We find also Ion. 3-(ui;^a, r^uvfjux (yet better r^w^a), for S-xvi/.x, T^xZ/ix. In all these words, cati is written by some with a diaere- sis ; as, Buvfjcx, § 4:6. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the Attic are often resolved in the other dialects, especially the Ionic and JEolic, into separate sounds. In the Ionic, the reso lution of £1, with s prolonged, into iji', is especially common ; as ^aatkrjtrj, y.),rji'g, for ^aaiXua, xlslg. Notes, x. On the other hand, the Ionic in a few cases employs contrac- tion where the Attic omits it, particularly of cti into « ; as, ;jo5, ifiaiirx, 'im- trxy fiMB-iai, iy^aticQvrxj for iS^o?, \^or]irXf tvonifx^ (iotiB-iajj hytovixovrx, /3. The fondness of the Ionic for a concTurence of vowels leads it, in some cases, to change v to a (§ 50) after a vowel (which, if before a, now becomes e) ; as, 'Ag/o'TayogE«, ttwixroi for 'A^ttrrxyo^xv^ ISyvavro. C. In Ceasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from the Attic by uniting the o of the article with a and at initial, to form w and ft) ; as, to aXrj&sg, roilij&sg ' ol avdQig, ard^Bg ' ot alnokoi anoXot. In the following erases, which are found in Herodotus, and the two first also in Homer, the smooth breathing has taken the place of the rough ; o x^i- CH. a.] DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 107 trrosy u^tffTos - aliTeg, atvros • el ^XXa/, u\Xou Other dialectic erases are, Dor. tXa^os, u\a,v^xs for Eis.))A.u9-af, A. 202. <^ 4 8. IV. Insertion or Omission. Vowels are often inserted in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here, as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom helongs to the poets, especial- ly the Epic. These often double a vowel, or insert the half of it (i. e. the short for the long), for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract verbs; as, xQijrivov iiXdttif), for xgijvov ekdmg, A. 41, cpaav&iv, rj^caiaaa, oqoio, ogdag, yilcoovrig, cpoaig, yaXoag, iuxoai, for cpav&EV, r]^waa, oga, ogag, yilavicg, cpwg, yd- lag, si'xoai. Bemabes. 1. The Ionic is especially fond of the insertion of e ; as, Gen. pi. ^vS^Eaiy, ^Tiviuvy ai/Tsaiv, for av^gwv, &c. ; 2 Aor. in&i. iv^UtVy X/!r£s/v, for 2. In the Doric and Epic, the particles a^a, ava, xmrd^ va^d^ bctoj ywo, and xsri (Dor. for Wf «), often omit the final vowel hefore a consonant, with such assimilation of the preceding consonant as euphony may require ; as, ap fffaiSj Bj» ^lUfiaiirif 'ciyxpjcnij avffrds (§ 68. 3), xao dvvccf^iv, xaiT (poiXapa (§ 62. ^), x&d- QaraL for scp&agvTai., a7ii(jio) (contracted OTiigw) for aif.gaio See §§ 34, 46. /3, 56 - 58, 60, 63. R., &c. Note. In like manner, u is the corresponding vowel of the old consonant F. See § 22. S. § 51. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are observed in the formation and connection of words A. In the Formation of Words. I. A labial mute before a forms with it t/^ ; and a palatal, | ; thus, become a^ become as vrir ^J/, Xiivirca Xsi'iJ/u* xtr |, xo^ctxs Ko^it\< jSc 1^, "A^a^s "A^a^. yir ^, Xiyirai X^^ar. Note. In like manner, ? is the union of a lingual with a sibilant sound, and in many words has taken the place of f& ftfJ!., T^t^fAO. T^lfi,(Lt&. rtrv^ftai rirvyfActt, aiyQfz.ex.Tfia,t uvofiafffiai. (pfA fAfx.^ y^a(pf£,a. y^dfifia. xfi. yf£, *TtTXtiof/,a.t w'fsrX&yf^xt. S^ fffi., a^fiOi atrf/ee,, wi'^rtiS-ft.ai •ri'^ufffAat. Except in a few such words as oixfiyi, others from the dialects ; as, in Homer, )6£vB-f£avj vtoxf^os, rroTftas ' and some axa^ftivas* ^ 54. IV. V before a (1.) labial or {%,) pala- tal, is changed into the cognate nasal (^ 49, i 3) ; and (3.) before a liquid, into that liquid ; thus, (l.)v^ VfX. C2-) KOTES. become fL-r, fi(p, flfC, fi^p, yXj Ivf^dXXM lfi{idx>i:eii. a'vv2TXA2, for fth -^vxds (Insc. Potid.) ; so, ArKAI, TOAAOrON, and even E22AM0I (cf. §§ 57. 5. 68. 3), for £v xa/, rov Xoyov, Iv 2«^ seems to have been extensively retained before a ; thus, lis, n^Us, for s/s, ri&s/f. § 30. 7. In the Dative plural of syncopated liquids, and of aaxriQ, Star, the combination -cqo-, by metathesis and the change of e to a, became -pair- ; as, for naiigai, naxoaai " for ttOTsgai, aaiQaai. 8. Elsewhere the combinations Xa and qa were permitted to stand, except as a radical after q was softened in the new Attic to Q (§70) ; as, Sqqtjv, male, ■d-dggog, courage, xoggt], temple, cheek, for the older Sgarjv, -d^dgaog, xogarj. The combination (la is unknown in classic Greek. ^60. VI. Between two consonants, forma- tive is dropped, and v is changed to a (§ 50) ; as, for ytypa^f^ai, yty^a^^m • for hiXiyff^i^ y.i\l^^i • for e^S-seQvrai, i^^d^arau Note. So the compound ■xgoofx"'' ^ written by some v^orx^t, §61. VII. Before x formative, a labial or palatal mute unites with it in the cognate rough, and a lingual mute is dropped ; thus, 13 CONSONANTS [BOOK become as become as ir» .o(pcx,. Z"^ A^) SeSjSa_;^;xa dBdioet^ec. Pk. h ilXr)p,xot. u>.V yi'y^a(pxa. yiy^ccipa.. ^x X, •^i(p^a$xx ^i(p^axa,. XX Xt O^UXXDC Vititx^' ^x X, vrivTitS-xcc ^iTr&ixx. yx Xy ^i^^ccyxoi m-^^ocp^ct. § 63. VIII. If rough mutes begin two succes- sive syllables, the first is often changed into its cognate smooth, especially (1.) in reduplications, or (2.) when both letters are radical ; but (3.) in the second person singular of the Aorist imperative pas- sive, the second rough mute is changed ; thus, for (1.) v. And in composition, from rou Irs^oVf ^ars^au, cc'^S and 'itifii, xtpinfa, Stcu etixx, S^iSisxx. Tixx and iifii^x, itx^/ii^ss. (2.) afro oy, «^' oJ, iTTrd. and hf^i^a, If^^fis^os, Note. In some compounds, this change takes place -vrith an intervening { ; and in some words, it appears simply to have arisen from the tendency of J to aspiration (of. § 13. 2) ; as, f^ou'Siis (from w^i and 0S05), if^nv^is (v^i, cpiu), Ti^^tVTrov QriTTx^tit 'iTT^os) ; ipQOifiiov (yr^o, oTfCo;')^ ^^xtTircij from T(t- ^airiraj. ^66. II. Some words and forms end either with or without a Ji?ial consonant according to eu- phony, emphasis, or rhythm. In most of these cases, the consonant appears not to belong to the original form, but to have been assumed. In some cases, however, the reverse appears to be true ; and some cases are doubtful. 1. Datives plural in l, and verbs of the third person in e and 1, assume v at the end of a sentence, or when the next word begins with a vowel ; as, nSo-/ yap elwe roura • but, ETsrsv xuro vatriv. Heiiri Xiyovffi rovTo • but, JXairiy aiiro Xsyouriv. 10* 114 CONSONANTS. EUPHONIC LAWS. [bOOK I. Notes. ». So, likewise, adverbs of place in - ^. In these words, Ix and ovx may perhaps be regarded as the" original forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in § 6.3. Wlien orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other by di-opping x. 3. In composition, the preposition ir, in, retains its v before g and o ; while avr, with, drops its v before o followed by an- other consonant, and before J ; but before a followed by a vowel, changes v to a ; as, ivgnrnw, evaelco (yet l'Q^v9fiog often- er than 'dvgv&^og) ; avarrjfxa (for avrarrjita'), ijvt,vyia' avaaivia (for avvatioi), avaatrla. Note. The Epic «» for iti (§ 48. 2) here imitates b • as, xtrriis, Smr^^iTus- DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. § 69. A. The dialects often iwierc/jareg-e <;onsonants ; most frequently, I. Cognate Mutes (§ 49) ; as, Ion. xSn;, iixofcxi, for tctS-is, Tiy^ofuu • &q[. a.fJb'Tt for xf^ipi. CH. 3.] DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 115 Notes, k. The soft Ionic ■was less inclined than the Attic to the rough mutes ; hence, in the Ionic, the smooth mute remains before the rough breath- iog (§ § 65j 68. 2) ; aa, ar' au, Ssx^J^sfof, ouk vti. In some compoundSj this passed into the Attic ; as, xTttXiuTn;, from iiro and b'/wj. fi. Aspiration is sometimes transposed; as, Ion. xiAav, it^xura, h^ivnv, KjtX^nOaiVy for ^irm^ si'Tay^-a!, IvTSy^gv, Xa>.xjjS5 • Ion. trXiii- ^Ajy for !T»sy^(yy. § • t'. rV. «■ with other letters ; e. g. 1 . The Ionic and Old Attic inr and jir pass, for the most part, in the later Attic, mto TT and pj5 ; as, Tatrtria tktt&Ij yXuff^a yXurre^^ apa-ytv apayjv- See § 59. 8. 2. Dor. (- der. Number, and Case. Note. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake of con- forming to the substantives to which they belong. ' A. Gender. § 74. The Greek has three genders ; the Mas-; cuLiNE, the Feminine, and the Neuter. Notes «. Nomis which are both masculine and feminine, are said to be of the common gepder. CH. l.J GENDEK. 117 fi. To mark the genders of Greek nouns, we employ the different forms of the article ; in the singular, for the masculine, o ; for the feminine, « ; for the common, o, « ; and for the neuter, to : in the plural, for the masculine, al ; for the feminine, a! ; for the common, oi, xl ; and, for the neuter, rd : as, o 'rufiiasi stewardj a, fi Tpotpogj nurse, to cuxovt Jig. In lilie manner, the different cases and numbers, according to their gender, are marked by different forms of the article ; as the Gen. sing. masc. by ••ay, &c. y. In the case of most animals it is seldom important to distinguish the gender. Hence in Greelc, for the most part, the names of animals, instead of being common, have but a single gender, which is used indifferently for both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (^WtKoivos, promiscuous). Thus, Xixos, wolf, h ciXairn^, fox, whether the male or the female is spoken of. S. "Words which change their forms to denote change of gender a^e termed movable; and this change is termed motion; as, o fixa-iXtus, king, vj [iacriXuxj queen; o ifoipos, wise, vi ao^ri, t^ iroipov, u In words in which the feminine may either have a common form with the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the common form, where the Ionic and Common dialects prefer the distinct fonn ; as, o, h ^sos, god, goddess, and a 3-iii or ^iaivec, goddess. So, likewise, in adjectives. § 75. The masculine gender belongs properly to words denoting males ; the feminine, to words denoting females ; and the neuter to words denoting neither males nor females. In Greek, however, the names of most things without life are masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses- sion of masculine' or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in their formation to other nouns of these genders. Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers (from their power and violence), and also of the months, are masculine ; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands, and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants) are feminine ; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply- ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially diminutives, are neuter ; as, o avijioQ, wind, 6 Bog^ag, Boreas, 6 noxafiog, river, 6 jyi7log, the Nile, 6 fiijr, month, o 'Exajofi^ui.- liv, June — July, rj avxri, jig-tree, rj fiijlia, apple-tree, fi umog, pear-tree, fj a/iTislog, vine, rj pipXog, papyrus, ^ ;fti)g«, country, 71 AiyvTiTog, Egypt, fj vrjaog, island, ^ 2dfiog, Samoa, ^ nihg, city, ri Aaxiduljiav, JJacfidcemon ; to avY.ov,fig, to iiitJKov, apple, TO Tsxvov, child, to avSganoSov, slave, to .yvvaiov, dim. of yvvri, woman, to naiSiov, little hoy or girl. § 7 6. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the significationf may be, for the most part, inferred from the form of the theme or root, according to the following rules. I. In the FIRST DECLENSION (^ 7), all words in -ag and -jjs 118 DECLENSION. [bOOK 11 are mctSculine ; all in -a and -jj, feminine; as, o xafilag, 6 vav- Tjjf ■ ij olxia, jj T(^»). II. In the SECOND declension (U 9), most words in -os and -m; are masculine, but some are feminine or common ; words in -ov and -wi' are neuter ; as, o Ao/o?, o viws ' rj oSog, ^ I'ous, dawn; o, t) &e6g, god, o,"^ agxiog, bear ; to aixov, to avdyecor. Except when the diminutive form in -»» is given to feminine proper names ; as, yi AtOVTiOV, 9J Vxvxs^iov. III. In the THIRD DECLENSION (IfU 11-14), a. All words in -svg are masculine; allin -w and -avg, femi- nine ; and all in -a, -t, -v, and -og, neuter; as, o innivg, 6 a/jr- cpoQfvg, amphora ; ^ ij^w, ij yaiiff ' to aujia, to /islt, honey, lo aaii;, to T£«;fo;. b. All abstracts in -ttj? and -ig, and most other words in -ig are feminine; as, ^ yXvxvrijg, sweetness; ^ dvvafiig, power, ij Tioitjaig, poesy ; rj ^Ig, rj nohg. 0. All labials and palatals, all liquids (except a few in which 9 is the characteristic), and all liquid-mutes are either masculine or feminine. d. Nouns in which the root ends in, 1.) -(i)T-, -SV-, or -VT-, are masculine ; as, o ys'iloij, -oiios, ZaugA ier ; o It/^rjV, -ivog ' o Xiiav, -oviog, 6 oSovg, 6 yiyag, 6 l/idg, -aviogf thong. Except TO ous, aiTos, ear, ri (pus, (pans, light (both contracts), n (P(Kt, ^(itls, mind, and a few names of cities (§ 75) ; as, « 'Yxfinvs, -omros, Rhamims. 2.) -5-, or -1&-, Site feminine ; as, »; ;ia;n;T«'e, -a'5o?, forcA, ^ Ipiff, -iSog, strife, ^ ;fAajuw?, -iJ^os, cZoafe ; i; xo'gvj, -v&og, helmet. Except J, ^ (Tarf, TTxt^as, child, wovs, ^oSos, foot, 0, 9i o^vts, -l^es, bird. 3.) -ai-, or -a-, are neuter ; as, to rjTtag, -aiog, to xsgas, -btos, TO yigag, -aog. B. Number. {j 77. The Greek has three numbers; the Sin- gular, denoting one ; the Plural, denoting more than one ; and the Dual (dualis, from duo, two), a variety of the plural, which may be employed when only two are spoken of. Thus, the singular Hv^^u'ras signifies man, the plural Ht^^ami, men (wheta er two or more), and the dual atS^^uru, two men. Ebmakk. The dual is most used in the Atlic Greek. In the .fflolio dialect CH. l.J CASE. 119 (as in the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek dialects j, and in the Hellenistic Greek, the dual does not occur, except in Sua, too, and KMfatt both (Lat. rfwo, airibo). C. Case. ^ 78. The Greek has five cases; 1. The Nominative, expressing the subject of a sentence. 2. " Genitive, " the point of departure, or cause. 3. " Dative, " the indirect object, or accom- paniment. 4. "'Accusative, " direct limit. 5. " Vocative, ' " address. Notes, a. From the general character of the relations which they dsnote, the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. jS. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right cases, and the other three, casus obliqui, the oblique cases. y. For a fuller statement of the use of the cases, see Syntax. D. Methods of Declension. ^79. Words are decHned, in Greek, by an- nexing to the root certain affixes, which mark the distinctions of gender, number, and case. There are three sets of these affixes ; and hence arise three distinct methods of dechning words, called the first, second, and third declensions. The first of these methods applies only to words of the mas- culine and feminine genders ; the second and third apply to words of all the genders. In some of the cases, however, the affixes vary, in the same declension, according to the gender ; so that, to know how a word is declined, it is necessary to ascertain three things ; 1. its root, 2. the declension to which it belongs, and 3. its gender. The mode in which the gender is marked has been already stated (§ 74, /3). Prom the theme (i. e. the Nom. sing.) and the gender, we can often determine at once the root and the declension. If it is necessary to mark these expli- bitly, it is commonly done by giving, with the theme, the Genitive singular, or its ending. If the Genitive singular ends in -as or -tis, or in -ev from a theme in -as or -ns, the word is of the Jirst declension ; if it ends in -ov from a tlieme in -as or -ov, the word is of the second declension ; if it ends in -as, the word is ^of the third declension. The root is obtuined by throwing off the affix of the Genitive; or it may be obtained by throwing off any affix beginning with a vowel. Thus the nouns, o rafi'ms, steward, vi otKia, house, n y\uffira, tongue, a ^rifias, 120 DECLENSION. GENERAL RULES. [bOOK II people, and i"k^a.-^, Arab, make in the Genitive, rxftliu, s'lxlx;, ykarirtit, SjJ- fioii, and "A^alics. From these genitives, we ascertam that ra/ilas, o'ikIk, and yXw5-a belong to the first declension, SS^o; to the second, and "Aja\^ to the third. By throwmg off the affixes -cu, -ai, -as, and -o;, we obtain the roots Tx/ii., o'lKi-, y-kaian-, hfi; and 'Aja/J-. The words are then declmed by an- nexing to these roots the affixes in the table (f 5). § 80. In the declension of words, the follow- ing GENERAL RULES are observed. I. The masculine and feminine affixes are the same, except in the Nominative and Genitive sin- gular of the Jirst declension. The neuter affixes are the same witli the masculine and feminine, except in the direct cases, singular and plural. II. In neuters, the three direct cases have the same affix, and in the plural this affix is always d. III. The dual has but two forms ; one for the direct, and the other for the indirect cases. IV. In the feminine singular of the first declen sion, and in the plural of all words, the Vocative is the same with the Nominative. y^ ^ 81. Eeiiaeks. 1. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still further limited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and per- sonal appellatives and epithets, are sufficiently employed in address to require a separate form for this purpose. Hence the participle, pronoun, article, and numeral have no distinct Voc. ; and in respect to other words which are de- chned, the following observations may be made. a. Masculines of Dec. I. are commonly names or epithets of persons, and therefore form the Voc. sing. (i. In Dec. II., the distinct fonn of the Voc. is commonly used, except for euphony or rhythm ; as, Tl flxo;, u (plXas, my friend ! my friend I Ai'. Nub. 1167. " Oi'Xo; ^MEMXas A. 189. 'Bixi'os ti T. 277. To avoid the double £, S£o,-, god (lilce deus in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct Voc. ; yet &d St. Matth. 27, 46. y. In Dec. III., few words, except proper names and personal appellatives and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those wliich have, the Nom. is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Attic -nTiters ; thus, ''D. •jra.ux TcU Ar. Ach. 971 ; buffi -riXis Soph. Pliil. 1213. AT«» Soph. Aj. 89 ; but '■fl ip'i\ ' A'U; lb. 529. In many words of this declension, the Voc. cannot be formed without such a mutilation of the root as scarcely to leave it inteUi- gible(§§ 63, 101). CH. 1.] HISTORY. 121 § 82. 2. An inspection of the table (^ 5) will likewise show, that, in regular declension, a.) The Nom. sing. masc. and (except in Dec. I.) fem. always ends in s. ^.) The Dat. sing, always ends in i, either written in the line or sabacribed. y.) The Ace. sing, (except in neuters of Dec. III.) always ends in v, or its corresponding vowel a (§ 50) ; and the Ace. plnx. masc. and fem. is always formed by adding s to the Aco. sing. (§ § 34,58). S.) The Gen. plur. always ends in m. £.) In Dec. I. and II., the affixes are all open (i. e. begin with a vowel), and all constitute a distinct syllable. In Deo. III., thi'ee of the affixes, M. 30^; £!rl S£?/o?i. N. 308 ; 9-ii}g, vavitj, AiQflSrig, ATQu8r)v, 'AtqcISi], yXolaarjg, yloiaarj, ti^tj, Tifirjg, ri/j'^v ' CH. 2.] FIRST DECLENSION. 127 but la/Aiag, rajiia, axid, axtag, &VQa, ■d'vgav (^ 7), ISici, idea X$^ttt, need, x^°^i color. l^OTE. Long a likewise remains in the pures, ro^, grass, aroti, porch, yva, field, s-ixucc, gourd, Kit^vd, walnut-tree, sAaa, olive-tree, 'NxvtriKKa, Nausicaa; in the words, ocXuXei, war-cry, Wi^^a, day after a feast, itK.a.^a,'K&, trap-spring, ysvva^ds, noble; and in some proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign ; as, 'AvS^o^sSa, A^J^a, ^i^of.tn>-ix, Atav't^as, "TXaj, 2yXX«f • and it became jj after ^ or go in the words K^tj, nech, ko^vi, maiden, Kojpri, cheek, aS-a^tj, pap, fori, stream ; in some proper names, as Tjijns • and in compounds of /a- T^saj, to measure, as yicafi-iT^ns (§ 92. 2). In some words, usage fluctuates between long or short x and n ; as, 'A^da-rx; Cyr. vi. 1.31, 'A^xrxtis lb. v. 1. 4, -^sTvei and •priUn, w^viji.va. and w^vfjLtvi. § 94. Contracts. A few nouns, in which the character- istic is a or t, and feminine adjectives in -ta and -ojj, are con- tracted ; as, jUi'KK jUVH, 'Eofiiag '/i^^trjg, ^ogsiig ^oqgag (g being here doubled after contraction), avyja avxij, Jig-tree, xgy^" Xgva^, SiTtlotj diTilri. For the rules, see §§ 33, 36, 37 ; for the paradigms, U^ 7, 18. DIALECTIC FORMS. § Uo. 1. In the affixes of this declension, Ihe Doric dialect retains throughout the original a ; while in the singular, the Ionic has tj in most of those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long x, and even in some in which they have short a:, particularly derivatives in -iix and -otS. (^ 44) ; thus, Dor. tj/zx, rifjixs, Ttftx, Ttfj-xy Ion. ax,ir\, irxtTJ;, fficiri, ^^^u«, tu^XoiS,, ftix. 2. In words in -*??, the primitive Direct Case in -& is sometimes retained by Homer and some of the other poets as Nom. (§ 86), for the salie of the metre or euphony : as, o xvrt Qviirr& B. 107; ivTroTci Neo-Ta/g B. 336 ; f^yi- rUrx Xivs A. 175 ; (ix^ufjC^Tx 'X.t'i^av Find. IT. 3. 92 ; lujcrx MsvaXxa? Tlieoc. 8. 30. So in feminines in -», the poets sometimes retain the old short x in the Voc. ; as, mii.)KAa»o. The Epic dual forms in nj'/t, which alone are used by Homer, arise from a mere poetic doubling of ' (§ 48). 2. Some proper names in -as have the Gen. sing, in Herodotus, after the analogy of Dec. I.; as, 'K^aTras, K^aitnu viii. 122, but Kja/Voi/ i. 6; JUttsoi iv. 160 ; KXso^/SjorEs) v. 32. The Gen. plui'. forms ^s/rriuv (Hdt. i. 94) and irujsiav (Id. ii. 36), if genuine, may be referred to the Ionic insertion of s (§48.1). 3. The old Dat. plur. in -cin is common in the poets of all classes, and in Ionic prose. So, even in Plato, S-saTri Leg. 955 e. 4. For the Epic Gen. in -a9-sv, see § 91. For the Epic Datives in -o^j and o9-;, and the old Dat. in -«, see §§ 89, 90. For the Doric and iEolic forms of the Ace. plur., see § 45. 5. 5. Contracts in -ovs from -oos occur in Homer, though rarely ; as, vovs X. 240 (elsewhere was). In words in -so;, -nv, he sometimes protracts the ■ to It (§ 47. N.), and sometimes employs synizesis (§ 30). III. The Third Declension. tFor the afliiea and paradigms, see §§ 85, 87; WS, 6, 11- 16.] § 1 00. In this declension, the Nominative, though regard- ed as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the root in its simple, distinct form. This form must therefore be obtained from the Genitive, or from some case which has an open af- fix (^§ 79, 82. s). Remaeks. 1. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes which occur in those cases winch have eithei- chse affixes, or no affixes ; that is in the Nominative and Vocative singular, the Dative plural, and the Ac- 130 THIRD DECLENSION. [bOOK II. cusatiye singiilar in -v. For these changes, see in general §§ 51, 55, 57- 59, 63. 2. The flexible ending of the Ace. sing, in this, as in the other two de- clensions, seems to have been originally ». But the » was so extensively changed into a in accordance with § 63. E., that the a became the prevailing affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will therefore be understood that the affix is a, if no statement is made to the contrary. "When the affix is V, the root receives the same changes as in the theme (§ 110). Words of the third declension are divided according to the characteristic, into Mutes, Liquids, Liquid-Mutes, and Puees. A. Mutes. [IT 11.] §101. Labials and Palatals. These are all either masculine or feminine, and in none is the Voc. formed except yvvrj (N. y). Notes, a. For the ■^ and ? in the theme and Dat. pi., see § 51. /3. In 3-j;|, the root is ^^tx- In those cases in which ^ remains, S- be- comes r, according to § 62. In « aXiww«|, -exoj, fox, the last vowel of the root is lengthened in the theme. Compare § 112. a,. y. Tt/m, woman, wife, which is irregular in having its theme after the form of Dec. I., and also in its accentuation, is thus declined : S. K. yvv^, G. yv- VKmas, D. yvvatKif A. yvjia7xx, V. yvvxi • P. N. yvvxTxl^j G. yuvxtxay, D. yv- vtn^/, Ai yi^vxTxas • D. N. ynvaTxs, G. yvveciKoTv. The old granmiarians have also cited from Comic writers the forms, A. yum, P. N. yi/yxi, A. yumi, ac- cording to Dec. I. § I®3. Masculine and Feminine Linguals. These lose their characteristic in the theme and Dat. pi. (§ 55), in the Ace. sing., when formed in v (§§ 63. E., 100. 2), and in the Voc. (§ 63). Notes, a. If a palatal is thus brought before o-, it unites with it in ^ (§ 51), as (etvxxrs, avctxi) eiyx^ (^ 11), « (vvkts^ vu^, night ; if to the end of a word, it is dropped (§ 63), as (Ji\a.xT, ayxx) xva.. This distinct Voc, however, is used only in addressing a god ; otherwise, S ayaS, (or, by frequent crasis, uya,^, jS. For the change of o when brought before the affixes s and y, or to the end of a word, see §§ 112. «,. 113. 3. y. Barj'tones in -;; and -vs fonn the Aco. sing, in both a, and v, the latter being the more common affix ; as, x^-i'S (1 11)> « %'S> strife,, i, fi c^yi;, bird; Ace. ;^;a^/ra: and x'^S'^ (j^ the name of a goddess, the form in -a is always used, and sometimes, also, in poetry ; but, otherwise, the form in -i>, yet see H. Gr. iii. 5. 16), 'i^it and poet. £{;?», apiy and poet. o^yi9-x. So also, xXils (T 11)> " ysXsj;, laughter, and the compounds of trai;, foot; thus. Ace. xXiTia. and xUTv, yiXara. and yiXay, Oj'S/VoSss and O'ih'mvy (^ 16), SiVaSo! and S/. vDvv (^ 17). Add i'i^us, love. Ace. 'i^Dira and rare poetic form hm. So iT«rs, when resolved by the poets into traiV, may have Ace. vei'iy, Ap. Rh. CH. 2.] MUTES. LIQUIDS. 131 4. 697. In oxytones, the accent served to prevent the lingual from faUing away. § 103. Neutee Linguals. In these, the characteristic is always t, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after fid, but otherwise becomes g or g (§ 63) ; as, ad/ia, qoclj?, xsgug, iinctg (IT 11), liSog (TT 22), from the roots awfiaT-, qxor-, mguT-, ijTiui-, sidoT-, KoTE. The T is also dropped in fiiXi, /.tiXtros, Itmtey ; in yaXa, yx^^ccxrog^ milk, which also drops » ; and in yovuy yoyaros, knee, and Sa^u, Sagaros, spear, which then change x to [/(compare § 113). In the poetic ii)ja{, tj/ixroi, day, r is changed' into ^ after fiia ; and in i/'Swj, li'SxTos, water j and itku^j trua.. TO,-, filA, r is changed into j, and a. into a. See § 123. y. § 1 ®4. Contract Linguals. A few linguals drop the characteristic before some or all of the open affixes, and are then contracted ; thus, KkuSig (nAEtsj) King, xXuSag [xluag) x'k€ig' xiguTog xsgaog KEgcog, xigvcja xe'gaa xsga (IT 11) ; to jsgag, prodigy, P. N. xigara Tigu, G. xigiiiwv jsguiv ' o ;fg(«s, skin, 5. D. xgaijl Ofpwt) ;igbt (in the phrase ev XQv)- ^°i ^^ Homer, from o Idgcog, sweat, o ysXmg, laughter, o egoig, love, S. D. Idgw, yilta, 'ig(o, for ISgaJxi, &c. ; A. ldg&, yiXa, for iSgmia {ISgaa), yikooTa. Compare §§ 107, 119, 123. a. Note. In the following words, the contraction is confined to the root : ro oZs, uTos, ear (^ 1 1), contracted from the old oZus, ouarcs (§ 33. y). TO oiXexp, bait, Gen. osXsxtos, diXyjro;, TO ffTEx^, contr. ffTn^t tallow, Gen. cTtaTos, ffrnros. TO ip^sccQ, well, Gen. {f^eaToe (a or a), (p^nTos (§ 37. 1 ). Remark. Those linguals in which a liquid precedes the lingual will be treated as a distinct class (§ 109). B. Liquids. [IT 12,] -§ 10£». Masculine and Feminine L/quids. In these, except iilg, salt, sea (in the singular, only Ionic and poetic), the characteristic is always either v or g. For the changes in the theme and Dat. pi., see §§ 57-59. When the characteristic is J', it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the v or the g is changed in the theme ; as follows. 1.) If an £ or vowel precede, the g is changed ; as in hltrjv, -svog, daifiutv, -ovog (IT 12) ; o [iriv, ftijvog, month, 6 xsi/icov, -avog, storm, viinter. Except xTus, xTi/os, cornb, the numeral its, his, o>f« (T 21), and the lonio /liis (as from root ,«£»-, yet Gfni^^tnios) for //.ni, month (Hdt. ii. 82). 2.) If a precede, in nouns the g is changed, but in adjectives 132 THIRD DECLENSION. LIQUIDS. [bOOK II. the V ; thus, b ndv, Ilavoc, Pan, 6 naiav, -avog, pcBan ; but fislag, -avos (IT 19), TaXug, -avoc, wretched. 3.) If t or V precede, the v is changed; as in gig, qivog (TT 12), dsXcplg, -jyo?, dolphin, 6 ^oQwg, -vvog, Phorcys. Notes, a. The v remains in fjtoiruv, ~vv6s, wooden tower ; and most words in -IS and -us have a second, but less classic form, in -ii and -vs ; as, pis anil pU, ^iXcpU and ^eX^/v, ^o^kus and Oc^»uy. /3. In the pronoun tIs, (t 24), the v of the root t/v- is simply dropped in the theme. Yet see § 152. /3. Eejiakk. Vocative. In the Voc. of 'AjroXX^v, -mos, Apollo, n»«iSa», -Ztos, Neptune, and i curri^, -«jo;, saviour, the natural tone of addi'ess has led to the throwing back of the accent, and the shortening of the last sylla- ble ; thus, "AtoXXov, TVoau^ov, crairi^. § 106. Syncopated Liquids. I, In a few liquids of fa miliar use, a short vowel preceding the characteristic is syn- copated in some or most of the cases ; as follows. 1.) In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open terminations : avTi^, man (^ 12). For the insertion of the S, see § 64. 2. Kum, dog (^ 12), which has, for its root, ;cki>»-, by syncope, xnv-. In this word, the syncope extends to the Dat. plur. x^/as, lamb's (^ 12), which has, for its root, i^tv-, by syncope, ajj-. The Nom. sing, is not used, and its place is supplied by aifivos. 2.) These five are syncopated in the genitive and dative singular: ';ra.T'/i^, father, and fjcriTyi^, mother (^ 12). « B-vyaTijp, daughter, G. ^ayt^n^as ^uyarpos, D. S-wyxTEfii &yyaTg(. 91 yoLirrriP, stomach, G. yxtrTi^os yxcrr^os, D. yaffri^i yecffr^i. ri Anf^nrvi^, Ceres, G. Ajj^wjitejos ^^fctir^as, D. A^i^u^rE^j Ajf^jjrgi • a]so, A. AfJfA^TE^a A^fltlTQCC. Notes, cc. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and sometimes employ it in other cases than those which are specified. fi. For the Dat. pi., see § 59. TairTiij has not only ycLar^im (Dio Cass. 54. 22), but also in Hipp, ya.irr'n^i'i- § 1©T. II. In comparatives in -av, the v is more frequently syncopated before « and t, after which contraction takes place ; as, fiil^ovu (fitl^oa) (UEi'JcD, f/il^ovig (/jil^oEg) fiii^ovg, fiu^ovag (fidQoag) fid£ovg (^ 17). Compare §^ 104, 119, 123. oc. Note. A similar contraction is common in the Ace. of 'An-oXXft/v, Apollo, and Ilflo-E/Sajv, Neptune; thus, 'AtcXXuvx, ('AsroXXiya) 'AtoXXoi (iii. 1. 6); Tliirtit^itx, Uoiriiia. See, for both the uncontracted and the contracted forms, PI. Crat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, o xumm, -Zios, mixed drink ; Ace. xvxsMva, and, rather poetic, xuKtZ (». 316 ; xvkziu A. 624) ; ri y>.riX^h -uMs, pennyroyal ; Ace. yX.^x'^ia, y^tix" C^^- ^"^^ 874) ; and by a like syncope of j, o ix'"^, ichor ; Ace. ix^^cc and (only E. 416) i^oi. 5) 108. Neuter Liquids. A few nouns, in which g is CH. 2.] HQTJID-MUTES. PURES. 133 the characteristic, are neuter. They are, for the most part, confinfed to the singular, and require, in their declension, no euphonic changes of letters. Note. Iu saj, spring^ and the poetic ^esa^, hearty contraction talces place in tlie root; thus, N. sa^, poetic «p, G. ea^as, commonly ^gay, D. eaig/, com- monly «ji • N. »sa{, in Homer always x?{, D. x Jj;. C. Liqtjid-Mtjtes. [¥ 13.] § 100. All nouns of this class are either masculine o feminine. The characteristic of the class is vt, except in the feminines Safiaq, -aqzog, vnfe, ^Xfiivg, -iv&oc, worm., nt'iQivg, -iv- ^0?, carriage-basket, and TiQwg, -vvdog, Tiryns. The t or t9^ is affected as in simple Unguals (§ 102). When, by the drop- ping of T, V is brought before'; in the theme, it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the v or the ? is changed (§§ 57, 58), according to tlie following rule : If an O vowel precede, the S is changed ; otherwise, the v. Thns, Xsajji, -flvroff, ^£vo^a/v, -wuros (^ 13), o "^^oiH-ajv, -avrosj dragon; but yiyds, -avTos (^ 13), o ificasj -ecvros, thong, o ^ifzasis, -svros, the Simots, oukvvs, •uvTos, showing. Notes, a. Except oSo«, -o»to;, tooth (^ 13 ; yet Ion. SSiit Hdt. vi. 107), and participles from verbs in -eo/ar, as, ^avs, Vovros (^ 22), from ^i^a3(/,t, to give, (3. Some Latin names received into the~Greek have -ns in the theme, instead of -SIS ', as, l^X'/ifiTii, -svTflff, Clematis, OiaXfjs, -sutos, Valens. y. If the characteristic is -»9--, the v remains before ; (§ 58. /3). In SkiKkj (^ 13), the 5 is simply dropped in the theme. Bkmases. 1. A few proper names in -«;, -xyros, form the Voc. after the analogy of the theme ; that is, v becomes a, and is then contracted ; thus, "ArXaf, -avTfls, V. Q'KrXu.vr, "ArXai', ^'ArXaa:) "ArXa- TloXySa/^i^f, Y. TLoXvoifioi. 2. Nouns and adjectives in -uu -ivro;, preceded by o or ?;, are usually con tracted j as, o •yrXccKotts ^Xxxov;, cdke^ G. •vXajcozyros 'jeXcixoZvrcs ' Tjfi^sis •nfjcTi;, honored^ F. rtijt.riiff} ; as, ecttpris, -ias C^ 17), frA«'^«;, -soffj fullj T^£yS)jV, -ids, false. 4.) In monosyllables, o becomes ov ; otherwise, m ; vs, ^ovg, ^o6g. Ace. ^oiv (^ 14), 0, ^ Qovg, Qoog, sumach, o x^^S^ /i;""?, heap of earth ; but ulSmg, -6og (^ 14). Notes, a. This rule applies also to Unguals in which c precedes the char- acteristic ; thus, Tm, iroVas (1[ 11), and its compounds, Oiiimvs, -oS« (If 16), S/croys, -aSaff (^ 17)i ^^* E'Sfiis, -oraj (^ 22). /S. In feminines of more than one syllable, in which the characteristic is a, the afiSx ; is changed to s, and is then absorbed. Thus from the root tix'- '^ formed the theme («;t;o?, yix°^) ^X^ (IF 1'^)' ^^ ^ vit^ai, -oss, persuasion, h Anrat, -oos, Latona, &c. Except, as above, cc^us, and the Ionic « riuis, dawn. These feminines in -co and -us have no plural or dual, except by metaplasm (§ 122) ; imless, perhaps, uxovs (§ 123. at) is to be regarded as simply con- tracted from ilxix;. § 113. (B.) In cases which have no affix, s characteristic becomes t, v, or iv, or else assumes a euphonic s ; and o characteristic becomes oi or ov ; as follows. 1.) If the theme ends in -rig, s becomes ej ; but, otherwise CH. 2.] puREs. 135 is changed as in the theme ; thus, Nom. neut. aatfig (If 17), TjSv (^ 19) ; Voc. Tglt)gsg, 2(6xpaTsg, noXi, mjxv, Innev (^ 14), vSv (U 19). 2.) In the theme of neuter nouns, s assumes g, becoming itself o (§ 28) ; as, to jstxog, -toe (H 14), to t&vog, -cog, nation, TO oQog, -£os, mountain. Except TO ^rru, -los, tow7i(^ 14), the Epic to iriJi', -so;, flock, and a few foreign names of natural productions in -i, as to mtri^i, -sais, pepper. 3.) In the Vocative, o becomes oi, if the theme ends in -co or -tig ; but 01), if it ends in -oi;? ; as, iixoX, al8dl, ^ov (fl 14) ; and in like manner (cf. 112. a), OlSlnov (U 16). "§114. Eemarks. 1. After the analogy of e and o, « characteristic becomes av in yqavg and j'ai's (U 14), and as- sumes g in the theme of neuters ; as, to yigag, -aog (^ 14), to yrjgag, -aog, old age. 2. In the Accusative singular of pures, the formative v be- comes a (§ 100. 2) except when the theme ends in -ag, -ig, -vg, -avg, or -ovg ; thus, &wg, ijgaig, Inncvg, TgiijQrjg, aldmg, 9;;f(o (U 14), aaq>7jg (^ 17) ; Ace. -fl-wci, ijgcaa, Innsa, Tgii^gsa, alSoa, rixoa, aaq>da ; but o lag. Stone, xig, oig (contracted from o'ig)^ nohg, ix&vg, nrix^-g, ygavg, vavg, j3ovg (U 14), rjSvg (^ 19) ; Acc. kav, xlv, oiv, TtoXiv, ixSvv, nrixvv, ygavv, vavr, ^ovv, riSvv. Note. Proper names in -vis, -so,-, for the most part, admit both forms of the Acc.; as^ -'2ux^a.Tyis (T[ 14), A. 2wxgaT« (Plat.), "^ux^^rnv (Xen.); o "Aj)ij, Mars, A. "Aj « and "A^m. 3. When the characteristic is changed to a diphthong before a in the theme, the same change is made before ai in the Da- tive plural ; as, iTiTiEvat, ^ovai, ygaval, vaval (^ 14). ^ 115. II. Contraction. For the general laws, see §^ 31-37. The following remarks may be added. 1. Pures in -rjg, -og, -m, and -ag, -oog, are contracted in all the cases which have open terminations. See jQiriqrjg, Saxgdirig, ' Hqaxlirig, zilxog, rjXfi, alSwg (^ 14), acKfi^g (fl 17). Add a few neuters in -ag ; as, to yegag (^ 14), to xgiag, meat. Notes, a. Of nouns in -a and -as, -Sos, the imcontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the poets and dialects. /S. In proper names in -xXius, contracted -xXtjs (from xXios, renown), the Dat. and sometimes the Acc. sing, are doubly contracted. See ^H^ntKXitjs (^ 14). For the later Voc. "H^xxXss, compare § 105. E. The Nom. pi. 'B^axXiss, in the Ion. form (§ 121. 4), occurs, with ©jjo-lsj, PL Theset. 169 b 136 THIRD DECLENSION [boOK II. 2. In other pures, contraction is, for the most part, con fined to three cases ; the Nom. and Ace. plur., and the Dat. sing. The contractions which are usual or frequent in these words are exhibitea in the tables. Contraction sometimes occurs in cases in which It is not given in the tables, and is sometimes omitted in cases in which it is given. These deviations from common usage are chiefly fotmd in the poets. § 116. 3. In the Attic and Common dialects, the endings -Eo?, -£«, and -EH?, instead of the common contraction, receive in certain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel. This change takes place, a.) In the Gen. sing, of nouns in -ig, -vg, and -ivg, and sometimes of nouns in -t and -v ; as, nohg. Gen. noUog jid'Aem?, nrjxvg, -siag, Innevg, -smg, aaiv, -log and -itog (^ 14), ns7ifgi,-£mg (§ 113. 2). Also "AQ7ig,Mars, G.'ylgiog and sometimes '^pEra; (as if from a second theme "Agsvg, cited by grammarians from Alcssus). b.) In the Ace. sing, and plur. of nouns in -eds ; as, Innivg, Ace. sing. iTiTiEK Inniu, pi. inniag Imtittg. KoTES. X. This change appears to be simply an early and less perfect mode of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as a-oXfiwj, it is evident that the s (as in 'Xr^iiimi, M.in\tu;, § 35) has not the full force of a distinct syllable ; while it is equally evident from the use of the poets, that it has not wholly lost its syllabic power. It seems, therefore, to have united as a species of semivowel (of the same class with our y and w) with the follow- ing vowel, which consequently, as in other cases of contraction, became long. An especial reason for regarding this method of contraction as early, consists in the fact that it is confined to those classes of words which have dropped F or A from the root (§§ 117, 11*5). The poets sometimes complete the con- traction bj' synizesis ; as, ^xriXiius Eur. Ale. 240, 'E^i^S-iui Id. Hipp. 1095, 'A;t;;XX£K Id. Iph. A. 1341. Sometimes, also, the unchanged Gen. in -us, and rarely the Ace. in -£« and -eSs occur in the Attic poets ; as, Nwj so; Eur. Ion, 1082, irixia! Id. Hec. 866, foviii lb. 882. The poets likewise employ in the Ace. sing, the regular contraction into tj ; as, ^vyyott(p^ Ar. Ach. 1150, 'G^uan Eur. Eh. 708, and even k^ri Id. Ale. 25. The regularly contracted Ace. pi. in -si;, instead of -is,;, became in the later Greek the common form, and although regarded as less Attic, yet is not unfrequent in the manuscripts and editions of genuine Attic writers, partictdarly of Xenophon ; as, limrikus Mem. iii. 9. 10. ;3. If another vowel precedes, the e is commonly absorbed by the us, a,, and ss ; thus, Hu^xiiats .Tlei^ams, Tiei^aiiet Tlei^atoi (Tf 14); ;^;o»?, X''^t X"^^ (§ 123). y. For the earlier contraction of the Kom. pi. of norms in -tvs into ?j, see § 37. 2. The uncontracted QnAis occm-s Pi. Theset. 169 b. S. The form of the Gen. in -zas is termed by grammarians the Atiui Geni- tive. For its accentuation, see Prosody. The Gen. pi. in -im accented upon CH. 2.] PURES. 137 the antepenult ia also termea Attic ; as, itoXesiv.' The regularly contracted trnX''' occurs iv. 7. 16. s. The Gen. in -bus is also found in a few adjectiyes in -« (as, nxWiTcXis, •tus), in iifuirvs, half (Gen. commonly -sa;, but also -so; and -aus), and, in later writers, in other adjectiTes in -vs (thus, ^jii!;ijliu; Pint.). d compare ■/ixoi above (4.). In the Dat. pi. the short vowel remains unchanged ; as, irxfin. Note. In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter nouns, the diph- thong so appears to have been reduced to a simple short v ; as, ^SeF? hivst «^eF «SS (*|[ 19); mx^Ps "■^x^l' ""WF' V'iz'^'i "riX^^ vtix"! ajnF ti^Tu (t 14). § 1 1 §• la femininesj it waa natural ttat the inserted breatlimg or consonant should commonly assume a softer form. In this form, it appears to 12* 138 THIRD DECLENSION. [bOOK II have been most nearly akin to the Ungual middle mute S (of. § 49. 2) | and in a great number of feminines, it acquired a permanent place in the language as this letter. In its previous, and as yet unfixed state, we represent it, for distinction's sake, by a capital A. Before this inserted lingual, a could re- main, but there was a unifonn tendency in e to pass by precession into /. It is a remarkable illustration of this, that in the whole declension, there is not a single instance of e before a characteristic lingual mute. In the progress of the language, feminines in -e-, or with the inserted lingual -sA-, assumed tlu'ee forms ; 1.) The A fell away, leaving the vowel of precession i in the Nom., Ace, and Toe. sing., but the original s in the other cases ; thus, »aX;f, wiXiais, m- Xii, nXiv, mki • vi\U!, ^iksai, TToXiin, vriXtis (T[ 14). This became the usual form of feminine pures in -is, in the Attic and Common dialects. 2.) The A fell away, and precession took place throughout. This became the regular form of feminine pures in -is in the Ionic dialect (§ 44. 3) ; thus, Ion. N. -Js, G. -U;, D. -fi, always contracted into -f, A. -!», V. -i' ; PI. N. -lis, sometimes contr. into -r?, G. -Tuy, D. -iiri, A. -!«?, commonly contr. into -Js ; as, vroXis, •jToXios, ^oXtf 'jroXiv • '^'oXas, -lav, •^r'oXurt, croXmSf -Ts. The i was also the prevalent vowel in the Doric ; thus, Dor. ^oXi;, t'oXio;, v'oXT and waXe/, croX/v • iffoXiiSi rrsXiaiv, 'ji'aXttfffft and troAEiTi, sroXiaff. 3.) The A became fixed in the root, and the word passed into the class of linguals. Thus, the root MEya^s-, Megarian, had two forms, MEyajEF- masc, and with precession MEyajiA- fern. ; from the former we have 'Ksya^tis, -ims, Megarian man, and from the latter, 'Mzya^U^ -i^os, Megarian woman. This became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -;?, if we except the large class of abstract nouns in -ins. Especially many feminine adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined. Note. We find, also, the same forms in a few masculine or common noims and adjectives (§§ llj, 119. 2), and even, in a few words, a corre- sponding neuter formation in -/ (§ 113. 2). § E 1 H. As might have been expected, these three forms are far fi:om being kept entirely separate. Thus, 1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the latter especially in the Ionic and Doric dialects, which were less averse than the Attic to hiatus (§§ 45, 46) ; as, yi /Aiivi;, wrath, G. /j-rtviiss and /Amtos • fl r^o- ms, heel, G. T^om^os, r^o-rtos, and t^owews • particularly proper names, as, Kt/T^;?, G. -/Sa?, and -105 • ''lirts, G. -itos and -los • &etis, G. Qi-n^os 0. 370, D. ©Err 2. 407. For similar cases of the use and omission of a lingual characteristic, see § 104 ; of a liquid characteristic, §§ 107, 123. «. 2.) In some pures in -is, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (particularly in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms ; as, « rv^c-is, tower, G. rv^a-ios vii. 8. 12, but PI. N. rif^iis iv. 4. 2, Tv^riav H. Gr. iv. 7. 6, Ti^tnn Cyr. vii. 5. 1 ; Totris, spouse, G. -tas, D. -£i • vt //.a.ya.tts, -los, a kind of harp, D. [ioLyahx vii. 3. 32 ; o, h Ttypis, tiger, G. riy^ias, and in later writers Tiy^i&os, PI. N. Tiy^eis, G. Tiy^Ecav • some proper names, as, a ^viwitris, G. -los, i. 2. 12, ''Igis, G. -Its vi. 2. 1 ; and the adjectives 'tS^is, intelligent, vwtis, abstemious. In like manner, »', A 'iyx:iXvs (§ 117. N.), eel, G. iyx^ixuas, PI. N. iyx'iXtis, G. iy^iXiuv TO wii-t^i (§ 118. 'N.'), pepper, O. -£&/? and -//■?. "H. 2.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 139 DIALECTIC FORMS. § 120. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the affix. 1. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Aco. sing, sometimes ends in -x, in words in which it has commonly -» ; as, ih^ix Z. 291, »?« or Mix, triXtix, for EujiJv, vxuv, irixiv ixS-ux Theoc. 21. 45. On the other hand, the New Ionic often forms the Ace. of nouns in - ^^^ °^Si iSwj, /3j^£r, cro^jji*, crroXsJ", and ^ixii, Si^aii a.nd Si^ai H. 453. The endings -ii, -m, and -a; (except in xi"') are always contracted (§§ 118. 2, 115. «); as, xsw-n A. 640, kxui II. 526 (this contraction of -vi into -w is Epic), nc7 I. 618. (c) The endings -ix, ■lur, and -ixs are commonly uncontracted, except by synizesis ; as, ^tsuiix V. 27, v^pi^tfix S. 757, xXytx il. 7, fiixtx 0. 444, via i. 283 ; o-twS-eh/b K. 95; sro^Mj A. 559, mXiicsx! Y. 114. So ■pr'oXixs S-. 560. (d) The ending •lis is tised both with and without contraction ; as, ^^mrn^xyiT; vecrii/xin E. 194. (e) The neut. plur. ending -xx is always contracted, or drops one 140 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [bOOK IJ. «. (cf. 4. below) ; as, xl^x, Sstra, y't^x B. 237. The form witli the single short a sometimes occurs in the Attic poets; as, x^ia, Ar. Pax. 192. (/.) Of oTs, sheep, cut, ear, and •yicttls, old woman, the following forms occur in Homer ; N. oiV, G. otos, BIOS, A. o7v • P. N. oils, Gr. otuv, oleHv, D. i'tlffift, oUffi, oitrirt (cf. § 119. 2), A. o/ff. N. ous, G. eilxTo; • P. N. ovxrx, D. ovairi, uffi (§ 33. y). N. yg»ju?, y^vius, D. 7j»;i, V. yg»ju, ygjjw* the Gen. and Ace. are suppHed by y^ccitis and yg«7av of Dec. I. 3. In common nouns in -tus, the characteristic sF before a vowel regularly becomes «, in the Epic ; as, iVT^o?, Ir^iiT, (V-r^a, /TfTjji^ (once in Hom. iV- ^TE?; A. 151, also lixnX.i7s Hes. Op. 246), iVWwv (^ 16), i^iir-niiirin A. 227 (so, by imitation, (JuirixSat Eur. Phcen. 829). This change also extends to proper names in -16; (in which the Epic has great freedom in using the long or short vowel according to the metre), to "A^ns, Mars (§ 116. a), and to croX(s. See Homeric Paradigms, ^16. In common nouns in -ey,-, this change occurs also in Herodotus, although questioned by critics ; as, (ia:ri\>}o;, /SaiTiXsJa, vii. 137, ^ao*;X«J' iu. \ 37 , [ixtriX^afv vi. 58. The regular inflection of nouns in -ivs, in Ionic prose, and also in the Doric, is in -los, &c. The Ace. in -«a or -ia is sometimes contracted by the poets into -^ ; as, 'OSwir^ t. 136, TkSS a. 384, ;3« (§ 120. 1). « &i/£is, T/iemis, as a common noun, H^Af, law, G. Qift-t^os, Epic 0s^(irrflf /3. 68, Ionic ©£/«/« Hdt. ii. 50, Doric Qifuras Find. 0. 13. II, also PI. Kep. 380 a. In tlie Attic, ^ifcis occurs mostly in certain forms of expression, where it is used -witliout declension, as an adjective or neuter noun ; thus, ^E^i; Iffri, it is lawful; tpao) ... S-e^/s siyati, they say that it is lawful, PI, Gorg. 505 d ; ri ft,7i B-if^ts, that which is not lawful, Jilsch. Sup. 335. ^t^eiv&iy, attendant, G. B-i^aTroyros, &c. ; poet. A. 3-egacra, PI. N. S-i^a^ss Eur. Ion, 94. KiiXais, cable (r. KaXa-, Att. Dec. II.), G. xaXai, &c. ; Ion. xoiXos, 'Ov, &c., I. 260 and Hdt. ; in the later Epic, PI. xxXms, &c., Ap. Eh. 2. 725. XayfiJj, hare (r. Xayit-, Att. Dec. II.), G. \ayui, A. Xxyuy, Xayai, &C. ', Ion. Xxyis, -av, &0., Hdt., also PI. N. Xxyct Soph. Fr. 113, A. Dor. (§ 45. 5) Xxyos Hes. Sc. 302 ; Epic }.,otyaios, -ou, Horn. ^ a, « (/,oi^rv$ (in late writers fiaQrii^), vntness, G. fca^rij^os, D. ftx^rv^i, A. licSgToga, rarer fia^ruy • D. pi. fia^rvfft • Epic o /iccprvpos, -ou, ij". 423. 0, n fljan/ff, Mrd, G. o^vt^as (Dor. o^yi^os, § 69. II.), D. o^yT^i, A. Ojjvr^a and o^y'iy • PI. JgtrS-ss, &c. ; from r. ojvs-, Sing. N. S^yYs, A. Jjvl'ip, Pi. N. ofys/f, G. figcEwv, A. o^yus and o^erf (§ 119). Another form is to S^yioy, -ov. o^ip&is and o^(pos, a sea-fish, G. o^(pej and o^(pou. Compare xa.\us, Xayus' « irvy^, pnyx, G. ^uzyos, D. ^ryxv/, A. fruxva • later G. srvyxoy, D. vyvxl, A. tryixa,. The proper root is fri/xv- (compare the adj. sri/xtos) ; but from the difficulty of appending s in the theme, transposition took place (§ 64. 3), which afterwards extended, through the influence of analogy, to the oblique cases. i ris, moth, G. in'os, and in later writers iruros. M o^ctiht^, weal, B, 267, G. ffftuBtyyos, &c. ; K. pi. e^uhtyyis Y- 716. (pS-'o'is, contr. (f^o!;, cake, G. (pBoios • N. pi. f^ois and X^"^i ^ x°'^^ X°^* I*^* ■^' ;c*^'2* ;c''^s (§ 1 1 6. /3) ; also Dat. Ion. x'ii Hipp. TO ;t:{£o« (Ep. xe^"S' § 47), deit, G. xi""! • PI. N. ;^f£« (§ 37. l) ; from r. xi^^-> N. (xe^'s, Xi^O XV-"!, G. (jci^i's, Xi^'"!' Xi'^0 Xi^^s (§§ 33, 35). fl XZ'^5, skin, surface, G. ;j;ga)rof, D. ;t;gwr/ (;^§■!/{, ^rc, G. Tujos, D. sriij/ Dec. II. Pl. N. 9eiiix, walsh-Jires, D 144 IRREGULAR NOTJNS. [BOOK 11. e-Tixos, row, G. trri^^ovj &c. ; Dec. III. poet. fem. G. trrixos H. 173, PI. N. ffrixis Find. P. 4. 373, A. ffr',x'>^s Ar. Eq. 163. Note. Add the poet. Dat. pi. uv^^ct^o^Etro-i H. 475, = avS^airaSo/s from av^^KToSov, slave; Nom. 'i^os H. 315, Ace. t^ov I. 92, = o Jgwf P. 442, lovcj A. Egwra Horn. Merc. 449 ; Geu. pi. fujX^rm Lye. 106, = ^jJAwv from (AnXov^ sheep ; Ace. olxa. (only in o7»ah, homeward^ often in Hom. and even used in Attic prose, vii. 7. 57), = oTafii" from flTxaf, house; PI. N. •r^otravaTcc tr. 192, D. ^^offaivaa-t H. 21 2, = irgoff-iUTfl!, ^^offai,xo5, copper, to tXuiov, oil, vi ra^vrTis, swiftness. Proper and abstract nounk are seldom fotmd in the plural, except when employed as common nonns. /3. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words, want the singular ; as, rx Aiovva-ix, the feast of Bacchus, at *ABijyai, Athens, 01 sTfiirixt, the trade-winds. § 1 3 y. 4. Some nouns are employed only in particular cases, and these, it may be, occurring ordy in certain forms of expression. Of this kind are, isfixs, hody, form, Nom. and Ace. neut. icrixXnv, surname. Ace. fern. (= WixXti^iv), commonly used adverbially, XjVa, with oil, Dat. neut., perhaps shortened from Xitrx7. Some regard it as Ace. /iaXus, arm-pit, Gen. fem., only in the phrase ire /iiXtis, under the arm, secretly ; also, in late writers, i?ri /tixiiv. Otherwise the longer form, » fix- rp(;iiXti, is employed. iK£A.5, Voo, masc. and fem., lised only in familiar address ; 2 /iiks, my good friend. 13 146 DECLENSION. [bOOK II oWj, slee^, dream, and S«xf, waking, reality, N. and A. neut. See Svu^n (§ 124.^). mt, eyes, Du. N. and A. neut. ; PI. G. oirtm, D. JVco/j. SfiXot, advantage, and «S« (Ep.), pleasure, N. neut. Ta» or t2», only Attic and in the phrase $ tov, good sir, sirrah. Notes. «. Add the poet. Nom. and Ace. neut. iZ (root Sa/^-, § 63) A 426, = iS/ia, house, xg? (r. x^iS--) 0. 564, = « x^r3-«, barley, a^ipi (r. aX^/r-) Horn. Cer. 208, = aXfirm, barley-meal, y\ciipu, hollow, Hes. Op. 531, sf/ Phi- let, ap. Strab. 364, =: J'jiov, tuooZ (compare, with these neuters, /3f7 and fi, § 136. /3) ; Dat. fern. Jai (r), battle, N. 286 (akin to this, Ace. SaiV Call. Fr. 243) ; Dat. Xiri 2. 352, Ace. sing. masc. or pi. neut. Xlrx a. 130, = Dat. and Ace. of to xlvav, linen ; Ace. fem. /ifx, snow, Hes. Op. 533 (from which Si vi(pxs, -aSo;, snow-flake) ; Voc. iixi 0. 1 28, = ixsi (3. 243, from iXiis, crazed. /3. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote {f^avos, single, •vruiris, case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in tkree, a triptote ; in ^wr, a tetraptote. CHAPTER III. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [irt 17-20, 22.] § 138. Adjectives are declined like substan tives, except so far as they vary their form to de- note variation of gender (^ 74. S). In this respect, they are divided into three classes, adjectives of one, of two, and of three terminations. Note. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculiim is re- garded as the primary gender, and the root, theme, and declension of the masculine, as the general root, theme, and declension of the word. The mode of dechning an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings ; and, if necessary, the form of the Gen. sing. Thus, citiKos, -ov ■ iraip^s, -es • tplXtos, -a., -ov • o, h Vi^ou;, -oSos, -Zms, unknown, o, « a^ats, -a/Sflf, childless, o, n ^Xt^, -txos, of the same age, o, n vjfu^vvis, ^^ras, half' dead, o, h (pvyas, a^os, fugitive. Note. The indirect cases of adjectives of one termination and of Dec. III., are sometimes employed by the poets as neuter ; as, yviCfim rs ftsydXm Iv vtivvirt iraj/jictTi Em:. El. 372, fiavta,iriv >.vsavi[La.triv Id. Or. 270, ^^6f£»trt ^ivsua/v [iXs- fx^oi; lb. 837. § 130. n. Adjectives of Two Terminations have the same form for the feminine as for the masculine, hut have a distinct form for the neuter in the direct cases singular and plural. Eemaeks. a. Adjectives which form the neuter must be either of Dec. II. or III. (§ 79), and, if of Dec. III., cannot have either a labial or a pala- tal characteristio (§ 101). To adjectives which cannot form the neuter, this gender is sometimes supplied from a kindred or derived root ; as, o, « ^j^ra?, -ctyos, rapacious, to a^-jraKTiKov. /S. The neater must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, one for the direct cases singular, and the other for the direct cases plural (§ 80). Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neuter plural is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the neuter singular; as, rfiwsa srar^o? aoraraga Eur. Here. 114, ^i&jrsa ... £5r«Xi/Sfl6 Hdt. viil. 73. y. In "SItuvs (1[ 1 7), and in similar compounds of ■ruis, foot, the Neuter sing., on account of the difficulty of forming it from tbe root, is formed from the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. II. (^ 18) ; thus, i, « ti- TTous, ro yfjrauv * o, n r^i(pyi, trofiis * ;^^y(rea, ^I'ffXon (^ 18); fiax^os, -a, ~ev, long, a3-fioos, -a, -flv, dense ; xaXof, -«, -ov, beautiful, f^itros, -«, -ov, middle, ysy^etfi- fihas, -7], -av, written. 148 ADJECTIVES, [book II ^133. Rule ii. If the theme belongs to the third declension, the feminine affixes of the first are annexed to the root increased by a (i. e. to the theme before- euphonic changes). Thus, from tlie roots ?ravT-, ;^;«f/si'r- (^ 19), ^oyXewavr-, agavr-, ^awevr (^ 22), are formed the femmines (yravrirctj •jea.vira) Tao-cif (^x^Uvrtrett ^tt- nTrS. (§§ 5S, 57, 58). The following special rules are observed in the formation of the feminine, when the theme belongs to Dec. III. 1. After s or o, the a which is added to the root becomes s (§ 50), which is then contracted, with e into si, and with o into vi. Thus, from the voots I'jds- (^ 19), and ildoz- (^ 22), are formed the feminines (^deaa, rjdsia) ridilS, {dSoiaa, udoaa, slSosa) sl5vtS. Notes. ^. The diphthong oa never stands before the affixes of Deo. I. The concurrence of open vowels which would be thus produced seems to have displeased the Greek ear. Hence the contraction, in this case, of at into the closer diphthong w. /3. In the contracted perfect participles, which have a long vowel in the last syllable of the root, the r remains. Thus, from r. ifntir- (coutr. from Itrrxir-, from the verb 'ttrmftij to stand) is formed the feminine (iffraJrc-a') itrruffo. (T 22). y. The fern, tenmnation ~z7x is commonly shortened in Ionic prose, and sometimes in Epic and other poetry, to iSi (sometimes Ion. in, especially in Hipp.); as, jix^tx, ti^ix Hdt. i. 178, jixS-itii lb. 75, (ixS-Us E. 147 (but iixS-iiris B. 92), lixix B. 786, aSix Theoo. 3. 20, rxxiZn Theog. 71 5. So, even in Attic prose, Buttmann edits from the best Mss. ifnirixs PI. Meno, 83 c. On the other hand, the poets, in a few instances, prolong -ix of the Neut. pi. to -sTx for the sake of the metre (§ 47. N.) ; as, o^sTx Hes. So. 348,- iiiTx Soph. Tr. 122 (so irxiiuM for imuii, Ap. Eh. 2. 404, ixx^ukir Id. 4. 1291). 2. After a liquid, the a which is added becomes t, which is then transposed, and contracted with the preceding vowel into a diphthong. Thus, from the roots fisXav- (^ 19), tiqiv- (r. of Tsgriv, tender), nisg-, are formed the feminines {fiAaraa, fis- Xaeva) fiiXaiva, {refsvaa, legstra) tsguva, niuga (§ 134. 5). Compare §§ 56, 57. 3. If the root, after the addition of a, and the consequent changes, ends m i. or p, the feminine is declined like oxia • but if it ends in a or /■, like ylmaaa (^ 7, §§ 92, 93) ; as, ^5ua, r]dslag • naaS, ndarjg ' fiHaiva, ftsXalyrig (![ 19) ; niuqa, TtislQug. Observe that the a in the direct cases is always short. See §92. OH. 3.] OF THKEB TERMINATIONS. 149 § 133. Of those words which belong to the general class of ADJECTIVES (§ 73), the following have three terminations: — 1. All participles ; as, jSovXivtov, agtxg, ildag (^ 22). Note. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a dis- tinction must he made between the 7-00^, a^r, connectirig vowel, and flexible ending of conjugation, and those of declension ; thus, in the genitive fiauXsuovros, the root of conjugation is fiovXst;-, and the affix -ovns • while the root of de- clension is ISouXtuotr-, and the affix -115. 2. All comparatives and superlatives in -og ; as, aqcptoTsgoi , -«, -oj', wiser ; aoyiuTaios, -rj, -ov, vnsest. 3. All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive ; as, diaxoaioi, -at, -«, two hundred, zghog, -jj, -ov, third. 4. The article and adjective pronouns, except lig (jlg). See 1124. 5. Simple adjectives in -og, -ug, and -vg, with a few other adjectives ; as, cpihog, aoq)6g, xQvaiog (^ 18) ; xoigistg, ^dvg ' tiks, fiiXag (U 19); ixc6v,-ovaa,-6v, G. -6t'xog,V}illing ; xdlag, -aiva, -av, G. -ttvog, wretched ; tigriv, -siva, -sv, G. -tvog, tender. Notes, cc. For the number of terminations in adjectives in -05, only gen eral rales can be given. For the most part, simples have three terminations, and compounds, but two. Tet some compounds have three, and many sim- ples, particularly derivatives in -uas, -ids, and -/^os, have but two. Deriva- tives from compound verbs, aa being themselves uncompounded, especially those in -xos, -ns, and -no;, have more commonly three terminations. In many words, usage is variable. See y. /3. Adjectives in -»s, of the Attic Dec. II., have but two terminations ; as, ay^^ois (^ 17), fl, 91 tuytus, ro sUysay, fertile. For •rXius, see § 135. y. In (a.) words in which the Fern, has commonly a distinct form, the form of the Masc. is sometimes employed in its stead. And (b.), on the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the Fem. in words in which it is ciimmonly the same with the Masc. Thus, we find as feminine, (a.) Adjectives in -as (particularly in Attic writers, § 74. s), SSxo; Eur. Med. 1 197, of Dec. I.), have often a special fem. in -/;, -ihos ; as, h, n Xxrims, TO l^Tsres, seven years old, and « Icttet/j, -i^os • rov t^irn kcu rnv Ipr/v PI. Leg. 794 c. ; ras r^taKovrourus ff'^rovtois Th. i. 23, but r^ta.Kovr6vr'ituv irvtivSm lb. 87. y. Some compounds in -ds, -« have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in */a J as, fipiysv^s, -£s, h hpiyivita, A. 477f So fiovvoyiviia, hovi^u&, ^iirvn- rruS. Soph. CEd. T. 463. ^. Add 0, h <^iuv, and « ^Uiqx, ra mov, fat ; o ir^6ff/3i/s, old, venerable, Eem., chiefly poet., vr^itr^x, T^itr^yj, ^^itrfiu^a, -ff^ifffi'/ji's, vr^iafiis ' o, ti fiaxet^, and n [laxat^S,, blessed, poetic ; o, vi -^^otp^uv, and Ep. « ^^oi, -si. So, likewise, in Att. writers, the plural compounds i/i'irXtcii, ixrXix Cyr. vi. 2. 7, wsfiVXios lb. 33. In like manner "Xia PI. Phsedo, 95 a, N. pi. from "Xius, -u», contr. from 'Ixxos, -»». -Tt^xas (by some written w^ao?), h vr^xsTa, to b*^Sov (sr^aov), mild. In this adj., forms fi'om r. w^a-, of Deo. II., and from r. v^xs-, of Dec. III., are blended (see ^ 20). Ion. i irSs, TO irSv, safe. In this adj., contract forms from r. rx- are blended CH. 3.] IRREGULAR. 151 with forms irom r. ffat- (contr. from A-aa-), belonging partly to Dec. II. and partly to Dec. III. Thus, S. N. (ff«flj) (Tft/s aZoi iii. 1. 32 (caav) cm A. \(ra.(f9) auv P. N. ffaotj (truss) ffeHs (ff-aa) tfS, ffcjx There is also an Epic form eroos* "With the above may be compared the Homeric ^eoi E. 87, Ace. X<^v 11. 445, contr. from ^xosj ^aev, ^ the common ^a/osj ^waV) living. § 1 3 ^« Remabks. 1. Some compounds of yixatsj laughter, and xi^as, horuy may receive either the Attic second, or the third declension ; as, ./o? aiTTtivv N. 773, OT-oA/v aiVwi- N. 625, aiVa phB-^et 0. 369, HijSairoi' aiTmfftray . 87 ; ajy^Ti r. 419, ct^ynTx 0. 133, a.^yiri A. 818, a^yirec O. 127; a^yuipsov 2. 50, a^yw^flv n. 621 ; ToXiv ... ihTiix^ov A. 129, fraX/v ivvu^ia, II. 57 ; T^oivjv l^ifi^XcoKOi V. 74, T^a/jjv l^'tfhcoXov I. 329 ; croXyT>,a? £. 171, tra^-yrX^j/^wv c 319, iToAuTXsjroi X. 38 ; &c. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of synonymous adjectives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied. 4. Among defective adjectives, we notice, a.) The following, chiefly poetic : o, h ct^xx^us, to ci^ax^v, tearless, Ace. aSas- x^vv (the other cases suppUed by a^ax^STo;, -ov) ; ^oXvBocx^us, tearful (supplied in like manner by ToXuBax^vroi) \ o rr^ia-p>v5 (for fem. see § 134. S), old, as subst. elder, ajnbassador (in- the last sense G. ^^iffP>t&)5 Ar. Ach. 93), A. -^^iir- fivv, V. -TT^kffflu • PI, TT^ia-fius, -^^taf^ms Hes. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G. ^^eff^sav, D. T^ifffiifft, ^^sfffisva'iv Lyc. 1056, A. -^^ifffhtis, Du. ^^ifffin Ar. Er. 495 (the plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by o ■^^iff^trm, old mxin, and a 'jr^tff^iurm^ ambassador) ; (p^ovtos, -jj, -ov, gone, which, with the Nom. throughout, has only the Gen. (p^ovBoo Soph. Aj. 264. |3.) Poetic feminines and neuters, which have no corresponding masc. ; as, H voTvix. (and sometimes -rorvx), revered-^ r«v ^orvtay, ai worviotf 'h S-dXtm, Tx ^oiXtee., blooming, rich (Horn.), h xU and Xura"^ (always with crerg*)), ft. 64, 79, y. 293, e. 412, =Xeia, fem. of XiTos, smooth; ro /3g7 (r. (i^td--) Hes. ap. Strab. 364, = neut. of (i^iB-us, heavy ; -to fa. (r. ^'«S-) Soph. Fr. 932, = neut. of pdhos, easy (compare with /S^r and pa, the neuters SaJ, x^T^ &c., § 127. a) ; T« ^^oi and Ivln^a, pleasing (Hom.). 152 NUMERALS. [bOOK II. y.) Poetic plurals wliich have no corresponding sing. ; as ct ^ufiUs K. 264, and Tx^fiis A. 387 (yet raifvs iEsch. Th. 535), thick, frequent, xl ^x/iux'i A. 52, and nt^tpuxi T. 357 (accented as if from B-x/^uos and raj^sio?), ri ra^tpia A. 69, l^utrd^fici'rts...'i7r^oi II. 370 ; o't TXiis A, 395, Toiis -rXiai B. 129 = wXeove;, txUixs, more, S.) Poetic oblique cases wliicli have no corresponding Nom. ; as, rev IvaSic fM^ns, unhappily wedded, Msch. Ag. 1319 ; xxXXiyitxixas, Itaving beautiful women, Sapph." (135), xxWiyimixi Find. P. 9. 131, 'EXXaSos Ki^X>.iyimiKx B. 683 ; vaXux^vi ©ygo-Tjj B. 106 ; voXv^araytn Bu/AsXav Pratin. ap. Ath. 617 c; yi^;»E^aTa (TETfav Ax. Nub. 597; pch^^^> xh^'f ;c^g*'*» also PI. ;t;s- fusj, ;c'^(tix (of which xk^'" '• 229, v. 310, is a doubtful variation), A. 80. A. 400, &c. = ;^;Ei'gayaf, &c., worse. CHAPTER IV. NUMEEALS. [11 21, 25.] 1^.1 ST. I. Numeral Adjectives. Of numeral adjectives, the principal are, (1.) the Cardinal, answering the question, noaoL ; liow many ? (2.) the Ordinal, answering the question, nooTog ; which in order ? or, one of how many ? (3.) the Tem- poral, answering the question, nooTmog ,- on what day ? or, in how many days 1 (4.) the Multiple (multiplex, having many folds), showing to what extent any thing is complicated; and the Proportional, showing the proportion which one thing bears to another. 1. Cardinal. For the declension of the first four cardinals, see IT 21. The cardinals from 5 to 100, inclusive, are inde-' clinable ; as, ol, at, t«, tUv, roXg, t«7?, rovg, rag, nivre, five- Those above 100 are declined like the plural of (fikiog (IT 18). KoTES. a. Er?, from its signification, is used only in the singular ; %va, only in the dual and plural ; and the other cardinals only in the plural (except with collective nouns, in such expressions as as-w/s i/,v^ia jca.) rtr^axotritx, 10,400 infantry,!. 7. 10, iViroii ixTaxiirxiX'mi, 8,000 liorse, Hdt. vii. 85). For the dialectic as ■well as common dedens. of the first four cardinals, see ^21. We add references to authors for some of the less frequent forms : ee/s Hes. Th. 145, « Theoc. 11. 33 (in some Mss.), Inscr. Heracl., Iw Z. 422, oliixfei- u; (by some written ai'Sx/i.a.s) Hdt. iv. 114, Soi) and Ufupu, both (which is placed in 1[ 21, as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic pro- noun), are sometimes indeclinable (in Hom. never otherwise) ; as, Sua fntSv vii. 6. 1, Syo /jtai^aatv K. 253, Syai xocsovsirirt N. 407, ;^Egtf-Jv afi (kfjctpoj Horn. Cer. 15. S. For the double forms of TtiwajEs, see § 70. 1. In the compounds Sexa- T^sr?, Tsa-jragSfrxaj'Ssxa, and its equivalent Sgxarsirv k-jrohiovra. fiv^ictj Id. ii. 13. It 'wiU be observed, that the participle may either agree "with the greater number, or, by a rarer construc- tion, be put absolute mth the less. See Syntax. y. The combinations of fractions mth whole nmnbers ai'e variously ex- pressed; thus, (a) TQiec nfAiSot^iixaj three half-daricSy i. e. 1^ daiicSj i. 3. 21 (b) Particidarly in Herodotus, TgiVow rifi.ira,\avroVj the third talent a half one i. e. 2^ talents, Hdt. i. 50 ; sjSSo^av nfAtTdXavTov -\- Tira^rov riftiroiXuvrov =■ rdXavra Tsxa, 6^-\-S^= 10, lb. (compare in Lat. sestertius, shortened from semistertius) ■ (c) IiCSS classic, Sua xa) ytfiiff&tecv fivav, Suw xeti tjfttfftf ^^cc^^ftatj Poll. ix. 5^, 62 : (d) WiT^trov, a third in addition, i. e. 1^, Vect. 3. 9 ; Wi- ^ifAvrov, \\, lb. : (e) ^fitoXtov, half as much again, i. e. 1^, i. 3. 21. 2. The Table (fl 25) exhibits the most common numerals, with some of the interrogatives, indefinites, diminutives, &c. which correspond with them. CHAPTER V. PEONOimS. I. Substantive. [17 23.] §141. Personal, eyco, av, ov. The declension of these pronouns is peculiar. The munbers are distinguished not less by difference of root, than of affix. Thus, the 1st Person has the roots. Sing. ^-, or, as a more emphatic form, ift., PI. i/i-, Du. »- ; the 2d Pers., Sing. • (6) the Accusatives vis and irfi, without distinction of number or gender ; (c) the Dat. pi. irfit, which even occurs, though rarely, both in Attic and in other poetry, as sing. ; (rf) the Dat. pi. of iyd and o-i! with the ultima short (especially Sophodes) ; thus, w^iv, y/«iv, or ^fAiVj u^lv. See 5. below. 4. The DIALECTIC FOEMS aiisc chiefly, (a) from want of contraction, as, i^ioj &c. J (b) from protraction, as, Ifi^Toj aiio^ eTa, hfciluv, v/xsimv, tr^siuv (§ 47. N.) ; (c) fi'om peculiar contraction, as, ifiiu, inv, iS (§ 45. 3) ; Id) from the use of different affixes, as Gen. Ep. -&s» {i/ii^m, ci^iv, t^ev, § 84), Dor. -as {l/icsos, contr. ifiovs, l^usyj, 'rios^ contr. rivsj with g doubled Tious, and, similarly foimed, UZs) ; Dat. sing. Dor. -n {ifilv, rih, rlv, "») ; (e) from the retention of primitive forms without the flexible ending, as '£/ii, &fi/it, 6/ii, ll/i/ii, (Tfi (compare the sing, l/ii. A, V, and see §§ 83, 86) ; (/) from variation of root ; as. Dor. r- for ir- (t6, nv, nl, ri, Lat. tu, tui, tibi, te, § 70. 2) ; Mol. F- for the rough breathing (FsSsv, Foii Ft • Lat. s-: suij sibif se) ; Dor. *a^-, .(Eol. and Ep. afift-j for 9if£- {^d/jLis, ai/.fjt.is, &c.) ', ^ol. and Ep. u^w^. for 'c^ (w/*^£5, &c.) ; Dor. ■^- and ^-, ^ol. ar^-, fortr^- (•^U, -lit, «s ^. 372, 'ci/ci Ar. Lys. 95, &/i/is A. 59, Sapph. 93 (13), Theoc. 8. 25 ; vZ: Cor. 16, vZy A. 418, U. 99 (.^Z. ?), »^ E. 219 CH. 5.] PERSONAL. 157 »;■» 5. 88 : cii Ar. Lys. 1188, Sapph. 1. 13, tu'hi E. 485, «ii Cor. 2; o-ss A. 396, Hdt. i. 8, itbTi, T. 137, o-sS T. 206, Hdt. i. 9, iri9-£r A. 180, Eur Ale. 51, TioTo 0. 37, 468, tsDj Theoo. 2. 126, teo?s Theoo. 11. 25 ; tci A. 28, Hdt. i. 9, nh S. 619 (not in H.), Hdt. v. 60 (Inscr.), Ar. Av. 930, t/v Theoc. 2. 11, Find. 0. 10. 113 ; ti Theoe. 1. 6, ru Theoo. 1. 56, Ar. Eq. 1225 ; i/iiis Hdt. vi. 11, ifci; Ar. Ach. 760, tlfcfiis A. 274, Sapph. 95 (17), Theoo. 5. Ill ; i/iiay H. 159, Hdt. iii. 50, iftiim A. 348, iftftiuv Ale. 77 ; i/ut or Sfiir, Soph. Ant. 308, tl/i/mi A. 249, Theoo. 1. 116, il/n/ii Z. 77, uft.//,' K. 551 ; up'sn! li. 75, Hdt. i. 53, u/^i, Ar. Lys. 87, S/i/is lb. 1076, u/i/j,i Y. 412, Find. 0. 8. 19, Theoo. 5. 145, Soph. Ant. 846 ; irtpST A. 336, ^,v Sophr. 83 (87), (pi> Call. Di. 125, Hrp Sapph. 98 (40) ; o-ipsas B. 96, ir(pixs Hdt. i. 4, ^■ipsraj ». 213, D-ifiZf E. 567, ript A. Ill, Theoo. 15.80, Soph. Ant. 44, ^s Theoc. 4. 3, &ff.fi.C) ; or more commonly by doubling the « to x (§ 29), pronounced with the rough breathing (n^-, in ■hi/.ti;, &o.), or, in the Dor., to a {'df£-i in ^dfttsj ^esf^^v, 'afiTvj 'a^Kfi). Prom this the new Flur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of ex- pression, X, the deepest of the vowels, into k, the most protrusive {lift/i-, in the Ep. and .^ol. vf^/Ats, vfifiiuv, vft/£ivj vfifii • and 'iJ^-, in iifiiTs^ &c.) With the 14 158 PRONOUNS. SUBSTANTIVE. [bOOK II. exception of this imitative plural, the Plur. and Da. of tlie 2d and 3d per- sons have the same root, in which plurality is expressed by joining two of the signs of these persons {rip- = giav, -ovog, discreet, aiacpgoviattgog, aacpgovdaTaiog. agnai, -ayog, rapacious, agnayiaraiog. inlxagig, -nog, pleasing, iTuxagnrnzegog, inixagixiazaxog. Notes, a. Other examples are /xxxa^, blessed, fAxxa^Ticras X, 483 ; fiixat CH. 6.] ADJECTIVES. 165 -xvts, black, fiskdyn^as, A. 277, and fisXxmn^os, Strab. ; &ipriXi%, -ikos, elder- ly, x^nXtxi^Ts^os • |8X«|, -Sxi;, stupid, /iXxxuTs^cs, -arxns, Mem. iii. 13. 4, IT. 2. 40, for which some read /IXxxon^os, and ^XxxSrxns or /iXxxlirTxns. From a;t;«j«, disagreeable, we find the shorter form x^x^lirTtios, v. 392. /3. The insertion of -sir- is particularly made in adjectives ia-m. Yet some of these employ shorter forms ; as, u-sirsiv, ripe, tewxlri^as Mseh. Fr. 244 ; B-iav, fat, ^liri^ss, Horn. Ap. 48, tfiirxm, I. 577 (as from the rare Tries, Orph. Arg. 508) ; WiXw/^m, forgetful, inXw/iorxm, Ar. Nub. 790 (ImXti- fffLoniTTi^os, Apol. 6). B. Comparison in -tiav, -laiog. ^159. A few adjectives are compared b^ changing -vs, -as, -os, and even -go?, final, into -tcav and -tffTos. In some of these, -tcov with the pre- ceding consonant passes into -aaav (-jzav, § 70. 1) or -^cov. Thus, ■^dvg, pleasant, ■^dtmv, ' ^Siatog. taxis, swift, ■d-daaatv, &aTTav, laxiaiog. noXvs, much, nXdmv, nXsiov, nXslatog. [liyag, great, [isi^av, fisyiOTog. xK^o's, beautiful, xotXliav, xdkhaiog. ataxQog, hose, alaxiiav, cil'axiaTog, ix&gog, hostile, ix&twv, 'dx&iOTOg. Eemakks. a. For the declension of comparatives in -»», see T[ 17 and § 107. The I in the affix -lav is long in the Attic poets, but short in the Epic, and variable in the later. /3. The forms in -trrmv and -?.»i«fa;, a. 376 (the pos. form XsJiij occurs Theoc. 26. 32); xa^mrrDs, A. 266 (§ 71 ; so always in Horn.). Dor. (hisTwros, Theoc. 5. 76, xifprn, Tim. ap. H. 102 d ; Ion. x^itruv (§ 159. /j). Late xyxShiuTccrcs, Diod. 16. 85. aXyuvog, painful, aXytiav, aXyiaiog. aXysivoTigog, aXytivoratog. xaxog, had, xammv, xaxiarog. Xsigmv, ;fEjp«rTOS. rjaaiov, riTzmv. Poet, xuxurt^es, o. 343; ;^;£/gflT£^fl?, 0. 513, x^i^''^^ -^ ^^^i XH^^°'^^i'>i 1 248 (for the Epic xk"'^' ^-r '"'I'ich, though positive in foml, are com- p~- tive in sense, see § 136. S) ; Xxmros or lixisTos Y. 531 (Jlxumn as an ad- verb was common in Attic prose ; jElian uses Hxisrcs as an adj.). Ion. 'lirnut (§ 159. /3). f.t^g6g, small, ^l^'T^'^"', l^"^Q6T«Tog. bXiyog, little, few, \ ^^r"""' '^"""''' ^4«^"'^°^- CH. 6.J ADJECTIVES. 167 Poet. lXux"St oki^aii (§ 159. /S) ; /ision^os Ap. Eh. 2. 368, fiuvTosj Bion, 5. 10 (yet common reading fAnovet), qt^diog, easy^ ^awv, qaarog* Poet, pnt^ios, X. 146, psi^/af, Theog. 574, pmrs^osf 2. 258, pdrs^as Pind. 0. 8. 78, ^niVrflf, ^. 565, paTa-ras, Theoc. 11. 7, prifrix.rost r. 577. The common foundation of the forms of this word appears toiave been ^ai'A-(see §§ 118, 119). § 161. 1. Examples of double comparison. ta'^ecTOS) lasty extreme, Iff^arars^os (Oun ya^ tov iirp^oirov Iff^ararsQav (7>j u9 Ti. Aristl. Metaph. 10. 4), Itrp^otTaretTosj H. Gr. ii. 3. 49. a"gaT6gflj, before, comic T^or&^otirzQas Ar. Eq. 1164 ; K.A. 'Op^s ; iyM ffot vr^ovi^os tictpi^eij oiipQoy. AA. 'A>.X' oh r^K'jnt^a.Vj aX>.* lycj Te^avi^etir&^os* WgwTfl?, firstj ^^tuTiffToif first of all, B. 228. iXd;^tffroSf least, l)^ax'o''ror£^o$, less than the least, Ep. Ephes. 3, 8. KoTE. See also examples of a poetic double formation of the Comp. (afiEtvoTs^os, a^tioTSQOij &c.) in § 160. For xttX^tafTt^ov Th. iv. 118, is now read »»xxToy* 2. Examples of adjectives in the comparative and superla- tive degrees, formed from other parts of speech. ^otffiXius, hing, {^atrtXivn^os, more kingly, a greater king, I. 1 60, (^affiXtvra. res, the greatest king, I. 69. lra.7^os, friend, Irect^oroiTosi iest friend, PI, Gorg. 487 d. xXifT'Tfis, thief KXt^TiiTTaros, most adroit thief, Ar. Plut. 27. xvuv, dog, xuvTEgflj, more dog-IHie, more impudent, 0.483, xuvraras, K. 503. xegSfl?, -tog, gain, xt^iav^ more gainful, V. 41, xi^itrros, .^sch. Pr. 385. aii'i'U, hiTuselfy ahrort^os Epich. 2 (l), ecvrora.ros (ipsissumus Plant. Trinnm. Iv. 2), his very self Ax. Pint. 83. ay^t or ccyxov, Tiear, ay^ort^og, nearer, Hdt. vii. 175, ay^orarof, Eur. Pel. 2, oftener iiyx;isiv, I had written. § 168. Tenses may be classified in two ways ; I. with respect to the time which is spoken of ; II. with respect to the relation which the action bears to this time. I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 2. fu- ture, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct in the Indicative. In tliis mode, those tenses "which refer to present or future time are termed primary or chief tenses, and those wliich refer to past time secondary or historical tenses. II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. Tte tenses wliioh denote the first of these relations may be termed definite ; the second, indefinite; and the third, complete. For a classified table of tha Greek tenses, see % 26. OH. 7.] MODE. ni Notes, x. Some verbs have a complete future tense, called the Future Perfect, or the Third Future (§ 239) ; but, othenvise, the tliree tenses which are wanting in the table (Tf 26), viz. the indefinite present, the definite future, and the complete future, are supphed by forms belonging to other tenses, or by participles combuied with auxiliary verbs. /3. Foi the general formation of the Greek tenses, see ^ 28. C. Mode. ^169. The Greek has six modes; the In- dicative, the Subjunctive, the Optative, the Im- perative, the Infinitive, and the Participle. 1. The Indicative expresses direct assertion or inquiry ; as yQaquo, I am writing ; ygoKpo) ; am I writing ? 2. The Subjunctive expresses present contingence ; as, om olda, 07101 TgajTcoftat, I know not, whither 1 can turn. 3. The Optative (opto, to wish, because 9ften used in the expression of a wish) expresses past contingence ; as, ovx i]dsi,v, 07101 TQttnolfirjv, I knew not, whither I could turn. 4. The Imperative expresses direct command, or entreaty , as, ygaips, write ; xvTnsa&a, let him he beaten ; 5oV /joi, give me, 5. The Infinitive partakes of the nature of an abstract noun ; as, ygaqiiiv, to write. 6. The Participle partakes of the nature of an adjective , as, ygdifav, writing. Notes, a. For a table of the Greek modes dassified according to the character of the sentences which they form, see f 27. /3. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Present and Aorist have all the modes ; but the Future wants the Subjunctive and Imperative ; and the Perfect, for the most part, wants the Subjunctive and Optative, and like- wise, in the active voice, the Imperative. The Imperfect has the same form with the Present, and the Pluperfect the same form with the Perfect, except in the Indicative. y. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each other as present and past, or ae primary and secondary, tenses (§ 168. I.) ; and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and oflices of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspond- ence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more obvious. D. Number and Person. ^17 0. The numbers and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns and pronouns (§ 164). 172 CONJUGATION. [book II Note. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person ; tha Infinitive, from its abstract nature, wants the distinctions of number and per- son altogether ; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an Adjective, has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. Bemabks. X. The first person singular of the Present indicative active, or, m deponent verbs (§ 166. 2), middle, is regarded as the theme of the verb. The ROOT is obtauied by throwing off the affix of the theme, or it may be obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing off the prefix and affix, and allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is conjugated by adding to the root the prefixes and affixes in 1ft 28 - 30. 0. Verbs are divided, according to the characteristic, into Mute, Liquid Double Consonaht, and Pure Verbs ; and according to the affix in the theme, into Verbs in -a, and Verbs in -fci (§ 208. 2). For a paradigm of regular conjugation without euphonic changes, see tIF 3^> 35 ; for shorter para- digms of the several classes of verbs, see tH 36 — 60. y. For a fuller view of the use of the Greek verb in its several forms, see Syntax. E. History of Greek Conjugation. ^ §171. The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only in the same way with that of declension (§ 83). The following view is offered as one which has much in its support, ajid which serves to explain the general phenomena of the Greek verb. Greek conjugation, like declension (§§ 83, 143), was progressive. At first, the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first distinction ap- pears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only twofold, affixing /i to express the first person, and a lingual or sibUant to express the other two. Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and most demonstrative form ap- pears to have been -t (cf. §§ 143, 148). By uniting these affixes with the root ipot-, to say, we have the forms, (pif/,, I or we say, (psir, you, he, or they say. § 1 7 S« A plural was then formed by affixing the plural sign v (§ 83\ with the insertion of e to assist in the utterance. Thus, 1 Person. 2 and 3 Persons. Sing. «-s V^a-r \iv, 'iy^a. -9}S -«T y^u § 1 83. rV. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen a short vowel before an affix beginning with a consonant. This will be ob- served in pure verbs before the tense-signs (§ 218) ; in the tense-signs of the Aor. and Put. pass. (§ 180); in the -s- often inserted in the Opt. (§ 184) ; in verbs in -/ii before the subjective endings, especially in the Ind. sing. (§ 224) ; in the euphonic affixes -ss and -iv of the Pres. and Put. act. (§§ 203. a, 206. ^) ; &c. This tendency does not appear before endings beginning with »T, since here the syllable is ah-eady long by position. Of other endings, it appears chiefly before the shorter ; hence, before the subjective far more than _the objective, and in the Sing, more than the Plur. or Dual. We give here ex- amples of the two last only of the cases that have been mentioned above : (ft/n .iiiy Theoc. 12. 19, iia'ppri^iiccs Hdt. iii. 12 ; &.\ytmis Soph. CEd. T. 446, 'SiKo.ira.i; Ar. Vesp. 726, (pytaxii PI. Gorg. 477 b, x^axXlirzi .fflsch. Eum. 983, (pSiirxnr Th. iii. 49. li. In analyzing Opt. forms of the 3d Pers. pl., it is often convenient to join the inserted s with the flexible ending, although in strict propriety it is an extension of the connecting vowel. See ^31. § 1 8 S. VI. One important analogy we ought not to pass unnoticed. The oldest inflection both of verbs and of nouns, that of the nude Pi'es. and Impf., and of Dec. III., had no connecting vowels. The next inflection in or- der of time, that of the euphonic Pres. and Impf., of the Fut., and of Dec. II., took the connecting vowels -o- and -e- ; while the latest inflection, that of the Aor., of the Perf. Act., and of Dec. I., took the connecting vowel -a- (cf. § 176). But the analogy does not stop here. As some nouns fluctuated between the different declensions (§§ 124, 125), so some forms of verbs fluc- tuated between the different methods of inflection. Thus we find, a.) Verbs in both -/a and -u, particularly the large class in -Vfu and -ta ; as, tetxvvfn and ^sjkw&i, to show. /3.) That verbs in -ju.t whose roots end in e, o, or u, have, in the Impf. act. sing., a second and more common form in -o» ; as, ItUhv and (irlh-iiy) irihvi (Tf 50), Wi^uv and ISiSaui/ (1[ 51), i^iixmn and Xldxivsv (^ 52). y.~) That verbs in -a have the 2 Aor. nude, if the root ends in a vowel, except I ; as, (1[ 57) I'/Bnv (r. ;8«-), 'iyvan (r. yvo-'), 'itut (r. Si/-) ; but 'itm (r. «!-), 2 Aor. of Tim, to drink. S.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) 2 Aorists middle which want the connecting vowel even after a consonant ; as, S\ti> A. 532 ; &^/titii» (Part.) 2. 600 ; yivra (=£!xsTo) 0. 43; yitrc (= iyEwro) Hes. Th. 199, 'eysvTc Theoc. 1.88; iSiyfinn !• 513, "Sixrn O. 88 (so even Pres. 3 Pers. pl., 'Sl^aTcti M. 147, for lix"^«.i, § 60), Imp. y4„ T. 10, Vtx't Ap. Eh. 4. 1554, Inf. ii^Sci, A. 23, Part. i'lyfiiMs B. 794 ; l>.iXixn A. 39 ; Txn Hes. Th. 481 ; ikiy/iviv ,. 335, >.Uro i. 451, Xi^a fl. 650 ; luiilm (3 Pers. du. for ifiidvirh>, § 60)*; 'i/uxn a. 433, /i'lxTa A. 354; S^ro E. 590, jEsch. Ag. 987, ojiro A. 204, o^lau 0.474, OPIUMS, A. 572, Soph. (Ed. T. 177; TxXrc 0. 645; vi^Sxi (for ■ri^Mxi, §§ 55, 60) -r. 708. * A. 146. CH. 7.] HISTORY. 181 KoTE. These Aorists, being nude, agree in their formation -with the Perf. and Plup. (§ 179), except that they want the reduplication. s.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) Aorists which have the tense-sign -»•- with the connectives -o- and -s-, and thus unite the forms of the 1st and 2d Aorists; as, islria Horn. H. 16. 1 ; iSwera v. 75, /3i)«o E. 109, 221 ; 'Siiren H. 465, Sii«o n. 129 ; i|o» E. 773 ; xilio I. 617 ; of«o T. 250, contr. Sj^su (§ 45. 3) A. 264 ; aTo-s x- 481, Call. Cer. 136, Ar. Ean. 482, drinu T. 173, o'/irsTs u. 1 54. The use of this form in the 2 Pers. Imp. will be specially noticed. Perhaps the common 2 Aor. smrm, fell, and the rare, if not doubtful, 'ix"^"i belong here. Z-) Aorists without the tense-sign -r-, but with the connecting vowel -x-. See § 201. 2. Compare the omission of -r- both here and § 200. 2 with §§ 117, 182. III. B.) Eeduplicated tenses, havmg the connectives -a- and -s-, and thus unit- ing the forms of the Perf. or Plup., and of the 2 Aor. See § 194. 3. Note. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1st or 2d Ao- rist according to the connective ; a classification which is rather convenient than philosophical; § 186. VII. The formation of the complete tenses requires fiirther remark. The affixes of the Perf. and Plup. seem to have been originally nude throughout, and they continued such in the objective inflection, iaasmudi as here each flexible endiug has a vowel of its own. That this was the reason appears from the fact, that in the subjective inflection also we find remains of the nude formation, but only in cases where the flexible ending has a vowel of its own. These remains abound most in the old Epic, but are also found in the Attic (§§ 237, 238). The inflection with the connecting vowel, how- ever, became the established analogy of the language ; so much so, that even pure verbs, no less than impure, adopted it (cf. § 100. 2). Here arose the need of another euphonic device. The attachment of the open affixes to pure roots produced hiatus, and to prevent this, y. was inserted. This insertion appears to have been just commencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards became the prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of analogy, to impure, as well as to pure roots. Other euphonic changes were now required, for which see §§ 61, 64. 3. The history of the Perf. and Plup. active, therefore, is a history of euphonic devices, to meet the successive dfr mands of pure and impure roots. The latter first demanded a connecting vowel ; then the former, the insertion of -x- ; and then the latter, that this -X- after a labial or palatal mute should be softened to an aspiration uniting with the mute. We have thus four successive formations : 1. the primitive nude form,ation ; 2. the formation in -«, -e/v ; 3. the formaUon in -»a, -xtiv after a vowel ; 4. the formation in -xa, 'xuv after a consonant (after a 'labial or palatal mute, softened to -a, -tit, § 61). The last formation nowhere ap- pears in Hom., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the in- serted K are distinguished as the First Perf. and Plup. ; and those without it, although older, as the Second (§ 199. II.). 16 182 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II. CHAPTER VIII. PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. ^187. The Greek verb has two prefixes I. The Augment, and II. the Reduplication. I. Augment. The Augment (augmentum, increase) prefixes «-, in the secondary tenses of the Indicative, to de- note past time (^^ 168, I., 173). A. If the verb begins vv^ith a consonant, the b- constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is termed syllabic. E. g. Theme. Impf. Aor. ^6v\li'ji, to counsel, tCouXiucv, HauXtuira, yvuptZfOj, to recognize^ \yvai^i1^oVj lyva^iffa. ^ fi'n'raij to tJiroio, ippi^rov, Uppi^a (§ 64. 1). B. If the verb'begins with a vowel, the s- unites with it, and the augment is termed temporal. Note. The syllaUc augment is so named, because it increases the number of syUahhs ; the temporal (temporahs, from tempus, time'), because it increases the time, or guantiti/, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment before a vowel, see § 189. 2. The breathing of an initial vowel remains the same after the augment. § 1 8 8. Special Ritles of the Temporal Augment. 1. The prefix e- unites with « to form i], and with the other vowels, if short, to form the corresponding long vowels ; as, 'ctS/xsai, to injurSj (eaS/xsflv) vi^iKovv, (letdiXTjirct} vidixijirci. ^oCSxio), to contend. ^§Xovv, tiSktiffa. Ik'Ti^a, to hope. WXiTi^O It, ^kVtiree. 'ixinvuy to supplicate, *TKiil^9l (^ 58), and ii'siv (^ 56). ^189. Eemakks. 1. The verbs ^ovlojiai, to mil, Sv- vttiittt, to he able, and (liWai, to purpose, sometimes add the tem- poral to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic ; thus, Impf. iBovKofirjv and ri6ovX6iJ,i]v, Aor. P. iSovl'^&iqv and rjBov- Xri&riv. 2. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the s- constitutes a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment ; as, a.yvSfi,tj to hreakj ' Uf.. avaiya/j to operij avkcoyov (§ 188. 2), avi^^a. aiSiat, to pushy IkSovv, %&>vio/£ai, to buy, and some Epic forms. Cf. § 191. 3. The sylla- bic augment in these ■words is to be referred, in part, at least, to an original digamma (§ 22. t) ; as, iFx^xt ta^xr y. 298, iv. 2. 20 ; Xfa.i'ia.ii Idtixm Hdt. ix. 5, la'irSaK y. 143, JFaSe txh Hdt. i. 151, sFFaJ" tuxhn (cf. §§ 71, 117. 2) S. 340. 3. In a few verbs beginning with s, the usual contraction of ts into Si (§ 36) takes place ; as, idol, to permit, tieay, lldffa. Add ISil^ia, to accustom, ixiffffu, to roU, tXxtu, to draw, ttru, to he occupied with, %pyd.%oftxt, to work, Epcror, to creep, IrTtda/, to entertain, t^or, to have ; the Aorists tTxov, took, ucrx (Ion. and poet.), set, sT/itv and ii^tiv (^ 54) ; and the Plup. iitr-Axii}! (IT 48), stood. 4. An initial x, followed by a vowd, remains in the augmented tenses of a very few verbs, chiefly poetic 5 as, xiej, to hear, xiov (yet Icr^iVs Hdt, 9. 93). See, also, mxx'urxa (§ 280). An initial a sometimes remains even when followed by a consonant ; as, eltrr^ia/, to sting, otar^^ta Eur. Bac. 32 (cf. aTJa, § 191. 3). So tXXnntlni (that flie word °ExXji» maynot be disguised), Th. IL 68, and in poetry £^o^u», xxhZ,oji,ny, .lEsch. Eum. 3, Prom. 229. In these words £ is long by position- 5. An initial s followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting with the augment ; thus, io^rx^u, to celebrate a feast, {UaQra^ev) iw^rxl^oy. So, in the Plup., luxui, and the poet. luXmv, ii^yen, &om Perf. luxx, itX^x, %o^yx. 184 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [book U 11. Reduplication. ^190. The Reduplication (reduplico, to re- double) doubles the initial letter of the complete TENSES, in all the modes (§§ 168. II., 179). Rule. If the verb begins with a single consonant, or with a mute and liquid (except ye, and, commonly, ^X and yV), the initial consonant is repeated, with the insertion of s ; but, other- wise, the reduplication has the same form with the augment. In the PLtrPERFECT, the augment is prefixed to the reduplication, except when this has the same form with the augment. Thus, Theme. Pei-f. Plup. fiovXtuu, to counself ^i^avXtvicee., \^t^ovX%6xztv. 'y^d(p&tf to writCj yiy^a(pa. lyty^d^itv. (piXieo, to love. ^t(plXviKX (§ 62), t-^KpiXnKUv. ^^^doflXlj to USCf x.ixZ^[i.eci, iKtx^fifCijy. ^■vyjo-xa, to die, Ttdwixa, trthv^xuv. pa^aiytcjj to pj'otej ippa-\pe^^n»a (§ 62. a), Ippa^pcJo^KUVt yvaiQi^tUj to recognize (§ 187), lyva^iKcCj lym^tKEty. ^Xairrcivatj to bud^ l&XaVr«xa, i^Xaffrvxiiv. /SXasrrw, to hurt., ^iSXutpa, iS&SXa.(piiv, yXvipof, to sculpturcy 'iyXvf£fceci, yi'fkvy.fimj iyXvfAfCTjv* ^ijXoM, to emulate. %C;^>.mxa,, lZ,i'lXaxuy, •<^tuoofLXij to licj 'i'ipEVff/HCl.l, l^pzuir/zm' ffTiipavoajj to crown. Itm^xveuxe&j iffT£(pa.vcCKiiv, ithxiu> (§ 188. 1), Uc^; iixviKcc) hoiKriKct, rioix^xsiv. flsygavflj, to increase (§ 188. 2), VV^9]fZ,Xl, V}tll^f/,V1V' viyiofzaij to lead (§ 18£ 1.3) 3 ilytj/zenj hynf^nv. o^flsw, to see (§ 189. 2) ) leu^ecKBC, loi^xxtiv. aivUfixt, to buy (§ 189, .2), iUV7]filX,lj tuvyifiviv. Ipyd^efixij to work (§ 189. 3), i"^ya,fffLai, il^ydffft.nv. § 101. Kemarks. 1. In ^ve verbs beginning with a liquid, d- commonly takes the place of the regular reduplica- tion, for the sake of euphony : Xoty^dvit), to obtain by lot, XccfiSccvaf, to take, Xiyar, to collect, fA&i^efAsti, to share, r. pz-, to say, i't^^nx^ ^"^^ ^i^oy^cCf ilXnyiM.i&t, t7k9j(pcej zly^Tifi-fAc^i and XsX»;jU^(k/. tiXo^ct, iiy.iyf/,a.t and XiXiyfi,c6u il^i^XDc, i'i^tiftai (Tf 53). 2. Some verbs beginning with «, e, or o, followed by a single consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first let ters of the root ; thus, iX^Xccxeii This prefix is termed hy grammarianSj though not very appropriately (§ 7_), ciXti, to anoint, Ikctvvm, to drive, ogvifffeo, to dig. etXttXi/XfACCi. tXvjXctfiai. o^CD^vyfActi. CH 8.] COMPOUND VERBS. 185 the Attic Reduplicatum. It seldom receives an augment in the Plup., except in the verb axuiu, to hear; thus, «A.>)Xi^a, aX»x/pti» • but, from axsioi, kxri- Koa,, ixnxisit. This reduphcatiou prefers a short vowel in the penult ; as, i\ri\i(px, though j)A.s/?o! (§ 269); IXiiXufc (§ 301). 3. The verb iJLifivwxa, to remember, has, in the Perf., /i's/in/nei ■ xniafcxi, to acquire, has commonly xixn/ixi (i. 7. 3), but also 'ixrnfuci (properly Ion., as Hdt. ii. 42, yet also ^sch. Pr. 795, PI. Pi-ot. 340 d, e). There are, also, apparent exceptions to the rule, arising from syncope ; as, trstrraixa, ^ivrx- fixt. For 'ictxa, to seem, and the poet. 'ioXva, 'io^ycc, cf. § 189. 2. For ^x (IT 58), cf. § 189s 4. Tte poet, xiuiya, to command, receives no redupUcation. 4. When the augment and the redupUcation have a common form, this form is not to be explained in both upon the same principle. Thus, in the Aor. iyva^irx (§ 187), s- is prefixed to denote past time, but in the Perf. iysu^ixx (§ 190), it is a euphonic substitute for the fuU redupl. yi- In like manner, analogy would lead us to regard the Aor. hVixmx (§ 188. 1) as contracted from Ix^ixjiirx, but the Perf. nVixiixx (§ 190), as contracted from xxVixvixx, the initial vowel being doubled to denote completeness of action. In the Per- fects il/jix^iixi (E. 1), and trrnxx (^ 48), the rough breathing seems to supply, in part, the place of the initial consonant. Some irregularities in the redu- plication appear to have arisen iirom an imitation of the augment ; as, iu^Hxa, idnn/ixi (§ 190). III. Prefixes of Compound Verbs. ^103. I. Verbs compounded with a preposition, receive the augment and reduplication after the preposition ; thus, •ff^airy^x^ai, to ascribe, fr^ecrty^a^ov, vr^offyzyfix^x, l^sXauifO), to drive out, V^tiXxwov^ ' t^iXviXxxx, Eemakks. 1. Prepositions ending in a vowel, except '!rt^i and irjo, suffer elision (§ 41) before the prefix e-. The final vowel of jrjo often unites with the £- by crasis (§ 38). Thus, xm^xWu, to throw away, xtriSxkXov • srsj/- SxXXw, to throw around, Tn^ti^xXXov • •r^aSaX.Xa/, to throw before, ^rgae^aXXap and 'TT^ou^xXXov. 2. Prepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, re- sume that consonant before the prefix e- ; as, i/tSxXXai, to throw in (§ 54), IviSxXXoy . ix^xXXea, to throw out (§ 68), t^iSaXXav. 3. A few verbs receive the augment and reduplication before the preposi- tion ; a few receive them both before and after ; and a few are variable ; as, Witrrx/^xi, to understand, 'Wiirrd/zi^v • ivoxXiu, to trouble, vivu^Xovv, maixXvixx • xxhvh&t, to sleep, Ixxhu^ov, xxSriv^m, and xxhZ'hov (§ 188. N".). 4. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow the same analogy ; as, ^ixirxca, to regulate (from tlxirx, mode of life), ^tyirnira ind iSmrviffx, ^t^iviTvixx, ISeS/s)T«jW«v ■ IxxXtjffjx^aj, to hold ail assembly {IxxXtj- nx), l^txXijtr'ix^ov and IxxXtjiria^ov, V^ixXvitrixffx • ^x^otvEo), to act the drunkard (^xpotiios) , Wxpc^vnifx V. 8. 4 ; lyyvxut to pledge, for the various forms of which see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 155. § 1 03. II. Verbs compounded with the particles 8va-, ill, and £u, well, and beginning with a vowel which is changed by the augment (§ 188), commonly receive their prefixes after 16* 186 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK It these particles ; as, dvaagsaxiia, to be displeased, Svatigioxovv ivegyixiu, to benefit, sirjqyhovv and cvsqyhovv. III. Other compounds receive the augment and reduplica- tion at the beginning ; as, Xoyonoum, to fable, ikoyoiioiovv • dvazvxiia, to be unfortunate, idvaxvxrjaa, Sidvaxv/rixa ' sixv^sa to be fortunate, svxvxovv or ijixvxovv (§ 188. N.) ; Svaamiia, to shame, idvadnow. Yet InnoxexQocprjxa, Lycurg. 167. 31. DIALECTIC USE. ^ 1 "4:» 1. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of past tune (§ 173) became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it appears as a kind of optional sign, ■which might be used or omitted at pleasure; thus, 'ihx-m A. 2, SSxe 55; as 'i 515, rsT/^ii/^tf Theoc. 25. 61, a-!jvs N. 363, 'irsfn A. 397 ; Att. Eedupl. ityxym A. 179, «j/aysTs X. 116, wa^js n. 822, ixi^am it. 342, aXxXxs Y. 185, a{iii{o» M. 105, )?{aj£ A. 110, i^x^sixn Ap. Hi. 1. 369, srafiisraipsv S. 360, l^x^xfuira I. 376, i»^»r!rs« (also edited hivitrnv and hiviimii) 0. 546, 552, Y. 473, ^S'jojs B. 146. Two Second Aorists are reduplicated at the end of the root : mi'^S-'r-ov from r. sviiT-, B. 245, and vi^uxxx-ov from r. Igi;x-, E. 321. Note. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Att. poetry ; thus, aji- fiv Soph. El. 147, xixXofcms Id. (Ed.T. 159, tTspi lb. 1497, ilxvxipiit Eur. Ion, 704. "'Ryxyov remamed even in Att. prose ; as, i. 3. 17. CHAPTER IX. AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [Tnr28-3i.] I. Classification and Analysis. § 195. The Affixes of the Greek verb may be divided into two great classes ; I. The Subjective, belonging to all the tenses of the ACTIVE VOICE, and to the Aorist passive. II. The Objective^ belonging to all the tenses of the MIDDLE VOICE, and to the Future passive. Note. The affixes of the Aor. pass, appear to have been derived from the Impf. of the verb s!/ii, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass., from the Fat. of this verb (§ 180). Hence the former are subjective, and the latter, objective. Of thi affixes which are not thus derived, the subjective represent the subject of the verb as the doer of the action, and the objective, as, more or less directly, its object. See § 165. § 196. The affixes of the verb may likewise be divided into the following orders ; 1. The Pkimaey, belonging to the primary tenses of the Indicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive m 168, 169. y). 2. The Secondary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative. 188 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK II. 3. The Impeeatiye, belonging to the Imperative mode 4. The Infinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode. 5. The Participial, belonging to the Participle. § 197. These affixes may be resolved into the following ELEMENTS ; A. Tense-Signs, B. Con- necting Vowels, and C. Flexible Endings Note. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may be de- nominated simply dgTiSj connectives, and endings. For a synopsis of these elements, see 1[ 31. A. Tense-Signs. ^198. The tense-signs are letters or syllables which are added to the root in particular tenses, and to which the flexible endings are appended, either immediately or with connecting vowels. In the Future and Aorist, active and middle, and in the Future Perfect (§ 168. a), the tense-sign is -]- (§ 183). When followed by a vowel it is contracted with it. Thus, iSovXiv-S-rj-v, ^ovXiv- &ri-xi, ^ovXsV'&^-rai ' (/JovAev-^e'-w, § 36) jSovXsv&a, {^ovXev- &E-l7jr, § 32) §ovXiV&tiriv • ^ovXev-&i-vT(ov, {ffovXiV-^i-vrg § 58) ^ovXsv&slg. II. The letters x and ■5', of the tense-signs, are sometimes omitted. Tenses formed with this omission are denominated second, and, in distinction from them, tenses which have these letters are denominated Jlrst ; thus, 1 Perf. nsnstxa, 2 Perf. ni- noi9a • 1 Plup. fnincixHV, 2 Plup. insnoidsLV (U 39) ; 1 Aor. pass. ■^yysX&rjv, 2 Aor. pass. •^y/e'Xijv ■ 1 Fut. pass. ayyeX^-^ao- fiai, 2 Fut. pass. iyysX^do^iti. (^ 41). See §§ 180, 186. '■^I- 9'] TENSE-SIGNS. 189 Notes, a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed ths Secmd Aorist, is simply an old fonu of the Imperfect (§ 178. 2). li. The regular or Jirst tenses will be usually spoken of simply as the Ao- ristj the Perfect, &c. § ^00. III. In the future active and middle, changes affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which are then contracted. 1. The tense-sign -a- becomes -£- (§ 50), a.) In the Future of liquid verbs. See § 56. ;3.) In Futures in -tiri!/, from verbs in -1^01 ; thus, xo/ihu (^Ke/tiiai) xcfuZ, xc/iUlit KO/iiuv, xsfiliru)! xo/iiSv • Mid. xc/iiin/ixi (xc/iiiowi^ xojudufLxl, xo/ii- ffiffSott xofitUff^Xi, xofiirofisvos xo/AioUfcsvos {% 40). y.) In the Future of xxiil^o/ixi, to sit (root iS-) ; thus, (^xxSeSro/ixi, xxh. Viof/.m') xaStSsvfiai. Add the poetic (^rixo-io-ixi) nxiinSm Hom. Ven. 127, and (jiiSaofixi, -iofixi, § 45. 3) fixhuf^xi Theoc. 11. 60. See also b. below, 2. Some Futures in -uaa and -iato drop -a-. Thus, IXxvvu, to drive, F. s^xa-at (iXau) i>.u, iXairtis tXxs, IXxa-si eX^ • IXaCE/v IXav • IXxffaty kXav ' viXitu, to finish, F. riXiffcn (reXecu) ts\u, TtXiffus riXus • TiXiffiiv rzXsTv • nXijODi nXaiv • Mid. TSXiire/Axi (nXiofix/) n-iXovfixt, riXtirzff6xi TsXstffPxi, TsXicro/isvos vtXoufizvoi • ^s&>, to pour, F. {^itrai) xS^t (;gsirs;s, ;j;£S/5) x^^^ ' ^^' ix^C'l^xi) Xfiojt,xi. Add xxXia, to call, /ixx'lixi, to fight, x/A(ptsyvDfii, to clothe ; all verbs in -uwvfAt ; sometimes verbs in -x^ar, ~ particularly $iSa%iii, &c. SToTE.' The contracted form of Futures in -xra, -Ua, and -fira, is termed the Attic Future, from the common use of this form by Attic writers. It is noti however, confined to them ; nor do they employ it without exception ; thus, iXxffovrxs vii. 7. 55, nxitrcvatv Cyr. viii. 6. 3. It is not found in the Optative. A similar contraction appears, in a few instances, to have taken place in other Futures ; thus, l^n/^ourt -, will you lay waste ? for i^tifiuffeTz, Th. iii. 58. 3. A few verbs, in the Future middle with an active sense, sometimes add s to -a-, after the Doric form (§ 245. 2). Thus, TrXeat, to sail, F. vXiuffofixi, oftener (f, tojlee, (ptv^ofixi and (^sopo^a;) ^sv^ovfAxi. This form of the Future is termed the Doric Future. Other examples in Attic Greek are xXx/ai, to weep, viu, to swim, vrxi^&t, to sport, mvrai, to fall, trvsar, to blow, TTvvffxvofixi, to inquire, Kemabe. a.) The Liquid, Attic, and Doric Futures, from their formation, are inflected like the Present of contract verbs (If^ 45, 46). It will be ob- served, that in a few verbs the Pres. and the Att. Fut. have the same form. b.) In a very few instances, the Fut. is in form an old Pres. (§ 178. 2) ; as, i(rSiai, to eat, F. 'itB/ixi, A. 237, Ar. Nub. 121 (in later comedy 'iioHfixi, cf. y. above) ; visu, to drink, F. mofixi, x. 1 60, Cyr. i. 3. 9 (later ■jriaufixi) ; il/ii, to go, commonly used'as Fut. of 'ig^'f^"'- ^'^ ^ '^^'V ^^^ poetic forms, which will be noticed under the verbs to which they belong. 190 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK IJ § SO 1. IV. The sign of the aorist, 1.) Becomes -s- in liquid verbs. See § 56. 2.) Is omitted in ilva (^ 53), linyxa (r. luyK-, to bear), 'i^ia (Ep. 'i^^ax) from x;!", to pour, and the poetic 'ixm (Ep. ixtix and 'ixux), from xxiai, to bum. Add the Epic liXcd/inv and iXtva/inv, N. 436, 184, 'iinnvx E. 208, ixrixrixi Heg. Op. 765. See § 185. f. 3.) Is the same with that of the Perf. in iinxx, iimxx, and kxx. These Aorists are used only in the Indicative, and rarely except in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. plur. In the middle voice, the Att. writers use only the Ind. (ixx/^m Eur. El. '622, irith the very rare Part, ttxcc/avcs, .fflschin. 72. 9. The other dialects add ihxii/iiiii, K. 31, ^nxx/nvas Find. P. 4. 52. Note. These Aorists in -xx are only euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor., after the analogy of the Perf. First the final -v (originally -ft,) passed into -X, which became a connecting vowel; and then -»- was inserted to pre- vent the hiatus (§§ 179, 186) ; thus, eVu-i' s^ti-x Uu-x-x, 'ilnxxs, Unxi, ihxxv • fiSsyv 'ihuKx, ^v viKx. This form became common only where the flexible end- ing had no vowel (cf. § 186), i. e. in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. pi. ; and was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms are found after the same analogy. The nude form disappeared in the Ind. act. sing, (cf. § 186), but was elsewhere either the sole or the common form. See \\ 50, 51, 54. B.^CONNECTING VoWELS. § 202. The connecting vowels serve to unite the flexible endings with the root or tense-sign, and assist in marking the distinctions of mode and tense. Notes, a. In each tense, that which precedes the connecting vowel (or, if this is wanting, the flexible ending) may be termed the base of the tense (lixris, foundation) ; as, in the Prea. of ^ovXivai, finuXiv- ; in the Put., (3»o- X£vir- ; in the Perf. act., fitZov\ivx-. /3. ITie regular additions, which axe made to the base in the Present and Future, are throughout the same ; as, ^ovXiv-u, P'ovXivtr-u, fiov\t6-iis, fiouXev(r lis • ^ovXiV-ojfli, {iovX£Vff~oi/n • ^ovXs^-ofixi, jiovXsvir-afixt, ^ouXiuSriff-ofAXi. § 203. I. In the INDICATIVE, the connecting vowel is -«- in the Aorist and Perfect, and -u- in the Pluperfect ; in the other tenses, it is -o- before a liquid, but otherwise -e-. Thus, A. \^ovXiVif-x-ijt.tv, iSouXsvtr-x-/it]v • Pf. ^sSouXiux-a-fitv ' Plup. iCtCeu- Xtux-zt-v • Pres. (iovXsv-o~/i£v, ^ouXe6-s-t£, (^^ovXiv-o-vffi, § 58) (iavXtvouffi ' jiav- Xiu-o~fixi, (^^ovXlv-i-xt, § 37. 4) fiouXturi, (iavXeu-e-rxi • Impf. i^avXtv-o-v, \^ov- XtU-S-S ' iQouXlU-Q-flTiV, tZoUXtV-i'TO • F. (^OVXiVlT-O-fiSV, ^OVXlVff-t-TO)) • ^OVXtVtT- o-fAiSx, fiouXnjff-Z'irSQV • {iavXtv6riff-o-fiXt. Reiviabks. X. In the Sing, of the Pres. and Fut. act. the connectives -o- and -t-, either by union with the ending, or by simple protraction, become -u- and -u~ ; as, (JiouXtu-o-//,, -o-x) fiouXtuoi, {pmuXiv-i-i) ^ovXlvus, (&ovXzvt-T, '6-s) fiovXiust • (iouXiuffu, {iovXiviTUs, ^ovXtuffit. See §§ 181. 1, 2; 183. 'H. y.J CONNECTING VOWELS. 191 li. In the 3d Pets. sing, of the Aor. and Perf. act., -i- takes the place of «- S as, (iSou>.ivff~K~T) ISovXiUiTi, ^i^ovXiUKU Sco § 181. 2. y. In the 3d Pers. pi. of the Plup., -s- commonly takes the place of -ti- NoTE. The original connective of the Plup. was -sa-, which remained in he Ion. (§ 179); as, iiSsa B. 71, Hdt. ii. 150, InHmx ?. 166, iriSWixs 1. 90, ^es B. 832, ^'Ssev 2. 404, lyiyoni Hdt. i. 11, avv^ian Id. ix. 58. The earlier contraction into -a- is especially old Attic, but also occurs in the Sp. and Dor. ; as, 1 Pers. >!S)) Soph. Ant. 18, WinvSn Ar. Eocl. 650, nt^ivn A. Ach. 10 ; 2 Pers. »iS«f Soph. Ant. 447, riSn^ix r. 93, iXeX^tis Ar. Eq. 522 ; 3 Pers. pn A. 70, Soph. (Ed. T. 1525, ixixif,, Theoc. 10. 38. By )recession (§ 29), -)i- passed into -si-, which became the common connective, md in the 3 Pers. sing, is already found in Horn, (ajismg from -is) ; as, iirn- lu 2. 557 ; so XsXoivu Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Pers. pi., -sa- became -«-, )y the omission of the a, which was only euphonic in its origin (§ 179). So, n the 2 Pers. pi., j'Sste for jSeits, Eur, Bac. 1345. § SO-l:. II. The SUBJUNCTIVE takes the connecting vowels jf the Pres. ind., lengthening -s- to -?)- and -o- to -to- (^ 177). Thus, Ind. (iitvXs6-a>, Subj. ^ouXsu-m, fiauXtvir-ai • ^ovXiu~u-s, ^ovXlv-vi-Sj ZouXiiiif~^-s • j3oyA.ey-£i, iSawXsu-jj, (iovXsvtr-^ • (iovXtv-o-/itVj fiouXiv-at-fLSv * Piou- \tu-s-rij ^ovXiV-7i-rf {[iovXs6-o-vffi, (iauX£u-ai-vtrtj § 58) jiouXtuoufflj ^ovXiVuffi' iovXev-o-fiatj ^ouXsV'U-p.aiy ^ttuXsutr-ei-fixi • ^ovXiu-i-ra-t, fiovXtv-tj-rai, (iovXtvff- §205. III. The OPTATIVE has, for its connective, I, either ilone or with other vowels (§§ 177, 184). Rule. If the Ind. has no connecting vowel, and the base 3nds in u, t, or o, then the i is followed by tj in the subjective Torms, but receives no addition in the objective. In other 3ases, the i takes before it a in the Aor., and o in the other tenses. The connective i always forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Thus, Ura-iTi-Vj iffTa-i-fitnv (^ 48), rih-iTj-v, rih-UfAnv (*{ 50), ^ovXtvh 'tj-v (^ 35), tiSo-ivj-Vy S/So-/-jWjjv (^ 51) ; fhovXt6ff-a.i-ft.tj (iovXtvff-ai-finv • ^ou- \iV-oi-fH, (iovXiu-oi-fCtiv, ^avXlvff-ot-fctj (iovXsvff-oi-finVj (havXsvHff-oi-/ilfiv • 't-oi-u.i [^ 56), ^stxvu-oi-fitt istxvv-ot-fitiiv (^ 52). Eemaeks. 1. In Optatives in -Itir, the « is often omitted in the Plur., ispecially in the 3d Pers., and also in the Dual ; as, IrTxTftsv, itrraTrs, lirrxTiv, 'trrxTTov (If 48), /iouXiuhTit (f 35). In the 3d Pers. pi. of the Aor. pass, ie longer form is rare in classic Greek {ixmufhmirxv Th. i. 38). 2. In contract subjective formSj whether Pres. or Fut., the connective at often jssumes « ; as, ^ipixi-ot-fit, contr. tpiXal-fAt or ipiXstfi-v (^ 46) ; ctyyiXoin-y 'T 41, § 56). Notes, a. The form of the Opt. in -o/>i», for -sifu, is called the Attic Op- ative, though not confined to Attic writers ; as, iyu^un Hdt. i. 89, o'lxainn rheoc. 12. 28. This form is most employed in the Sing., where it is the com- non form in contracts in -ia and -iu, and almost the exclusive form in con- racts in -« in the simple Terb (Cyr. vii. 1.36), hnt trp^m/u in compounds \xctTa.irx,ois Mem. iii. 11. 11). So «;'))» (f 56) Symp. 4. 16. /3. See, m respect to the insertion of » (e) in the Opt., § 184. 3. The Aor. opt. act. has a second form, termed JEolic, in which the con nective is that of the Ind. with u prefixed ; as, fitvkim-nx-s. See § 1 84. a § 206. IV. In the imperative and infinitive, the con- necting vowel is -De- in the Aorist, and -s- in the other tenses. Thus, jiouXsuir-a-TZj ^ovXiVtr-a-ffh, /SayXeyir-a-;, ^ov\lV(r-a~aSa.t • ^ov\lv-l~rlj Remakks. a. Before v in the Imperativej -a- takes the place of -£-, and, in the 2d Pers. sing., of -a- ; as, fiouXm-i-vro/v, ^dxive-o-i (§ 210. 2). (3. In the Infinitive of the Pres. and Put. act., -s- is lengthened to -ii (§ 183) ; as, PtQvXtu-u-v, ^ovXzvir-U'V. §@©y. V. In the PAKTiciPLE, the connecting vowel is -a- in the Aorist, and -o- in the other tenses. Thus, (jSowXeytr-a-VTs, § 109) fiovXsutrxs, {iovXlVff-Di-fJt.lvos • (JiovXlZ-o-vrs, § 109) (icvXiVbiv, {p,avXi6-o-vrira, § 132) (iovXiimuffcc, (fiauXlv-o-vr, § 63) /3fla- Xeuoy • fiavXiVtrav • (^^sSovXiVK-o-TS, §§ 112. cc, 179^) fiiSovXEVKus, (^(iiSouXsUH- e~i^ovXlU'ijija,i,i^iQiiuXiu-ft,rjv. 2.) In the Pres. and Impf. of some veris in which the char acteristic is a short vowel. These verbs are termed, from the ending of the theme, Verbs in -fii, and, in distinction from them, other verbs are termed Verbs in -co (§ 209). The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, 'iWa-ficr, "trTx-irciv ■ "iTTcc-fixi, iirra-iim (f 48). In the Inf. and Part., the connecting vowels -t- and -0- are inserted after i ; thus, t-i-vai, Q-i-uTs) wy (If 56). So, in the Imperative, livras. Cf. §§ 185. y, 205. 3.) In a few Second Perf. and Plup. forms (§ 186). The flexible endings are here affixed to the roo<; thus, eo-ra-^sv, trra-ii, iarx-vxi (^ 48). In the Part., the connecting vowel is inserted ; as, 'SiSms (T 58). So, in tlie Inf., ti^iUai, with which compare )ha.i, above. OH. 9.1 FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 193 C. Flexible Endings. ^309. The flexible endings (flexibilis, change able) are the chief instruments of conjugation, marking by their changes the distinctions of voice, number, person, and, in part, of tense and mode. They are exhibited in 1[ 31 , according to the classi- fication (^^ 195, 196). SPECIAIi EutES AHD KeMAEKS. First Peks. Sing. The ending -fi, after -a- connective, and, in primary forms ("§ 196. 1), after -o- and -co- connec- tive, is dropped or absorbed ; after -oi- and -ai-, and in the nude Present (§ 208'. 2), it becomes -/xt; in other cases, it be- comes -V ; as, (Ind. ^ovIsv-o-jm, Subj. ^avXsv-w-fi) ^ovXsv-w, fis6ovlivx-a, iSo-ilsva-a (so after -{«-, contr. -?)-, § 203. N.) ; ^ovXtva-ai-jii, ^ovXev-oi-fii, ^ovlava-oi-i4i, laTtj-jxi (^ 48) ; i6ov- Isv-o-v, d6B6ovXsvy.-si,-v, i6ovXevdr]-v, ^ovXsv&iirj-v ' qiiXolrj-v, ayyeXolri-v (§ 205. 2) ; iottj-*', iaxairi~v (fl 48). See § 181. 1. Note. T^i/paiv, for r^'K^nipi, occurs for the sake of the metre Eur. Fr. Inc. 152. §31©. Second Pees. Sing. 1. For the form -a&a, see § 182. 2. The ending -& is dropped after -s- connective ; after -a- connective, it becomes -v, with a change of -a- to -o- (§ 206. «) ; after a short vowel in the root, it becomes in the 2d Aor. a, and in the Pres. e, which is then contracted with the preceding vowel («s becoming i)) ; in other cases, it becomes -&i (see ^ 181. 3). Thus, ^ovXsv-s ' ^ovXhva-o-v • -d-s-g, S6-g, s-g (IfU 50, 51, 54) ; (laTa-s) i'oTJ), {%i&s-s) zl&si, (Si-do-s) Sidov, {dilxvv-s) Sdxvv {^S\ 48-52); cpivri&i (^42), §ovXf{i&r,xi, (§ 62), taza&i (U 48), Xa&i, dtdl&i (T[ 58), and, in hke manner, g>a&i, "r&i (Ufl' 53, 56, ^ 181. 3), and the poet. 'iXa&i Theoc. 15. 143, iTi6iivv&i Theog. 1195. Note. In composition, irrni:, lirii', and Hi (If^ 48, 56, 57) are often shortened to ffroi, jix, and el • as, cra^ximz for •Tnz^a.trryidi^ Ka.ra.Ca for xara- Stj^Ij T^oirii for -r^oTiSi. 3. The endings -aai and -ao drop the a, except in the Perf. and PIup. pass., and sometimes in the nude Pres. and Impf (§ 208. 2) ; as, {i3ovXsv-s-ai, § 37. 4) ^ovXsvrj or jSovXivii, {§ov- Xsv-s-o) ^ovXsvov, [iSovXsv-E-o) sBovXevov, (eSovXcva-a-o) sSovXsv- ata ■ ^ovXev-oi-o, ^ovXsva-ai-o ' ^eBovXiV-aai, ^s6ovXiv-ao, iStSov- Xsv-ao ■ 'ioTci-aai, laxa-ao and (iffra-o) iffioj (^ 48) ; Tl&E-ant 17 194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [boOK II and {li&e-ai.) ji&rj, {i&s-o) sdov (Tf 50) ; dido-ao and (dido o) dlSov, {Soo) dov ('^ 51). See § 182. III. Eemakks. (a) The Aor. imperat. is iiTegularly contracted ; thus, (/3oi/- XsuV-as-o) (iauKsumi. (6) The contraction of -ixi into -si (§ 37. 4) is a special Attic form, which was extensively used by pure writers ; and which, after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -y, remained in (iovXii, o'lii, and o^u. (c) In verbs in -fn, .fftti remained more frequently than -o-a, and was the common form if a or a preceded. Yet poet. iTirr^ Msch. Eum. 86, iim or Su'vi) (§ 29) Soph. Ph. 798. Further particulars respecting the use or omission of the -r- in verbs in -/ii are best learned from the tables and from observation. §211. Third Pers. Sing. The ending -t becomes -ai in the nude Pres., but in other cases is dropped, or lost in a diphthong ; as, (i'atTj-T) I'aiijai, i'otj; (^[ 48) ; cBovXivs, ^iSovXcvxe, {^ovXev-s-T, ^ovXev-s-f) ^ovhmi. See ^ 181. 2. Note. The paragogic v (§ 66), which is regularly affixed only to e and simple /, is, in a few instances, found after ~%i in the Plup., and follows n in the Impf. of lift,!, even before a consonant; thus, 3 Pers. ^iuv us (T 58) Ar. Vesp. 635, 'Mii mtiiroi (If 56) Id. Plat. 696, i'ri^cilM oux Id. Nub. 1347, icrnxiiv ainv Y. 691, g,iiXriK(i« a'lxi^'i E. 661, riv li i. 2. 3. In all these cases, the v appears to have been retained from an uncontracted form in -e(»). See § 203. N., 230. y. So Impf. iinxuv s'/^ix V. 388. § 3 1 3. First and Second Persons Pl., with the Dual. 1. The 1st Pers. is the same in the Plur. and Du., having, for its subjective ending, -[iev, and for its oijective, -/jsSa, or some- times in the poets, -^la&a ' thus, ^ovlivo-fisr, ^ovUvo-fir&u^ and poet. ^ovXEvo-fisa&a. Note. Of the form in -fiihv (§ 174), there have been found only three classical examples, all in the dual primary^ and all occurring in poetry before a vowel: -rt^i^u/Athv "^. 485, XiXi'tfcf^iSov Soph. El. 950, o^fjCutftiSov Id. Ph. 1079. Two examples more are quoted by Athenaeus (98 a) from a word- hunter (ovfljKKTa^sSgas), whose affectation he is ridiculing. 2. The 2d Pers. pl. always ends in -£. The 2d Pers. du. is obtained by changing this vowel into -ov ; and the 3d Pers. du., by changing it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -riv in the secondary, and into -uiv in the imperative. Thus, Pl. 2, ^ovXsv- fTS, dSovhviTS • Du. 2, ^ovlivstov, i6ovi.svsTov ' Du. 3, ^ovXevsTov, iSovXfvhijv, ^ovXiviriav. Remaek. In the secondary dual, the 3d Pers. seems originally to have had the same form with the 2d ; and we find in Hom. such cases as 3d Pers. ^ittiKtrov K. 364, ririv^irov N. 346, Xaipuirffirov 2. 583, ^ai^riffiTtirSov N. 301. On the other hand, the lengthening to -jjc (with which compare the lengthen- ing of the Plup. affix, § 179) was sometimes extended by the Attics even to the 2d Pers. ; as, 2d Pers. ilx'^rm Soph. (Ed. T. 1511, riXXxl^Tm Eur. Ale. 661, ivQsrm, i^iSyifiiiruv Pl. Euthyd. 273 e. § 2 1 3. Third Pees. Pl. 1. The ending -vt, in the pri <3H. 9.] FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 195 mary tenses, becomes -von. In the secondary, after -o- or -«- connective, it becomes -v ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -£>/ ; but, otherwise, -aav. Thus, {povXivovai, § 58) ^ovUvovai, ^ovXsvaovai, ^sSovlEvxaat, ^ovksvaat * laxaai, saraai. (|[ 48) ; iSovhv-o-v, i6ovXiva-tt-v ' ^ovXevjoi-sr, ^ovlsvaai-tv, ^ovksv&sl-ev ' iSsSovhiixe-aav, e6ovUvdrj-aav, ^ovXsv&elij-aav • 'iaxa-aav, Eoxtj- aav, iajaln-aav (U 48). See §§ 181, 184. (S. 2. In the Perf. and Plup. pass, of impure verls, the 3d Pers. dI. is either formed in -axai and -axo {% 60), -or, more com- monly, supplied by the Part, with elai and rtaav (^ 55) ; as, iqi&dQ-ttxai Th. iii. 13, from qj^etgro (r. q>&ag-), to waste, ys- yQa/i/ihoi, ilai, ytyqafiftivoi rjoav (^ 36). Heduhk. The forms in -arxi and -uto are termed lonio. Before these endings, a labial or palatal mnte must he rough (jp, x), and a lingual, middle (S) ; as, from r^ivu (r. rmv-), to turn, {rir^iiL^-vrui) TtT^xipxTxi PI. Eep. 533 b ; from raa-tru (r. ray-), to arrange, (riray-vrai) TiTu-x^rat iv. 8. 5, irSTa;^ara Th. vii. 4. 3. In the Imperative, the shorter forms in -vxiav and -a&mv (§ 177), which are termed Attic (§ 7), are the more common. In Homer, they are the sole forms. Note. In smua and "toiv (^% 55, 56), the old plur. form has remained without change. § 3 1 4. 1. Infinitive. The subjective ending, after -u- connective (§ 206. (S), has the form -v ; after -a- connective, -t forming a diphthong with -«- ; but, in other cases, -vai, ; as, ^ovXev-ii-ji, ^ovXsva-ii-v ' ^ovXiva-a-i " ^i6ovXsvx-f-vai, jSovXiv&rj- vai' laxa-vai, atrj-vai, taxd-rai (^"48). See §<§ 176, 183. 2. Participle. For the change of »• to a connecting vowel in the Perf. act., see § 179. For the declension of the Pan., see Ch. III., and the paradigms (IT 22). § 2 1 5. Eemakks. 1. For the eeghlak affixes of the verb, ■which are those of the euphonic Pres. and Impf., and of the regularly formed Fut,, Aor., Perf., and Plup., see f ^ 29, 30. These aiSxes are open m the Pres. and Impf., and close in the other tenses. For the affixes of the Pres. and Impf of vekes in -fn (§ 208. 2), see ff 29, 30. The affixes of the 2d Aor, act. and mid. are the same with those of the Impf. (§ 199. a), or, except in the Ind., the same with those of the Prea. (§ 169. /3). The affix- es of the other tenses denominated second (except the nude 2d Perf. and Plup., § 186) differ from the regular affixes only in the tense-sign (§ 199. II.). The Fut. Perf. or 3d Fut. has the same affixes with the common Fut. act. and mid. (§ 179). 2. Special care is required in distinguishing forms which have the same letters. In fiau^eim (1|1[ 34, 35), weremarli (besides the forms which are the same iu the Plur. and Du., § 212) the following: Ind. and Subj. fianXiua- Pnt. Ind. and Aor. Subj. ^ovXtiru ■ Ind. and Imp. HauXtuin, ficuXiiiirh ■ Ind. 196 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. CONTRACTION. [BOOK II. PI. 3, and Part. PI. Dat. ^oaXiioviri, g>ou\%iitiiviTi • Imp. PI. 3, and Part. PI. Gen. /iavXiuitrm, fiavXeuravrm, fiauXiuSUraiv ■ Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, /Bob. Xtiii, liivXivni ■ Subj. Act. S. 3, and Ind. and Subj. ffid. S. 2, /iauXii^ ■ Put Ind. Mid. S. 2, and Aor. Subj. Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, ficvXiw^ ■ Aor. Imp. g,ai\iviro», Put. Part, jhouXiurav ■ Opt. Act. S. 3, ^ouXiiirxi, Inf. Act. fiauXsunai, Imp. Mid. S. 2, jidxtufxi. 3. With respect to the changes which talce place in the root, or in the union of the affixes with the root, the tenses are thus associated : 1. the Pres. and Impf. act. and pass. ; 2. the Put. act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aor. act. and mid. ; 4. the Perf. and PIup. act. ; 5. the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; 6. the Aor. and Put. pass. It will be understood, that whatever change of the kind mentioned above takes place in one of the tenses, belongs likewise to the associated tenses, if nothing appears to the contrary. For the Put. Perf., see § 239. II. Union of thk Affixes with the Root A. Regular Open Affixes. § 21 ©. When the regular open affixes (^ 215. 1) are annexed to roots ending in a, s, or o, contrac- tion takes place, according to the rules (§^ 31 -37). See the paradigms (HH 46-47). Notes, a. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed Con- tract Verbs, or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomtna. In distinction from them, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs. See Prosody, )3. The verbs «»&», to burn, and xXoiu, to weep, which have likewise the forms xxia and xXxlu, are not contracted. DissyllabS Verbs in -iu admit only the contractions into u ; thus, •rXiu, to sail, vxius rrXtTs, ^xiti trXu, vrXiofAtv, 'TcXtiri 'rXiirt, -Trxiovffi. Except Victi, to bind; as, ro Souv, ru tovvri PI. Crat. 419 a, b. y. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -ctoi are throughout the same. See ^ 45. The contract Inf. in -ai is likewise written without the i subsc. ; thus, Ttj/Mt, as contr. from the old •nft.i.it (§§ 25. (3, 176, 183). So <^iXiii, 'inXcii may he formed from the old ipixUr, inxkr. B. Eegular Close Affixes. § 217. I. When the close affixes are annexed to a consonant, changes are often required by the general laws of orthography and euphony ; as, y^et^ea (t[ 36, root y^a..&t^HffO[/,ai (§ 52). •^gafTirei} (^ 38, r. w'^ ay-) ; cr^a^w, ^pa.^ofice6i, i'^^a.^df/.Tiv, f^ri^^a^o (§ 51); 'reiTga_;^^a (§ 61) ; ^i^^ecKreci, l^^oi^^fiVj Wi'TT^ot^hj ^iT^x^^eci (§§ 52, 60). CH. 9.] OTHER EUPHONIC CHANGES. 197 vr&iSu (^ 39, r. iTi^-, irsi^-) ; irsiVa/, iTrivstiro, etrewE/fl-^s, ^i'TsTtr^xt (§ 55) vicrsiKct (§ 6l) ; vri9niirfi.a,i, Wi'^iio'fictjy (§ 53); a-Eflre/ff'Ta/, Wsitr^nv (§ 52), ayysXXo* (^ 41, -r. ayytX-j) otyyt'kZj KfyyiXoufim, ^yyuXa,, fiyyuXa.ft.tif (§ 56) ; ^yytXh (§ 60). Remarks, a. In the liquid verbs xXiv&ij to bend, x^/vtu, to Judge, Knivat, to day, Tiiyai, to stretch, and vXvvu, to wash, v is dropped before the affixes which remain close (§ 56), except sometimes in the Aor. pass, (chiefly in po- etry for the sake of the metre) ; as, xixXi/ixi, ixXlhv and IxXUhv, T. 360, H. Gr. iv. 1. 30 ; xix^ixa, »ix^tfjt,a.t, Ix^iSm and Ep. ix^tvSvjv, N. 129. ;8. In other verbs, » characteristic, before /«, more frequently becomes (T. rga-), fo 6orc, lengthen a to »? ; as, F. XQ^^^' ^^'^'''''f-'^h '^^'nffo). 'Axoaw, to thresh, with the common F, aXajJff-iy, has also the Old-Att. a,XoeLa/, A. P. \rt0riv (§ 62). Notes, a. Verbs in •awvfti and -£vv(7/t/, and those in which the root ends 17* 198 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. ' [bOOK II. in Xi-j for the most part retain the short vowel ; as, yeXaw, to laitghj F. yi- Xao-fl^a/, A. iyiXonrett A. P. \yiXa70nv. iS. The short vowel remains most frequently before S, and least frequently before ff. In the perfect and pujperfect, it remains more frequently in the passive, than in the active voice. § 220* 2. In seven familiar dissyllables, mostly imply- ing motion, f appears to have been once attached to the root (see ^§22. 5, 117): SsiUj to run (r. ^eF-), F- (3-iFirofiai) ^iCffo^ott (B-tutru only Lye. 1119). See § 166. «. vsw, to sivim, F. nvffof^aij -ovfiiti (§ 200i 3), iv. 3. 12, A. 'ivivtrcc, Pf. vivtuxa, •^kiatj to sailj F. ^Xtva-atj commonly ^Xtuirofieti, V. 6. 12, or •rXtvirovfiaij V. 1. 10, A. 'i'prX.suffx, Pf. we?rX£uxa, Pf. P. •prt^Xivirf^iiti (§ 221). wvew, to breathe, F. ^rytva-arj Dem. 284. 17, commonly .aij to be about to, to purpose^ to delays F. fAiW^ffBo, A, l/x.ixX9j(ra ana fifAiWriffa (§ 189. 1). tppai^ to go away^ F. ipp^tratj A. vpptio'ce, Ff. TJppTjxa. ^offKcuj to pasture, to fefidj F. fiotrx^a-a}. But Xxfi^aij to shine, F. Xa^ttn/'ai, A. sXxff^aj 2 Pf. XsXa^rra • «^;t;w, to /cad, to rule, F. ^^^lu, A. «j^os, Pf. P. wgy^wos/, A. P. ti^x^^^ ' (rirEvSw, to maAe a libation^ F. (ff'srsi'J-fl'a;, §§ 55, 58) avruffu, A. ^ff-iTEifl-a, Pf. P. Qiff'^'iv^-fAotij ii are shortened, for the salce of vivacity, to «^/, m, and « ■ "thus, i?v 5' tyw, said /, Ar. Eq. 634 ; n S' oV, said he, PI. Rep. 327 b, cj '^, Ae spake, A. 219; o-ar, ^jct/, ?rosr, war, hoy! I say, boy I boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. (6) The 2 Pers. sing, of the Pres. ind. is commonly -written (fijs, as if contracted from ^as/j. For iipviffStt, in the Imp., see § 182. (c) To the forms in the table, may be added the Ep. Pres. M. PI. 2 s Mk. 1 . 34, xfiTs Eev. 2. 20, Pf. P. ifimrxi Mt, 9. 2, 5. EifiL, to be. [IT 55,] ^S30. In the Present and Imperfect of this verb, the radical syllable i-, 1.) Before a vowel, unites with it ; thus, (i-vai, i-aai, § 58) uai' (e'-m) w, (I'-JJs) rti ' {i-iriv) iirjr. 2.) Before vi, becomes o (cf. §§ 203, 206) ; thus, {t-vtg, o-vtg, § 109) coV, Imp. (I'-yiMc) oVtwv (less used than the other forms, PI. Leg. 879 b). 3.) In other cases, is lengthened, as follows. Of.) It becomes ti in the forms tt/ii, t7s, Ct, Civat (cf. §§ 218. j3, 224. E). The form J, both here and in ^ 56, is either shortened from sTf (which is not used by the Attics), or is a middle form employed in its stead. 0.) In the remaining forms of the Pres., it assumes a (compare § 221) ; OH. 9.] COMPLETE TENSES. 203 thus, E-ff-^si', E-o'-rs, 5-c^Tflv, t~ff"raij s-ir-raiffav, %-if-ruv (§ 213. N^.). After the r, the t in the Sd Pers. sing, is retained ; thus, i-r-rl. Before the (cf. § 1 79, 201. N., 211. N.). For Jo-fe, see § 182. The middle form «>>iv is little used by the more classic -writers (Cyr. vi. 1. 9). The Imp. «Vs<, which follows the analogy of the Impf., occurs but once in the classic writers (PI. Eep. 361 c), and is there doubtful. Eemaeks. a. In the Put., instead of 'irerai, the Attics always use the nude form 'iffrai. b. Some regard the root of this verb as being Ir-, and adduce in support of this view, the Lat. (esum) sum, es, est, (e)sumits, estis, (e)sunt, and the San- scrit asmi, asi, asti, &c. Eifii, to go. [1 66.] '§ 3 3 1 • (a) The Pres. of ii/n has commonly in the Ind., and some- times in the other modes, the sense of the Put. (§ 200. b); thus, Hfu, (I am going) I will go. (b) For ji's«, in the Plup., the common Attic form was &, which appears to be a remnant of the old formation noticed in § 203. N. A Perf. e7x, corresponding to this Plup., nowhere appears, and some regai'd mm (omitting the i subse.) as an Impf. doubly augmented (§ 189). For the use of titds tense, see § 233. (c) For "m/u and tsinv, see § 205 ; for itoiv, § 213. N. ; for livxi, iaiv, and levraiv, § 203. 2 ; for ^ttaSa, ^ 182 ; for ji's/v in the Sd Pers., § 211. N. ; for J^sv, J«, &o., § 237. ' (d) The middle forms n/nzi, li/ai\i are regarded by some of the best critics aa incorrectly written for 1s/iai, li/inr, from "tifu (H 54). Ketftat, to lie down. [ir 60.] § 3 3 3> (a) This verb appears to be contracted from xU/uxi, a de- ponent inflected like rihfjMt (^ 50) ; thus, Kii(jLa.t xi7fi.Btt, xisvrat xsTvrxi, xizira xiteo, xiiffSai xttitSoct, xtif^svos xit/tEvos * ixufliiy ixtifirtv ' xtitrsftat xuffofiott. In the Subj. and Opt. the contraction is commonly omitted ; thus, xia/ixi, CEc. 8. 19, »£a/^>iv, iv. 1 . 16, like •nSaji.a.i (also accented rilu/titi) and Tihi- /^m • yet xiirai (also written xiTtxi), for x'mrxi, T. 32, /3. 102. (4) The Subj. sometimes retains the form of the Ind. (§ 177) ; as, Subj. 'Siaxuf/.xi PI. Phasdo, 84 e. (c) We find the following forms in the dialects, some of which have the shorter root xs- : Pres. S. 2 xt7a,i Hom. Merc. 254, S. 3 xUrxi Hdt. vi. 139, PI. 3 xUsTxi X. 510, xilxrxi fl. 527, xiarxi A. 659, Hdt. i. 14; Impf. PI. 3 Ixslxra Ap. Eh. 4. 1295, xbIxto and Xirrvixat • Opt. lirraim (poet.) 5 Imp. Xirrci-Si (poet.) Ar. Av. 206 ; Inf. Urttai iv. 7. 9 ; Part. Ep. iirra,-iis, -ens T. 79 (also IrTnas Hes. Th. 519), commonly contr. imis (t 22. 8) i. 3. 2, (irra-'o-'rircL) iirTSrx, (io-Ta- o-s) ifTdis and sometimes, by syncope, irro; PI. Parm. 146 a, Ion. ijTiiis . (§ 48. 1), -aras Hdt. ii. SS ; also Urnxais PI. Meno, 93 d. Plup. Sing, iirrri- xuv or eiVTJjKfi/i*, -eig, -£/, JPl. iirra-fisv, 'iffra-ri, 'iiTTx-a-av i. 5. 13 (Itrr^xttrxv Cyr. viii. 3. 9). S-v^ffKot, to die (r. ^a»-, ha-, § 64), Pf. Ind. SiTig. rihtjxK (base reha~, Tihtix-), -xs, -I, PI. TiSmfii)! PI. Gorg. 492 e, rihxrt, nhxti iv. 2. 17, Bu. nhxTcy iv. 1. 19 ; Subj. rih^xai, Th. viil. 74 ; Opt. rihx'mv, Cyr. iv. 2. 3 : 18 206 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK II. Imp. nSmii X. 365, nhdrui PI. Leg. 933 e, &c. ; Inf. rthavai Mem. i. 2. 16, rshtjxUai Soph. Aj. 474, and Poet. {Tsdvcc-i-vui) rs^vZvai JEsoh. Ag. 539 ; Part, rihnxiis (fem. S. 734), Tiha.-iis, Find. Nem. 10. 139, commonly contr., with £ inserted (of. §§ 35, 48. l), nhia;, -Sirx, -ai or -is, vU. 4. 19, r. 331, Kp. Tihniis or Ttlmiis, -ires or -Ztos, a. 289, P. 435. PIup. Sing. inSn- Kiia, -SIS, -SI, PL iTihxfiSt, -ri, -rxv H. 6r. Ti. 4. 16. Pf. Ind. Sing. 'Si'Stixcc Cyr. i. 4. 12, and iiiix Soph. (Ed. C. 1469 (If 58 , base SiJ;-, isimx-), iiSeixxs and SsSins;, SsSoixs and iiSis ■ PI. isiifisy Th. iii. 53, WSiTs, (SeSj^o-/, § 58) isSiari PI. Apol. 29 a ; Subj. SsS/'^ ■ Imp. isSiti Ar. Vesp. 373 ; Inf. hhUxi (§ 208. 3) Rep. Ath. 1. II, and SsSMxwai Ear. Sup. 548 ; Part, ishiis PI. Prot. 320 a (contr. or sync. SsiSwav Ap. Eh. 3. 753), and isiaixus Eur. Ion, 624. Plup. Stnjr. ihislxsiv PI. Charm. 1 75 a, and i^s^Uiv, -SIS, -SI • PI. eSiSijfAEv, eMS/ri, IVtSia'av PI. Leg. 685 c Q.^s'Soixstrav iii. .5. 18). Pf. Ind. Sing. cTSa (t 58 ; base iS-, aiS-), oTo-tf)T£ vii. 7. 6, ^srxv Cyr. iv. 5. 55, sometimes Ion. Jo-av r. 445, Hdt. ii. 163.' §238. In the following examples, the nude forms are chiefly poetic, and, in part, Epic only'. a. Pure, a^itrraai, to dine ; Pf. Pi. 1 vt^iffrSfiSv Ar. Pr. 428, Inf. fi^nrTuyai Ath. 423 a. In imitation of these comic forms, we find also, from 'ismnu, to sup, ^I'Ssiwya/ist and "Sihsiirvtyxi Ath. 422 e, Ar. Fr. 243. liaivtii, to go; Pf. li'sStixx (r. /Jo:-), 2 Pf PI. poet. lUSx/tsv, /HSxtc, ^sSdSiri B. 134, /3£eS,r,v Soph. El. 1386 ; Subj. PI. 3 {isSSiri PI. Phsedr. 252 e ; Inf. fisSiyai Eur. Heracl. 610, Hdt. iii. 146 ; Part. Ep. fisSxdi;, -via., -Zns, E. 199, n. 81, Att. contr. /SsWs, -Zsa., -Zns, Soph. Ant. 67, 996, (Ed. C. 314, H. Gr. vii. 2. 3, PI. Phsedr. 254 b. 2 Plup. PI. KiUfi.ty, -xrs, -urx.af£S» (Ep. for TSrXayasi) y. 209 ; Part. riTXncas, -v7a^ -OToSt <-. 23, E. 873. /3. Impctre. In the nude forms of the first four verbs mentioned below, r passes into 9-, after the analogy either of the 2d Pers. sing., or of the objective inflection. avuyx, to command, poet, preteritive, Fl. ave^yftiv Horn. Ap. 528 ; Imp. amys Eur. Or. 119, and xvap(;iili. Ale. 1 044, iiayirm /3. 1 95, and {xtiiiyTu) itax^ai A. 189, PI. imyirs i^. 132, cimxti Eur. Here. 241. K^a^&ij commonly 2 Pf KSK^aya, to cry ; Imp. xix^a^^i Ar. Vesp. 1 98, PI. asx^aysTi lb. 415, and Kziir^itxh Ar. Ach. 335. lyzi^ai, to rouse; 2 Pf. ly^viyo^a. . Imp. PI. 2 iy^vjyo^h 2. 299 ; Inf. sygjj- yo^Sxt (as if from \yariyop[ji.ai) K. G7. TTAtr^ai, to suffer; 2 Pf. crgsran^a, /"/. 2 (srEfrov^re, crsiravfl'TS, § 52, ^iiroffrit § 55) sTEa-air^s r. 99, ». 465. i'sixss, to te like, pret. (base £?;£-, Uix-, §§ 191. 3, 236. l), PI. trag. £«j//is» Soph. Aj. 1239, J)u. Ep. eixrou S. 27, Plup. Iixt>i» A. 104. ^SX'f^'! '" <""»«>■ 2 Pf. sXigXi/^KC, Ep. PZ. 1 iiXriXauliiSv (§ 47. N.) y. 81. ^i^aitx, to trust (^ 39 ; base iri'^iS-, iti'Xul-, vstraiS-, § 236. 1) ; Imp. trag. ^imirii Msch. Eum. 599 ; Plup. Ep. PI. 1 i.^imi/i.iv B. 341. ^339. V. Future Perfect, or Third Future. The Fut. Perf. unites the hose of the Perf. with the c^xes of the b'ut. act. and mid. ; as, (sffT^jx-aw, fl 48) aaTiJfo), {ysyQacf-aofiai, i, 36) Yeygaipojiat. RsMAitKS. 1. The Fut. Perf. is scarcely found in Kjasd verbs, or in verba beginning unth a vowd (^upv^irstr^oii Pind. Kem. 1. 104, il^yisjifixt, ^ 53, Cyr. vii. 1 . 9), and is frequent in those verb? only in which it has the sense of the common future (§ 233). 2. (a) Of the Fat. Perf. act., the only examples in Attic prose are Io-th'Isj and nhitfj, both formed from Perfects having the sense of the Pres., 'Uthxx and Tihtixx (§§ 233, 237), and both giving rise to middle forms of the same signification (§ 166. 2), Itrr'^^ofiai and T£^vji|o/*at/. (6) Other examples of a redupUcated Fut. in the active voice are •riTii^isa Ar. Pax, 381, and the Ep. axet^ncru, Hom. Merc. 286, xixo^'/i '^' ^56), all from verbs which have redupUcated 2 Aorists (§ 194. 3). (c) Other examples of the Fut. Perf. mid, with the Perf. ctct., are xixXayycK, xixXay^o/jcitt Ar. Vesp. 930, KZx^xya, xsxpa^ofiai Ar. Ran. 265, xixn^x, xixcCHiteiuii, 0. 353. (d) An example of a redupli- cated Put. mid. with a reduplicated 2 Aor. is ^rifiSwci^ai, 0. 215. § 24:©. VI. The student will observe, in respect to the complete tenses, the following particulars, which are far more striking in the Act. than in the Pass, voice (§ 256) ; 1. their defective formation ; 2. the entire want of these tenses in many verbs ; 3. the comparative infrequency of their use ; and 4. their more frequent occurrence in the later than in the earlier writers. 308 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK II. DIALECTIC FORMS. A. CoNTKAOnON. § S 4: 1 . Forms which are contracted in the Att. (and wliich are also commonly contracted in the Dor., but often -with a different vowel of contrac- tion) more frequently remain uncontracted in Ion. prose, while the Ep. has great freedom in the employment of either uncontracted, contracted, or variously protracted forms. Here belong. Contract Verbs in -aw, -sw, and-oea (§ 216), the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. (§ 200), the Aor. Pass. Subj. (§ 199), the Subj. of Verbs in -/u (§ 226), and the 2d Pers. Smg. in -xi and -c (§ 210. 3). In these forms, the first vowel is either (I.) a, (II.) s or Ji, or (III.) '• Of these, s or u is far the most frequently uncontracted. § 2^2m I. The first vowel cc. (a.) In the Ion., the « is commonly contracted or changed into s ( § 44. 2) ; and when a with an O vowel is con- tracted into a, E is often inserted (§ 48. 1, cf. § 35). Thus we find, as va- rious readings, o^mvtss, o^iovrsst and o^'eaivTse, Hdt. i. 82, 99. So eu^aiftet/ i. 120, ai^ief/,tv ii. 131, ;tga(r^ai vii. 141, ^^aSm (§ 33. a) i. 47, ;^;ges(r^a* 157, l^pioivTo 53, ;tgew (for ^^aov) 155, ifitjp^itvittTo (for ifiyj^ccvaovrof one e dropped ; see §§ 243. 2, 248, /) v. 63 ; Subj. of Verbs in -/u, tuKaiinSa. iv. 97, 2 Aor. xriofisv or xTiaifisv X' 216, for xTaw^sv, contr. nraifiiv (see also b. below). NoxE. In the 2 Pers., the termination -as commonly remains ; as, ixs«- axo Hdt. i. 117, Wiirrxo vii. 209. (b.) In the Ep., protracted forms are made by doubling the vowd of con- traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, or its corresponding short vowel, commonly o with w, and a with <£, § 48) ; and sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly s used for a to si ; as, o^«ft/, contr. o^Bj r. 234, protracted o^ou E. 244, o^oius o^as A. 202, o^aas H. 448, o^aay opuv E, 872, o^oav A. 350, c^oaiffxt A. 9, o^aTSat X. 156, oQKatr^ai IT. 107, o^flWTS A. 347, avriMtiffav A. 31, air^otXaa B. 293, a(r;^aXa- av 297, ifjcvcooiTO 686, yiXittivns tf, 40, yiXuovris 111, aXou (Imp. for kXaaUj •d) £. 377 ; fitcixirSxi a,. 39, /aioimui N. 79 (^e»o/»eo» M. 59), l^ciuti c. 324; t^&totfit 317, TiStuoifAi H. 157 (tiSwfct 133), (^vaso, fAvciov, fivu) fivuto Ap. Eh. 1. 896, vxnrxiiir^ T. 387 ; /iivamyri 0. 82, for /amiyiiri, xi^an I. 203, for xEjas- Att. Fat. 'Uos/o-i N. 315, Ji.'319, IXaav £. 290 (see § 200. 2); xfE^aiu H. 83 : 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -^i, o-tjiji! P. 30, irrfiy E. 598, fTile/isv 0. 297 (o-TEia^£» A. 348), o-rwo-/ P. 95, o-TjisTw jS-T«(. Tet "k&txi Hes. Sc. 101, for Stxi (a being resolved into ax, § 29). 2. We also find in Ion. prose, in imitation of the Ep., xnfilun Hdt. iv. 191, riyo^oa/vTo vi. 11. So Dor. xofioavn Theoc. 4. 57. (c.) The Dor. sometimes contracts x with an O sound following into S ; and commonly x with an U sound following into » (§ 45. 1, 4) ; as, mvxvTi Theoc. 15, 148, tixTsivxfie; Ar. Ach. 751 ; 1 Aor. Sing. 2 Itx^x Theoc. 4. 28, for iTtyi^xo, -u, >]^x At. Ach. 913; roXfi^s Theoc. 5- 35, X^s 64, o^tjrt 1 10, ^yjir Ax. Ach. 778, £j 346. 1. For -SI- connective, the Dor. and .ffiol. sometimes employ -»- (§ 44. 4); as, UiXwix Theoc. 29. 4, for UiXtis, liffiti 11. 4, for iii^uti, aym Sapph. 1.19. For the Dor. forms in -ss and -e», see § 183. N. 2. The Dor. and Mo\. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel of the Pres. (§ 185), especially in the Inf. ; as, SeSo/xik Theoc. 15. 58, for ViSiii- XX, ^urMsfis 10. 1 (see 1. above), iiriirn 5. 7, mvolhi 5. 28 ; Inf. 'Siitxin CH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 211 I. 102, yiyxxsit Find. 0. 6. 83, Tsivaxm Sapph. 2. IS; Part. x6;t;i.aSii»To!5 Pind. P. 4. 318, vKf^txnTxs 325. Instances likewise occur in the Ep. of the Perf. passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into that of the Impf. ; as, KixX:n'yii«rxs M. 1 25, l^^yovrt Hes. So. 228 ; l/iiiitixsv i. 439, IsrsJCxo* Hes. Th. 152. Note. In this way new verba arose, not confined to the Ep. ; as, from ayaiyx, imyai, to order, 0. 43, A. 287, Hdt. vii. 104, Impf. tlvayav I. 578 {iiviiyiav H. 394), P. xviu^ia it. 404, A. ijtcii^x, Hes. So. 479 ; from olkixx, oXix.li, to destroy, 1. 172, A. 10, Soph. Ant. 1286 ; from y'iyma, ysyairiai and ytyaiyltrxu, to cry aloud. 3. Iq the Subjunctive, the Ep. often retains the old short connective (§ 177), for the sake of the metre; as, xysi^o/iKi A. 142, ?0|Ksv, iys!ia/iit B. 440, iptiiiiiirlx 3. 87, ^SUtxi T. 173, eiSo^sv A. 363, s'/Ssts 0. 18. 4. In the following poet, diiefly Ep. forms, the connecting vowel is omitted ; as.) Of Pm'e Verbs, xvim, to accomplish ; Impf. ^vun s. 243, "SvHn Theoc. 2. 92, "Zti/iis 7. 10. l^vat. Ion. and Poet, il^vu, to draw. Mid. to draw to one^s self, to protect ; Act, laf. e'l^vfisiixi Hes. Op. 816; Mid. t'juTa; Ap. Eh. 1208, il^txrai A. 239, Efffo-o X. 507, i'j5T3 A. 138, ei'jSro II. 542, i^mra Theoc. 25. 76, 6"jo»ti! M. 454, s^wixi s. 484, i'/^vfixi ■v^. 82 ; Pass, ^vth Hes. Th. 301 ; from the shorter puo/ixi, effiJTo Soph. CEd. T. 1352, fixm 2. 515, furiai 0. 141 ; Iter. puffxtv li. 730. eivu, to shake, trturai Soph. Tr. 645. ifvBvTxi, he tahes his stand, purposes, F. 83, trnvvTat ^sch. Pers. 49, o'viuro B. 597, X. 583. Tayvoj, to stretch; vavHTai P. 393. /3.) Of Impure Verbs, 'i^m, comm. ir^lu, to eat; Inf. 'iS/mai A. 345. XsivM, to leave; Impf. 'iXii'TTo Ap. Eh. 1. 45. trivia, to lay waste. Inf. Pass. {^i^i-aSai, § 60) •ri^iai II. 708. ^sg«, to bear; Imp. ^e^re I. 171. (fuX&aacii, to watch (r. (puXax-) ; Imp. !r^ii-(puXaxh (cf. § 238. /3) Hon^. Ap. 538. D. Flexible Endings. §'247. a. 2d Fers. Sing, (a) For the form .irC«, see § 182. II. (6) For unoontracted, variously contracted, and protracted objective forms, see § 243. (c) The Ep. sometimes drops it in the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; as, fiifivtixi O. 442, contr. /iifivif O. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, jiiSx.tixi E. 284, JVitot n. 585. (rf) On the other hand, in the S. S., we find iriiv Lyo. 21, nXla^m LXX. Ps. 79. 1, 'iSAialJirm Eom. 3. 13. So, in the Opt., tl-ffaisttv Ps. 35. 25, ^owata-xv Dent. 1. 44, for eiVo/sv, ^at^a-txisv (d) Pare instances occur in the poets of -cciri in the Perf. with a short penult (of. § 45. 5) ; thus the old reading X£A.oy;);Si», -Hnv), cf. §§ 44. I, 243. c. /3. § 24:9. e. Iterative Form, The Ion., especially the Ep., to express with more emphasis the idea cf repeated or continued action, often prolongs the flex, endings of the Impf. and Aor., in the sing, and the 3d Pers. pi., to -irxov, -Txss, ~trxs(v)j -trxov in the subjective injlection, and to ~iixofji.vjv, -axm (-ly, -ow), -irxsro, -trxsvTo in the objective. This form, which is called the itera- tive (itero, to repeaC) is likewise used by the Dor. poets, and sometimes in lyric portions by the tragic. " It sometimes appears to be used for metrical effect, rather than for special emphasis. It commonly wants the augment. Thus, Impf. 'i^tirxDv, I wcLS in the habit of carrying, N. 257, 'ix^irxEs E, 472, izi^xt 126, Hdt. vi. 12, 1*1. 3 'ix^rxsv S. 627, for ij^"' -^s> -h -", u(px'mtTxiv, she kept weaving, /3. 104, xXXmaxtv 105, ■xiii.iricxi, jVs/tiTEMov Hdt. i. 100, CH. 9.j DIALECTIC FORMS. 213 ^sjsirx! Theoo. 25. 138, ^xvsa-xs Soph. Ant. 963, /ixxi(rxtn H. 140, sreXso-xw X. 433, IftKryirxotTD v. 7, Z,mtii!Xiri> E. 857 ; 2 Aor. "Sso-xs T. 2 1 7, Aaf ems Hdt. iv. 78, JXafsiTxov 130, Juo-xsv 0. 271, yiiUxin X. 208, oXiirxsTc 586, 1 Aor. (only poet.), o-rjs^^ao-xov 2. 546, cSirxirxs X. 599, /irturdrxiTa A. 566 Notes, (a) That the connecting vowel before -m- is i rather than o, follows from § 203. (6) Before -yx-, a short vowel remains, and t takes the place of u; as, (rr&axii V. 217, for eVt» (r. crx-), Vaaxot I. 331, avitirxe Hes. Th. 157, for avln, (pi.i%(rxi have a contract form in -Tifiivai ; as, (jyooL-iv) yofifisyat S. 502, veiv^fjisvut v. 1 37, xaXji^Eval K. 125, crevM/^tvai ff. 174, from ^^caw, ^TE^vaor, xaXgw, VivSiaj, Yet (ae^Eva/) "ufievai (X>. 70. In ay;v£^Eva/ i/. 213, from ayjvea/, and a^ofifisveti Hes. Op. 22, from ajo/a, the connecting vowel is omitted. g. Participle. For the .fflol. contraction into ai and m in the Part., see § 45. 5 ; thus, xl^mis Ale. 27, pi^x:; Find. F. 1. 86, ^^i^xira 8. 37, ^ii%xi- ex Sapph. 1. 9, ?;c"""» 77(76), Pmd. P. 8. 4, Theoc. 1. 96. For the Fem. -Dvcra, the Laconic 'uses -wx ', as, ixXi^Sa, xXsSx, d-z/^traS^wav (§ 70. V.), for IxXivturx, xxUuaa, du^i>x%i>uirm, Ar. Lys. 1297, 1299, 1313. So Mwa 1293 (§ 45. 5). E. Vekbs in -fu. § 25 1. 1. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the forms with a connecting vowel (§ 225), especially in the Pros. sing, of verbs whose characteristic is s or o ; as, Tiiiis Find. P. 8. 14, nSu x. 192, Hdt. i. iil4 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II 133, SiSsrs I. 164, SjWSIQ, Hdt. i. 107 ; IfrS lb. ir. 103, Imp. xxfiimt I. 202; jTjo^iow; (unredupl., for T^oniiHiri) A. 291 ; 2 Aor. Opt. r^ciriliiin Hdt. i. S3 ; Inf. irijm7> Theog. 565, J;S^» (§ 244. a) Theoc. 29. 9. 2. On the other hand, the .fflol.. Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -,«; in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in -a ; as, xxXn/ii Sapph. 1. 16, S^ti/u 2. 11, (pixn/ti 79(23), antiin Hes. Op. 681, tixn- jKi Theoc. 7. 40, for xxXiai, o^xai, &c. ; aiiix'>'h ?%""■'> li(lhri t. Ill, 112, for ivi^ii, &c. (unless rather Subj. Smixv"' ^■) I f'smxi B. 107. 3. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another os to s (of. 242. a), and sometimes inserts e before a (§ 48. 1) ; as, (Irraeiin, § 58) UrkRirt Hdt. v. 71, tmicirxi (§ 248. /), lirrixirc Hdt. iv. 166. So, in the nude Perf., 'nrrixin Hdt. i. 200, irrixTi v. 49. 4. The Ep. sometimes differs from the common language in the length of the characteristic vowel (§ 224) ; as. Inf. rM/nyxi 'V. 247, iiiomxi ii. 425, ^iuym/iiv n. 145, for rifeviu, &c. ; Part. niri/iiMv K. 34 ; Imp. "Xriii, iliaSi y. 380 (so nude Perf. eo-tjits A. 243, 246, for 'Ura.ri) : 2 Aor. fmita.i M. 469, (Jarnv A. 327, for Kjirav, &c. 5. For the Impf. iriint and «», the Ion. has Wiha, Hdt. iii. 155, and »« /3. 313, unaugmented ?« A. 321, Hdt. ii. 19. So ta; Hdt. i. 187, hi A. 381, fcrs Hdt. iv. 119, Uam ix. 31. Cf. §§ 179, 201. N, 252. b. § 959. 6. Diakctie forms of il/i'i, to be (t 55). (a) Those which arise from different modes of lengthening the radical syllable (§ 230. 3) : i/ifi! Theoc. 20. 32, Sapph. 2. IS, iriri (i assumed after the analogy of the other persons) A. 176, Theoc. 5. 75, S. 3 brl (v inserted instead of »■) Id. 1 . 17, s'lfiii E. 873, Hdt. i. 97 ; Inf. v/m (for which some give the form wpn, cf. 5 70. 3) Theoc. 2. 41. (6) Uncontracted forms, and forms like those of verbs in -a>: 'idm B. 125, '{a A. 119, Hdt. iv. 98, 'l^a-i B. 366, 'iam I. 140, Hdt. i. 155, 'ius I. 284, 'iai 142, Hdt. vii. 6, iw» B.'27, Hdt. i. 86, UZia. T. 159, Xiiirx Pind. P. 4. 471, Theoc. 2. 64, iZ(m 76, (^l-mrx, § 58) %xirx or 'ix(r(rx Tim. Locr. 96 a, iov A. 762, euvt-oi Theoc. 2. 3. (c) Variously pro- tracted forms : hi (1 P.) A. 762, (3 P.) B. 642, Hdt. vii. 143, 'hs Theoc. 19. 8, 'iwect. X. 435, m» A. 808, ei'a T. 47; Impf. iter. (§ 249. 6), JV»o« (1 P.) H. 153, (3 P.) Hdt. 1. 196, i«s lb., E. 536, iEsch. Pers. 656. (d) Middle forms: eVo, commonly 'Uso a.. 302, Sapph. 1. 28, ilxra v. 106 (for %iTo, cf. S. 1 ^i^tjiv • others read ilat,rii, Ep. for hra from Siftxi). («) Old short and unaugmented forms : \ft,U Call. Fr. 294, '/(ran A. 267, Pind. P. 4. 371, iVrav Id. O. 9. 79. (/) For J; II. 515, Hdt. vii. 9, see § 230. a.; for P. 3 U-ri Pind. 0. 9. 158, Th. v. 77, Theoc. 5. 109, § 181. « ; for £«, fc eas, «s(i'), furs, 'ixaxi, § 251. 5 ; for Jo-/ T. 202, and 'iyiri, § 181. ;8 ; for I'lwSx Theog. 715, Jjio-fe, § 182; for sT^e;, ^insj Theoc. 15. 9, ri/tis 14. 29, § 247. b ; for Impf. S. 3 (-J^t) « Theoc. 2. 90, § 230. y ; for Inf. s>" ^■ 299, £>£v«/ r. 40, ififiii Pind. 0. 5. 38, Theoc. 7. 28, Soph. Ant. 623, 'l/t,- fmai A. 117, Sapph. 2. 2, «j«£y Theoc. 2. 41, tif/,tv (for .which some write sT^stf, cf. a above) Th. v. 79, Tim. Locr. 93 a, tlfisvat or tifctvxt At. Ach. 775, § 250. b; for 'ia-iTD/ixi A. 267, imrsrai A. 164, .ffisch. Pers. 121 (sVsra/ A. 211). § 71 ; for 'Uixt A. 563, iVirsoM 2. 95, § 243 ; for Im/^ Theoc. 10, 5, Xtiirxi Eur. Iph. A. 782, iircurxi B. 393," Theoc. 7. 67, itromra,i Th. v. 77, § 245. 2. 7. Dialectic Forms of sT^i, to jro {^ 5&). (a) The protraction of ? to ii (§ 224) likewise appears in P. 3 eT« (or Jo-/, or perhaps s/V/' from s?^/, fo ie) CH. 10.] KOOT OF THE VERB. 215 Hea. So. 113, Theog. 116, ilu only Sophr. 2 (23), im (by some ascribed to si>i', toie) |. 496, SI. 139, siVoiitoij S. 8, E/Varo A. 138, UlimTii 0. 415, iti- ricrint 544. (b) In the Impf., we find both nude fonns and forms with a connecting vowel, from the root /-, both unangmented, doubly augmented (§ 189), and doubly augmented with contraction; thus, (m, cf. 251. 5) ma (from which may be formed by contr. the Att. ^x, § 231. 6) J. 427, Hdt. i. 42, !?;•£ A. 47, Hdt. i. 6S, fs M. 371, J's B. 872J jiVsv x. 251, '/mv A. 494, tf/rav K. 1 97, Hdt i. 62, i'iiv •v^. 370, iV>i» A. 347'. (c) The Opt. is/x (only T. 209) is formed, as if from the root is- (cf. § 231. d). (d) The Inf. "im Ath. 580 c, is the regular nude form, (e) For sTs see § 230. x ; for sTir^oi K. 450, iyfo K. 67, § 182; for "jn I. 701, § 181. /3 ; for IV" B. 440, § 246. 3 ; for 1/iit A. 170, Find.' O. 6. 108, 'l/iimi T. 32, '//i/itmi 365, § 250. b. F. Perfect PAKTicrpiiE. ^ 2o3. 1. In Perf. Participles ending in -lis pure, the Ep. more frequently lengthens the preceding vowel ; and the Part, is then declined in -aTos or -uros, according to the metre. If the preceding vowel remains short, the form in -ams is commonly required by the metre. Thus, fitix^tiin; y. 139, xexfinoTus A. 801, xtK/^ijaJra x. 31. See, also, §§ 237, 238. 2. In some fern, forms, the antepenult is shortened on account of the verse , as, XsXaxuTa fA. 85 {XiXvjKus X. 141), fj!,ifia.Ku1at A. 435 (jttfivtxui K, S62), ifia^vtas P. 331, Ti^aKvToty I. 208. CHAPTER X. EOOT OP THE TEEB. i^ 3 5 4:. The root of the Greek verb, although not properly varied by inflection, yet received many changes in the progress of the language. These changes affected the different tenses unequally, so that there are but few primitive verbs in which the root appears in only, a single form. Note. The earlier, intermediate, and later forms of the root may be termed, for the sake of brevity, old, middle, and neto roots. The final syllable of the earliest form of the root is commonly short ; and the oldest roots of the language are mon- osyllabic. § 255, The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the degree in which they exhibit the departure of the root from its original form, in the following order. I. The Second Aorist and Second Future. Eemakks. a. The 2d Aor. act. and ntid. is simply the Smjif. of an old root 816 ROOT OF THE VERB. [bOOK li (§ 178. 2) ; thus Skmn and iXiwc/tyit (f 37) are formed from the old root Xir-, in precisely the same way as i'xsiiraj and sXe/iro/iav from the new root Xiir-. /3. The 2d Aor. and Fut. pass, are chiefly found in impure verbs which want the 2d Aor. act. and mid. They affix -m ^nd -viiroittu (§ 1 80) to the sim- plest form of the root. y. These tenses (except the nude 2 Aor. act., § 224. 2) have commonly a short syllable before the affix (§ 254. N.). S, In a few verbs, the original root appears to have received some change even in the 2 Aor. ; chiefly, in accordance with the prevailing analogy of the tense, to render the root monosyllabic, or its last syllable short (§ 254. N.), or to enable it to receive the nude form (§ 227. (3). ^ 25G. 11. The Perfect and Pluperfect Passive. These tenses have not only a more complete, uniform, and simple formation than the Perf. and Plup. act. (§§ 179, 186, 235), but are likewise more common, and are formed in some verbs (see TQscpoi, % 263, (p&dQui, § 268, &c.) from an earlier root. III. The Perfect and Pluperfect Active. For the van ous formations of these tenses, see §§ 179, 186, 234 - 238. IV. The First Aoeist and Future. V. The Present and Imperfect. These tenses, with very few exceptions, exhibit the root in its latest and most pro- tracted form. § 257. Eemabks. 1. The 2 Aor. and 2 Fut. are widely distin- guished from the other tenses by their attachment to the original form of the root ; while the Pres. and Impf. are distinguished no less widely by their in- clination to depart from this form. The other tenses difier comparatively but little from each other in the form of the root. If the verb has three roots, they are commonly formed from the middle root. See, for example, ^a/iSxva (§ 290). 2. Many verbs are DEFECrrvE, either from the want of a complete forma- tion, or from the disuse of some of their forms. In both cases, the defect is often supplied by other verbs having the same signification (§ 301). In the poets, especially the older, we find many fragments of verbs belonging to the earlier language. These occur often in but a single tense, and sometimes in only a single form of that tense ; as, 2 A. S. 3 i'Jjajjs, rartg, A. 420, SsaTo (r. Ssa-), appeared, ^. 242, 1 A. lnu^ainnv, breathed, X. 467, X/y^s, twanged, A. I 25, Pf. J*t. xExa^jjarfl!, gasping, E. 698. 3. On the other hand, many verbs are redtoto^vut, either through a double formation from the same root, or the use of forms from different roots. It should be observed, however, that two or more forms of the same tense, with few exceptions, either, (a.) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition ; thus, xTilvu, and later x,ovtria, A. '^>.9yj-a, Pf. P. XE>.0i;^a:/, A. P. £>.flu^»)i' ' COntr. from Ep. >.o£6<, S. 252, F. ^osra, &c. From the old r. Xo-, we have the Ep. Impf. or 2 A. \ii x.. 361, Xin Horn. Ap. 120, Mid. Inf. >.iiir6xi or XcU^xi Hes. Op. 747 ; and from the same root, or from Xou- with the omission of the connecting vowels, are the common shorter forms of the Impf. act. and Pres. and Impf. mid. ; as, (for IXoofitv or iXavofiiv) IXovfAtv Ar. PI. 657, Xavfiai, XhZtxi Cyr. i. 3. 11, XmaSxi Z,. 216. §361. 3. Some roots are syncopateb in the theme, chiefly in cases of reduplication ; as, (r. yiyev-, ytyv-) ylyvofiai,, ninTW, fiifivta {% 286) : others in the 2d Aor. (§ 255. d) ; as, (r. iysQ-, iyg-) ^ygoiitjv (§ 268), riX&ov {% 301. 3), Ep. defect, (r. Tifi-) iiiTjiov (I 194. 3), found : others in other tenses ; as, KxXiai, to call, F. KaXis-M, xxXa (§ 200. 2), A. IxaXsrrcc, Pf. (r. kxXs-, xXe-) xixXuxa, Pf. P. xixXnf-txt, F. Pf. xixX^vofixi, Ar. Av. 184, A. P. IxX^- ^t]v (ixaXiirSviv, Hipp.). Poet., xixXrurxu JEsch. Sup. 217, ir^a-^aiXi^o^ai, r. 19. liiXu, to concern (§ 222. 2) ; Ep. Pf. P. lii/iiXtrxi, -ich, T. 343, Plup. iB£^eX6To *. 5 1 6. See §§ 64. 2, 222. a. Note. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they are best referred to syncope, or to metathesis with, in some cases, contraction ; thus, (r. xaXi-, xXxi-, xXn-) xixX'/jxx. % 363. 4. In some roots, metathesis takes place, chiefly by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs, (a) in the theme; as, ^Xdaxa, &vi^axco, &Qaiaxa (§281): (J) in the 2(2 Aor. (% 255. S) ; as, lazV (§ 227. /?), ixlnv {% 301. 2), ISqu- xov (§ 259. a), tuQu&ov (§ 288) : (c) in other tenses ; as, §i- Glrixa, i6Xi^&7]v, xsxiirjxa (§ 223). § 363. 5. A few roots are changed to avoid a double ASPIRATION (§ 62) ; as, •r^ifiu (r. ^^x(P; Sfsp- § 259, rjaf -, r^iip-), to nourish (Old r^xfai, Pind. P. 4. 205), F. ^•{£^;.s;, A. 'iS^f^x, Pf. TlT^oipx, Pf. P. niix/t/ixi, 1 A. P. y^il^^ay, commonly 2 A. P. ir^xfm. Ep. 2 Aor. intrans. or pass. ETjaf ov, E. 555, Pf. ffvv-'iT^oipi Hipp. Note. See, also, i^u (§ 300), Satr™, SfuV™ (§ 272), ^iai (§ 219), CH. 10.] EUPHONIC AND EMPHATIC CHANGES. 219 •^i^X" (§ 30l)> '""'Pia (§ 270). A few other roots have both aspirated ana unaspirated forms ; as, -rvx- and rvx- (§§ 270. 9, 285, 290), xotS. and jtaS- (§ 275. f); ■^ixai, to cool, F. ■•i'u^ia, &o., 2 A. P. 'f^ivym, Ar. Nub. 151, and i^ixih .fflsch. Er. 95. 6. In a few cases, a consonant is dropped or added for the sake of euphony or the metre ; as, IdGo), to pour out, Ep. uGia, 11. 11; Sovitsta, to sound, A. iSovnriaa, i. 8. 18, J. 504, and iySoVTiTjaa, A. 45 ; Af/^eo, to lick, Pf. P. XiKsiXfiag Hes. Th. 826. So, in reduplicated forms, nifinlri/xi, niftnQrjixi (§ 284), and in the Att. RedupL, iyqrjyoqa (§ 268), rifiva, tq how down, Ijxvrifiv- xs X. 491 (for ffti)'|Uiix£, i/i- being prefixed according to analogy, § 191. 2, although the tj is radical). With xoJ^6o[itti, -(aao/iai, to be angry, we have also the Ep. {xo6oiJ,ai, § 29. a) xdoofiai, xio- aofiai, A. 80 (see r. 413, 414). § S64. 7. In some verbs, the omission of the digamma (§ 22. S) has given rise to different forms of the root ; as, i\iia (r. iit and iXiui/im (§ 201. 2). Deriv., ikti'iyo}, A. 794, iXurxai (§ 273. a). avx-'x-vita, Ep. (E/&.:rvi;ai (§ 48. 2 ; i: •zrviF-, vn-, JTvEf-, wvtf-, srywv- § 277), to recover breath, X. 222, A. P. x/imivh', E. 697, nnde 2 A. M. a/itrvSra A. 359. From the root frvw- are formed the extended vrtvvtrxu and wivvtriru, to maie wise, j£sch. Pers. 830, 3. 249, and the Pf. P. trirvufcxi, to be wise, CI. 377, referred by some to wviu, by others to Tiiivifxu. piu (r. pip', /5tf-)j ^^ fif^j -F. piufofixi (§ 220), A. 'ippsurcc, and better Att. F. M. (or 2 F. P.) pvwo/ixj, 2 A. P. (or 2 A. Act. r. fus-) Iff iJxv, Pf. ipfitixct, Ion. Pres. P^ pioofisvoi Hdt. vii. 140. Late F. psva-a. aivofjLai and ffoaf^ai (r. ffsF-, «»-, tfw-, cs-, whence ffa- § 28), to rush, poet. Soph. Tr. 645 (§ 246. a), .Slsch. Pers. 25, A. /nvx/^m (§ 201. 2) H. 208, Pf., as Pres., sVo-u^a/, Z. 361, A. P. lirthv or lirirS^jiir, Eur. Hel. 1302, Soph. Aj. 294, 2 A. M. Ut/inv or Irirtpm, Eur. Hel. 1162, S. 519. Ep. A. Act. 'Uriux E. 208. Lacon. 2 A. P. iv-cimux H. Gr. i. 1 . 23, for imrriti. Ob- serve the augm. and redupl. X^a (r. x^P-i Z"-)> '" P"'"'' P- x'^" (5 200. 2), A. ix'" (§ 201. 2), rare and doubtful ex"'^'^^ ^^* ^' xix^fixi, A. P. ixti^nv. Ep. F. x^"^'"j x^^^ fi. 222, A. £i;su) ; in liquid verbs, and in some mute verbs, j and v are simply lengthened ; in other cases, the short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong. In mute verbs, the change commonly extends to all the reg- ular tenses (§ 215. 1). 1. Change of a to «. r^Ti^ (r. irxv-, nv-), to rot, trans., F. r^^l^a, 2 Pf. intrans. (§ 257. p) ri- fffi^K, iv. 5. 12, 2 A. P. eiracrjjv. Tfl«s>, to melt (Dor. raxa Theoo. 2. 28), F. rri^u, A. eT>i|o!, 2 Pf. intrans. rcTtixx, iv. 5. 15, 1 A. P. trrixhv, commonly 2 A. P. iri,xti)i. Pf. P. t! rriyfiai Anth. § 3 6 7. 2. Change of & to a.i. ixio/iat (r. Sa-, Ja/-), to divide, chiefly poet, o, 140, F. ^utrof^ai, A. lioiffa- fim, CEc. 7. 24, SiSfE^^a;/, A. 125, SeS^i^a:/, a. 23. Kindred, Stzi^&f, -/^tu, to rend, ^sch. Ag. 207, ixrio/ixi, to divide, 2. 2G4, Hdt. i. 216, A. ixriecc-im (§201. 2). xttScti^b) (r. KccSu^-^, to purify, F. xa§ci^a, A. Ixa^jjga (sometimes written 6x^^<2^a, cf. § 56. a), Pf. P. xtKaSa^f/yXi, A. P. Ixet^a^^iiv, xaiva}, to Mil, chiefly poet., F. xccvai, 2 A. %xayov* vx!u (r. »«-), to dzoefli poet.. Soph. Tr. 40, F. rxrrc/^xi (§71) Ap. Eh. 2. 747, A. hxrirx, built, S. 174, Pf. P. mx(r/ixi, Herod. Att., A. P. ivxrfti' Eur. Med. 166. Ep. deriv. nxiiTxa, A. 45. v(pxUu, to weave, F. vipavu, A. liipnvx, Pf. P. vtpxfffixt (§ 217. /3), A. P. vfxrhi. From the pm:e root i(px-, Ep. iiipiu(n (§ 242. b) n. 105. ^aif&f (^ 42), to sAozfj, F. (pavu, &c. The Pf. sre^atyxa is late, first occur- ring in Dinarch., who employs it in composition with a^o. Kindred poet, verbs, pai/vs/, to shine, ft. 383 ; from r. (px-, Impf. (pit |. 502, F. :j-!f jiirsTiti P. 155 ; from r. (pxi6., Ft. fxiSi^v A. 735, Soph. El. 824. Xxl^a (r. X"?-! X^'i-)' '0 ''yoice, F. x^'i'i'" (§ 222. 2), Pf. xcxx(tixx, Pf. P. xs^xQ^f^xi and xixx^fixi, 2 A. P. E;^af>jv. Ep., redupl. F. xt^x^viru, xixx^wnfixi (§ 239. i), 2 A. M. xixxgi/ii' (§ 194. 3), 1 A. M. ixti^x/mr, S. 270, 2 Pf. P*. xe;i;«S'""5 (§ 253. 1), H. 312. Late, 1 Aor. ixxl(Wx, 2 F. P. x^^Q^irafiau 3. Various Changes of x. ixia (r. Sap-, S«-, ix4-), to bum, poet, .ffisch. Ag. 496, 2 Pf., as Pres. in- trans., Vitnx, r. 18, 2 A. M. ihiS/im, T. 316, Pf. P. iiixufixi. Call. Ep. 52. xxiat and xxM (r. xxp-, xxv-, xi- § 259, xxi-, xa-), to fiwrn, F. xxviru and xxuaofixi, A. 'ixxvax and poet, exsa (§ 201. 2), .^sch. Ag. 849 (Ep. 'Ixnx A. 40, J*»a, ^. 176), Pf. xixxvxx, Pf. P. xixxufjtxi, A. P. ixxvdriy. Ion. 3 A. P Uadu, Hdt. ii. 180. CH. lO.J EMPHATIC CHANGES. 221 kXkiu and xkatu, to weepf F. xXeiur, 1 A. M, ^fa/ugy, 'aoaifixt, *a^x!fctiv, Eur, Or. 3, 2 A. M. poet. fi^afiTiv, "«;&»/««/, *ec;aj]u9iv Soph. El. 34. jEol. iiffoi, Sapph. 44(73). Poet, deriv., vniiit/ixi, T. 108, xt^rx- ^.-, sX- § 259), to roH wp, press hard, Ep. E, 203, A, iXirx (§ 56, /3) A, 409, Pf, P, •UXfi.x,, n. 662, 2 A, P, laAjiv, N, 408. Att. forms, ilxXa or ilxXa, Ar. Nub. 761, Th. ii, 76, and iXXa Soph, Ant, 340, Deriv, EiXfia; or uxiai, -viaai, I'lXiica, -tffu (Ep,, A, P, ixicrSyiv, Y, 393 ; Deriv, zlxvipxu, A, 156, uXDtpx^&i, T, 492), \xiirffu, 't^ea (poet, and Ion, tlxitriraj or uxiririii, .iEsch. Pr. 1085, Hdt. li, 38), iXiXiZai, -'4", Ep. A. 530. ^I'lvui, to smite, poet., F. ^ivS, 2 A. 'ihsat, Ar. Av. 54, 1 A. ihiix, T. 481. xetfiat (r. Kxp-, Ksp- § 259), to shear, F. xi^aj, A. 'ixn^x, Pf. P. x£xdc;^«;. F. xi^iru, Mosch. 2. 32, A. 'ixi^ira, x. 456, Ixs^irxp^ia, ^sch. Pers. 952 (§ 56. /3), 1 A. P. ixi(hr. Find. P. 4. 146, 2 A. P, ixx^m, Anth, fisi^o/ixt (r, fixQ-), to obtain, chiefly poet,, I, 616, 2 Pf. 'ififie^x, A. 278, Pf, P. ilie,x(Txi (9 191, 1), if has been fated, PI, Eep, 566 a, Pt. sl/ixifcii/ts, later Ep, ^ifio^Tfrxt Ap. Eh, 1, 646, Dor, fjLtfto^xKTxi Tim, Locr, 95 a, iipdXa, to owe, ought (Ep, o^£A.Xa 9-, 462), F. ipiXrurm (§ 222. 2), 1 A. &;0siX9iirx, 2. A,, used only in the expression of a wish, utpzXov, Pf. aifiiXyixx. Kindred verbs, o^£>,Xa», to assist, poet, (for o(p£XXEfe>. see § 245, 5), h. rtlva (r. Titv-), to stretch, F. tb»«, A. inim, Pf. rirxxa (§ 217. «), Pf. P. rtrciaa/, A. F. ira^fl>. Kindred Ep. forms, riraiiu, B. 390, A. Pt. nrmxt 19* 25iiJ ROOT Ot THE VERB. [BOOK II. N. 534 ; rawa P. 390, F. rxttra, &0. ; Imp. Tn (contr. from tks, r. ra-,' S. 219 ; 2 Aor. J'*. Tsrayia. (§ 1 94. 3 ; i. ray-) A. 591. (fhl(a, to destroy, F. f ^s^jJ, A. 'liphi^x, 1 Pf. iipla^xx, 2 Pf. 'ifin^a, Pf. P IfSx^/ixi, 2 A.' P. ifix^m. F. ^^sf jw, N. 625, F. M. (pSx^iofixi Hdt. viii 108, (phfii/ixi ix. 42, 2 A. M. iipix^ixTc (§ 248. /) Id. viii. 90. §969. 5. Change of i to r. xxt»iki, to bend, F. xXi'i.S, A. 'ixXnx (§ 56), Pf. P. xixXlf/ixi (§ 217. a). 1 A. P. ixiiStit and ixXhlm, 2 A. P. IxXi^nv T^i^aif to rub, to wear, F. TQiyJ/a, A. ir^typx, Pf. rergi'^a, Pf. P. Ttr^tftfixi, 1 A. P. Ir^ifh', commonly 2 A. P. Irff Sii». 6. Change of ? into e/. xXsifa (r. kXi^-, aXe/(p-), to anoiKt, F. xXii^w, A. «Xsi-4'x, Pf. aXnXl'ipa (§ 191.2) and tiXtiipx, Pf. P. a?^^^i/ifixi and ^i.sifc/t.xi, 1 A. P. hXti(pSm, 2 A. P. i)X;'j>l». Ifti'xM, to irea^, F. IssiV, 1 A. i'gE;|«, Ar. Tesp. 649, and H^ilx, Hipp., 2 A. Ji'jijioi', P. 295, Pf. P. i^Kiiy/ixi, Hipp. CoUat., Ep. i^ix^iii, s. 83. ££EjVm, to cosi down, F. i^u^a, A. i!(ei-^x, A. P. h^tifim- 2 A., comm. tntrans., «ff/«v, E. 47, Plup. P. t^i^ixn 3. 15, late Pf. P. \fri^iiii,fixi. See, also, Xs/Va. (IT 37) and trsiVa (t 39). 7. Change of s into ov. xxouu (r. a«o-, axoy-), to Aear, F. xxovirofixi, A. ^Kovtrx, 2 Pf. ax!jxD», 2 Plup. 71XV1X0UV (§ 191. 2), A. p. vixova-^tjv. Late, F. axou/ru, Pf. P. wjffly- ir/tai. Ep. xxouxla, Horn. Merc. 423. §370. 8. Change of i? into 5. xXytvu, to afflictf F. aXyCvw, A. ii^yvvx, A. P. wXyyv^jji*. oSfgd^ai and ivpo/>cxtf to lainent, F. hav^ouf/.xi, A. £^di/ga^)iv. trXyviu, to wash, F. ^Xvvu, A. sVXffva, Pf. P. ■jri-rXv/ixi (§ 217. a), A. P. Tuf SI (r. BOip-, ri/»v, y. 16 (^xixuin, § 194. 3), 2 Pf. xsxsu^a. Soph. El. 1120. Ep. xiuSxiia, V. 453. nvx^, to prepare, poet., F. Tiv^a/, A. trtv\x, Pf. P. TeryyjWof/, A. P. XruxH^- Pf. P«. intrans. nnax^i ft- 423, Pf. P. Tiriuxxrxi (^ 248. /) /3. 63, Plup. iTirii^xn A. 808, Pf. P. /k/. rlrsi/x^tr^xi %. 104, F. Pf. t£T£1/|o|(««;, M. 345, A. P. Irsixhh Hipp. Kindred yerbs, ruypt^xya (§ 290), riTuirxii/tia (§ 285). ^suVs", and sometimes (poyyxtu (§ 290), to ^ee, F. fii^o/ixi and (psti^av/iai (§ 200. 3), 1 A. 'iipivlx, commonly 2 A. %(pvyov, 2 Pf. irsfeoya. Ep. Pf. Ft. Vlfu^ins (ef. 274. S) il>. 6, trE^yy^Ef^; a. 18. OH. 10. I EMPHATIC CHANGES. 223 10. Change of s, in the diphthong si, to ji. KXtiu and xXjaij to shut, F. xXuir&i and xX^iriu, A. 'ixXtttra and ExX^tra, Pi. p. xi»X£iir/£xi, xixXufiai, and xexAjj^ix/} F. Pf. xixXzUo/zat, Ar. Lya. 1072, A. P. IjtXsWnir. Ion. xXiifiu, -;V4), Hdt. iii. 117; Dor. F. xXaliJ or xXx^S Theoc. 6. 32, A. 'ixXa^cc, &c., as from xXa^ai or xX^^iu (§ 245. 1). § 371. II. By the addition of consonants, usually either t, 0, v, ax, or ?. Of these consonants, i is chiefly added to labial roots ; a, to palatal and lingual roots ; v (without further addition, ^ 289. 2), to liquid and pure roots ; (7x, J, &c., to pure roots. In a few instances, the cZose terminations are affixed to the protracted root. § 2 « S. l._ ADDinoN OF T (see § 52). , 2 A. P. ISxciSm- F. Pf. fiiixa'^dfixi, Hipp. Ep. ^Xxiofcxi, T. 82. JfUiTTai (r. Sjti^-), *o fear f/ie ^sA, poet. Eur. El. 1 50, F. t^u^a, 1 A. iJji/^a, n. 324, 2 A. Op*. x'Ta^i^ai Y. 187, A. P. i\6(ptm, I. 435. S-acrrw (r. 9-aip-), to bury, F. B-x-^a), A. t^x-^x, Pf. P. rUxfifjcxt, 3 F. ts- ixi» (§ 263). 1 A. P. \(i.fSm, Hdt. ii. 8 1 . From the r. 9-af - in another sense, come the Ep. and Ion. 2 Pf., as Pres., t'iSti^x, to he amazed, A. 243, Hdt. ii. 156, 2 A. %Tx;y, sometimes 2 A. P. ix^uSrjv. In Hipp., Pf. xix^uipx, F. Pf. xtx^v-^o- fjLxtn For x^wfrTaff-xe, see § 249. rf. hx<7rrca (r. pxtp-^, to stitch, F. pa-^pa/, A. sppx^a, Pf. P. ^px/ifixi, 2 A. P. piiptru (r. ^a{!r-), to aeise, poet., F. ftd^'^pat, 0. 137, 1 A, 'i/ixi^x, Ar. Eq. 224 ROOT OF THE VERB. [bOOK II 197, Ep. 2 A. fii/M^'mv, shortened filfinTcv (§§ 194. 3, 255. S, 263. 6), and 'ijiaTm, Hes. Sc. 231, 2 Pf. ftifi.«.;^x, Id. Op. 202. Ti/sTTw (r. Ti/ir-, r:/rT-), F. TusTTuVa (§ 222. )), 2 A. iTurrm, Pf. P. rjri!- ^Tn/iiu and rirvfi/txi, 2 A. P. iTuwm- Ion. 1 A. 'irv^x, A. 531, irv^iiiw, Hdt. ii. 40. For tstkitoi'ts!, see § 194. 3. /3. To Other Eoots. avuai, avvToi (x. avu-, avvT-^, to accomplish, F. avuffu, A. mSffOL, Pf. wfuxa, Pf. P. mua/ixi. A. P. hiirlm, Hes. Sc. 311. The simpler fota "«»« like- wise occurs in the Pres. and Impf. For Hvvn, &c., see § 246. a. TIX.TU (r. TEX-, rixr- § 259), to fief/'e^ to bring forth^ F. te^w, commonly Ti^tfiai, 1 A. £T£|a, commonly 2 A. Jrsjuov, 2 Pf. Tiroxa, A. P. Wixh^- Late Pf. P. TSTsyiKiti. For rixunlcci, see § 200. y. § 9 73. 2. ADDITION OF ir. This letter is sometimes simply prefixed or affixed to the characteristic, but commonly unites with it, if a palatal^ to form aa (xr, § 70. 1), or less frequently f, and, if a lingual, to form J (^ 51. N.), or less frequently aa (ti). Notes, (l.) Palatals in -ta are mostly onomatopes. (2.) Linguals in ■S^a are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses, and, by reason of eu- phonic changes, nowhere exhibiting the root in its simple form. The charac- teristic may, however, be often determined from another word. It is most frequently S, and may be assumed to be this letter, if not known to be another. (3.) In a few instances, ir unites with yy to form %, and even with a labial to form Z, or trr. a. Prefixed. aXinxKa (r. otXvK-, aXufx-'), to avoid, poet., F. aXu^at, A. ^Xu^». Extended Ep. forms, iXurxii^a Z. 443, iXunKmi x- 330. itirxu (r. six-, ii'x- § 260, ti'o-x-), to liken, Ep. T. 197 (also "rxa J. 279), Pf. P., as Pres., HYyfixi, to be lite, Eur. Ale. 1063, Plup. P. my/in; S. 796. The common trans, form is elxii'^iu, .xircj, &o., and the common intrans., the pret. lotxoi (^ 238. /3), for which are also used the simpler tixa (having in the 3d Pers. pi. the irregular form ii%ciin At. Av. 96 ; cf. iVam, § 237. oTSaj), and Ion. olxa, Hdt. i. 155 ; Plup., as Impf., smxhv (§ 189. 5), F. t'l^ai. At. Nub. 1001. Ep. Impf. intrans. (or Pf.) iJxi s! 520. biirai and m'tTm (r. itiT-, iviif- § 259, ivinr-), to speak, tell, poet. A. 643, B. 761, Soph. (Ed. T. 350, F. hl^ci, H. 447, and li.;o-»«VXe|-), to e»ar(J q^, poet, in the Act., F. aXi%wu, It. 109, 1 A. ixilwic, y. 346, and )?Xs|«, .ffisch. Sup. 1052, 2 A. aXxXxot (§§ 194. 3, CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 225 261), MXuxSct (^ 299) ^sch. Fr. 417 ; Mid. to repel, F. iXilwof^xi, vii. 7. 3 A, nXi^dftyiv, i. 3. 6. oSagoino!(, to bite, Ion. and Poet., F. oinlwoi^ai, Hipp., A. uSa'^ii^nv, Anth., Pf. P. uittyfictt. Act. o^a^at, to smart from a bite, Symp. 4. 27. § 'S * 4« y. Uniting with a Palatal to form ^y (i't). aXXcctrira) Or aXXarrw (r. aXXosy-), fo change, F. eiWoi^w, A. rfXXa^a, Pf. tlXXax^, Pf. P. tjXXayfiat, 1 A. P. «XXa_;^;^?iv, 2 A. P. nXXayyiv. ^xfiairiii (r. irXxy-), to sifj-ffie, in composition with sx or x«Ta, to sfrj^e wtVA terror, F. !rX)?|fij, A. eVXjila, 2 Pf. vrs'^rXnya, Pf. P. ^tTrX^yfiai, 3 F. ^g-rXj?- |oiao!i, Ar. Eq. 272, 1 A. P. WXrixh", commonly 2 A. P. i^xiym, but s^s- vXaytjv, xanwXayijv {-^ytjv, P. 31, 2. 225). For vi-TrXviyov, &c., see § 194. 3, The form trXKyvO/ixi (§ 293) occurs Th. iv. 125. In the simple sense to strike, the Att. "writers associate the Act. of ^etnta-ffeu "with the Pass, of vX^ir~ du (§ 301). 'rrnaaoi (r. vtrcLK-, ^mK- § 266), to crouch from fear, F. -jTrn^at, 1 A. sVthIo!, poet. 2 A. stTTODcov, .£sch. Eum. 252, Pf. 'irrnx;''- Ep., fromr. h-t*-, 2 A. Z». 3 VTmrn H. 136, Pf. Pt. ■riTTttiis (§ 253. 1), B. 312 (cf. § 238. a). Kindred, vriirim, A. 371, ■xruaxiX,", A. 372. ra^affiroj (r. Ta^a^-J, to disturb, F. raga^w, A. £Taga|a, Pf. P. TETK^ay- ,««/, A. P. Ero!^a;t;^?iv. From raQaffffat is formed, by metathesis, contraction, and the aspiration of r before j (§ 65. N.), S-^airtraj {ra^xrir-, r^ttctaa-, B-^dtrir-'), F. &ja|s<, A. 'ii^aS,x, A. P. iS^i.p^Sm. Ep. Pf., as Pr. intrans., rir^nx'^ (§ 62), H. 346. ra-trffu (r. ray-), to arrange, F. t»^w,\ A. 'ira.%a, Pf. TiTa:;i;a, Pf. P. rU •reiyfixi, F. Pf. T£ra|5|Ua<, Th. v. 71, 1 A. P. irxx^rtr, rare 2 A. P. Irayiiv. (p^iirru (r. ^jix-), to shudder, F. ipj/|ia, A. 'iip^i^cc, 2 Pf. (rsfjrxa. For m- tp^ijtovrus, see § 246. 2, S. Uniting -with a Palatal to form 2^. xjafoi and 2 Pf. xix^Syx (§ 238. ;8), to crj/, F. Pf. xix(ii?,i}/ixi (§ 239. c), 2 A. ^Kgayov. Kindred, xXa^a/ (§ 277. a), xg^^w, -a^a/, xX&i^oi. o}f£uZ,ej (r, alfiuy-), to bewail, F. o/^of^ij^a/, A. aftai^a, Pf. P. o7fi&iyfiiai (!) 189. 4). A. p. Pi. n'l/iaxhls Theog. 1204, late F. ci/tiilaj, Anth. «A.0A.i/^af (r. oXflXuy-), to shout, to shjnek, F. oXoXv^of^xt, A. aXoXv^x. trrsvx^ai, and poet. irTevx^ai, to groan, F. irreva^w, A. iffrivx^x. Poet, forms, (rrflva;(^ewj Soph. El. 133, ff"roya;^;i^fi; or ffrsva^i^at, B. 781, A. strrovx^t^yiffx, 2. 124. tripa^M and ffipdrrat (r. c^dsy-), to sZay, F. ffipx^&i, A. s^tpa^x, I A. P. iirtpx^- tm, commonly 2 A. P. sir^ayuv. Pf. P. 'iiripxyiati, x. 532. The shorter root p«- appears in the Ep. Pf. P. rifx/ixi, E. 531, F. Pf. vifynro/ixi, N. 829. Hence (r. pa-, (pt»- §§ 259, 277), the poet. 2 A. sVejiMv (§ § 194. 3, 261). E. Uniting "with yy to form J. vrXxZoi (r. jrXayy-), to cause to wander, poet. (= •rXxixu), B. 132, A. EVx«ty|«, a. 307 ; Mid. ^Xx^otixi, to wander. Soph. Aj. 886, F. TXxyi/i. /ixi 0. 312, A. P. iirXxy-/Jni Eur. Hipp. 240. irxXvi^at (r. sxXTriyy^, to sound a trumpet, F. o'aX^ty^u, A. iiraXTrty^a* Late F. rxX-rltrai, &c. See, also, xXdZu (§ 277. a). 'i.n6'iC,tfi,iii, PI. Ax. 371 c, , Theog. 12, lo-ira^n», Pind. P. 4. 363, Uririifi.tiv, |. 295, 2 A. ej»^>!i., ^sch. Eum. 3 ; Pf. P. «««/, to sit (U 59), A. 134, Eur. Ale. 604, of which the comp. xu^ij/nat is also common in Att. prose. Deriv. l^^vM, -viru, &c., A. P. iS^u^jiv and iS^vs^yjy (§ 278. y). oyofidZ<^ (r. ovofjLoLr-), to name, F. ovofiiiiraf, A. avafixiro:, Pf. ^vo^ikxk, Pf. P. a/vo/^aiTfzai, A. P. avttfeatr^t]v. Ion. oitvofeaZat (§ 44. 4), Hdt. iv. 6, .^ol. ovo- ^ajs; (§ 44. 5), Pind. P. 2. 82, chiefly Ep. ho/ixltu,, B. 488. (p^a^a (r. ^^atS-), fo fe/Z, F. (p^arw, A. tip^xirx, Pf. vr'ap^axa, Pf. P. Tiip^et- fffAai, A. P. I^^aff'^jji'. Pf. P. Pi. 'jF^it-'7ri.xi (§ 290). § 276. Eemaek. As verbs in .^, Hdt. H. 90, &c. Late 2 A. M. Ft. (r. ij^a-, § L'l'7) a^vii/iDics, Auth. tiiufi'tjo), to slay, strip, poet., F. iix^i^aj, A. 191, A. kx^ilx P. 187, and rim^ifx, Anacr., Pf. P. mi^nr/ixt. Soph. Aj. aS, itiix^Uhi, iEscli. Cho. 347. Primitive, hxi^u &. 296, 2 A. ijvx^av. Soph. Ant. 871, 1 A. M. Uti^x/^tit, E. 43. 'i^u (or X^u) and jSfi^iu (r. l^y-, pty- § 262, 1^ S-), to do, poet, and Ion. .Ssch. Sept. 231, O. 214, F. sj|. Some read Ti/^ii, as Pres., N. 707. See, also, xi/^tu (§ 223). § 9 7 8. y. Affixed to a Vowel. ^a;'»ii>, and poet, fixirxa (§ 279 ; r. /3oi-), to jfo, F. ^Ktrcfjut,!, 2 A. e'/Sn (t 57 ; see § 227, 242. b, 251. 4), Pf. ^iZma. (see § 238. a). Poet, and Ion., F. ^nru, I will cause to go, Eur. Ipli. T. 742, 1 A. ifSno-m, Hdt. i. 46. In composition, Pf. P. (iiCajLtsu and p>i€xirfitxt (§ 221. a), A. P. Ka.S->]v. For (inffis, &ic., see ^ 185. s. Kindred forms, [Idai in Dor. Ik^uvtks Th. v. 77 ; Ep. e,iiioj, V. 22, /3;?»/i;, H. 213, /iiUiri^ N. S09 ; Ion. ;3ie«««j, Hipp.; the common causative jiiSx-^ai ; and apparently the Ep. Pres. used as Fut. (§ 200. b) fiU/ixi, I shall walk, live, 0. 194, X. 431, PI. fiufiii^'«/««", A. P. YiXiSni- Ion., Pf. P. IX>iXay/«o:i Hipp., A. P. hXatrSm, Hdt. iii. 54. For iXriXiBxTo, see § 248. /". Ion. and Poet. Ikatrr^iu, 2. 543. fiai)f/.oit and ficciof^at (r. ^a-, jttai- ^ 267, ^eii- § 259), to see/i after, poet. ' Soph. CEd. C. 836, v. 367, Ep. F. /iicirofixi (^ 71) A. 190, A. Ifturc-xfim, V. 429, 2 Pf. /^i/ina. (^ 238. a). Pres. Imp. /twu (§ 242. b) Mem. ii. 1. 20 (Epich.), Inf. (as firom r. pxa-) /iarfxi Theog. 769. Extended, fccti/txa, -niTu, Soph. Aj. 50. (Tiviy (r. sro-, -TTi- § 259), to drink, F. Trtof^at (^ 200. b), later •Trtou^ai (§ 200. 3), 2 A. ?5rl'o» (§ 227. as), Jm^. ir/s, commonly ij-rA, Pf. «re*4(x«, Pf. P. 'xWafAat, A. P. i'Tr'oBni. tIvu (r. r;-), to fay, to expiate, F. T-fo-^a, A. iTXaa, Pf. rsTrxa, Pf. P. «W- (T^a;, A. p. Irltr^m. Mid. Tlvofj.oti, and TivSft-xt or rivvvfj.ctt (^ 293), to avenge, to punish, chiefly poet. P. 279, 366, Eur. Or. 323, 1172, Hdt. v. 77. Poet. Tiu, to pay honor to, F. Turw I. 142, ^rT^a, Soph. Ant. 22, Pf. P. Vt. rsTtfisvos, T. 426. (pBxvcd (r. tpBx-), to anticipate, F. (^Ba-sfi), commonly ^pBrico^ai (§ 219), 1 A. 'ifSictrcc, 2 A. iiphr (§ 227), Pf. 'i(pSi.xai. Ep. 2 A. M. Pi. (pM/iisas E. 119. ^^/'ifftj (r. (p^/-), to perish, to destroy, F. trans. ipSitru, (pStu, Soph. Aj. 1027, intrans. (pdlo-of^xt, A. trans. 'iipSitra., Pf. P. 'itp6X fj'.a.i, Plup. P. and 2 A. M. (§§ 227, 226. 4) 'Kpif/ini. Ep., ip^/s,, 2. 446, /3. 368, A. P. Ep^f^„v, ■^. 331, 2 A. Act. i(pf!hv (cf. § 299) E. 110. Extended poet, form, (pSinSu, A. 491, ». 250. S. Prefixed to a. See 'Soifj.vot/jt.a.t (§ 298), xi^vfi/ai, x^vi(Ava.[A'xi, ^/rvvi/iii, ffxthwifu (§ 293), wegv*)- iit( (§ 285), ■nXma, ■rlXia.ji.xi (§ 282). OH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHAN&Eb, 229 § 2 70. 4. Addition of sk. The addition of these letters is commonly attended with the precession or protraction of the preceding vowel, with metathe- sis, or with the loss of a consonant. a,. Without iurtier Change. a^iifxu (r. a^s-j, to please, F. a^sffa/) A. TjQstrecj A. P. fi^etrfftiv. See a^et^i- CKii (§ 285). yit^tia and yti^eiffKa/, to grow oldj F. yn^airai and yrt^Kirafiaij 1 A. iyri^&init, 2 A. lysjgav (§ 227), Pf. yiyn^Btxx. iXarxo/iai (r. jXts-), to propitiatBt F. Si.ecffof£xij A. i^aa'£e^»]v, A. P. IXairfitjv, Kindred Att. forms, /Aeo^aj ^sch. Sup. 117, IXsSofcxi, PI. Leg. 804 b. Ep., IXuDfiai, B. 550, Pf. Szifc;. IXvixuj (p. 365, 0/)^. 'iXvixot/jLtj Hom. Ap. 165 ; forms as from iXji«;, Imp. "Xa^i Ap. Eh. 4. 1014, "Xjitfj (§ 251. 4), Mid. "yjifim Hom. Hym. 20. 5 ; later Ep., F. iXxls/ixi Ap. Eh. 2. 808, A. iXa|a. ^Ji», 1. 1093. fitiffuirxat (r. fziSu-^, to intoxicate, F. iztStirai, A. \[/,iSijira, A. P. \fjLi6u1rS9iV, The intrans. fniiu, to be drunk, occurs in the Pres. and Impf. § 3 8 0« ^. Towel changed by Precession. afiSXoai, commonly xfitSX-ttrxoi (r, af^iSXa-, afjc^Xtffx- § 2.59), to miscarry, F. u,fi.Z\uiTia, A. ^fiSXaura, Pf. ^fjtSXaixa, Pf. P. ^fACXoff^eci, 2 A. ^/aSKoiv in Suid. Ion. i^-xfcSxisTxi Hipp. isvaXflo;, commonly avaXUxai (r. ^Xd-, aXio"*-), to expend, F. kv^^^^t'o;, A. awwXiUffa, Pf. KV}i>\.a}xa!, Pf. P. av«A.w/ia;, A. P. ^v»;X^^»7y. Tllis verb often retains a in the augment (§ 189. 4), especially in the older Att. ; and some- times, in double composition, augments the second preposition (§ 192. 3); thus, A. xtx^airx, Soph. Aj. 1049, xxrtivxXoKrx, Isoc. 201 b. y. Vowel Lengthened. fitairxofixi (r. [ita-, jiiMtfx-^, cliiefly in the comp. xvx-Siaiirxofixt, to revive, both trans, and intrans., F. lliuirofj,xi, 1 A. trans. ISiMffxf^riv, 2 A. intrans. Klav (§ 227), liiS, ^mm (§ 226. 2), filmfi, jiiZvxi, fiiais. JPrimitive, /3m«, to live, Fut. ^u!i(ra), commonly f>m(rofj:,xi, 1 A. iSlajirx, commonly 2 A. ISlait, Pf. fisSlcjxx, Pf. P. fiiSla/ixi. Shorter Ep. forms, fiii/^sirix (fiii/inrtx Wolf., § 278) Hom. Ap. 528, F. Pam-iirh Ap. Eh. 1. 685. For ^laou, we commonly find, in the Pres. and Impf., ^aar, which again in the other tenses (F. l^mc-i or X^rc/ixi, A. iZxirx, &c.) is rare or late. For the contraction of Jaoi, see § 33. X. From the contr. forms of the Impf. (S^ass) t'^Jis, sJj;, appears to have arisen a 1st Pers. sf«ii Eur. Ale. 295, and a late Imp. f?^i Anth. The prolonged Zaa and ^ea (§ 242. b) have given rise to A. l^-i%airt Hdt. i. 1 20, Inf. Z,iiit Simon. Fr. 231. 17. '§381. X Metathesis. liXairxii) (r. fioX.-, fiXe-, fiXc- § 64. N.), to go, to come (in the Pres., Ep. and found only in composition, ■r. 466), F. fiaXcS/ixi, 2 A. cpoXnv, Pf. /iifiiXuxx (§ 223). Atwxa (r. S-XV-, S-M-), to die, F. S-xtcv/ixi, 2 A. lixso), Pf. rshtixx (§ 237), F. Pf. TiSnifii and T£^»!5| (§ 295). 20 230 ROOT OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. S^uirxu (r. S-oj-j 9{»-), to leap, F. ^c^ov/iou, 2 A. ?^sji>». CoUat. di^m/Mi, Hdt. iii. 109. I. Consonant Dropped. Xu.irxia (r. ;t;av-, § 55)^ to gape, F. ^ayaufixt, 2 A. i;^;«vov, 2 Pf. xi;^9iva. Late p^aUai. Extended ;i;ao-«(«f<«, Ar. Vesp. 695. 'Tra.irx'' (r. sra^-, iriit- §5 259, 277, TtaSirx-, ■xturx,-^ the aspiration of the &, which is dropped before ir, being transferred to the x, wMch thus becomes x), to suffer, F. viitriift.a.i (§ 58), 'J A. i'sra^ov, 2 Pf. iriiroilii,. Poet. 1 A. Ft. irn- cxs (but TTxiirxs Dind.) ^sch. Ag. 1624, Ep. Pf. Ft. mviSui^ (§ 253. 2) J. 555, Dor. Pf. mvoirx'', tpich. 7(2). For ■jri^iurh, see § 238. /3, § 2 8 S> 5. Addition of S, ?, &, akd ^. afiit^u and a[jci^a (r. a^sf-), to deprive, poet. Pind. P. 6. 27, t. 18, F. ^^E^ff-af, A. tjfis^trx, ^. 64, A. P. ti/Ai^^tiv, X. 58. S('. 238 ; contr. aiu, Ap. Eh. 4. 1 97 ; ir»j», in the Subj. e'oijs I. 681, o-o!) 4 24. T^bi, to afflict, F. T^vffsi/, Pf. P. frir^vfictt • and Tgy;t^fiii (r. T^y-, r^ux-, T^v^o- § 298), F. T^vli^, Pf. P. riT^ixi/ixi, Th. iv. 60. So «ji^/ (f 53) is the only verb in -/u having a monosyllabic root, and beginning with a consonant, which is not redupUcated. § 2 8 5. y3. Verbs in -rxu. a^ec^iirxej (r. ip-, a^s-, x^x^lirx- ^ 296), to Jit, Ep. ^. 23, 1 A. n^ffx, H. 167, «. 280, 2 A. jje»e« A. 110, Soph. El. 147 (§ 194. 3), 2 Pf. ui- trans., as Pres., x^n^x, N. 800, also Att. a^S^x, jEsch. Prom. 60, H. Gr. iv. 7. 6, A. P. a^lnv n. 211. Pf. P. x^yi^iiix,, Hes. Op. 429, Ap. Eh. 1. 787. For xpi^v7x, see ^ 253. 2. Deriv., x^iu-xu (§ 279), ajriJs; and x^tuvu, &c. fli^^ucrxiji (r. /3^fl-, (ii^^biffx-y § 280. y), to eaf (the Pres. rare), Pf. {ii^^atxx (see § 238. /z), Pf. P. /HS^a^ftxi. Ep., 2 A. E'e^iai/, Hom. Ap. 127, 2 Pf. Op*, (r. /3^w^- ; or from new Pres. ^tZ^uica) jiiQ^uSois A. 3.5, F. Pf. (iiS^ujof^ai, li. 203 ; Ion. A. P. le^Mtiv Hdt. iii. 15; late Ep. 1 A. K^u^x, Ap. Eh. 2. 271 ; lateF. /3fa5|o^«j. The deficiencies of this verb are supplied by sirA'a (§ 298) and r^dyni {^ 267. 3). yty^iuffxoi (r. yy<)-), fo know, F. yvuffo/^xi, 2 A. 'iyviuv (^ 57), Pf. eyvwxa, Pf. P. tyvMcTfixi, A. P. ly^aiff^yjv. 2 A. M. Opt. cyy-yverra JEsch, Sup. 216, Ion. 1 A. uv-iyvuirx, persuaded, Hdt. i. 68. Note. The Ion. (not Hom.) and the later Greek softened yiytiaxu) and yiyvofixi (§ 286) to yivuirxid and yivo[/.xi. "hitaffxu (r. Sa., S/Sa;^;-, SiSaiTw-), fo teach, F. titx^bi, A. itt^a^x, Pf. SeS/S«;i;;a, Pf. P. SsSi'Say^ai, A. P. Biixx^'!'. Ep., 1 A. iSiSxirxnirx, Hom. Cer. 144, 2 A. £S«o», Ap. Eh. 3. 529, SsSaav (§ 194. 3). From the r. "Sx- are also formed, with the sense to learn, the poet. F. 'Sxwouxi (§ 222), y. 187, Pf. "SiSxnxx, li. 61, S£Sk>i^:s;, Theoc. 8. 4, SiSusos, j. 519 (hence iiSxxirlai tr. 316, CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 233 § 246. 2), 2 A. P. lUnv, Soph. El. 1 69. Hence, likewise, the Ep. F. coutr. QaUu, iaia, § 200. 2) Jijsi, I. 418. iiSfiatrxo) (r. Sg*-), to ran, used only in composition with ci^o, S;a, or ig, F. %^a.irii/Aittt 1 A. E^^iKffa!, 2 A. it^av (^ 57), Pf. yiS^axa. Kindred, ^^ceffxa^M^ Lys. 117. 35, i^rnrTsuoi, Hdt. iv. 79. fii/ivrnrxa/ (v, juvoc-), to remind^ F. /ivJiiratj A. iftwiffx^ Pf. P. (/if^v7\fioLi (see § Si34. ^), 3 F. jusfivwoiixi, Cyr. iii. 1. 27, A. P. i/ivwlnv. As from fti/ito- ucii and fAifjt.^a.fjLttt^ Jiap. fiifLvso Hdt. v. 105, P^ /isfjtvofitvos Archil. Fr. 1, Opf. PI. 3 fiifi^vataro Pind. Fr. S77. Prjm. Mid. [jLvu.o^a.i, to remember (Ep. X. 106), to woo, vii. 3. 18. Collat. forms, fetwxa, Orph. Hym. 77. C, |K»s fxuftxi, Anacr. Fr. 69. vi^^acirxatj and poet, sre^vji^i (r. ^ggcc-, wga- § 261, TEgva- § 278. S), to se//, Pf. ^irr^icxx, Pf. P. iri^^i/txt, 3 F. veyr^arii/ixi, vii. 1. 36, commonly used for the rare rpxHrtifixi (Ath. 160 f), A. P. strja^nv. Ep., Fut. /«/. (srsja- !rs;v) srsjaav (§ 24.5. 3) O. 454, A. Ws^arx 0. 428, Pf. P. Pf. ^ii/^iyas . 58. The Fut. and Aor. of this verb axe supplied by ariiSiiro/ixi and isrs- tofjiyiVj mid. tenses of a^Totiiufzt, Tir^bitrxta (r. rgo-), to wound, F. T^wtrw, A. sr^anrxt Pf. P. trir^ufixtj A. P. It^oiStiv. Kindred, t^iuu, Ep. ^. 293, ro^iu, to pierce, Ep. Hom. Merc. 283, F. To^riaM, lb. 178, 1 A. Iri^wx, E. 337, 2 A. i'To;ii», A. 236 (for TSTa;o» and TiTo^wa, see §§ 194. 3, 239. ft), ro^iva, Ar. Thesm. 986, nr^xitu (§ 286). riTi{rxi>fi.xi (r. TUX-, §§ 263. N., 273. oj), to prepare, Ep. $. 342, 2 A. «- Ti/xsrv (§ 194. 3) 0. 77, TSTUxi/inv, A. 467. § S 8 6. y. Other Verbs. xxx^'i^u (r. a;i^-, axx^-, xxa^t^- § 297), to afflict, Ep. cr. 432, F. xxxp^^^. JO/, 1 A. a»a;^;9)ffa, commonly 2 A. Mxx^ov, Pf. P. xxx^^vifixi and «x;j;^G^a!f (P. 3 ax»7;^£§aTK/ § 248. y). Collat., x^ofiut r. 129, and x^vvij,xi. Soph. Ant. 627, to sorrow; Pres. Pi. a;t£s.x-, XiXx-, § 267), to desire earnestly, Ep. N. 253, Pf. P. (one X dropped, § 263. 6) XiXlnfixi, A. 465. The prim. Xxai is used by the Dorics; Theoo. 1. 12. fiha, and poet, /ilfctai, .ffisch. Ag. 74, F. /isvS. See § 222. 2. Ep. deriv. fiifivxt^eu, B. 392. •jr'fjrria (r. a-er-, ires'- § 273. /3, ir/(rr-)j to /a/?, F. ^iirou/jLxt (§ 200. 3), 1 A. eVeira, commonly 2 A. ?!r£iro», Pf. {mr-, ■rri- ^ 262, vm- § 236. a) trejTTfjxoj (see § 233. x). Dor. 2 A. iVerov, Pind. O. 7. 1 26 ; late Pf. ire- ■xTnxx, Anth. Poet, forms, a-jVviii, Soph. CEd. C. 1 754, and perhaps «T»i a. Addition op a and e. Resiarks. (1.) "Wlien a is affixed, t in tlie preceding syllable usually becomes a ; but, when e is affixed, o. See ar^axpoLca and trr^o(pia} (§ 259. a). (2.) The vowel which is added is more frequently retained before the close terminations. a.. Addition of «. j^^O^dofixi (x. )3f y;^;-), to roarj F. f^^u^nirofioii, A. IC^vp^ijtrecfctiv, A. P. i€^v- X'^Stivj 2 Pf., as Pres., (ht^^Uxi^. Kindred, (i^uxuf, later ^^u^a (Hipp.), to gnash the teeth. Similar onomatopes are fiXux^ofcect and fivtKdofiai, to bleat, and fAvxaof^oiij to loWy F. -yiffofAon^ Ep. 2 Pf. fiSfCTjxxj K."662, ^e^wxa, 2. 580, 2 A. 'ifcecxovj n. 469, 'iftuxov, E. 749. yoaw (r. yfl-), to bewailf Ep, H. 664, F. yo^ffoficcij 2 A. ^yeov, Z. 500. Mid. yoaof^eci also Att., Soph. (Ed, T. 1249, vu(/.a.aj, F. veofAn(fi», poet. for v/jctijy (§ 222. 2), to distribute. Also Ep. Impf, vE^E^oiira A. 635. ^irofAceij poet, ^riroifiai, Find. P, 8, 128, and crordoficai, B. 462, iEsch. Sept. 84, later 'itrTa^xi, Eur. Iph, A, 1608 (r. trsr-, a-Era-, crara-, crra- § 261, "ttoi- § 283. c), to fly, F. •rtT^irofcce.i, commonly Trrnaoficcty 2 A. '^srr^v, 2 A. M. liTTa/iJiv, commonly Isrro^jjv (§ 261), Pf. P. iTEiroTjj^as/, A. P. l^rar'/iV^jv. F. !rflT«VfljKa/j Mosch. 2. 141. Other collat. forms, •^orUf/.atj T. 357, trwrao- jtta/, M. 287, 'jriroiof/,aij Hdt. iii. HI. § S 8 8. /3. Addition of e. m%of^ce.t, and poet. etltofAcci, ^sch. Eum. 549 (r. ectS-j ul^t-), to respect, F. ctt^itrofixt, A. M. ^Ssj-a^jjv, Pf. ^"Sitrftcci (P. 3 w^o-vihiitrOf § 248. /", Hdt. i. 61), A. P. vtTiffhv. am, £. 478, and a«^;, I. 5 (r. a,-, as-), fo breathe, blow^ Ep. ; /Tnp. aflViw, Inf. xTJvxi, Ft. aiU • Pass, avif^xi, Z,. 131, Deriv., a?w, 0. 252, and aiirSoit n. 468, to breathe out, expire. Kindred, A. asira, to breathe in sleep, to sleep, y. 151, contr. atra., tr. 367. yafiXea (r. ya^-), to marry, said of the man, F. ya,fi.m, A. 'iyvj/iu, Pf. yeya- fzriKcc, Pf. P. yEya^w >](««/. Mid. yajweo/ta:/, to marry, said of the woman, F. yafAQVfjLot.i, A. \yy)ftDifji.7iv. Late F. yccftniru), A. lyajitjjca, A. P. lya!^«V»ii' {yttfAthlffd Theoc. 8. 91). Ep, F. M, ya.fjiX, A. ISdx«9-a, Pf. SfiSo^jjxa, Pf. P. ^z^oxtifAcct A. p. ESaxflVsjii. Impers. Soxer, li seems, F. 5o|s/, &c. ivifiiXefcat and iTi^EXesjU^/ (r. ^eX-, ^eXs-), to taAe care o;^ F, etr/^EX^ff'tf tAotit Pf- P- 6irijt*£^s>.9j^«;, A. P, i-rsfitsXji^i^v. CH. lO.J EMPHATIC CHANGES. 235 xTwsMj to soundj to crashi poet., F. xri/TaVw, 1 A. J*TtJir*)fl-a, 2 A, 'ixru- vat* xvXiv^at and jcuXivSsisy, to rollj F. (xuXiS^-ff-w, § 58) xuXiera/j A. eKuXra-itj Pf. P. x£»uAifl-/Aa/, A. P. \jcvXlff6nv. Late F. xyXivS^Vw. Rare Pres. ;cyxf(y, Ar. Vesp. 202. Kindred, KctXivViofLai, to be busied iuj Cjt. i. 4. 5, aAivSEw or aA.(vJerf£ont A. P. lfiJirf'«ir. Late Pf. ewka:, Plut. ; Ep. and Ion., A. lua-a!, A, 220 (w-Qeairas* for cr^o-tua-xs, Anth.), Pf. P. ^a-fion, Hdt. V. 69; ccv-iuiSm Hipp- Deriv. ^ffTiXo(jLttii to Justle, Ar. Ach. 42. § 3 8 9. b. Addition of &y. Remarks. (1.) Roots which receive av without further change are mostly double consonant. (2.) Mute roots receiv' ing oiv commonly insert v before the characteristic. (3. ) Roots which do not insert v sometimes prolong ocv to aty or viv. ^ a. "Without further Change. alffSoivofteti, and rarely tLla66fi,a.i (r. aJir^-f ttiffffetv-}, to perceive^ F. alr^nffofAat (§ 222, l), 2 A. ftr^ofitjvy Pf. P. jfo-^jj^aj. oik, I A. utpXtjirx commonly 2 A. a^Xoir, Pf. ufXttxx. Ion. Impf. or 2 A. iaip/.£i (§ 243. 4) Hdt. viii. 26. See iipilXai (§ 268). § S90. (3. With the Insertion of » (see § 54). ay^ivoi (r. aS , a-»-S«ii-), fo pfease,"poet. and Ion. B. 114, Soph. Ant. 504, F. xSniru, Hdt. V. 39, 2 A. 'iilov, Id. i. 151, StibJ. Sia, &c., 2 Pf. 'teSoj, I. 173 (s«So!, Theoc. 27. 22 ; I Pf. Mhxx, Hippon.). For the augm., see § 189. 2. Kindred, n^ia, to please, commonly ^ajAxi, to be pleased, F. ntrSntrofixi, A. rfc^M" (A. M. nVuTo /. 353). X^vyyxvai (r. i^vy-), to disgorge, 2 A. ^^vyov< Ion. Igeyyo^ai, 0. 621, F. l^iv'^ofAXi, Pf. ?^£yyjKa/, Hipp. B-iyyxvu (r. 9-iy-), to touch, F. 3-i^ofixi, 2 A. eV/yav. Lat. tango. xT;^xy&t or »/y;^;avw (r. xi^-'), to find, poet. Eur. Ale. 477, F. x^^Tiao^iat, Soph. (Ed. C. 1487, 2 A. 'ixXx'^, Eur. Ale. 22. Ep. xtxxiu, P- 672, and «;i;(j£ai «. 284 (Mid. Ft. Kix'/il^m;, E. 187), F. xixmu, Ap. Eh. 4. 1482, 2 A. (from r. xi^i-, or Pass, with sense of Act.) ixtxi', "". 379, Subj. (xixi^) xixi'i(a (§ 243, b), A. 26, &c. 1 A. M. sx;;k»™/""'j ^- 385. A.a5/;^;a»o< (r. Xx^-, ^-oz- 5 266, XEy;^- 5§ 259, 277, Xay;^'"'-); *" "Main hy lot, F. Xri^ofixi, 2 A. 'iXax'v, Pf. 5">.>!;j;ai (§ 191. 1 ) and XiXo y;);*, Pf. P. dXyiyuixi, A. P. IXnx^i'- Ion. F. Xx?,sfi.xi, Hdt. vii. 144. For 2 Aor. Sulj. kikxx^, causative, see § 1 94. 3. }^afASxva) ^ (t. XxS-, XtiS-, Xxf^S-j, to take, F. Xti'^ofixi, 2 A. 'iXaSav, Pf. ilXntpx (§ 191. 1), Pf. P. ilXn/iiixi, and poet. xix>i/ifixi, Eur. Iph. A. 363, A. P. IXriiph'- Ion., F. Xxfi-^afcxi, Hdt. i. 199, Pf. P. \iXx//,iicu, iii. 117, A. P. iXxfiipinh ii. 89, Pf. A. XiXxinxx (§ 222), iv. 79. For A,£Xa££irfc/, seti § 194. 3. Poet, forms, kx^opxi and Xx^Hfixi, A. 357, Ar. Lys. 209. XxvSxvai, and sometimes XMia (r. 7.a^-, X>)^-), to lie hid, to escape notice, F. Xma, 1 A. 'iXncx, commonly 2 A. 'iXxln, 2 Pf. xixnla. Mid. Xxititnnxi and xMoft,xi, to forget, F. X^irofAxi, 2 A. IXxSof^vjv, Pf. XeXjjir^fl!*, F. Pf. XeXji- iro^a/, Eur. Ale. 198. Ep. Pf. .P. xixxirfixi, E. 834, late 1 A. M. iXiKrx/znv, Quint. 3. 99, Dor. A. P. lA.air^ui', Theoc. 2. 46. For xiXxin, &c., see § 1 94. 3 Collat. Ix'XviSxvia, 71. 221. XeiVs) (r. X;!r-, Xeiw-), fo Zeaue, and sometimes in composition Xi/frcivai, Th viii. 17, F. Xii^^ai, &c. (ir 37). Late 1 A. 'iXu^x. fixv^xvu (r. ficx^-^, to learn, F. fix$'/iiTiifjt.xL (§ 222), 2 A. 'ifjcxhv, Pf. ft.iii.x5n' XX. For fAxSivfLxt, see § 200. y. ■jTvitxioiixi, and poet, •riih/iui iEsch. Ag. 988 (r. iri/^-, trti;^- § 270), to inquire, F. !rii(rciixi {^ivniiclxi .ffisch. Pr. 988, § 200. 3), 2 A. imSi/mr, Pf. n'XuirfiXi. Ep. 2 A. 0/)«. •Xiirvloiro (§ 194. 3), Z. 50. Tvyx,a.vu (r. Ty_;i;-, T£y_^-), to liappen, to obtain, to hit, F. rtu^sf^xi, 2 A. E-ry- ;^fly, Pf. TSTvx^xx (§ 222), rarely riTtv^x, Ath. 581 e. Ep. 1 A. ery;^«^a, A. 106. SeeTsi;;(;« (§ 270). ;t;o!»Sa»a (r. ;coiS-, ;>;»»?-, ;(;£i'S- § 259), to contain, poet. Ar. Ean. 260, E. OijivSyo^aj, § 58) x^irofixi, r. 17, 2 A. eje^^"'! ^- 24, 2 Pf. xjvavSa, Y. 268. CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 237 § S O 1 • y. With «» prolonged. a,\^xUij (r. ixS-), to nourisli, poet, .fflsch. Fr. 540, 2 A. HiUxvi)!, r. 70. Also aXWxAT} to nourishj to grow, Y. 599, late A. iter, i^^ntrairxsv Orph. Lith. 364. iXiTxlvai or iXiT^xlva (r. aAiT-), to sin, poet., Hes. Op. 239, 328, 1 A. ixlrnirx, Orph. Arg. 647, 2 A. «X(toi>, I. 375, Ef. P. Ft. xXir^fcitut S. 807. fliSea* and e^ncUu (r. a/S-, a/Ss- § 288), to swell, F. fl/SjJo'a', A. cfSyiira., Pf. wS?j • XX. Also oi^xvai, trans., 1. 554. IXtuSoivcii and i\ir4u'ivu (r. o\itrd-\ to slide, to slip, F. IXtirHifiii, 2 A. ojXlcr^ov. 1 A. axiclnrx and Pf. aiKlritixx, Hipp. Also iXisiiX", Ath. 236 a. off^^aivofixi, rarely oirtp^xofixt, Ath. 299 e (r. oA-^g-, oc^ja- § 287), to sme//, F. or(p^riirofLxt, 2 A. urtp^ofAnv, A. P. uff^^xvSnv, lon. 2 A. ur^^xfiviv, Hdt. i. SO, late 1 A. airip^vrxfiriv. See, also, jxa^si (§ 292), xix^vw (§ 290). § 303. u Addition op ve. /:iu>E:ii (or /loiiti), to stop up (r. /3u-), F. /3uyiir, PI. Phasdr. 235 d. Poet, and Ion. inirx'fxi Mscb. Eum. 804, Hdt. vii. 104. See sx;a (^ 300). ^ S0o> d. Addition of vu. (1.) If a, e, or precede, the v is doubled, o becoming w. (2.) if it, precede, the v becomes l. (3.) A lingual or liquid preceded by a diphthong is dropped before yu. X. To Pure Boots. E»»i;/ii (r. Ft; i- § 22. S), toelotJie, poet., chiefly Ep., F. sVo-o/ (§ 71), «. 337, A. sa-^x, E. 905, Pf. P. iJ/ixi and ?o-;«a/, t. 72, Hdt. i. 47. Prose form, xfi- ^livvUfii, F. xfjt^iitru, afcipi&j (§ 200. 2), TifAtpUrx (§ 1 92. 3), Pf. P. 9t/Aa|iis/; Hes. Op. 664. In the comp. xxTxyvSfu, the E of the augm. is sometimes found out of the Ind. ; as, A. Part, xxtix^hs, Lys. 100. 5. xvoiyat and xvoiyvuftt (r. eiy-), to open, Impf. avEwyflv (§ 189. 2), II. 221, >r. 5. 20, and later tivmysv, EL Gr. i. 1. 2 (Ion. av^yn, 8. 168), F. xvol^u, A. xvii^^a, and later ^voi^x, Pf. xvico^x, Pf. P. avEwy^a;, A. p. av£A;;i^^j)i', and later hoix^m. Acts, 12. 10. 2 Pf. i»£»uya, to starad open, Hipp. The simple oi'yiu and clymi^i are poet., .ffisch. Pr. 611, F. oi^a, A. Z^x H. 457, .ii'la, n. 446. islxvOfci (r. Sejx-), to show, F. Sei'^s). See ^^ 52. Ion. (r. Sex-) Se^iu, iii^x, &c., Hdt. iii. 122. Mid. ^uxMi/ixi, Ep. to prcet, I. 196, Pf. hihyfcxi (§ 47. N.), ?i. 72. The primary sense of tz'txvijfit is to stretch out the hand, and kindred verbs are S!;t;(i^a!; (Ion. Vixofj^xi, Hdt. vii. I 77, § 69. I.), to receive F. Vi^afjbxt, A. \%i.^xfiifiv, Pf. SsSsy^ai, F. Pf. 'hi%'i%ofirzi (for Wiyf/.n^, &c., see § 185. S), and the po6t. ^ihlirxofcxi, ^utiiTxafixt, ^nxavxat, ys^vvfixi. u^yyufii (r. E^y-, E/^y- § 268), to sAw< in, to confine, F. Ei'^^w and 'i^^u, A. £ij5«, Pnr«. £i{?as and Efla;, Pf. P. J^yfixi, A. P. i'l^x^nt. This verb ap- pears to have been originally the same with ii^yco, to shut out, and the dis- tinction which afterwards arose, and which was marked by the difference of breathing, appears not to have been always observed. Ion., in both senses, t'fyau, -la, Hdt. ill. 48, 0. 325 (Ep. EEfyw, B. 617), and 'i^yvpfii or ii'^yyS/ii, Hdt. ii. 86, iv. 69. Ziijy'S/ti (r. <^vy-, ^luy- § 270), to yoke, F. Jei/?^, A. i^t'ti^x, Pf. P. 'i^tvy- fAxt, 1 A. P. i^iux^nv, 2 A. P. i^vym. fiiyvvfii (r. />tty-), to mingle, to mix, F. fci^a/, A. sfn^x, Pf. P. [AtfAtyftxi, 3 F. fitfitlafixi, iEsch. Pers. 1052, 1 A. P. i/ir^Sm, 2 A. P. lfciy>i«. The older form fi'tayu (§ 273) is always used in the Pres. and Impf. by Hom. and Hdt. For Ef^ixro, &c., see § 185. 5. ^iyvv/ii (r. vxy-, trny- § 266), to fasten, to fix, F. jrii^fu, A. 'isru^x, 2 Pf, CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. ' 239 intrans.j^as Pres., irsTflya, 1 A. P. Wnx^^h commonly 2 A. P. Iway^w. Ep. 2 A. M. 5. 3 tTTvKTo (§ 185. S) A. 378. For wjiyfur*, seo § 226. 4, Late v^a-tra/j Pf. P. Ti^iTy/icail. pnyvufit (r. poty-j ^wy-), to break, F. ^jj^aj, A. 'ippti^ee^ 2 Pf. intrans. 'ippioya (§ 236. 6), 2 A. P. Ippdyvv. Ep., ^'Wa^, 2. 571, Pf. P. sppvyf^ai, 3-. 1 37 ; Ion. 1 A. P. lppii^^»}v, Hipp. Kindred, pdirff&t and agairfl-w, -^a;, to smite. ^^aro-w, and rarely ^^dyvO/zij Th. vii. 74 (r. ^^ay-, (p^ceirtr- § 274), to fmccj F. (AO(r(Lect and of/.iiifAOf/.ai (§ 2^1. a), A. P. iuft.oir^t]» and afiodfiV' Pres. P^. ofiovvTzs Hdt. i. 153 ; late F. ofAoo-at, Anth. ofito^yvufAi (o/ifljy-), to KJipe o^, poet. E. 416, F. ofio^^&tf A. ftl^afl^cs, Eur. Or. 219, A. P. ufio^x^m, Ar. Vesp. 560, A. M. dif^to^^ecfiViv, 2. 124. Collat. ifio^yd^aiy HonS. Mere. 361, late fto^yvUfci. fl^lyai, to stretch out, and Ep. o^syvu^;, A. 351, F. o^i^&/, A. a/ge^a, A. P. u^i^Sviv, Pf. P. eo^iypceci, Hipp., o^i^^iyfAOCij 11. 834, o^vufit (r. fl^-), to roMsei F. o^-rw (§ 56. /3), A. iSgfra, 2 Pf. intrans., as Pres., o^wga. Ep., F. M. o^ovff.a.1, T. 140, 2 A. w^fl^av (^ 194. 3), 2 A. M. ^ygfl^jjv, M. 279 (see § 185. S, g) ; from r. o^e-, Impf. o^iofim, B. 398, Pf. P. ^^a'^e- ^a; (§ 191. 2), T. 377, jSwfi/. o^a^ijTOii M. 271. Kindred, chiefly poet., H^o- fictt, o^iVUj l^oSuvaiy e^ouof • Lat. oripr, •rra^vuficti (r. ^ra^-j, to sneeze, 2 A. %-n-ra,^ov, 2 A. P. 7*^. •ttxpsis, Hipp. trro^vDfzt, iTTo^ivvvfAi, and ffr^uyvum (r. (ri» (§ 223), A. 99, Eur. Ale. 127, 2 A. P. poet. ISa^jiv, Eur. Med. 647. Ep. Pres. and perhaps Fut. (§ 200. a) Sa^aa, A. 61, Z. 368, Pf. P. SsS/jji^K/, E. 878, F. Pf. SsS^aVs^ai Horn. Ap. 543. Collat. poet, forms, "ixfiixu, \. 221, tx/itiifti E. 893, jEsch. Pr. 164, ix/ixkiZm, Find. P. 5. 1 63. Lat. dome. 'iXxaj (r. \xx-, iXxv-^, to draw, F. ix'^ta (Ixxutru, Hipp.), A. llXxucra (§ 189. 3; tlxlx, Orph. Arg. 260), Pf. ClXxuxx, Pf. P. iiXxa(riixi, A. P. itXxuffd'/iv. Ep. £Xx££j, P. 395, kXxtitroj, nXx'Airx, X. 580. l^uTxbt (v. e^-), to ask, F. sga(T97(rw and s^fitrfju^i (§ 222}, A. ti^uwiffttf CH lO.J EMPHATIC AND ANOMALOUS CHANGES. 241 Pf. ^^uTfiKBi, Pf. P. Ti^uTyi/iuij A, P. ti^urviSmi 2 A, M. vi^ofim. Ep. and Ion., !?|»o^o!i A. 553, Hdt. iii. 64 (liiti/tsvas lb., § 243. 4); F. ti^woftan S. 61 ; I'l^aircia, -sat, S. 347, Hdt. iv. 145 ; i^iai, H. 128; I^jsi'm Z. 145. ia-iliu, and poet. sWa), H. 415, jEsch. Ag. 1597, or fSiu, £. 341, Em-. Cycl. 245 (r. IS-, M- §§ 282, 52, |j-, to pursue, iSiuKechv, Ar. Vesp. 1203, PI. Gorg. 483 a; uxa, to yield, I'lxiim, Soph. CEd. T. 651 ; I'^yai, to exclude, i'l^yiioi. Soph. CEd. C. 862 (J^yicloi, A. 437, ii^y&hr, E. 147), ti^y&Sofj^nv, .^sch. Eum. 5G6 ; ctfttvM, to ward off, yif^vvcihv, Ar. Nub. 1323, i/iUvSM/itiv, .fflsoh. Eum. 438; xliu, to go, fisT-ixfi^ar A. 52; vXxxSai (§ 273. fi),'irx'Jin (§ 300). Cf. 'i(pMn (§ 278). These extended Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Imperfects, and are commonly so accented. § 300. 3. Exchange of Letters. In the two following verbs, a passes into e aspirated (§ 50). 'i^ai (r. fTcr-, EW-), to fie occupied with, Impf. u^ov (§ 189. 3), F. 'i-4'^, 2 A. sVsrov, SubJ. sToj, &c. Mid. tTsfiai, to folhyw, Impf. u^o/^tiv, F. 'i'4'ofixt, 2 A. Ifl'irfl^jjv, SuhJ. o-TufiKi, &c. Poet. itTTToftKi, ^. 826, Impf. (considered by some 2 A.) iir^i/aiv, T. 239. A. P. irt^i-ifinv, Hdt. vi. 15. The act. sVoi scarcely occurs except in composition. 'ixm and iV;^;^ (r. r^-, ix-> 'X- § ^63, ;V;t;- 5§ 283. c, 263), to Aaoe, to loM (in the sense to have, the forms 'i^" ^°'i ^'?'" ^™ preferred ; in the sense to hold, 'Ux" and nxi'"), Impf. eT^jok and Tir;(;oi', F. 'l\ai and nxwoi (§ 222) ; 2 A. 'iirxov, Subj. irx^ (comp. ^ta.nx'*' or tixtrx^^ ^. '^X~ ^^ '^X^~\ QP*' '^X"'^^ (§ 205. a). Imp. irx't; {'X^- § 288 ; compare Sss, ?;, § 210. 2), and rarely, in composition, Tx'e, Inf. rx^Tv, Ft. irxm ■ 2 A. poet. tV;j;s^«» (§ 299), .ffisch. Pr. 16; Pf. irxnxx, Pf. P. 'iirxnf.xi, A. P. lirxihf, 2 A. M. iirx'fm. Ep. Pf. Ft. trvv-ox^xin (§§ 236. 1, 191. 2, 62) B. 218. For {■r-^x"") see § 236. d; for iv-£/;i;e£, see § 243. 4. Ep. deriv. forms, 'nrxava, S. 38 7, iffX^'^xat, E. 89. For the compoimd uTiffx^^''/^xi, see § 292 ; for avixo/mi, § 301. 2. For the cr in «^Te;^;ia (.xfA(pi, £X'^)t ^^ § ^^ » ^^^ ^o^ the- various forms of the augm. (Impf. vifi^^-uxot^nv, 2 A. «jWir;-(r;^o^«v, A^^-etrxofinv, &c.), § 192. 3. ' C. Anomalous Changes. ^301. Forms are sometimes associated, which must be 21 242 ROOT OF THE VEEB. [bOOK II referred to roots originally distinct, or widely removed from each other (§ 257. "2) ; as, 1. a/^Ew (r. ai^s-)f to tahe, F. at^^a-u, Pf. «'^«xa, Pf. P. «^jj/ia;, A. P. '/i^Uy,t (§ 219) ; 2 A. uXoi, nourishment; x"'!"' (y- X'^i')' *" '■«/'"''=«) X^^-^, joy; iph'iffu, to corrupt, tphpx, corruption. Some verbs in -eyw have abstracts in -e/» (§ 92. /3. a) ; as, rrxtSivtu, to instruct, ^eti^^idj instruction. c. -oj (G. -ot/j m,) J as, xiy-aj, to speak, Xcy-os, speech; tr^siQaj, to sow, ffvro^os, sowing, d. -ro; (G. -rou, m.) ; as, xcokv-m, to wail, xaxD-ros, wailing. e. -05 (G. -Efls, n.) } as, xyi^-ofAxi, to care, Krit-os, care. f. -f/,os (G. -//.ov, m.), or -^n (G. -/*«?, f ) ; as, oSv^-ofiai, to lament, o^u^'/^os, lamentation ; /ii-/itn-/i''i, to remember, fttn-pn, remembrance. Remark. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as the effect or object of the action, and thus blend with Class 2 ; as, y^xfi/^^, line. § 306. 2.) The effect, or object of the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the verb, -f6a (G. '/lotros, n.) j as, trm-atj to make, compose, ^oin-fia, thing made^ CH. 11.] NOUNS. 245 poem; e-Tii^ej, to sow, tr^i^fix, thing sown, seed; y^a(pu, to write, Qy^a. ^^ -TOf^ (G. -To^o?, m.) ; as, ^i^atf^i (r. Sa-), to give, Sfl-eat, pxurr^Q, beater, hammer, ^eoffr^^, girdle, a«T«j, wi7id (blower), IftQoXtvsi st<^er. ^307. 4.) The PLACE, instrument, or other means of the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the verb, a. -T«f/ov (G. -au, n.), more frequently expressing place; as, xK^od-o/i^xt, to hear, ax^ox-TyiQiov, place of hearing, auditory ; ^ixaa-ryi^tov (jStxx^ai), court of Justice; Toryi^iov {vlveS), drinking-cup. Cf. §§ 314, b, 315. a. b. -TQov (G. -flu, n.), or -r^a (G. -a?, f.), more frequently expressing means ; as, ^vu, to curry, ^ut/T^ov and ^uffT^a, currycomb, kuT^ov (Xuw), ran- eom (means of releasing), o^;)^rifrTQx {}^xSoy.a.t), orchestra. Remark. Terminations of verbals are affixed, in general, with the same euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection ; i. e. those begirmlng with ff foUow the analogy of -trai of the Fut. or -ffai of the Perf. pass. ; those beginning with ^w and t, of -fAai and -rat of the Perf. pass. ; and those be- ginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. It is convenient to remember, that verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. of the Perf. pass, more frequently denote the thing done ; the 2d, the doing; and the Sd, the doei: Thus, •ffz—pfoivi-fAxi, '^z-'ffaiyi-ffxi, Ti-Ton^-rxt, ^oiij-fix, poem, ^aiTi-ffi;, poesy, voivj-t^;, poet. § 308. II. From Adjectives. Nouns formed from adjectives (or from common radicals, § 303. «) usually ex- press the ABSTRACT of the adjective, and are formed in, a. -ix (G. -ixs, f.)) Of) i^ the root ends in £ or a, -tx forming, with the final vowel of the root, -e/a or -oi£ ; as, iro ^0^ adjectives in -05 and -vs ; as, 'Uosj equal, Itroryie equality ; nray^v?, swift^ ra^vrviSj swiftness. c. -a-uvv} (G. -»5, f.), from adjectives in -os and -uv ; as, Vixcctos, J'"^tj ^ixctta ffvvrtt justice; cu(p^uv, discreet, tratp^oiruyT], discretion. d. -05 (G. -los, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -vs ; as, ^ntSvs, deep, (iaSotj depth; ih^vsj broad, tZ^os, breadth. e. -as (G. -atosj f.), from numerals ; as, Sw, two, ^vdsj duad. See t 25. III. § 309. III. From Other Nouns. Nouns derived from other nouns are, 1.) Patrials (patria, native land)^ and similar words de- noting persons related to some object. These end in, ii. -TJjs (G. -Tov) masc, and -ns (§ 134. a ; G. -ri^eg) fem. (with the preceding vowel long in patrials; thus, -17935, -virvs, -arvis, -icctvsj -iuTns\ and also in other nouns in -irris) \ as, 2y€a:gff, Sybaris, Sti^agfr*)?, a man of SybariSf a Sybarite, 2y6a^7r/s, a woman of Sybaris; Aiytv^ms, TlnrartjSf '2-7rtc^Ti£CTV}s, ^ixBXteurtjSj a man of j^gina, &c. ; ^okis, city, voXin-vnt citizen, -^oXItisj female citizen ; to^ov, bow, ro^ornsj archer, ro^oris, archeress. b. -£vs (G. -ia>s) masc, and -/? (G. -t'Sos') fem. (§ 118. 3) ; as, Miya^ct, Megara, Msya^eyj, Megarian man, Mgyag/f, Jif. woman; j- ffros^ 'AogjjffTj V?] E. 412. Remaek. Patronymics appear to have been, in their origin, diminutives thus, TlQteifAi%s, little Priam. See ^312. Akin to the above are a few words in -/Jfia?, contr. -/Soyj, — son, -/Ssa, contr. -iS^, — daughter; as^^B-vya- TQi^ovs, -iS^, daughter's son, — daughter, a.^iX(pi^ovsj -t^t}, nephew, niece. § 31 1. 3.) Female Appellatives. These end in, a. -15 (G. -iSos), chiefly from masculines of Dec. I., and from those in -evg as, ^iff-trortjs, master, ^tir^oTis, mistress (also ^io'^aivcc, cf. b). See § 134, a. CH. 11.] NOUNS. 247 b. -eetva (G. -«s), chiefly from maaculinea in -atv ; as, xim, -ovrosj lioitf Xtaivecj lioness ; rtxTav, -ovasj artisan^ riKrmve& • Aaxwv, -uvog^ Spartan, Aec- xKtvK. Also from some in 'os ; as, S-&os, gody 3-6«iv«, goddess (^ 74, e), kvKos wolf, XvKCtivee, c. -iia (G- -tieis), from (iatffiXivst Mng, and U^tusj priest; thus, j3«(r/Xs/«, queen, It^nx, priestess. d. -irira (-rra, § 70. 1 ; G. -jj?), from several endings of Dec. III. ; as, K/X/|, -ixos, Cilician, K/Xio-j-a (cf. § 273), ava^, -xros, sovereign^ iivaa-ffa, S-jJ;, -T«j, hireling, S-TJcrirxj AlSvsy -vos, Lylnan, ASCvffffa,. Note. See, also, §§ 306. N"., 309, 310. § 312. 4.) Diminutives (sometimes expressing affec- tion^ often contempt). These end in, a. -lov (G. -lov, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-/S^v, -a^iov, -uk>i.4av, -uS^iov, -v(piov, &c.). — b. -iefKos (G. -ov, m.), -tj^Kt] (G. -jjj, f.). Thus, war?, c?«7rf. Diminutives, •jra.iSiov, little child, 7ea.tVi(rx,o5., young boy, vrat^serxri, young girl, ^eei^a^iov, 'prxtScc^ihov, ^eni^ct^uXXtov, ^xi^et^iirxos, TTct^nrx^^iov • fAit^cc,^^ youth, fi.etpcx.KioVj (Attoccxittov, fAZt^MKuXXioVf fAUoccxuXXioiov, (/,ii^tt,xlif£en, A.. P. ^^i0m, eti^treg, at^STiog • vavM, to stop, Pf. P. ^ritfoiVfjteci, A. P. l-rayff'^jjv, TOiVlTTOgy 'H'CCVffTiOg. g. -vog, -«, -ov, passive (compare the Part, in -f/.ivog') \ as, aiQa>, to revere, {inZ-vog) ffifivogj revered, ^ohivog (^^o^ia), longed for. h. -a^og (-c£, ~ov), -Kg, (G. -aJof), &c. ; as, _^a>.a&<, to slacken, ;^«X«gflf, slack; ^i^&t, to bear, (po^ag, fruitful; X'lyco, to choose, >.oyag, chosen; Xot^rog (Xti<^ai), remaining, §31^. II. From Nouns. These have the following endings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed : a. -log, belonging to; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it in a diphthong (-xiogj -uog, -otog, -mg, -vioi), and often, without respect to this, assuming the form -uog (Ion. -mog, § 46. B.), especially from names of persons and animals. Many patrials (properly adjectives, but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, ou^avog, heaven, oh^aviog, belonging to heaven, heaven- ly, (poviog Qpovog^, of murder, murderous ; ayt^ccTog (^ayo^a), pertaining to the forum, ^KSmmog (^Kffy^'ieti), Athenian, ^itog (S-s-aj), divine, *A^yi7og {"Apyog, -£-os), A.7'give, luog (ew;), Ion. hoTog {h&>g, -o~og), of the morning, •pr^^vioi {•!S-9Jpi;;vg), of a cubitus length; eovS^ai'^iiog {eivfi^uTog), human, 'OfAv^eiog Q'Oftyi^og), Homeric, 9-'^^iiog (9-«f), of wild beasts. I^OTES. a. From the neuter of these adjectives has come a class of sub- stantives denoting an appropriated building or other place, instrument, &c. ; as, A^meetov ('A^^jvS), Qvia-BToy, "M-euirtToy, temple of Minerva, of Theseus, of tJie Muses, xev^sTov (icou^iug), barber's shop, y^ocftpturuov {y^oi.fi,(jca.Ttvg), writing- tablet, cf. § 307. (8. Before -teg and -/a (§ 308. a), v often passes into c ; as, hmvrosn year, Iviava'tog, of a year, MiX«ir/of (M/Xjira?), J^lesian, cc^etvecirix (^d^dvctrog') , zm- viortalitu. CH. 11.] ADJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. 249 b. -txls, -», -St (if „ precede, -xS; ; if simple ; or n, -axis ; -vvliile -a/05 commonly, makes -xi'xi;), relating to. These adjectives in -xis are often foi-med from words tliat are themselves derivative. They apply to thmgs rather than to persons. Wien used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in quality, or ft for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus, rixil, art, tsx""';, relating to art, artistic; ^au!^o!, slave, 'ScuXixis, servile; A.i^yj, Libyan, AiQuxos, pertaining to the Libyans or Libya ; Kog/v^iuj, Corin- thian, 'K.o^iv^iaxos • ervrsv^sTos, spondee, trTov^tixxos, spondaic ; 'A^atos, AcluBan, 'A^d'ixe;, and less Att. ^A^at'ixos • vrotnTni, poet, •roitirixos, poetic, pnro^txos, QyiT&i^, rhetorical, trr^arviyiKos {(TT^arnyos), Jit for a general. See \ 314. a. u. -£05, -z, -m, and -rvof, -», -(!» (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en ; as, XZ^'^'fs, gold, x^vcr£o; (^ 18), golden, ^vXivcs (^yXov), wooden. d. -tvos, seldom -ivo;, expressing time or prevalence; as, yi/^t^ivos («jt6£ga), by day, ^i^tvas (weSaw), level, o^uvos {0^05, -e-as), mountainous. e. -nioj, -VIVOS, -avis, patriots, from names of cities and countries out of Greece ; as, Ta^ecvrlvos (Ta^aj, -ocvtos), Tarentine, ^ul^ixttvo's (K.v^ixos), Cyzi- cene, ^uQ^iavis (^a^^sis^ Sardian. f. -goff, -£^os, -7JQ0S, -aXsos, -9iXos, -uXis, -us (^-sirifx, -sv, G. -evtas), -limits Q-ts, G. -SOS ; contr. from -o-uins, from eTSos, form), expressing fulness or quality ; as, alff^^is {aTir;(^os), shameful, {^loSi^is (ipo^oj), fearful, -TTovn^os (orovos), painful, ^a^^aXios {^a^ffes^, courageous, d^acTtjXis {d^xTti), deceitful, tptt^ooXos (^s/Sw), parsimonious, vX^sts (JIxtj), woody, vru^ists (cryf, -v^os^, fery, ^a^isis (x^$'s)t graceful, ir(pt]»eo^9]s (jrtpTi^, wasp-like, ^poof^f^&i^tjs (i^a^^o?), sandy. §316. HI. From Adjectives and Adverbs. 1. From some adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the same manner as from nouns ; thus, y.a&agog, clean, xa&aQiog, cleanly, ilsv&dgwg (slfv&sgog), liberal, -d-ijlvxog {&rjkvg), femi- nine, x^saivog {x&ig), of yesterday. 2. The adjective has in Greek, as in other languages, two strengthened forms, of which the one may be termed dual, denoting choice between two objects, and the other plural, de- noting choice among a number of objects. The most obvious examples of these strengthened forms are the comparative and superlative degrees, commonly so called. Other examples of the comparer tive or dual strengthened form are, (a) the correlatives orinQos : hhether of the two 9 orort^is, etejoj (formed from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, •] 23, § 141, or, as some think, from the numeral iTs\ one of the two, oliSin^os, oVo- ri^oe, ixciri^os, a./jt.t (^e^^j), to harvest, l^i^M (e^/s), to contend, lo^ni^ea (£flgT«), to make a feast, ^mct^u Qixti), to judge, ^avfiK^ca (Say^a), to wonder. d. -a with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently active ; as, xa-^x^os, pure, xaSai^w, to purify, ^oixiXXat (yroiJ^Xos), to variegate, {jn&xiff' eai (jiuXoixos^, to soften. §310. II. Frobi Other Verbs. These are 1 .) Desideratives, formed in -inica, from the Fut. ; as, yiXoiu, to laugh, ysXairti&t, to wish to laugh, PI. Phsedo, 64 b, ^oXe/^tiffsitif (yroXiftkeS), to wish for war, Th. i. 33. Desideratives are also formed in -raw (rarely -aw), chiefly from verbal nouns ; as, .^av^avw, to learn, fia^urm, disciple, (jt-ttdvirtDLu, to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 18.'3, B-r^arwyiaw (^/rr^arviyoi), to desire military command, vii. 1. 33, ^xvurxa (Sa»aT«), to desire death, PI. Phffido, 64 b. 2.) Various prolonged forms in -Jw, -rxu, &c. (see §§ 265-300), some- CH. ll.J VERBS. ADVERBS. 25j times frequentative or intensive^ as, pt^ru, to throw, pi^ral^u, to throw to and fro, ffrsvojj to siffh, iTT&va'i^m, to sigh deeply ; sometimes inceptive, as, vt^au, to be at ' iAe age of puberty, ftSxo'Kai, to come to the age of puberty ; sometimes causative, as, iJLiSuu, to be intoxicated, fjt.i$iffKoj, to intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive, as, lijt^ctTaai, to clieat, V^avaruXXat (cf. ^ 312), to cheat a little, to humbug, Ar. Eq. 1 1 44 ; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form (§§254-258,265). E. Adverbs. § 3S0> Most adverbs belong to the following classes. I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives, employed as circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective thus employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of these oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to themes that are not in use. Examples, 1. GenttiveSj (a) in-hv, denoting ttie place whence (§ 91) : (6) in -ov, denoting the place wliere ; as, oS j]sc. ro-rou or ^ai^lou], in which place, where, auTDu, tliere, o^ou, in the same place, oV^ntfiov, nowhere : (c) in -jjs ; as, xt(^vns, of a sudden, \^s, in order i (d) w^o:x.o; (jr^oi'Q, of a gift, gratis, &c. 2. Dativih, (a) in -si, -ch of Dec. II. sing., and in -««(»), -£«(») of Dec. I. pi., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -m derived from pronouns, this commonly passes into the idea of whither, see Tf 63, and compare the fa- miliar use of where, there, &c., in English) ; as, 'ASmwi, at Athens ; see §§ 90, 96. 5 : (i) in ->j (-n), -a. (-a), -«; of Dec. I., and in -i of Dec. III., denoting way, place where, or time when ; as, ravr^, [sc. oSf] in this way, thus, [sc. ^u^if\ in this place, here, •TTavra^^, every way, everywhere, fre^i?, on foot, iiia, privately, ^afiui, on the ground, •Tea.'ka.i, in olden time, tatiTi, by the will of, ^ or ■£Sm, chiefly from verbs (those in -itSuii commonly conforming to other verbals) ; and -tx ; as, ^XivSnin {j!T\iths), in the form of bricks, Hdt. ii. 96, (iorpv^ov (fiiir^vs), in clusters, B. 89, avatpav^ov, or -S« (xvenpativia), openly, xpuQ^tiv, or -Ja ^ (xgycT'Tw), secretly, ff'jro^ahvtv {^ifreu^ta, tr'^ro^as), scatteringly. These appear to be Ace. forms (cf. § 320. 3; ; thus. Sing. fem. -S«v, neut. -Sov, PI. neut. -S«. c. -I or -£/', especially from imitative verbs (§ 318. c, -i^m becoming -ktti), and in compounds of a- privative, avros, and vras • as, MjjS'ffT/, like the Medes, 'EkXtiiifrl, in the Greek language, a/iiirli (jiiMi), without pay, d/ixx^u and 252 COMPOSITION. [book II. apLaxviriif or -/, without battle^ ai/rox^i^i (x^'i)f ^-^ one's ottm liand, trxvStifiu (SniKsf), with the whole people. Tliese appear to be Dat. forms (cf. § 320. 2}. d. -5 added to a palatal ; as, avx-fitytS/ii (r. piy-, § 294), to mix up, i,miii%, confusedly, pellmell, irajaXXal (?rx^-xkXx(ririii, § 274. y), alternately. (2.) Time when, in -te (Dor. -««), or, for more specific ex- pression, in -ly.a ; as, aXkozs {allog), at another time, aiuxa (avTog), at the very moment. See jj 63. (3.) Place whither, in -ae (which appears to be a softened form of -St, § 322. 111., or at least kindred with it) ; as, oi- gavoae, to heaven, ixiias, thither, sriQtoas, to the other side. See Tf 63. (4.) NuMBEE, in -dxig. See ^ 25. II. § 322. III. Prepositions with their Cases; as, {ngu egyov) ngovgyov, before the work, to the purpose, nagaxgrjfia, upon the affair, immediately, (di' o) Sio, on account of which, wherefore, ijv noSav bSm) ifinoduv, in the way of the feet, 'ASrjva^s (from 'A&rjvag, and -i5f, an inseparable preposition de- noting direction towards, §§ 51. N., 150. 4), to Athens. IV. Derivatives from Phepositiojjs, or Prepositions USED without Cases ; as, I'|m (ef), without, sXaa i/ig), within, fcgog, besides. II. Formation of Compound Words. § 323. In composition, the word which modifies or limits the other, usually precedes ; as, ro^o-Sijr]g (vo/iog, jL&tjfn), law-maker. The exceptions consist mainly of a verb or preposition followed by a noun, and are for tbe most part poetic. Among the verbs -which are most frequently so placed in prose are fTxia, to love, and /iiAu, to hate ; thus, (piX-iti^atras, man-loving, ftttro-'ffi^'jyis, Persian-hater. § 324. A. The first word has commonly its radical form with simply euphonic changes. These changes, besides those which the general rules of orthoepy require, consist chiefly, I.) In the insertion of a union-vowel, which, after a substantive or adjective, is commonly -»-, but sometimes~-»-, -«-, or -<- ; and, after a verb, -£., -;-, -o-, -o;-, or -«>- J as, vccid-o-T^iStis y-TxTs, -do;, r^ifiiy), instructer, ^tx-o-Xoyos (d/»j), Xiyai), advocate, '^vifjt.iov^yos (Ion. "hn/it-O'i^yo;, from "Svifj-tog and 'i^ycv), artisan, yyd-o-fitr^ix, from yiLoc, contr. y«, &nd fur^iaj, §§ 35, 98. a) ysufur^'tK, ge- ometry, (^vS-o-Ko^os • vacos, vs&is, and xo^ia) vsaxo^os, keeper of a temple, ^txvar- o-(po^os and -yi-ir(po^os, light- bringing ; Xu-ffi-nXvis (Xvaij teAas), income-paying, profitable, vav-trt-^o^os (vatTj, fragof) navigable, (^fii wounding, A. 5 1 1 . In some of these cases, the a- appears to have been bor- rowed from the theme or the Dat. pi. of nouns, and in others, perhaps, from the Aor. of verbs, or a verbal. 3.) In adopting a shorter form from the theme, or an early root ; as, aifc- oSaip^S (^ccTfAx, -cLTOif jSatrra;), blood-bathed^ (ptX-o-woyos (ip/Xe-ii; from (fiikoSf wovfls), labor-loving. Notes, a. The mode in which the constituent words are united often depends, especially in verse, upon the quantity of the syllables which compose them. j3. In some compounds, chiefly poetic, the first word has a form like that of the Dat. sing, or pi. without change ", as, wKn-roXos, roaming by night, Eur. Ion, 7 IS, Titp^iiri-^XnrTiSt wall-approacher, E. 31. ^ 33o. Remarks. 1, If the first word is o. particle, it is commonly unchanged except by the general laws of euphony. For elision in preposi- tions, see §§ 41, 42, 192. 1. 'Afi^t, like cre^/, often retains its vowel. In the other prepositions, the ehsion is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., par- ticularly in the Ep. before some words which begin with the digamma. For elision before a consonant, see § 48. 2. II^o sometimes unites- with a vowel following by crasis ; as, Tr^o-a^ros ^^ovirro?, ^^o-i^ca cr^ov^&j, x. 90 ; see § 192. 1. 2. Some particles occur only in composition, and are hence called insepara- ble. Of these, the most important are, a.) a-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a- priva five, as, os-craij, without children, ec-tro^oSi unwise ; but sometimes denoting ~ union, collection, or intensity, as, a-hXipos QeX^u;), brother, a-rsvns (niva), strained, 'A- privative (commonly av- before a vowel) is aldn to anv, loithout, to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng. and Germ, un- ; a- copulative appears to be akin to a^a, together. Akin to a priv. is vvi- (Lat. we) ; thus, vjjXsjjf (eXsoj), merciless, b.) tuff', ill, mis-, un- • as, ^vtr-^ufcos, ill-omened^ tuff-rv^la., mis-fortune, ^viT~oettfi&>y, un-happy. c.) The intensive d^i- (kindred with "A^jjf, § 161. E.), 1^/-, 2[«-, and Ja-; as, d^i-^ecx^vs, very tearful, ^d-^kovrog, very rick. § 336. B. The form of the last word depends upon the part of speech to which the compound belongs. 1. If the compound is a noun or adjective, it commonly takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class 22 254 COMPOSITION. [book h. of words to which it belongs. Often, the last word, if itself a noun or adjective, undergoes no change ; as, ojio-Sovlog., fel- low-slave, a-7iaig, childless. If the last element is a verb, the compound adjective or masculine substantive ends com- monly in, a. -cs. This ending (which is far the most common) has both an active and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent, wliich, if the penult is short, tlie actwe compoimd commonly takes upon the penult, but the passive upon the antepenult; as, \itii-ii\os (Xiios, lUXXu), throwing stones, Xt^c-CoXos, thrown at with stones. b. -ns (-S?, G. -£flff) ; as, £u-!r^£flr«f, becoming, avrac^xTis, self-sufficing, 0. -us or -as (G. -'•/), and -uj or -«j, denoting the agent (§ 30G. a, b) ; as, vofio-^irns, legislator, [jt,v^o—jru\vis (§ 92. 2), l^vth-Sn^as, bird-catcller, fiviXo- CoTft^, shepherd, 2. 529, sra/S-aXfirajg, child-murderer, Remaek. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with a, i, or a, followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to n or 01 J as, ffroctTnyos {cT^oiros, ayu), general, ovr^Xaros (Svff-, IkaCvatj, hard to drive over, dvavv/^os (a-, ovsfiu, § 44. 5), nameless, § SST. 2. If the compound is a veeb, it is important to observe that verbs are compounded directly and without change with prepositions only ; and that, in other cases, compound verbs are derivatives from compound nouns or adjectives ex- isting or assumed. Thus, XafiQmcii, to take, unites directly with the prep, ccyoi, up, to form ^•ia'kitfi^a.tu, to take up; but it cannot so unite with the noun 'i^yov, work, and hence the idea to take work, to contract, is expressed by i^yc-XncZiia, derived from the compound verbal l^yo-xdSos, contractor. So the verb compounded of jVcj-aff, liorse, and T^i^ai, to feed, is I'^^or^aipiot from l-rTor^o/pos, horse-keeper. Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to be changed in passing through the compound verbal ; thus, from itTtos and ^atiu, is formed trivo-vata;, bread- maker, and from this again trtro-votsM, to make bread. Eemakks. 1 . The imion of the preposition with the verb, as not affecting the form of the verb, and admitting of separation by tmesis (§ 328. N.), is termed loose or improper composition, in distinction from that close or proper composition ivhich forms one inseparable word. § 398. 2. In PRONOUNS and particles there is a still looser form ol composition, consisting in the aggregation of words, sometimes really and sometimes only appai-ently combined in sense. In these aggregates, the or- thogTaphy varies, the, words being sometimes written together, chiefly when the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. Among the chief words that are thus afHxed to others are, ii. The INDEFINITE PRONOUN r)s • as, cms, whoever, ouns, no one, I'lris, if any one. b. The PAKTIOLES, U.S (Ep. xi or xit. Dor. xS), contingent or indefinite; as, Ss &v, whoever, I'txv or oV av, wlienever. CH. 11.] PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 255 ys (Dor. yS), at least, emphati' as, 'iyuyz, I at least, truysj you sureh/j Tovro yz, this certainli/, I^bi ys, since at least. Sw, now (shorter fonn of tj^tj) ; as, oirrts Sm, whoever noiv, vm Sw, junt now. Sw^rors (Jjj crors), ever now; as, otrrnrSn-TForSi whosoever now, ti ^ri^ron ; what in tfie world ? otiv (contr. from Uvj it being so, ^ 55), then, therefore, yet, often added to au indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of indefiniteness ; as, offTiJouv, whoever then, o^atir^tj^oTivVi howsoever now then. W£j (shorter form of irsgi), very, particularly, just; as, oV-tej, who in par- ticular, atr-jTSQ, just as. vrori, at any time, ever, often added to inten-ogatives to strengthen the ex- pression ; as, Ti cTflTE ia-Ti rovro ; [what at any time is this ?] what in the world is this ? or, what can this be ? TE, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other connec- tive words, before their use was estabhshed, to mark them as such. In the Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent ; but in the Att. scarce occurs, except in are, and Sffrtj asj oVos v (iatriXias, Epyaxa^ the wife of Si/ennesis, the king of the CilicianSj i, '2. 12. Soipativerflv Si i/cius, the son of Polystratus, iii. S. 10, Qifita-TonXm flxw ^raga tri [sc. iy&>~\, /, Themistocles, have come to thee, Th. i. 137. 3. The sign of special application (aJj, as) is often omitted ; as, Ai(pH^Ks, ois ti^ov arKi'^a,(Tf£a.ra, the skins which they had as coverings, i. 5. 10. K-kict^^ot ol Kcct liffd) •^ci^ixa.Xiin ffCfj^^ovXav i. 6. 5. 4. Synesis. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is im plied in another word ; as, 'A^wvaToj uv vroXsus tjjs fnyliTTyig, being an Athenian^ a city the greatest, PI Apol. 29 d (here troAsw? agrees with 'A^ym, of Athens^ imphed in 'A^yivaTes). 'Atp'iKovTo us K.oTva/^ct, toXiv 'ExX?jvjS«, ^lymTiedy avroixouf, oixodyTets v. 5. 3 (here ic-roixous refers to veXirets, im- plied in -TToXiy) ; cf. iv. 8. 22, v. 3. 2. Sav tou tr^Ea-^e^y? Ar. Ach. 93. § SoOa 5. Attraction. A substantive intimately related to anoth- er is sometimes put in apposition with it by attraction. In this construction, the appositive usually denotes a part, or a circumstance, and is often joined with a participle, taking the place of the Genitive absolute. Thus, ILii^Xtxra oi Tu 'TT^aSu^a. xvTetiv, (poivTxo; fiiv at 3-v^a.i •^TB^oitifiivctt, their portals are easily set on fire, the doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5. 22. "AxXo r^iToy oc^fAo, i^'/iyzro, (poiviaifft xetra.-^ri'^'rafAivoi at 't^-^Foi lb. viii. 3. I -. 6. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an adjunct; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem more appropriate. Thus, Tourou to eu^o? Sya crXe^^cs, of this the breadth is two plethra, i. 2. 5 ; but, Toy Ss ^ec^avov to iueog IffTiv ilxoiri xa.) 'yrivri •TTo^uy, and the breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet, lb. 8. Ylorotf/^os tu^c? ^vo TrXtP^&fv lb. 23 ; but, Ta,(p^tii . ., to filv sy^aj h^yvtct) TlVTi i. 7. 14. Aexa (Ayee.7 &ttrcai ^saiv aTi/iieCf our garlands are profaned, a dishonor to the city, and an insult to the gods, Eur. Heracl. T2. To Ss vatrut fiiyt irrov . ., Tm f^sv ffiiv ^u^ctv av^avofjCSvyiv o^xs, but the greatest thing of all, you see your own territory increasing, Cyr. v. 5. 24. To XoitrS tov '%\, ^^tyjco; iPXioiV kolkZv, ^ouXt} yvvvi y^atvs 'EXXaS' eiiTKip't^of^ai Eur. Tro. 489. 'Hfiaiv Si ysvvaifi£yaiv. To Tou Koifjciudo^rotov, ouo ot yttToyts ff), or from their sustaining similar relations to the same word. This construction has received the general name of a^fi.a, xaS' o^oy xol] fti^os, construction by tlie whole and the part. II. Use of the Numbers. § 33S. I. The Singular is sometimes used for the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression greater individuality or uniii; ; as, Tov "Mlrjva, the Greek {=the Greeks), Hdt. i. 69. "£(insi, Sdxgvov ofiftdjav ano, the tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. El. 1231. Jllim'krjfi ivdiig Ofifioc SaxQVoyv lb. 906. Bemabk. a chorus, from its strict unity, commonly speaks of itself as an individual, and is often so addressed or spoken of by others. Not unfrequent- ly, the two numbers are mingled; as, XOP. 'Eyii fuv, S iral, xa,) n iriy ff^eu^ootr* oifjctt, xoLi rohfjiay avT)is, vi^dav' ti it /iit xizXus Xiy&i, gu vixa • a'o) ya^ s^J/oftttr^' Hf^ix. Soph. El. 251. '^Xl ^iiyoi, fit} S^r' a^txnSu ffo) yriffTivirits Id. CEd. C. 174. '^ft7v f^h ij^fj crav Tire^ivreti {ii^os ' fiivu Ss iEsch. Eum. 676. 'O^yxs ^kmiViu o-m . . 'TfiiT; Vs lb. 848. § 336. II. The use of the Plural for the Singular is particularly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, in adjectives used substantively, in the names of things com- posed of distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons or things ; as, KaJ "^v^vi xai' ^aX'TT'/t xeti vrovous ips^uv, to endure both heat, and cold, and labor, iii. 1. 23. Ta ti^ia too xi^acro;, the right of the wing, i, 8. 4. JTccT^oxXos, as trot va.'T^h «v tx (plXraTx, Patroclus, who was thy father's best-beloved, Soph. Ph. 434. Ti "Siuivviiftos fiaeriXtia, the palace cf SyeitnC' sis, i. 2. 23; cf. iii. 4. 24, iv. 4. 2, 7. Svy rotir^i to^ois, with this bow. Soph. Ph. 1 335 ; cf. To^ov toos 2S8. Twi* A/aj «•' i^S^uv liVe^ ffrivsis, 'for the foes * (Prometheus), JEsch. Pr. 67. ^dXa roxtutriv tixorats 5-vfiotjfiEvois, ' parents' (a mother), Eur. Heo. 403. Remakks. «. An hulividital often speaks of himself in the Flur., as if others were associated with him ; and a woman so speaking of herself, uses the masculine, as the generic gender (§ 330. I) ; thus, Xitoi/iila yx^ rx Xi- >.i^uiva. fMi, for I am ashamed of whctt I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. Saw 260 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [boOK III. ycc^ ipfifiiv^s oiix'st' a.v ihi • h cc) V Ufih xa.) ^jiv Kx) fin Id. Ale. 277. 'AAK. 'Ajxai^tEv Yi/iiTs CI r^nMirxivns Ahv lb. 383. MECA. 'H/a's xnvoii- /KE», ojVsj e|£puiro!^£» Id. Med. 1241. 'HA. Tltroi/uS', tl xV't ^"^e) "f^- foiJ^sMi Soph. EI. 399. So a chorus of •women (§33.5. E.) uses the masc sing, (if the text is correct), 'S.iUui ^.tlan/ixi, . . Xiinm Eur. Hipp. 1 105. [i. The Plur. may be used ^vith a singular compellative, ■when the person ad - dressed is associated with others; as, "It', i(p7i, ufnTs, S ''S^irviix, xa.) Mcia-xs- TS uvTOy {iovXti^yjval aVe^ ri/zus* 0/ f/.\y S« KyavriivTts l^i^xffxov H. Gr. iv. 1. 11. ^n Tsxyav, n Ta^iffTov ; Soph. GEd. C. 1102. Xlpoffixhr', u -jrccT, •jrar^i lb. 1104. § 337. III. In speaking of two, both the Plural and the Dual are used, the one as the more generic, and the other as the more specific form (§ 330. 1 ) ; thus, naXSsg Svo, two children ; but, Tw ncuds, the two children, i. 1. 1. Compare Tu>v avSQav vi. 6. 29, Tw uvSqs 30, Toiig avS^ag ' . . Tomav, . . iw avdge 31, TOVTOIV 32, T(U TE SpSqE 34. 2(p^w S' ivo^oiti Zstij, Tciy SI rsXETre fioi ©aiiflvT-', Itii oti f/,01 ^oJVTi y' au^is 'i^sTov- Me^EiT^e y ^7it ^xi^srov r' ■ oil ya^ fi' 'in BA.£irj? PI. Meno, 87 c. OySfiv aXXor^iav voiaiv oiirt Tns iccvTou ^ar^ttas ours, rou r^oTov (cf. § 405) Dem. Cor. 289. 14. Oura 'TXovrou oipirh ^liffm^tv PI. Rep. 550 e. HZv a^xovvreov ^i^trrd, Oyr. viii. 2. 21, Remark. The verb Xu-jeofjLai governs the Gen. in a variet}' of senses, which are natmrally connected with each other, but which might be referred, in syntax, to different heads. Thus, 2Tf«Tow . . tav XiXufif/rSvov ^o^Ss, 'left 23 ''^^^ SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [bOOK III. from lor by] the spear,' L e. 'the relics of war' (§§ 347, 381), iEsch. Ag. 517. K/fx» trsXfiifijv ou fictK^kv XiXzifj^fzivoi, * riot left far behind,' i.e. * closely pursuing,' Id. Pr. 857. Tyuf/.^ V aSeXtpoy Me^-sayfaw XeXu/a- fiivosy ' left behind by/ i. e. * inferior to,' Eur. Suppl. 904. Kai tU p>los f^ot trov AeXEijii^Evj) (pikos i *bereft of (§ 357), Soph. Ant. 548. VvejfAas >-£i- •^of/.iva, devoid of understanding^ Soph. EI. 474. AiXsiftrficci ruv Iv "ExXwtriir vofx,eovj *am ignorant of,' Em*. Hel. 1246. § 3^0. Words of SUPERIORITY include, — «.) Words of authority^ power ^ precedence, oxid preeminence. Thus, Tiffifix,.;(7'ire/*si' H. 410. Xer^af yi-^^f££vos ^oXi)j$ a.X.os, having washed his hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, j3. 261. Aau- itrSoci luppiTos ^orafioTo Z. 508. § 3£»6« That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of discourse^ a matter of complaint^ the subject-matter of a composition, &c. Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, Rule VII. The theme of discourse or of THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. Thus, Tow ro^oTov oh kocXZ; 'l^nXiyiiv, or/, k. t. X., it is not well to say of the bowman^ that^ S^c.^ PI. Hep. 439 b. Aiahe^ftivog avraiv, oerm /xiv ^u^etv xa} cUv 'i^onv, observing in respect to tJiem, how great and wJiat a country they have^ iii. i. 19. T«j Sa yuva.tx.oi J u . , Kaxo-^onTj but in respect to the wife, if she manages ill, CEc. 3. 1 i - Tov xairiyv'/irov ti ^«'? ; Soph. El. 317. KXyow- ras vrai^oSf having ken id respecting her son, Id.. Axit. 1182. MavTeTa!, , . S, rovV Ip^pyiffdvi fl-atf^aro? Id. CEd. C. 354. decree fAO-duv ot tou ^u^ou ooxoufiiv, ofg , . ivoftil^i CjT. viii. 1. 40. T . ee^ct xaroi to, avra 'i^ti ; Sut what of §*c. ? PI. Phsedo, 78 d. Tsjj Ss (r«s ipgevos, h trot/ Ss'Saixa Eui'. Andr. 361. Cf. § 438. y. KoTE. For the Gen. of the theme may be often substituted another case, more frequently the Nom., in the succeeding clause ; thus, E/ Ss vi yvvh kcc- xoTToiUj but if tlie wife manages ill. 3. Genitive of Supply. § 357. Supply may be either ahundant or defective. Hence, Rule VIII. Words of plentt and want gov- ern the Genitive ; as, a. Of Plenty. *Ay^46Jv 9-fj^ia/v srX^^*??, full of wild beasts, i. 2, 7. At(pSi^ct5 . . \'^'ifjc'}f\oLffa,v _3^ofray, they filled the skins with hay, i. 5. 10. Toyrwv olXt;, enough of these things, v. 7, 12. %Jifia.5 ToXXiuv k«J ayctSZv ytfZiOViras iv- 6, ^7. MsfTTri ya.^ vroXXm x'^o^ias ia-rU ii. 5. 9. Tav Si Str^riov 6 Xoipos lysurX^itSji i. 10. 12. Tlx^ee.^Eia'ou , , ^a/rtos Tetvicitav Sev- § CH. l.J OF SUPPLY. PAETITIVE, 269 ^Qtuv ii. 4. 14. Kfl^ Sires/ ffrofCK . . If^as ffct^xog Soph. Ph. 1156. *0 S«/- fieov S* e's fiB ^Xouo-ios xaxav Eur. Or. 394. Il3^.ovrsT . . (pikojv vii. 7. 42. Tgi^Jgjjj , . cso'a'yftivrj av>a^tav CEc. 8. 8. (i. Op Want. Taiv eiriTjjSs/wi' (rwac/sr, Ae zt«7? ziinwijoroui^nSj ii. 2. 12. 2^fivSflV))Twv . . Sfi?, ^Aere is need of slingers., iii, 3. 16. 07a)v av IXtriSwir l/««uTev Vrs^flff-a/^i, of what hopes J should deprive myself j ii. 5. 10, 'Av- 6^aivuv a^d^Zy i. 7. 3. *H ^pv^ij yvfivh rod ffaf^aros PI. Crat. 403 b. V ufi>vatv \.7, 13. T&fv Vt ^x^CeiQa/v . . «XXd/f 1. '^* 18. ToTs ToiouTois Tcuv E^ytuv Mem. ii. S* 3. E/ Ss Tt ko.) elXXo Iv^v vXtjs n KaXa.fjt.ou i. 5. 1. 'Yi^ijcvfiam rt rns ^aXayyos 1. 8. 18, 'Ev r^ ^vfAfA9}s ffxi-^ofAvovi iv. 5. 22. Ka) r^j rs y^s 'iTif/,ov Th. ii. 5G> M«vT/x^f 'ix°^ fix^^^ Soph. Q5d T. 709. SwsXiyovro rcHv kl^cov Ar. Acll. 184. Tj ^evav, (^iSaios. Se rav Iv ira- 7AfA.a, on this account I envy you, Cyr. viii. 4. 23. Miiridv um^sniims, serving for hire, lb. vi. 2. 37. M»Jh ■ aiiraiv xarctdt'i;, paying nothing for them, lb. iii. 1. 37. Tau ^ev ^a6evs tjiXTEi^tv aiirov lb. V. 4. 32. Ztvi\id ci tovvov, t^s ol o£jXiae ff-rvyu Soph. EL 1027. "H jj/Xoo Ss/ras . . « x''"'"'''' I'i-'^-T. 234. Txurns IxuV- CH. 1.] OF MOTIVE, REASON, AND END IN VIEW. 275 ficci ffSy I beseech you for her sake, Eur. Or. 67 1 - *Ix6r&u&> cr& rwvSs yovvxTaiv Kx) ffou ysv&iou Sfi^/S? r* ivhectfievasj 'by these knees/ &c., Eur. Hec. 75^2 'SwiTifoy kya.&ov ^tttfiovosj ' in honor of/ Ar. Eq. 1 06. Tav ^a^sxx fAva; Tlacrta i For lohat do I [owe^ Pasias tioelve mince? Ar. Nub. 23. U^o'^riTOTat Ttj; -r/B ^etuTixa Tjdovtis xxi ^aptros Toi, tjJs vro\ia)s ^^ayfxt&Tct, 'for the sake of present pleasure and favor/ Dem. 34. 23. 'KaTappo(povirit rod . . fih Xva-in X&7v cclroTsi ' SO that it may not profit/ Cyr. i. 3. 9. /3. "With Adjectives. ¥ju^otif£uv , . rod r^o^ov Tl. Phiedo, 58 e, ''Xl fcaxa^is Tjjj ri^VTjSi Blessed in iky trade ! Ar. Av. 1423. ''il rdXxiv* \yu affiXiu, rijs X&irrornros rm (pQivSv lb. 153. "A-roJikov acrorgosra/s, rov ^ctirfanfiecTos Ar. Av. 61, § 373. Rebiarks. 1. The Genitive of the end in vietv Is put with some words of direction, claim, and dispute. Words of direction include those of aiming at^ tJirowing at^ going towards, and reaching after. Thus, 'Av^giy^&iv ff''rfl;^;a^£fl-^aij to take aim at men, Oyr. i. 6. 29. KhroZ x,H' fjt.o^a,s . . tppi^roVf theythreta stones at him, Eur. Bacch. 1096. Ey^y Ile^- Kmns ^irtirSai, to fiy straight to Pelhne, Ar. Av. 1421. T/j ycc^ xvrS la-nv otrris rtjs a^x^^ avrf^ati7rcx,i% For who is there that disputes with him the sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him] ? ii. 1 . 1 1 . "Hffn ro^ora-i cko^ov, ro^ivir* avo^os rouat Soph. Ant. 1033. Tiw, pt-\pej ^ir^ov ra-x^ ""ov Eur. Cycl. 51. 'livcct rov ^qo trot, to go towards that which is farther on, i. e. to go farther, to proceed^ i, 3. 1. A^yu 3' t^tg 'B^a.fiouir a rov vr^oirarciru Soph. Aj. 73 1 . OSrot xvrB^oiouvro a^irtis , these were rivals in valor, iv. 7. 12. ^airtXiXiis fiira-Tfoiovfiivovs ri^^^Si laying claim to the kingly art, PI. Pol. 289 e. Tov tl ip^oviTv su . . a^ip;- tr^HTM Isocr. 98 c. 2. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with ■which verbs of motion pass into those of simple effoi't and desire. Thus, 'hfAcci, and, more commonly, l^hfiai, to send one's self to, to rush to, to strive for, to seek, to desire ; Ipiyo' ftat, to reach after, to strive for, to seek, to court, to desire ; as, 'lifcsvot Xsx^av Soph, Tr. 514. ToTs Voins Ipiftivois Cyr. iii, 3. 10, 'O^i^airffat rm e/nxUs ah rov Mem, i. 2. 15. ^aix^arav$ u^txHrnv lb. 16. Ttfiijs o^iyiffSat Hier, 7.3. 276 SYNTAX. GENITIVE OF PRICE, &C. [bOOK Hi. 2. Genitive of Price^ Sfc. ^ 3*r4. Rule XIL Price, value, merii, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. a. Price. "Icrsroi', ov . . oivtSoTo •rivT^xovra ^e&^iixc^v , the horse, which Ite had sold for fifty darics, vii. 8, 6, '^veTa-^ett . . fAix^a f^iT^ct vraX^ou a^yv- ^iou iii. 2. 21. IlflX^oo roTs HXXon tteuXovv Mem, i. 2. 60. Tajv V ifAuv •^aidav (pvycts ^v^^S ^^ aXkx^aifit^^, oh ^^vffou ftovav EuT. Med. 967 Ao^fls Ti ;^^9j^arww oi/x av-nrri Isocr, 21 b. 'Afi,.oivvuv Ivvici Dem. 159. 13. /3. Value and Merit. TlokXov a^ios t^ err^ccria, worth muck to the army, iv. 1. 28, "AvS^E? a^tot tJJs \XivS i^ta.s i. 7- 3. Twv xaXX/Vrwy Ixvrh a^iutravTCt ill. 2, 7. To fAVtjf^a croXXoi ^cotTovffiv ot^lea; ufiojv CyV. VU. S. II. ITaJoo; . . avd^tov ft\v ff ov , xccto^iov S' if^au Soph. Ph. 1008. *'E»eis Twv fl-^fl-Sfi ftuSwi Soph. El. 372. *A^^£;j tau xaraxoyeiv Dem. 15. 27. § ofO* y. Of MEilORY. TowTwv fluSsIj jCte^wv^Tot/, these things no one remembers, Y. 8. 25. Ou^ivos 'in rour&iv IfiificvnTOt 'made mention of,' vii. 5. 8. T«f Dt^x^^ fi.vtjfAovivofcsv Isocr. 12 c. TouTAy oe cturous vto fi.ifjt,yv^ffKiri Cyr. iii. 3. 37. M« ^* a.ta.fi,tri aoi oh (p^ov^ira/j which I shall not gjnu^e to yoUj Cyr. viii. 4. 16. Alirx^ov irTiytis yi (p^ovTitroitj it is mean to grudge him our roof i. b, to refuse him admission, Symp. 1, 12. MjjSe /*«* (pSavrnr-^g 6vyftecr&>Vt 'deny,' or 'reject,' ^sch. Pr. 583. *AXX* eu fAiya.i^a ■Tovoi ffoi Scup^fiCctTo; lb, 626. § 3 * # • RsiViARKS. 1. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy tran- sition, into that of obedience (obedio, to give ear to, to listen to, to obey, from ob and audio, to hear). Hence, words of obedience govern the Gen. (cf. § 405. «) ; as, Tayroy; . , ^xtrtXim; ohx axoueiv, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, iii. 5. 1 6. 01 Se KajSoy;^o; oyVs xaXovvra>v u^rixauov, * regarded their invitations [listened to them calling],' iv. 1. 9. 'T-^nxooi' rajv 'M.oirirvvei- xaiy, subject to the Mossynccci. ^anixooi rt viirav tuv vofcaiv PI, Criti. 1 20 e. 'A»;j»flyirT£r» Sfi tSv ^etTQOg Xeyuv eJov Tl TOJi ; ^Sch. Prom, 40, IS^atv WSI- hffSeci Th, vii. 73. IIws xv^ xaXevvros u^tihTv Cyr. iv. 5. 19. 278 SYNTAX. GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. [bOOK III. 2. Verbs of siglit commonly govern the Ace. ; and many verbs which are followed by the Gen. according to this rule sometimes or often take the Ace. (especially of a neuter adjective) ; as, Effio/jsv tow ■jtaXt/j.ious vi. 5. 10. AJ- (rimvTxi 'UaiTTci, Mem. i. 4. 5. See §§ 424. 2, 432. 2. 4. Genitive of Time and Place. § SyS. The time and place in which any thing is done may be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as cooperating to produce it. Hence, Rule XIV. The time and place in which are put in the Genitive (cf. ^ 420, 439) ; as, 1. Tevie. "D.i^tro rn; vvxroSf he went in the nighty vii. 2. 17. Tayra jttEP rij; ,'^jt6£ja? lyiviro, 'in the day/ vii. 4. 14. TtJ; Se/Xjis Ve «x£iv, * in the evening,' vii. 2. 16. "^im rri? 'hf^i^as oXm ^mXSov . ., aWk SeiXjjy aipix.ovTo iii. 3. 11. EiVs vunras Seoj ti, tin xa) vifAi^aS} "^ whether by night or by day/ iii. 1- 40. BajriXstT oli f^ccpf^iTrat ^ix-x ^jweg&Jv, 'within ten days/ i. 7. 18. "Or/ ayVw Sii ^oXXoy ^Qovou . . I'ffiTv^ot^ 'now for a long time/ i. 9. 2.5. 'E^iovrE? V iKoia-Tm 'hf^i^ccs, 'everyday/ vi. 6. 1. TLoXXdxis Tfjj 'hfii^asj Tiiany times a day. Ax. Eq. 250. n^/erSfi rouro woX- Xdxis Tod fcyjvog Cyr. i. 2. 9. T^/a 'hfit^x^ufcoi tou fzyjvost three half -darics a month, i. 3. 21, Toy S' ccvtov B-i^ovs Th. ii. 28, 79, 80. Tod S' WiyiyvO' (Azvou ^BifiaJvas lb. V. 13, 36} 51, 56', 116. "E^ Itcjv aXoyra? Ar. Lys. 280. Oy'rs r/j ^evo; a.Tos WxrnftkvTi Soph. Aj. 807. Ti/v ipiXatv vtx^/iivo; Hi. 13.53. Ti-oiai /^t^i fAyv] g Tovd* v^offT^a fiis xiysis i Soph. (Ed. T. 728. Tou xaxou ■roT/iou (pvTivhi; Id. CEd. C. 1323. "A^/xTs; hyvtrrri^iis lb. 1521. r^jias aW^rx lb. 1519. 'Kaxut yosp %uffoiXtiiTos outus lb. 1722. ^iXoiv axXavTos Soph. Ant. 847. Ke/v^is iiixxTx Id. El. 343. — This use of the Gen. is poetic, and is most frequent with the Participle. y. With Substantives. SiscfZyms Ku^au 'Aviiuns, Xenophon's Ex- pedition of Cyrus. Or fcsv viot toTs tSv ^^srSuTB^aiv l^etivotg ^al^ovffiVf ol 5i yi^a'tTi^ot tcl7s tSv viaiv Ttftoui aya.Wo'iTtx.i, the young rejoice in the praises of their elders, and the old delight in the honors ^aid them by the young, Mem. ii. 1. 33. "H^a? aXxTi'iBois, waiiderings caused by Juno, Jllsch. Pr. 900. Nerotf ^ ^apiec . . xtifjoaTX Soph. Tr. 113. ^383. IV. That which CONSTITUTES any thing WHAT IT IS. To this head may be referred what- ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop- 280 SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [bOOK III erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic. Hence, Genitive Constituent. Rule XVI. An adjunct defining a thing OR PROPERTY is put in ttie Genitive ; as, Tfl 'ULivuvoi o-rgarsy/ia, the army of Meru), i. 2. 21. § 3 8 3. Remarks, a. The thing or property defined may be either distinctly expressed by its appropriate word, or may be involved in another word ; as, ^aaHivg in §aaiUvi- Tim [sc. U^if] Mem. iii. 13. 3. Ej's T^ctpunav [sc. avrjuv] Ar. Nub. 508. S. The Gen. is often used in periphrasis, particularly with xi^S^^t thing, and, by the poets, with Vtfut?, form, body, xd^a, head, evcfi.cc, name, and similar words. Thus, Ai/xx; 'Ayx/i-ifivmis ='Ayx/ii/iiiavx Eur. Hec. 723. Tl ^/x- TaTov yvvaixo; 'loxatrrns xa^a. Soph. CEA. T. 950. Tl ^ohivh ovoi^C ofiiXiKS ifim Eur. Or. 1082. See § 395. a. £. A substantive governing the Gen. is sometimes used by the poets instead of an adjective ; as, X^ yrov . . ecraJv, the gold of words, for "Efrj; ;(;;tfwfl'S, golden words, Ar. Pint. 268. ''fl fctt-r^os i/iiis a-'iSxs iEsch. Pr. 1091. JloXi/ys/xot/s /3/«» Eur. Ph. 56. § 3 8 G. An adjunct defining a thing either expresses a property of that thing, or points out another thing related to it. An adjunct defining a property points out a thing related to that property. Hence the constititent genitive is either 1. the Genitive of Property, or 2. the Genitive of Relation. CH. L] OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 281 1. Genitive of Property. § 3 8 7. The Genitive of property expresses quality, di- mension, age, dsc. Thus, 'Hv iraiy us T^tttKovratj he was about thirty years old [of about thirty years], ii. 6. 20. TioTdfAov ovra. ro tZ^os crXs^g-aw i. 4. 9, a river being [q/*] a jj/e- tkrum in breadth (cf. Haroifcav to iS^os ^Xi^^iecTov i. 5. 4, and see § 333. 6). rTs'^Csl supos f'tKOffi woS&FV, u'ipos d\ Ixwrov' (a^kos o ixiyiTo tiveci i'Iko- ffi ^a^ccffayya/v ii. 4. 12. '0 Tt Tag fitrv^iecs (^iotos, but a life of quiet [=/3/or« ^Vy;^flff, a quiet Zi/e], Eur, Bac. 388. ^toXi^m . . v^v(pa,5 [= r^v- fsgax] Eur. Ph. 1491. ^offovV 'i;^sis roXfjb-ns 'ff^offwTtoi [== ouVw roXfin^ov^ ; Soph. (Ed. T. 533. To ti a-vfA-^viUffctt . . XZ°^''" '^oXXou {lirri], xct) -Tra-yx^- Xsirav PI. Leg. 708 d. "EtrTiy I voXtfAOS oup^ oVXwy To-rXsav, aXXa: Sajravwf Th. i. 83. "Otroi Tjjj avTiis yvaftns wcav lb. 113. Tot/^' agsl sraXA-ay travow Eur. Ph. 719. Note. It is obvious from the examples abovej that the Gen. of property performs the office of an adjective. Its use to express quality, in the strict sense of the term, is chiefly poetic. 2. Genitive of Relation, §38 8. The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in- cludes much which has been already adduced, under other and more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con- sidered are, (a.) those of domestic, social^ and civil life; (b.) those of possession and oivnership ; (c.) that of the object of an action to the action or agent ; (d.) those of time and place; (e.) those of simple reference, of explanation^ &c. The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a.) the Gen. of social relation, (b.) the Gen. possessive, (c.) the Gen. objective, (d.) the Gen. of local and temporal relation, (e.) the Gen. of referenve, of explanation^ 8fc. § 380. "• Genitive of Sooiai. Relation. '0 T«? (iccffiXias yvvcctxQs ahiX(po;, the brother of the hinges wife, ii. 3. 17. Tav 'OSgofToJv {hatriXta, vii. 3. 16. AouXou; rovvtuv i. 9. 15. *H; aiirov irccTpd^ijv esrtfiJjtffi i. 1. 2. ^ec ToTg atiToTs Ku^w e-s-Xoi; Cyr. vii. 1. 2. "E;;^o^sv ffuf/.aTa. IxuvaiTi^a. TovTav, we have bodies better able than theirs, iii. 1. 23. M;?^' l^arcoir'^g tko-^i [= tw Tuvht xaxctj to7; if£o7s KaxoTs Soph. CEd. T. 1507. "Aqx"^"^^? /ziirov %x,ovri.; to avTMV i. 8. 22 (of. Bceff-iAso; ah tots fiiffov 'i^cov ttJs uvtou ffT^ecTias 23). S. The verbs o^ai, to smell, vrvia/, to breathe, and v^otrSdxXea, to emit, may take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs { § 38:3. a) or understood with them; thus, "O^eva-i -TrtTTt};, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar. Ach. 190. TJj,- xi(paX^; o^a> (jlv^ov (§ ^55) Ar. Eccl. 524. T»i ifcecTiajv oZ'Acni 'Bil^io t*}tos , ' there will be a smell of,' Ar. Vesp. 1058. 'H; VkOv fAni ^^otri-jTvivtrt ^oi^tlav x^taiv Ar. Ran. 338. YloSiv {^^otoZ u,£ •jrpotr'i' ffaXs ; Ar. Pax, 1 80. CH. l.J OBJECTIVt. 283 I. It mil be observed, that the Genitive possessive is the exact converse of the Genitive of property (§ 387), the one denoting that which possesses, and the other, that which is possessed^ u. Gentttve Objectiyi:. § 39S. The object of an action, regarded as such, is put in the Accusative or Dative (§ 339). But if the action, instead of being predicated by a verb, is merely represented as a thing or property (or as implied in a thing or property), by a noun^ adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually regarded simply as sorpething defining that thing or property, and is conse- ^quenlly put in the Genitive. Thus, 1. Genitivis of the Direct Object. *0 ^^ou^et^^es ras tpvXaxas 5^£T«^Ei, the commander of a garrison reviews his troops, (Re.. 9. 15; but, Ktigo; i^'i Tccffiv froiiiTtti to/v 'Exx«v.£wo/ nhrcii. 1.3). ^vyyvaifziav Tuy av^^u-jftva/v ccf^o^ ^rvif/.oirejv Cyr. vi. 1. 37 (cf. 'Eyw a-oi trvvtyiyvao-xov lb. vii. 5. 50). § 303« Re3iarks. a. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to_denote relations, which, -with the corresponding acf/ecimesj are denoted by the -Da^ ; as, TJJ? twv 'Exx^vwh tuvoms, from good-will to the Greeks, iv. 7. '^O (cf. "Eilvovs Se o-oi at vii. 3. 20). T/j Sar' av ayS^o? evjLtiviixv Ix- QdXot TQiouti Soph. CEd. C. 631 (cf. Th ilfitvn ^oXu Id. Ant. 212). /3. The Gen. is sometimes employed, in like manner, for a preposition with its case ; as, 'Ev oc^ro^aa-u rm y'ns, in a descent upon the land, Th. i. 108 (cf. 'A-ffi^n Is rhv. ytjv H. Gr. i. I. 18). y. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen, with et'tnos and its derivatives ; as, To a'/noy rm ff^ov^ns-, the cause of the haste [that which was causative of, &c.], iv. 1. 17. Tavruy oh irv KiTia, you are not responsible for [the cause of] these things, CEc. 8. 2. 0/ tov ToXi/Ltov etiTtturotToi, the piin- cipal authors of the war, H. Gr. iv. 4. 2. Toutou '2a/x^tirj}v o xar-nya^os xirm- Tixt, for this the accuser blames Socrates [makes S. the author of this], Mem. i. 2. 26. See § 374. 284 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [bOOK III. S, The Gen, in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, posses- 5or, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, in distinc- tion from the Gen. objective. The following passages contain examples of both kinds: Tm TliXo'Tos f^h a'^aa-t}; 'HtXo'Ti' ovv/i^ ou KctTaX^-^iv, Pehpi's seiz- ure of all PeZoponweSMS, Isocr. 249 a. Tas vujv otxitMV ^^o'^rviXaxlirns tou yK^eus PI. Kep. 329 b. Hhv ixeivatv fiixxtjtriy r&fv I? m^S? IstvcHv Th. iii. 19. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objective!?/. See § 503. d. Genitive of Local a^i> Tempokal Relation, § 30 4. The Genitive is extensively employed in defining local and temporal relation, particularly with adverbs of place and time^ and with words derived from them. Thus, "A.'yp(^f yn?j near the landj Soph. CEd. C. 399. 'Avriov tvs Accf^^^ccxov H. Gr. ii. 1. 21. Toutou Ivecyriov vii. 6. 23. 'AvTisregoif raiv trXecyicitv Cyr. vii. 1. 7. "Avw rm W'Tfiiuv iv. 3. 3. "A^^' 'rod fih o-e/v^w Symp. 4. 37. 'lEiyyvs oTa^aSeiVijy ii. 4. 14. 'Eyyti? (/.v^'iuv^ nearly ten thousand, \, 7. 9. 'Ei'ltrea rSv o^saiy i. 2. 21. 'Extaj voV ti'i^ovs Mag. Eq. 7. 4. 'E»- ros oXtyMv, except a few (§ 349), H. Gr. i. 6. 35. y^xmrn EwSav Soph, Aj. 218. "Ei-E^^^e yris iEsch. Pcrs. 229. '%vSiv xa.) 'ivSiv ir(pa>v iv. 3. 28. IIoTiSjWwv IvTos ii. 1. 11. Toy TlXcuT&tvos e^w? At. Ran. 765. "E|(u .o;?, having conversed with each other f ii, 5. 42. To?? te vccukX^^ois o^viIti fzvi ^iciynv vii. 2, 12. A eye I t«v (/.ccvTua-t tw Sax^aTSi iii. 1. 7. Tip 'EvuaXi'w \XiXiZ,ovfft i. 8. 18. Tar? viot.vi(fx.oi; iy^iTv ex e^e ye iv. 3. 1 3. *H •^a.^ctxiXiucts tm s^uvTt tragi ^aiTTwii Sau^aff"T*) PI. Conv. 182 d. 'AxXsiXws 5/ exeXs ye vta iv. 8, 3. 'A(p5iy«(ra/ roura/j ti trot oi^tx^tvctfcnv Yn. 2. 26. 'AyysXXoyff-; Tors trT^etnatTceis i. 3. 21. Ila^jiyysiXfi Tor? (p^ov^a^'^ois i. 1.6. *T!r;(r;(;;va5- ^a/ (TO/ ViKM TaXavra i. 7. 18, Go fiif£(pofAeci, £^«, tovtois Mem. iii. 5. 20, Ej Se Tis alrM . . ovEiS/^fli lb. ii. 9. 8. 'H^-SiXfly v ayTw V. 6. 34. 'Exn- gy|i roTs "EXA.jjr; ffVffxiv»ffX(rSoLi iii. 4. 36. 'Oirorav w>.aTava? vfriXia ^i- 0v^iZ,^ Ar. Nub. 1008. 'AvsTXei' ayrw o 'AcrflX^-iuv iii. 1. 6. "Oo-fTE^ ayrS /stavrEi/Tfl? wv vi. I. 22. '0 ©gjj^) fiayrts, the prophet to the Thracians, i. e. the Thruciun prophet, 'EMr-HeQ. 1267. 'AxV jiwefr' avS^I cr-^vTas Eur. Med. 1157. ^403. /?. Words of ADVANTAGE and disadvantage, in- cluding those of henejit and injury^ of assistance and service, of favor and fidelity, of necessity and suficiency, of fitness and unfitness, of convenience and trouble, of ecwe and difficulty, of safety and danger, &c. Thus, TlaouffccTi; . . u'^rn^x^ '''? E^i^gy* Parysatis favored Cyrus, i. 1. 4. X^«- cifAo. . . Tor? Kgjjff'j, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4. 17. "Osrjj av rj? trr^ari^ (TVfiipi^vi iii. 2. 27. Il^oo-fpo^a 3-' y^^rv Soph. CEd. C. 1774 (cf. §'389. R.j. A.7^£va V. 7. 11. ^U^iov i K C6 V V (/.VPtOlS oiv^^uTois o]x.n.?-w 7ag tJ 'fio) XZ^ y^ TMff-S' ci^x^tv x^^^^S ; Soph. Ant. 736. 'EToiftous s^vcci ai/ru Toug /Vtreotj i. 6. 3. 'OSaf . . afiij-^ayos UtriXhTv trT^arsv/xccTt i. 2. 21, II T^a^eTa toTs croirh dfita^^tt hueriv tuf^tivitfrz^K iv, 6. liJ, *A.ir0tt XiffTi^ov y'l ffoi ot^a. ov y\\, 7. 5\, 'E^tfiiv^Ovov ftoi ItrTiv lb, 54, CH. 1.] OF INFLUENCE. 289 § 4:04. y. Words of APPEARANCE, including those ol seeming, showing, clearness, obscurity, &c. Thus, TLeitri ^tjXov lyivtro, it was evident to ally H. Gr. vi. 4. 20. 2aJ a? S« Xa/ffof otfsv lysj cte^J (Tiju axouat ii. 5. 26. ^'AdwXav ./a6v sravr} a.v0^a^a> o^n TO fiiXkov 'i^tt vi. I. 21. Aiff;^uv£ff^xi fioi Joxw i. 7. 4. M^ avro^o^^ vifAiy ii. 3. 9. ToTs Se •reti 5. Words of GIVING, including those of offering, paying, distributing, supplying, &c. Thus, A/Siw tfi Ss auTM Ky^fls fiv^iovs Sageixow?, a>id Cyrus gives him ten thousand darics, ii. 6. 4. TSJ V ovv trr^aria. tote a^rsSwxs KZ^os ftiir^ay i. 2. 12, T« Ss aXXa 0i£cvEr^a/ ra?^ ffTffecTTj'yoTs vii. 5. 2. THoTs ffT^ccTyiyols ou^ov lb. 3. Tors Xox,o^yQTs KaT^fAt^iffSvi lb. 4. EJVsg l/z-oi IteXs/ t/ 2zv0vi5, oh^ ourajs iTiXu Sflcraw, w; Zv ts ifioi So/>j crsgorro, xctt eiXXa vfj^y a'^oTtiTEiEv vii. 6. 16. Qt^pccKZi etvToTs i^op'iir^fja-c&y iii. 3. 20. T^v tow Ssoy ooir/v y^wrv PI. Apol. 30 d. 2&)» 'H^ax>.sr 'hea^Tifz.a.Tay Soph.. Tr. GG8. Bosa-iXsr Sao-^a? iv. 5. 34. OiVs tKtivos 'in vifiTy fit 'Tygavvflf across lx^^°s iXtvh^i^ koi yofiots lyavr/os Dem. 72. 2. *S.f6~v iya,yria>irtrcn vii. 6. 5. ^A.yrivro^ov Xixpov tm ftatrr&l iv. 2. 18. Oy're (iairtXeT kyrf^oiavitiQae. tjjs «f;i^«s (§ 373) ii. 3. 23. 'AxXorg/w- rara? ray r« Dem. 72. 1 (cf. § 349). 'Twaa'Twvai ayTflr? ^ASr.vouat toX- ftyiffetyns iii. 2. 1 1 . Ta< E^ yovxTxxs vVnn trrvyu Soph, Ant, 571. Av^n T£ ippzvav ^tpfflv T£ vrovos Eur. Hipp. 189. §410. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed by the Dat. (§ 401) are various in their character, having respect to place^ time, sensation, thought, feeling, expression^ ■action, ^c. They are expressed in two -ways; (a.) by the '-i92 SYNTAX. DATIVE. [bOOK III Dat. simply, and (b.) by an elliptical form of construction, in which the Dat. is preceded by ^g. Thus, H 0ffl£K>j ay'rjj IffTiv . . I'Ti ^s^i» ilg tov Tlovrov eiff^Xiovrt [sc. nvi or coi], this Thrace is upon the right to one sailing into the Pontus^ or as you sail into the FontuSy vi. 4. 1 (cf. Th. i. 24). '^Hv V «^aj 7]^n '^turt^ov ^xiovri fioij and it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing], Soph. Ph. 354. &vo/£iva> et . , o tjXtos dfiav^&t^f]j while he was sacrificing the sun was eclipsed^ Hdt. ix. 1 (thia mode of defining time by a Dat. with a participle is especially Ion.). K«; t« xZ°^°^ roTtrV ia-rh ov^iXt]X.v0(us j 'since this event, Soph. CEd. T. 735. To fAv 'i^euhv a-'prrofiiva ffZf^oe, ohx. xyav 9-£g- fiov h, *to the external touch/ Th.ii.49. ET yivvxTos, a; liovri [sc. ^«/vEi], ' as you appear to one beholding,' 'in appearance,' Soph. OEd. C. 75. 'E^ai ya^, otrris a.aix.os uv ffoipos y^'iyiiv TitpvKtj trXEiVrjjv ^vifiioiv hs yi^ovrij ^^ohffTa.Xyis oSfli*, 'for an old man [as journeys are to an old man]/ Id. CEd. C. 20. ToSe "hi fi-aXiffrct •sa.vTm f^U fiVTjffo fi'Ot, ftr^im'ori dvctfievsiVj but this most of all remember [for me], I pray youj never to defer, Cyr, i. 6. 10. *E; ri f^oi (lxi^a.i(/,ovs d(pa.i^a Cyr. vii. 2. 26. ^H ^iStjxiv vf^Tv o ^ives i Soph. CEd. C. 81. Ili(ptuy£» Ixt); .oiois ecrra i. 2. 5. * ^crXurfiivoi S-a^a^i i. 8. 6. 'tliKoBof^vi' fiivov (TX/v^fl/ff ii. 4. 12. Kygoj avE^jj ^&vi x^ ii. 5. 22. To7s ^\ Xn^ofti- vois is TlXxTKieiv ikSovTSSj i"«v y^y eSjiayy Th.. ii, 12. ET^ow dEiviws t^ sydsiiai vi. 4. 23. 'Asro^v^^xsi votr^ vii. 2. 32. O/X/as jAv no.) zuvoix l-^ofiivous ii. 6. 13. 0? S^ /6W (ra^srev, rai/Tau; hyiTro « ccK^ocrtia. rm « x^ixia « (X^eXej^e acrsrvcei Cyr. viii. 1. 16. XIjavoErv ^ev ye 'i^ca ';ravr» t^ av^gwtrivy yv^y^j), rarj Si X^^""'^ 07rXo(po^^ffeif^ diai^oftat 31 raJ 'iTt^cp, tov o Ivccvt'iov avxTQi-^cif Ts? Toy iVcrou ^aifc^ Cyr. iv. 3. 18. Tlcctras xtvrtffus f^ traifi.ee.'ri PL Leg. 631 c. 'H vois (iiXurtv '((ptffts lb. 717 a. Ti yag SaXt^ ru fih tiKu'iM Krvtfj.a.'r ohxi ffai^trat Soph. CEd. C 1026. — The Dat. of the missile with verbs of throwing will be specially observed. ^ 4 1 T. Eemark. Dative of the Agent. The Dat. sometimes expresses that through whose agency any thing takes place ; as, riaii^* v/x-Tv 'ffi'^Qinva.tj all things have been done hy us, i. e. our work is done, i. 8. 12. Ei Sfi r; xetXov . . l-;ri7r^oi»ro iificTv vii. 6. 32. Ta wy^a xtxttvfiim iln Tftj "Ssv^fj vii. 2. 18. ToTs Se K-t^Kv^uiois • • ov^ iM^aivra Th. i. 5\ * ToTg "RXkyja-i f^iffoTvro Id, iii. 64. Xl^otr-roXots (puXdira-iren Soph. Aj. 539. "^s o-Qi ^u(r(po^ il^yaffroci xaxd, Eur. Hec. 1085. T'lvt yoi^ wot* at . , cr^oir 18. TotJTM tS tqo^co l^B^Eu^fjircty ffra.Sf4.QVs viTTBtpots iii. 4. 23. Tlo^tuo/a- V6i . . T^ oSf lb. 30. Tas ^i> ft^dlus PI. Pol, 280 d. Rejiahk. The pronoun alvos is sometimes joined to the Dat. of an asso- ciated object to give emphasis ; as, M^ w^a? kItccTs rccTs T^t^^to-i KaTci^vffyi, lest he should sink us, triremes and all [with the triremes themselves], i. ii. 17, TloXXovs ya^ ^'S>j ocutoTs i-oTs "^ctois xarccx^tj/^viffStivBti Cyr. i. 4. 7. Tpi^ffsig uvToTs -rXfi^uftaffi ^'.(pScc^tjffetv Isocr. 176 b. — The preposition ffvy, which ia CH. l.j OF MEANS AND MODE. OF TIME AND PLACE. 29t> common in such adjimota if the xutSs be omitted, is sometimes expressed even with it ; as, "Oirais . . ?uv alroTift vois xv^iote i»TSTf{,^ir^os PI. Kep. 564 c. Cf. S. 498 and T. 482. 3.) The respect in which any thing is taken or applied (cf. § 437). Thus, Uj^^ht ys 9ifAa/v Xuipfivrts, inferior to us in number [in respect to numberj, Vii. 7. 31 (§ 349). IlflXiff . . ©ai^axo? ova^ari i. 4. 11. T^ l^t/ziXe'ii^ ifi^nTvxt raJv (plXav i. 9, 24. TsJ (ptuv^ ^Q^^/C^s ii* G* 9. X^^^watr/ xxt Tiftxis Touratv i'^Xsoy&KTStTt (§ 351) iii. 1. 37. TctTs •^v^et7s lpp&>f/.ivi- ffri^oi lb. 42. *EyJ Ss fiovtu ve^oix^vfftv ol i^^&7s vi/aois iil- 2. 19. Tw (iiX- via-Toi Tflu oTXtrtKov /3Xa^^«vai Th. iv. 73. *Pi^ji ,ksv ^sXav gV«s «. 304. §4:10. 4.) The measure of difference ^ es^eciaMy with the Comparative. Thus, Sgovw §1 ffvx.vM vim^ovj and sometime after [later by a considerable time], i. 8. 8. HoX^-w §6 uffr&^ov ii. 5. 32. No^i'^wv, aVw ^ev S-arrflv e^^j/, to- iffAeav o-uyays/gso-^asi (hex.ffiXu ffr^dTiv^a, thinking that [by how much] the more rapidly he should advancej [by so much] the more unprepared he should find the king for battle, §-c., i. 5. 9. ^'Kvia.vru vr^iffQurz^os, a year older^ Ar, Ean. 18. Yl^ovXecQs ^oXXu Th. vii. 80. Xgovw ^sret^'s/Ta waX^^ Hdt. ii. 110. 5.) The Dative with j^gdofxat, to use [to supply one's need with, § 284. 3]. Thus, M«vr;xjj ^^ik)fz.gvosi ^sing divination^ Mem. i. I. 2. 'E;t;;g«Tfl roTs ^ivoiSt ' erd- ployed,' i. 3. 18. ToTs 'i^r^oa a^nrrx ^^tjir^xij 'manage/ i. 9. 5. ^sifitSvi ^^-^ffoifjiivQv, '• having met with/ Dem. 293. 3. Tay? _;t;giw^svay5 layrf , * asso- ciating with/ Mem. iv. 8. 1 1. ''H/ Ky^o? •ffoXtfj^la. Ix^^'roj which was hostile to CyruSj ii. 5. 11. Stpa^^a wuhf^ivois £;^£«to ii. 6. 13. l^OTE. "NofAil^M has sometimes the Dat. after the analogy of ^^aofjioci • as, 0vffietii ^aryiiriois vofit^ovriSj ' observing/ Th. ii. 38, Eycs^Ei'oe f/Xv ouSe- rsgdi Ivofii^ov Id. ili. 82. (ii.) Temporal and Local Dative. ^ 4S^. Rule XX. The time and place at WHICH are put in the Dative (cf, ^§ 378, 439) ; as, 1. Time. Tri S' va-re^ccia. [sc. «^£jai] «;6£v ayyeXas, but the next day there came a messenger^ i. 2. 21, 'TliiTo y«g rai/r*? .Zi i/ixvriv Id. Ant. 226. Ksi'iasnv irtSa/ Klyiatot Eur. EI. 763. § 421. Remarks. «. To the local dativd may be referred the use of the Dat. to denote persona among whom, or in whom any thing occurs ; as, Avvafiiv av^gwwo/s 'ix^tv, * among men,* Eur. Bac. 310. ^u^oxtf^Ktrsis roTs TOTi a y^gci !roi5 PI. Prot. 343 C. Oilx uv l^svfiois Ifio) afza^rixs ovfioo; oliViv, 'in me,' Soph. CEd. C. 966. OJcc xa.) '0/ii^ai Ais/iriim Xiyii, 'in Homer,' PI. Rep. 339 e. ^O'hvtrfftu; ya,^ atuTw [^Ofx^pai^ Xoi^o^u rTnrr«s PI. Apol. 18 b (cf. TZt ftsTia^aiv ^^avTitTTyis Symp. 6. 6). 'Kjous T^o-jrof/iVos ^sch. Cho. 23. T«f ^uf^uSo^oLr tp^svx XvTTm Id. Ag. 103. ^vvitrroQu . . xaxu lb. 1090. See also § 431. 1. 2. Many verbs, which according to the preceding rules govern the Gen. or the Dat, are likewise construed with the Accusative (see §§ 341, 401, 422. E.) ; as, *n^sXs7v ^ev rohs iplXovs, . . (iXa^Tttv Se .£jjAaT£i] lb. 41. "A X^nv ffl fitr^ieo; • • ff^outr\y ipc^iv [= a-^iu^uy] Eut. HcrC. 709. Ta S' h fii- a-ai vi XriffTiv '/irx^'S Soph. CEd. C. 583. T/V as) vaxiis ut* axo^sffrov o'lfzuykv . . 'Ayce.(A'i(/,vovce. [^ Ti JS' axo^iffrofs olf£ca^£is 'Ayecftifivovx] Id. El. 122. In like manner. Touts xclf^' 'i^^' ^'odos [= rovro xa) \yu 9ro0ai] Eur. Ion, £72. Yet see §§ 333. 5, 434. ^ 4S6. 7. Elupsis. The verb which governs the Ace. is sometimes omitted; particularly, a.) In EMPHATIC ABDRESS ; aS, OuTOg, ^ ffi rot [SC. yXyeo Or xaXw], You there, ho! you I mean, Ar. Av. 274 (§ 343. b). 21 S^, A ttjv viuovirav U ^iBov xa^Xj iphs, 5] xarct^v$7 f/,y) ^i^^axivai ra^i ; Soph. Ant. 441. j3.) In ENTREATY J OS, M^, •r^oj trt B'iSv [so. IxiTlvcJ]^ tX^s fiS vr^o^ouveii, I beseech you by the gods, do not forsake me, Eur. Ale. 275. (Observe the arrangement, which is frequent in earnest entreaty ; and compare, in Lat., Per omnes te deos oro Hor. Ode i. 8. 1. Per te ego deos oro Ter. Andr. iii. 3. 6.) y.) In prohibition; as, M« r^tCks eV/ [sc. -^onTrt], No more delays! Soph. Ant. 577. M^ f/.ot /zv^iovs, ^*iSe ha-fAv^ious ^ivov; [sc. Xiyt], Dotit talk to me of your ten thousand or twenty thousand Tnercenaries, Dem. 45. 11. IM[« /xoi nr^o(pcia-iv At. Ach. 345. S.) In swearing; as, Ob, 'rovV "Okvfi^ov [sc. ofivvfAi. Cf. § 428], iVb, by this Olympus! Soph. Ant. 758. Ou rkv Aios acrr^ofrdv Id. El. 1063. — By this ellipsis may be explained the use of the Ace. with the particles vw, vai, and fid, (of which the two first are affii-mative, and the last, unless pre- ceded by vxl, conmionly negative), according to the following Special Eutle. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the Accusative ; as, Nw A/a, Pes, by Jupiter! i. 7. 9, Na) Tiu "liat vi. 6. 34. 'AxXa, /*« rov; 3-£ousj ouk 'iysjyB ocvtovs "Siu^m, but, by the gods, I mil not pursue them, i. 4. 8. N«) fioi Aicc, Yes, indeed! v. 8. 6. § 4:^ 7« 8. The Ace. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omit- ted; as, *0^ori n vr^os v^a^ fiovkoiro hxriXiffett [sc. tziv cScv] i. 5. 7. Cf. iv, 5. 11. Auxios TjXuin [sc. rov t^-jrov] i. 10. 15. Compare Xlet^iXxvyovros Cyr. viii. 3, 28, with ''EXavvavTos rov Virsrov lb. 29 ; and Uct^eXetvyaiv rav iVsrai', with Tl^otrtXccuvaiy ctvroTs Cyr. v. 3. 55. 9. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace. is sometimes employed, especially by the poets, for energy of expression ; as, "Exu^t \_= xti^e^v \-jroiii] ^roXuxt^Mv (povov Soph. Aj. 55. AJfA s^ivffK [j^ aj/xu rhv yn^ Ssi/flv '^X^'^'i or a'tfictri t«v ynv 'ihv/rct] lb. 376. Tiyyu "Bbcxquuv cixvccv Id. Tt. 849. T^^trps (p'ovov Eur. Sup. 1205. Cf. §§ 425, 431, 433. CH. 1.] OF DIRECT OBJECT. 299 1. Accusative of the Direct Object. § 438. I. This Ace. is often translated into English with a preposition; thus, "0/£vvfti S-sovs Kxt S-sas, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6. 17, Ouroi fciv yag avTohs I'^teo^K^K&ffiv, for these have been guilty of perjury against iAem, iii. 1. 22. *H^a5 . , lu •ffotuv, doing well to ws, i. e. treating us well, ii. 3. 23. '0 SS fftyXos ^vvarai I-ttk o^oXousj the sights ts equivalent to seven oboli, i. 5. 6. OuSev eckXo "^uvccficivf} ii. 2. 13. M«;^;a!ff ^appiTrs, you have no fear of hnttleSy iii. 2. 20. ^v\a,VTO(A.tvov . . vjfieciy guarding against us, ii. 5. 3. 'AwaSs^^a xoTfiff a-flETEga?, having run away from iAeiV fathers, vi. 4. 8. *0 xoXotos f& ol^tratj the jackdaw has departed from me, i. e. has left me, Ar. Av. 86. 'Hi- o*;^yv^?7^£v xctJ S-Eoyj xaJ a.vS^u'^ovs Tt^oBouvat ahrhj we were ashamed before both gods and men to desert him, ii. 3. 22. Ata-^vv&'rm to ^^xyf/.x, he is ashamed of the act, Eur, Ion, 367. Toy? ya^ ivinGs,7s i&eoi B-v^incovriis oh ^a,tpovffi, for the gods do not rejoice in the death of the pious. Id. Hipp. 1340, AV irs . ^oQsuovfft, Tov Totfiiatv ^'lotK^^oVj * dance in honor of,' Soph. Ant. 1153. 'Ex/s*- fl-sT . . "A^'Tifttv Eur. Iph. A. 1480, § 439. IT. To this head maybe referred the use of the Ace. with VERBS OF MOTION, to donoto the place or person to which (§§ 339, 422) ; as, 'A(pi^erxi Totrov vkai^yi., will come to a woody spot, Ven, 10. 6. "Airrv KaS- fcsToy fAoXt^v Soph. CEd. T. 35. 'Hx^ov •rccr^os a^^^aTov rd(pav Id. El. 893. TlvQyovs yyjs 'i^XiVff *l&)Xxtoi; EuT. Med. 7. *A.»|i, denying that this use of xs'^ '^ Attic). 2^ ;t;j^ . . xiSivs y. 14. 300 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [bOOK III. 2. Accusative of the Effect. §431. The EFFECT of a verb includes whatever the agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace. expressing or defining its action. The Ace. thus employed is either, «. a noun kindred, in its origin or signification^ to the verb, or /?. a neuter adjective used substantively, or y. a noun simply defining or characterizing the action. a. Kindred Noun. 01 ^l 0^a»is Wi) tvrv^vf.a.ro jEsch. Pers. 305. Ktvaam (povi'ou Vi^yfj.a, "S^xkovtos lb. 79. T«v3* o f^^off8ax.uy tS^osv Sopb. CEd. C. 1166. ^^^^aZvro TTiv »agfra/fl!» vi. 1. 7, Hlo^iuriov S* hfuv tous t^utovs ffra&fious ii. 2. 12. "Ekhi Tww ohov iii. i, 6. "E^« hy^ffur&ai . . hVov iv. 1. 24. Tgs- wsTiT/ r^i(pa.triOL5 otous Hdt. vi. 119. Remarks. 1 . In like maimer, an adjective sometimes takes an Ace. of the kindred noim (§ 424. 1) ; as, MsJre n cro(ph av t^v \iciUcav a-o.s^txov vii. 3. 33. 'S.^nfftx.ffScti Tt tjJ err^ocrtx, to make some use of the army, Cyr. viii. 1.14. T/ etvru x^^'V » "'^'^* wouid you do with him? lb. i. 4. 13. T/ trtfivoy kbl) ^i.i-Jiv OS xcu ^wy/zijv xcx.) tT ccyjc^ariov eregfli IV. 8. 27. IlaXXa; fiances ^TTi^vTCct Isocr. 71 e. ^o^yiyovvra •^ftx.ia'} ^tovvo'ta Dem. 535. 13. 3. Double Accusative, ^434. The same verb often governs two ac- cusatives, v\^hich may be, I.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the effect, in apposition with each 'other (§331); as with verbs of making, appointing^ choosing, esteeming, naming, &c. Thus, Bi£ ^^^ I^^' ^59. @i[/.t- (rraxXiis KX£o(poyrov tov uiov irr^ist f^lv l^i^ec^ctro a,ya,6av PI. Meno, 93 d. 05? ^yBfAOvas •^oXtofv Icrccid&va'atr^s PI. Eep. 546 b. Ky^aj to ffr^ecTEV^a xarivBifit "^ahxia fAs^yi, Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts, Cyr. vii. 5. 13. HoTE. Tte infinitive sTya/ is often used with these verbs ; ss, "Nofii^ yk^ vfAois Ifcoi tTvcct xa) ^aT^idea xc6i (^iXovs i. 3. 6. ^ofpiffTYiv o^ roi lvefi.a,Z,oviri . . rov ay\oc elvai PI. Prot. 311 e. § 43^. II.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the effect, not in apposition ; as with verbs of doing, saying, &c. Thus, E? rU 'Tt a.yadov « xxxov ^oi^ern&v ccvrov, if any one had done him any good or evil, i. 9. 11. Tec (juiyitrra. xccxoc l^yecl^o fAtvot tk; •ffoXus PI. Eep. 495 b. 'H.^ix'^irc&f/'&v rou-rov evSiv vii. 6. 22, *Hx/xos tolut ^(piXfja'tf Mwavrctf Dem. 255. 7. 'A^aTia-c&ff^ai ^ixm t^^^"^^ ^vjc. Heracl. 852. 26 302 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE. [bOOK III, Tayra xcc) xaSu^^tir* avrov Id. Bac, 616. "Orecy h roCii r^a.yea^im$ dXX^ Xovs TO. iff^arot xiyactv, ' say the worst things to each other/ Mem. ii, 2. 9. XIoWk 9r^o; tfoXXovs fa 3« i^sT^ecs Soph. El. 520. Ta ffifiv' 'i^rtj ko- Xa^ iKilvous Id. Aj. 1107. "Ew;j kXuwv, a. vZv iru Vj What language has escaped [you, the hedge of the teeth] the hedge of your teeth! a. 64. Tovys . , AiV Ufia B-ufios T. 406. Cf. § 413. y. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence ; aa, Tout fitvToi EiXXriv uSi Tovs \v tj? 'A.trtec otKouvTecSf ou^'sv Ten ircc(p\s Xtyirai, ej EiTflvra/, 'but as to the Greeks,' Cyr. ii. 1.5. To fiiv oZv irvyTet.yfzex. rns T0T£ croX/TSiflJs xai Tov ^^ovov, oirov ccvt^ ^^^ufiivoi diZTiXtifetfcsv, l^aoxouvTats d£07}X&JTa,t Isocr. 264 C. Tov al "ffavov voy xmra tov Toks/zov, f^rj y&vviTai ts sroXtyj Th. ii. 62. Toy? ay^ovoftovs Tovrovs - . ove/Sji ^i^Bo-^euirav PI. Leg. 761 e. — This construction may usually be referred to anacoluthon or ellipsis, S. The Ace. is sometimes used in exclamations, to specify the object of emotion (cf. §§ 343. 2, 372. i, ^) ; as, '!&», la XtytUs fio^av atj^ovo^, oh, oh for the fate of the melodious nightingale, j^Esch. Ag. 1 1 46. Asivov ye tov x «- ^uxa TOV ToL^cc TQVS (i^oTohs atp(^OfAivov, £1 ftviVz'TroTi voffTVia-ii ^cc?>.iy Ar. At. 1269. — This construction, which is unfrequent, should perhaps be referred to ellipsis. (ill.) Accusative of Extent. § 439. Rule XXIII. Extent of time and SPACE is put in the Accusative (cf. ^§ 378, 420) ; as, a. Time. "E^e/vsv ^fii^xs ztto,, he remained seven days, i. 2. 6. *^tcix^Us TeXvv ^^ovov i. 3. 2. Z&Jv atxiirhis IviauTov ii. 6. 29. "E^Xsov yifitipav xal vyxTOf vi. 1. 14. Tlo^tvofttvoi TO Xei-jroy Tijs hf-ii^ots iii. 4. 6. Toy? (Av yap xvvecs Tou; ^aXtTous Tag f/Xv {jfiipa; oiosa^i, tccs ok vuxras u,3 v [sc. oSov] i. 3. 14 (cf. i. 2. 20). Oyaoyii, £'

?, xa.) •jri^^ ffaXs^ou cvfiSavXsvuy r^v ye {TgaTflV B!r/ir_;^;«(rojW£v, ' for the present,' Mem. iii. 6. 10. See § 320. 3. § 441. Eemaeks. a. This rule applies especially to the Ace. neut. of adjectives, both sing, and plur. ; as. To a^^^aTov, formerly, i. 1.6. Ta filv . ., Ta Ti, partly , ., partly, iv. 1. 14, v. 6. 24. Mixgov I'^iipvyt vo fxM x-ttTa-ffiT^ccSmnt i. 3. 2. Tuxov, perhaps, vi. 1. 20. To Xflicrflw, henceforth, ii. 2. .'^. Ei' Tivas fiiyoi ^v to trajfix (puirn j) T^o(pyi j) ufAtporz^tt PI. Gorg. 524 b. TiJtroyTflv ya^ -^T^viht -TTt^i^v )3a(r/Xeys i. 8. 13. ©y/iflE/SeiTTSgo/ SI woXii iv. 5. 36 (cf. § 419). See especially § 162. /3. A strict analysis would refer the adverbial Ace. in part to the Ace. of effect (§ 432), in part to th^t of specification (§ 437), and in part to that of extent (§ 422. ill.). F. The Vocative. § 442. Role XXV. The Compellative of a sentence is put in the Vocative (§§ 329. N., 340. a) ; as, ^^ixQ^i Koi n^o^evE, . > ovx 'IffTt Ti ^oiiTrty Clearchus and ProxenuSf you know not what you rfo, i. 5, 16. ^A ^ccvfiua-ieoraTt eiv^ ^iuts, O most wonderful Tnan, iii. 1. 27. § 4:^3» Eekajsks. a. Ttie siffn of address, in Greek, as in otbier languages, is commonly S. /?. The term of respectful address to a company of men is avS^sj, witii whicli may be likewise connected a more specific appellation ; thus, 'O^ars fAvj a ai'S^Es, you see, ge?itlemen, iii. 2. 4. "AcJ^e? trr^xriarxii /»h ^ixv/Ltei^tTB, fellow-soldiers, do not wonder, i. 3. 3. ^fl wvS^s? "Exx^ves ii. 3. IS. il ai/Sf £? cr^ecrnyoi xx) Xo^oiyoi iii. 1 . 34. OH. 2.] ATJECTIVE. AGREEMENT. 305 CHAPTER II. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. I. Agreement of the Adjective. ^444. Rule XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case. The word adjectme is here used in its largest sense (§ 73). Thus, Ilafa. ^tiiro; fiiyx; oty^iaiv ^n^i'eav rr X n ^ tj s t ^ if^rge park full of wild beasts, L 2, 7> Ta> vrai^i ufiipoTs^tkiy both the children, \, \. 1. Ai *\uvtKa'i •jroXus . . ^s'SofASvat lb. 6. TovSs Tov T^flwav lb. 9. "E^&iu 0ed), In the sentence, "A good man is merciful," "good" is an epithet, and "merciful" an attribute. The agreement of the attribute with its subject is far less strict than that of the epithet ; while the agreement of the pronoun (§ 495) is still less strict than that of the attrihute. /3. An exception to this rule, which is merely apparent, consists in the use of the mascu&ne form for the feminine in adjectives of three terminations (§ 133. y, S). "§i 445. Remarks. 1. Infinitives, clauses used substan- tively, and virords' or phrases spoken of as such, are regarded as neuter ; thus, 'EtunSis tin hytftoya. a/Vsn", it would be foolish to ash a guide, i. 3. 16. A^- \av nv o'Ti iyyvs •ffov ^airtXtvs nv ii. 3. C. Oh to ^yiv WEg) ^Xs/ittou •Jfotri' ■reov, aXXa to iZ ^ijw PI. Crit0^_48 b. *"£fj,U5, _u aiiSgEf * K6viva.1ot * to S' 'TIMEI2 DTa.-a u-Ttu, Tfiv froXtv xiyM^^ou,men of Athens ; and when I say rou, J mean the state, Dem. 255. 4, To MH xaJ ro OT vr ^oTtSifcivet, the not and the no prefixed, PI. Soph. 257 h. Xgsjo-tfaii . . tm xa^' eoiiTo, to use the phrase xa4* olvt'o lb- 252 c. Note. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipsis of the part of speecK to which it belongs ; as, "Eo-T/y o [sc. (ryvSeo-jKos] aXXd avrt tov S e , the [conjunction'] aXXa is instead of Ti Soph. (Ed. C. 237, Schol. Ag/Vs/ ri [sc. ^^ohirts] ^la, [the preposition] ha is wanting, lb. 1291, Schol. § 446. 2. In coMPOirND construction, both syllepsis and zeugma are frequent (§ 329. N.). («.) In syllepsis, when •persons of both sexes are spoken of, the adjective is masculine ; when things are spoken of, it is commonly neuter ; as, 26* 306 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [bOOK III. iij dig itds fffuTi^a re ?koi/ f^uri^a net) aS£X.>iv Ti? av«^ Cyr. vi. 3. 11. "ExXsjv' e,- a'^ix.ov Eur. Med. 1331. 2to>,«v y "Exx>ii'« Id. Heracl. 130. 'ExXaSos y^i? Soph. Phil. 256. Sr^tK-r^as 'ExXaSa? Eur. Rhes. 233. Y'vva.lx.oe. T^fwaSfls Id. Andr. 867. TpwaSoj ^Sovo^ Id. El. 1001. ^x.u$nv is oi(/.ov jEsch. Prom. 2. Ty;^;^ Se fl-wrtj^ Id. Ag. 664. — These words, as sub- stantives, are commonly appellations of persons or countries, avjjg, yavjj, yn, &c., being understood. § 449. 5. Use of the Neuter. The substantive use of the neuter adjective (§ 447. a) exhibits itself in a variety of forms. Thus, a,) A neuter adjective with the article often supplies the place of an afi- stract noun; as, To S* arfXovv kcc) to aX«^£5 Ive/xi^z to avro ra! riXi^tai itveiif but sincerity and truth he thought to be the same with folli/, ii. 6. 22. 2uv tm oixctiiu (cf. Mera uoixtas) lb. 18. To p(^cx,X.iTov [== h ^aXiToT9]i~] trod •prvivfAX- vos iv. 5. 4. Oh ya^ oc^i^f^os la'nv o l^iZ^av to <^qXu xcc.) to oXiyov, *the much and the little,' vii. 7. 36. To -uria-Tov [= « cnWis'] Th. i. 68. A/a to a.vat- tr^iiTov vfjCMv lb. 69. 'Tito ya^ tov vn^t^a^ou; ttj; vixt]; Id. vii. 73. To y If^av ^Qo^Ufiov Eur. Med. 178. Tm ha.XXa, xotXov ; Id. Hipp. Maj. 288 c. '^fAotyi (pIXTOtrov toXis Eur. Med. 529. OifA.ai ya.^ iifias Tijff^s yj?; ^offtv^ioig TO, Wf&fT 'iffi(r0a.i lb. 916. 'K^ivaffK y atrraiv vuv Ifcuv ra, {hiXrccTo. iEsch. Euin. 487. — In these cases, an adjective agreeing in gender and number with the substantive would either express a different idea, or would express the same idea with less emphasis. 0.) The neuters ttXuov or -rxiovy /xiTav or 'ixarrovj oa-ov, Aoj^iv, and t) are sometimes used as indechnable adjectives or substantives ; thus, Islu^ix'Scts vXtTov w ^ai^£Kc&, myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. K^^tej -rXe'i- ovs ^ t^movra Iv. 8. 27). 'hhirSos ctXeov n r^iZv (invuv i. 2. 11. Ol-Vj); av- Tjj; iTCtiv crXeov ^ TtrTct^oi]covra. H. Gr. iii. 1, 14, "AXyv, oh (jcuov %vo7v trrct- yioivy the Halys, not less than two stadia in breadth, v. 6. 9. Ootvi^t B-EfuXico- iras oh fz.uov h •jr'kiS^ia.'tot; Cyr. vii. 5. 11. 'Acro»TEivoi/(r; Tm avS^wv oh fj.i7ov ^tvrcXrKoa-tov; vi. 4. '■24. ^^ev^ovs Tex.^* olvt^ ovk iXarrov TiTpaKur^iXicJv H. Gr. iv. 2. 5 (cf. S^avSovwrai . . ov'k, Ikdrrov; Tir^axaffiuv Xb. 16). IIeX- raffTu) oirov [_=^ rocrouroi oirot] ^letKoffioif targeteers as many as two hundred, vii. 2. 20 (cf. 'H^E?? roffouroi ovt£$ otrovs au o^ag ii. 1. 16), Ai^cov . . ocov f^VBteciuv Eq. 4. 4. KiSovs . . offov fivctetious ««) •rXiTov ko.) fiiiov Mag. Eq. 1 . I f) (cf. 'OXoir^o^avs afia^iociou? xat ftti^ous x,ou IXecTTOVg iv. 2. 3). "Or* ouSiv 6i> Tou fitioiv avr'nrrvis uTt^ Soph. Aj. 1231. Vi^ovro; . . to fiTjolv ovro; Eur. Heracl. 166. K^eWw tcuv to ^jjSsy Id. Tro. 412. ^oxovvrav Ctvos,i tI^ appear- ing to be something^ i. e. of some consequence^ PI. Gorg. 472 a. (If fivihiv and t) did not here remain without change, they would be confounded with the masc, and the expressions would lose their peculiar force.) Notes, (a) So, with the plur. form instead of the sing., Uce^afiivti vfii- ^a.? ■TTXtiea « t^us PI. Menex. 335 b. (b) In some of these cases, tJie neut. adjective appeai-s to be used hke an adverb. See § 529. /S. •^ 4LS flo fi.) A neuter adjective used substantively, or as an attribute of an infinitive or clause of a sentence, is often -jj/ma instead of sing. (§ 336); as, Ei Tovro tro o^tiXofLivov u'^rotohi'/i, n tt rocura. te l^itXaivro, if this which is due should be paid, or if both this should be due, vii. 7. 34. Ob tovto Xi^Mv s^^ofzai . . • £i ya^ TccuTd xiyoif^t Ages. -. 7. "Orccv fAtv ti kya^ot 'i^uffi.^ vra.^a.x.a.XoZix'i ^i Ewi T«yr« Symp. 4. 50. 2s ^ev roffctwra. ^^ti troitTv, KXahiv Iktivus Ar. Thesm. 1062. ^A^' oh^ vC^i; -raSs ; Soph. (Ed. C. 883. 'A'ToXXmv raS' ^v . . o xaxcc kcckec TiXav, 'it was ApoUc, Id. CEd. T. I3i:9. Oyx "leuv£s tkSe eiV/v, there arehere no lonians, Th. vi. 77. ASuv« ra ^y Wi^ii^uv Id. i. 125. AgSay^Ev', a; 'ioixe, r^Jv^E xoiT^ctviiv Soph. Ant. 576. OS; oh ^acpec^oria rot; 'A^fjvctlois Iffriv Th. i. 86. Note. This use of the Plur. for the Sing, appears to have arisen from the want of a noun, or definite object of sense, to give strict unity to the con- ception. It is very frequent in demonstrative pronouns, and in verbals in -tos and -Tioi. § J:5S. 6. An adjective often takes a substantive in the Genitive partitive, instead of agreeing with it. In this con- struction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the substantive, or in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.). Thus, M.710S TO. ir^ovdacTeo toiv ^QayfitaTav [_for w^ay^MoiTasJ, fttjoi Toug Bv (ppovovvTOis Tfijv avd^&f^aiv [^for a.v^^u7roui\, neither virtuous actions [fhe virtuous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men] Isocr. 24 d. Aaffr^oTyiTos- Tt [for Xoifi^^L ■"H. 2.] SYNESIS. 30& Ttis T(t], some distinction [something of distinction], TIi. vii. 69. 'ASjk ■xx- (riiSas [for aSjiv ■ra^tifSx, soft cheek [softnesses of cheek], Eur. Ph. ] 486. 'Xnfix . . lilies Soph. Ant. 1209. Note. In this way, greater prominence and distinctness of expression, and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness (§ 449. a), are given to the adjective. Upon the whole subject, see §§ 358 — 362. §453. 7. Synesis. The adjective often agrees in gen- der and number with the idea of the speaker, instead of the subject expressed ; particularly with, a. Collective Nouns, and words used collectively ; as, 'H Ss ^iiuX« . ., eux uyvoovvTis , and the senate^ not ignorant, H. Gr. ii. S. 55. Kgotwyjj we Toy 'EXXjjVixou irr^aTSVfiaro; [^ ffT^ctTiatTajv] otaKZX£vof/.iviiiv iii. 4. 45. T^w 'ttoXiv [woXiVa?] . . oWas Th. iii. 79. Aif^os . . a^STTri a.v ^KSy}vamv^ QiovXvi- ^EvTejIb.S. Nayv l» T6^v 'A^wvwv ^'xawo'aii l^r; ts 'AXxiS;aSj)V, wj KtXtutfov- Toss Id. vi. 53. OliV o^vts ilT^f^oVi x^oppaS^u ^aas, av^^af^o^ou /3etogov {Av xbrou too 'raXxiTu^ov . . /3/ov Ar. Plut. 33. Ta«a SuiTTsivoi; xxxx Soph. CEd. C. 344. Swi* xvo^ixv xxt f^syxXo- ip^oamm xvxSxivevrc; PI. Conv. 194 a. Cf. §§ 332. 4, 383. x. — In hke manner, as the Dat. maybe used for the Gen. (§ 412), 'EfitTfit [=S|too)] Smis i/ilxXa B-foo-jIs . . iisiioiirif .fflsch. Pr. 144. 310 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [bOOK III. ^ 455. 9. Attraction.' An adjective is sometimes at- tracted by a substantive either, («.) governing, or {(3.) in ap- position with, its real subject ; as, cc. Ttu/iiv al/ix . . vxTfif, the blood of my father, Soph. CEd. T. 1 400. OJiKo; . . v Ix^iyf^xTe lb. 1411. 'l>MT«f S' y^Eg^flVT>off Id. Ant. 785. Qv^ixiav ol^viiv Id. EI. 313. METflsxi/jW/of aT«?, n7B2rf iAe waves of woe, Eur. AJc. 91 (§ 383. a). TloXXa 5' o^u rxdra [= T01UTJ5 or T!?§£, § 421. /3] ^^oCxTct, and I see here jnany sheep, iii. 5. 9. 'H^ofA^v c^ov auTo; ilvi. Ovros, '((pri, o^ttrhv •^^affi^^ira.t, 'here he comes, PI. Eep. 327 b. 'Ht iv»» oSe, ns tfie man zs here. Soph. CEd. C. 32. II». ^iVOVTdl yk^ o5'5s S^' TiVEf lb. 111. 'AXX' i^V BTToSuil Ik 'SoflOtV Tig Efj^JErflti Eur. Ale. 137. °0S' e?^' 'O^ifTtis Id. Or. 380. *Jj»f Ixsrvaf . . (fa-Tai, ' sits there,' r. 239. CH. 2.] ATTRACTION. ANACOLUTHON. 311 •y. Manner; as, 'SvvsSxXXovto . . at '^XXvitr^ovrtccKee} -^oXus Ixodtfixt^ the Hellespontic cities contributed willingly , i. 1.9. '0 fiiv Ixa/v xravav (cf. 'O ^ev &»ouffia>s TetXtttVapav) Mem. ii. ]. 18, 0/ ^\ a-r^aTiuTeti Wi^avro 'h^ius «aj ihSui ii^ovra eia-f^svoi vii. 2. 9- KasrsjvSfTEv t«S' oqkios ^^stasiv Soph. CEd. C 1637. *Avu.so» rn; nfts^xsj n Ss'xa rj ^atExa .9iHirTS^ay Th. i. 2 1 . Xl^oSV/jLos ^SXXov jj o-of^vyixs iraXiy i. 2. 6, 7. Km^os Ttiv ^Xiffffa.y ils t«v K/A/x/av a'^o'X-if^'^ii, Cyrus sends the Cilician qeeen to CUicia, i. 2. 20. 'Ti^Eg Tm 'EXXaSo?, in behalf of Greece (their native land), i. 3. 4. Cf. § 4S5. a. NoTKS. (a) Proper names appear to take the article, from their being, in their origin, either adjectives used substanti-^ely (§ 448), or common nouns used distinctively (§ 479). Thus, 'H 'ExXaj [sc. yw], [the Greek land] Greece (comp. England, the land of the Angles, in French L^Angleterre, Scotland, 318 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [bOOK III. Ireland) ; '0 'ExXnVmvTw, [the sea of Helle] the Helkspont ; '0 Jli^ixXnt [sc. am'f], [the Illustrious Man] Pericka; "0 '^iXi'rvos, [the Hoi-se-lover] Philip; 'A»ij Maris ri yUos ko.) Tcvvo/ix rovra 'ix"" ^- -• ^^- (P) ^^^ ^^' jective construction is especially retained in names of rivers ; as, 'O Maiav^^os ^cTx/iis i. 2. 7. Tm Mjtfructi ^crx/iS lb. 8. So, in Eng., the Connectiout river, § 473. B.) A substantive not employed in iU full extent may be rendered definite, I.) By a limiting word or phrase. This word or phrase is usually placed, either between the article and its sub- stantive, or after the substantive ; and in the latter case, the article is often re- peated, either for perspicuity or emphasis. Thus, M!;g{/ toS MjiS/as riix'os, as far as the wall of Media, i. 7. 15. To crsgi tdv Un^cctei rii^os H. Gr. iv. 8. 9. Ta fj^an^a TEi^t} .ruv "K-O^iv^iiuv lb. 4. 18. To TEr;^05 to IIemv^/o/v vii. 2. 1 1 (of. Kal Toivay^aiitiv ro ruyi^os vs^isTy.av Th. i. 108). To /Av 'iffathv \_'n'i^oi\ w^o T^5 ^tXtxias . ., TO o\ 'i^ai TO ?rgo 'Tii; ^u^ias i. 4. 4. '0 Ttjs liamXius yvvociKos o^lKtp'o; ii. 3. 28. To t«; tov ^aivevros Ti^v'/is 'i^yov PI. Pol. 281 Su Ev Tali Kb>[jt.a,is ToCii usreg Tov 'jtC^iou Tov *osfa Tof Kevt^/tjji' sroroijWov iv. 3. !• Notes. «. On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to thai which is said about it in the sentence, either precede .the article, or follow the substantive without the article; as, "Or/ xtvos o tp'o^os tlti, koc) oi co^;;(;oyTss irmi, that the fear was ground- less, and the generals safe, ii. 2. 21. Y/X^c s;^oiv Thu Ki(^etXriv, having the head hare, i. 8. 6. ^^Xavvuv ava x^aTo; t^^ovvTt tm 'i^-jrai lb. 1 . KxTSiTTtiirev avTt- av Tm (piKctyyot i. 10. 10. ^'EfTeo'^s rtysfiovi tu 'H^axXs?, follow Hercu- les as leader, vi. 5. 24 (cf. Too 'Hytfiovi 'Jl^axXetvi. 2. 15). A/a f^ia-ov Ji TOV 7rct^ct^ucrov,'through the midst of the park, i. 2. 7 (§ 456). 'Ev rii kyo^^ fiXn Dem. 848. 13 (but, To ^so-oy aT~ipos, the centre division, i. 8. 13). IIoX,. Xuv Tcuv l^iryi^uuv f^iffTas, full of the necessaries of life in great abundance, iv. 4. 7. Ta Se iTtiTriiiia croXXa «ii XxfiCavtiv iv. 1. 8. Syi" hXiyots toTs W£fi auTo», zuitfi ttose aioMi Am /ew, i. e. with few attendants, i. 5. 12 (but, Son •rorj okiyoi; 'jn^i ctiiTov, with the few about him). 'Eiri;t;wf^£ra/ oX»)m t^v ^a A.a75-«, i. 2. 17. TS; »/iSj«s oXns iii. 3. 11. IlSor . . Tor; x^irm; xa.) To's S-ESTaT; .irairiv, to all the Judges and all the spectators, Ax. Av. 445. f /Xn h Siiroiax. fi x'^i") ''"^ country was all bare, i. 5. 5. "'Exxmr to %ho; i. 8. 9 (^ 470. N.). To xEfo:; ixxTi^ot vii. 1. 23. 'AfKpoTC^x Tx uTK, both his ears^ iii. 1. 31. Aira r/a Aixuvt, the Spartans themselves, vii. 7. 19 (but, Tn, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes the king, i. 1. 4. M£v6;v GsTTasXos, Meno the Thessalian, i. 2. 6. 'Ecrua^a, « Suswvs- ff'/df yvvhi Tou l^Xixaiv ^cciny.£&/s lb. 12. *A^ia']yMdi> Tov fiiK^ov t^iKotXou- fAivov Mem. i. 4. 2. 'Ey^ . . o i^tj^ar^ixais . ., y/*e7? Sg w i^v^aTtifcivai x, 7. 9. H rxXaiv lyai, I, the toretclied one (by eminence), i. e. most miserable, Soph. El. 1138. 'Ogiwv (Ts TOV Syo'Tjjvoi/ Id. CEd. C 745. _ *0 •jra.vrXTifioiv ly&i, I, the aU~wretched, Id. QLd. T. 1379. Tov vrxr^acpovTtjv, tov acrsS^ /as lb. 1441. iSo, when the pronoun is implied in a verb, 'D,>.ixofix> o txXxs Soph. Tr. 1015. 'O Tkifiniv . . Hkoi Eur. Andr. 1070. Note. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted; as, SiivotpZv 'AJijvaTos, ^enojphon, an Athenian, i. 8. 15. XlxTxyuas ecvn^ Xii^rtis lb. 1 . 'Eyii raXx;, I, unhappy man. Soph. CEd. C. 747. 'A^iXxo- fttti tuffrvivos lb. 844. § ATS. 3. An adverb preceded hy an article has often the force of an adjective. This construction may be explained by supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly oov or ysvo- (icvog. Thus, Tov vyv x^Dvov, the [now time] present time, vi. 6. 1 3 (cf. Tov ovrx vvv x^a- vov Eur. Ion, 1349). 'Ev t^ vr^atrhv [sc. yzvoficivat] Xoy&i ii. 1. ]. '0 vvv ^xa-iXshs ovTos, xxXitrxvTos tou Tort (ixirtXi&ig, '^rxT^o; Ss Toy vyv Cyr. iv. 6. 3. Tsiv TTifAspov vifii^xv iv. 6. 9. Tsjf o'l'xxdt oooy iii. 1. 2. Tors ^ravy toov o'Tga- TtuTuv, the best soldiers, Th. viii. 1 . Ka^^oy tou •jtxXxi Soph. CEd. T. 1 . Notes, (a) This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either substantively ov adverbially {^^ AT 6 — ^IS'). (b) K preposition with its case may be used in the same way ; as, Toy sv AeX^o?; x^vicrT^^tov, tlie Delphic oracle, Cyr. vii. 3. 15. 'A^/csvix . . ri ^^os lo-wagav, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4. ^4:'?'©. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted ; in which case the article may commonly be regarded as used substantively with the word or phrase following (see §§ 447, 469. 1). Thus, 320 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [boOK III. TSv ■rx^a lixriXiu; [sc. xH^uii], of those from the king, i. 1.5. TZv «{) Ttit 9-^iav, those engaged in the hunt, or the huntet-s, PI. Soph. 220 d. 0/ mu 07i/4.oti Th. viii. 66. 07 r evSov . . xa/ ol e^w, both those within, and those with' out, u. 5. 32. To tre^av rov •jroraftov, the opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2. low -^r^oiru, i. 3. 1. EiV Tovfi'^akiv [to tfz-jra.Xtv\, hack, i. 4. 15. 0/ bjb to? i^tKSiva, those of the country beyond, v. 4. .'J. To?s •rct^ovtri tuv ^itrTav i. 5. 15. Tj TO Kta^Sjov iln etirsX^sTv, what it was which prevented their entering, iv. 7. 4. '0 livith m,he that is nothing, Soph. Aj. 767. Tou ^sSsiT [oVtos] lb. 1231. See § 450. Note. The phrases o! a|Mf i and oI «j/, followed by the name of a person, commonly include" the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; and sometimes, by a species of vague periplirasis, denote little more than the person merely. Thus, 01 a/npi 'A^ix7ini, [those about Aiiseus] Ariceus and those with him, iii. 2. 2. 0/ ^sgi Ssvotpuvra, Xenophon with his men, vii. 4. 16. Oi Se afttp) Tjirircc(pi^v»v iii. 5. 1 (cf. T/co-a^EgvJis aoti oi o-yv ctiiru lb. 3). Toy? a^^i ®QairuXkiiv xa) 'Egoso'/vfSjjv, Thrasyllus and JErasinides with their colleagues, Mem. i. 1. IS. 0/ /J-lv trsgl tous Ko^/v^/oy; h t^ Ns^sa «irav, 01 Ss AaxsSaijtta- vioi xxt 01 ^ufjcfioo^oi iv ru ^xvcovi, ' the Corinthians with their alUes,' H. Gr. iv. 2. 14. Tltrraxou rs xa) B/avTo?, xa,) rm afitp) rov M/Xflo-zov ©aX^f PI. Hipp. Maj. 281 c. ^'l:'?''?'. 5. When the neuter article is used mbstantively with a word or phrase following, («.) the precise idea (as, in English, of ' thing ' or ' things ') must be determined from the connection, and (/?.) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive. Thus, a,. Ta rou y^^eJSj the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Tot afL(pi tov -roXifAoy, mili- tary exerciseSj Cyr. ii. 1. 21. Ta crs^i Il^o^evou, the fate of Froxenus, ii. 5. 37. 'Ev To7s Wocvcj, [in the above] in the preceding narrative, vi. f^. 1. Ta ^£11 Sjj KiJgoo oJjXflv OTi ouTtus 'iXi^t ^^os yificts, afT'TTi^ Ta 'flftiri^a. T^og IxiTvov, * the relation of Cyrus to na is the same as ours to him,' i. 3. 9. Ta wa^' l^oJ \XiffSm avri ruv oIkoi, to -prefer remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. 'EcteI Ss Ta Twv S^swv xaXaJs eT^^evj anrf zyften iAe gods had been duly honored, iii. 2. 9. Ta iTEfi rm ^ixyi?, the circumstances of the trial, PI. PhEedo, 57 b. ^Bipiifalpos ftlv '/l^fi TiTiXivrriKit, . . to. V iKtivov Newv ^A ^ouXofA.t.v Urect Eur. Iph. A. 33. Ta jSag fa^wv yk^ ^oZXet •pravra. -prXh Ivo; Id. HqI. 276. 'Hf H vXecxecs , l^virovv tovs ag_;^avTosff ii. 3. 2. § 4 8 S. Remark. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection, the article has often the forc^ of >a possessive (see § 503) ; as, 'ESauAETfl To/ crarSg afA(pori^a/ '^x^tTvaij he wished [the] his children to be both present^ i, 1, 1, Tia-aaipi^vTis ^ta.SdX)i&i rov Kv^ov ^^05 fov a^zX lb. K). '0 Ti KV^os lb. 7, 10. Kyja; §s i. 2.5. See i. 5, II, 12. E/,- tjj» Kf^/x/av i. 2. 20, 21. E/? KA;;6i'a:v lb. 21, "A/xa ftkia) '^vvovri U. 2. 13. ^AfLo. Tcii'riXtM ovofziVM lb. 16. ^o7; cc^^ovo"! rlns B-ccXaT'njSj . . To7s Ttis y«f Eep. Ath. 2. 4. T^rj /xlv xaTcc B^ccXarTctv oi^^ouffiVj . . to7s Ss kcctci. yfjv lb. 5. rigof iir^i^avj . . w^os e'7; B-eo7s iii. 1.23. Xl^os Toiv 3-ia/v lb. 24. 2y» S-£<9?s vii. 7. 7. H^os S-im y. 7. 5, Aixaiov Itrrt xot) cr^oj 3-£(Wv xa,) t^os av^^wcrwv i. 6. 6. Ta -r^o; Toy? 9-sotif, . i ra fT^off - ^iov i. 4. 6. ^Ho-ojy Sg ^iiat at ^"kurrrm^ and the greater part was spelt, v. 4. 27 (§ 455), K.ctXovlXo Ts ffr^a,Tiv fix, and another army^ i. 1. 9. To eiXXo irr^oiTiuf^a., the rest of the army, i. 2, 25. 'Afi,£voi, TO. Ss xoc.) avuvroivofitvot, ' [as to some things > . as to others] partly . . partly,' * now . . now,' iv. 1. 14 (§ 441). § 40 l. 2.) In poetry, with yaj ; as, TIuq avS^os ^avorsens ^xuv ' yoLff [AiyiffTo^ auToTs Tuy^^xvii de^u^ivav, * for he, Soph. EL 45. T^j yxQ vri^UxK fiViT^os Soph. (Ed.^T. 1082. To ya^ . . s^miat fiX^os, for thi&is a rare lot, Eur. Ale. 473. 3.) As the subject of a verb, after xaj, and ; as, KaJ i ; as, E/ ro xa.) to l-^oi^ia-iv avS^u-^os ouraa), oux ay ccTTiSaygv, if this man had done this and that, he would not have died, Dem, 308. 3- Ta xa* ra, an-^ov^tus Id. 560. 17. ^Apxvov/iott u; tou xa.) v'ov, I go to this one and that^ Lys. 94. 3. With the article again re- peated ; ^'ESe; yag to xai to ^oi^trat, xa.) to fiM '^Oino'«-i, for this and that we ought to have done, and this not to have done, Dem. 128. 16. "Oj e^« ^sTv ovtu vf^oa,t^i7ff6a,t KivSuvsvgiy tav ffr^aToryov, o^ru; fiv} tx '/] to. ysvninTeii, aXX oWfi/f ra, *not these or those, but these,' Id. 1457. 16. The nominative Ss xct) 'is (§ 491. R.) occurs, Hdt. iv. 68. S.) Through poetic license, in imitation of the earher Greek ; as, Ton . • ^§tffov, him destroy, Soph. CEd. T. 200. Ta.7v f^ot fziXtirSxi, take care of these for me, lb. 1466. M/a ya^ '4^i^x^ ' '"''^ v^i^akyiTv fi'sr^tov ti^Sos Eur. AIq. 883. *Ao'T£gaf, orxv (pS'tvcaffiv, oiVToXas te Tav ^sch. Ag. 7. § 493. 11.) As a RELATIVE PRONOUN. This substitution of the t- for the aspirated forms (§ 1 47) occurs in no Attic writers except the tragedians^ and scarcely in these, except to avoid hia- tus, or lengthen a short syllable. Thus, K.t£ivc60-cc tous oh XS^* xtccvuv, having slain those whom she ov^ht not to slay, Eur. Andr. 810. Tov 3-eov, Tai* vvv -^i- yns, the god, whom you now blame, lb. Bac. 7 1 2. "NobTs ixuvov^ ovriv a^rinjs fioXiTv i^tif/,tff6oc, Tov B-' outos Xiyw, Soph. CEd. T. 1054. 'AyeiXfAOt^' h^a, TcHv . . a-JTzo'Ti^riff i/xoiurov lb. 1379. "A.yos • « duxyvvat, ro fiijTB y?} . . •jr^off- y^&Tai lb. 1426. Remark^ On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found with fiiv and Se for the t- forms (§ 490. 1 ) ; tiius, UoXus 'ExXjjvJSaj, Ss jusy acos/gaJv, th «; ^i rovs ^uyd^ets Ketrdyuv, * some destroying, and to othera,* CH. 4.J PRONOUN. AGREEMENT. 327 Dem. 248. IS. "Ay ft\v xKrsi>>.yt ^^ ^ B'ios £w) TO ffv'K^.afi^a.vuv akXnXotv l^eiijirtff a^tfAivej vovroa T^a.-^oivm tr^os to ^ttuxuXustv «XA.«$Xa* Mem. ii. 3, 18. See § 444. ^. Note. In speaking of persons vaguely j or generally , or simply as persons, the masculine gender often takes the place of the feminine^ both in pronouns and in other substantive words which admit it; thus, Bhv oJs t ou xi^^ . r= irij it);Tgi3 ("■' OfiTXaiy Soph. CEd. T. 1184. Ovol ya^ xetxus •^d(r xovTt tcTiros ^v TSxrj ^ootryiyviTutt Id. El. 770. "H ffTU^oi euira f^oirxos oiix avi^iTat TixTovTBLS a,XKous \_=^ TtXTOVtrav aXXflvJ EuT, Andr. 711. ^pvi\yiXv6£ffi9 us if^t xoiTct?L£Xsi/^fit£vat a^tX^cti ts xct) aSeX^ioa?' xa.) ccvf^ia) TotrecuTeHf StTT eTvsci ev Tij oixla Tunrx^ce.ffxott^ix.a. tous \>.tuS&^ovs > * • ^oiT'.t^ov ^ev oZv liTTiv, ^ %aiKpa.TSSj Toug olxiiovs wi^io^ay d^oXXvfitivevsj dovvaTov o\ ToffovTovs TQii o Ky^of, '' u'vrsp yt ^apuov xai TLct^uiraTiSos iffTi -TCaTsj If^os o\ a.diX(po; i. 7. 9. Tuv a'aifixTaiv ffTSPfl^^vai, . . Xls^i tZv vf£ST£^a)9 ayaSoJV ii. 1 . 1 2. Ks/voy T£ xflti ch i% lirov xoim x^i" Soph. Tr. 485. To o-os ^.i^os, the marriage you talk of. Soph. Ant. 573. To irh yx^ "A^yo; oh ViSoix' lyu Eur. Heracl. 284. 2»» 'i^iy, u 'EXevj;, 'the dispute for you,' Eur. Hel. 1160. Eyva/a xct) ipixia t^ ifiv, good-will and affection to me, Cyr. iii. 1. 28. O/X/a tw ir^, love to you, vii. 7. 29. MJi ftsTx/i'iMiv iroi tTis i/iris Ss/jeSs, that you may not regret your present to me, Cyr. viii. 3. 32. &^mo; oifios -^sch. Pr. 388. See §5 454, 482. Notes, (a) The possessive pronoun is modified like the personal pronoun of which it supplies the place ; as, Tov 7s trov [otpffaXf^ov], tou ^^iir^ms, at least yours [your eye], the ambassador, Ar. Ach. 93 (§ 332. 4). See § 454. So, since irir/ios may be followed by the Dat., as well as the Gen. (§§ 403, 41 1), 'Ajtierefisy [= h/^'iv] -iroTfAou, xXuvoTs AaS^xxi^xio'iv Soph. Ant. 860. (6) The only POSSESSIVE of the 3d Pers., which has a place in Attic prose, is fffsn^os, their ; and even this is used rejlexively, and with no great frequency. Thus, Tlj iu^uv ^ovouvTas Tous ff(pt.ri^ous, when they saw their own men in distress, Cyr. i. 4. 21. (c) The Bat. for the Gen. belongs particularly to the weaker form of expression. See § 412. §504:. III. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the weaker form is the same with that of the common personal pronoun ; the stronger form is the so-called reflexive (§ 144). The weaker form belongs chiefly to those cases in which the reflex refer- ence is indirect and unemphatic ; the stronger, to those in which this reference is either direct, or, if indirect, is specially emphatic or distinctive. Thus, CH. 4.J PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND KEFLEXIVE. 331 llgaTTSTE o'^oiov ay Tt vfitTv o%irS& fAdXiffTa, trv/ztpi^nvy do whatever j/ou think will be most advantageous to yourselves^ ii. 2. 2. K.iXi6ov(rt ttitiruirxvra. cthrolg C« Wjabara, tcb fiiv xvtov XetCuVj roj al ff(pl rov ^zfftroT9]v Ax. Plut. 12. Toir (iiov Toy IfiavTou PI. Gorg. 488 a. 3. The place of the Gen. possessive of the reflexive pron. is commonly sup- plied in the plur. by the possessive pron. with a.vrm. In the sing, this form of expression is poetic. See § 454. *5 O VO* 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively in other ■ways, the pronoun ou became simply a retrospective pronoun, i. e. a pronour* referring to a person or thing previously mentioned. As such, it performed the office both of an unemphatic reflexive (§ 504), and of a simple personal pronoun, and was sometimes used as a general reflexive, without respect to per- son. In this last use, it was sometimes imitated by its derivatives (even in the Attic, by lavrou and o-ipiTt^os). Thus, 'QouXtvoin fAiru, a-tpiiriv [_== vfjuv], ' among yourselves,' K. 398. A^fi,atny oltriv [_= ffo7i\ dvafff-ois «. 402. O^e- trjy ^irtv ^== Iftesjs^ £';^;w» ^s^uTyftivov «Tfl^ yi^eufitjv y. 320. Ae? 'hf^xg dvs^ier^ai lavTavs [= «jWaj auTfluj], we ought to ask ourselves, PI. Phasdo, 78 b. EyXa- Coufiivoij o^ats f^h \yu VTO iff^oSufAixs eifia lauToy [_= \fieturov\ T£ x«) Ufias i^a-rccTno'xs lb. 91 C. KXa/aj . . eturn cr^os awr«v Soph. El. 233. AiV;^^yvE/s ^oXiy rviv ethros aurou, you yourself disgrace your own city. Id. CEd. C. 929. OvTi yk^ T9]v lavrou [= ffsaurou} tru yt '>^y;t;flv o^as Mem. i. 4. 9. Ma^ou rov avrns oiffSa. ^sch. Ag. 1397. ^"ttiq u'rXg ffatrvj^iccs oturajv [= vfiSv a.hrZy'\ The pronoun aviog marks a return of the mind to the same person or thing (§ 149). This return takes place, I.) In speaking of reflex action or relation. Hence axiiog is used with the personal pronouns in forming the re- flexives. See §§ 144, 504. II.) In designating a person or thing as the same which has been previously mentioned or observed. When thus em- ployed, uviog (like the corresponding same in English), being used for distinction, is preceded by the article (§ 472). Thus, Tsif §e tLVTTi 'flfAi^a,, and upon the same day, i. 5. 1 2. E/j ro aura ff^»/ix i. 10. 10. Ouros ti ethro!, and this same person, vii. 3. 3. ^'Ekuvx rot auToi Mem. iv. 4. 6. TaSra iVa5-;^;o» iii. 4. 28 (§ 39). See § 400. § SOO. III.) For the sake of emphasis, one of the most familiar modes of expressing which is repetition. When avioq is thus employed in connection with the article, its position con- forms to § 472. a. Thus, Ayro; Mei-iyv ISovXsTa, 3feno himself wished it, ii. I. 5. "Otrris . . ai/Toi ofAoirai hfjt'^v, avTos Ss^tx; oohi, aiiros l^a^aT^irecs ffvyiXctSi rohs ffT^etTtiyous lii. 2. 4. Ky^o; TBtotXaijvcov avros avv TLiyptiTi i. 8. 1 2. Aura ra asra Tav olxiuv ^uXa, the very wood from the houses, ii. 2. 1 6. Ka; S-iorsS'urra- Tov avTo iirri -ffivTbiv ^u&iv ayS^wjros, ' the very mo§t religious,' PI. Leg. 902 b. OvTet V ecu v^o aiiTov f^BcffiXiais rsTxyfiivot ^tray, ' before the person of the king,' i. 7. 11. Tl^os uItu tm trr^etrivf^an, [by the army itself] close to the army, i. 8. 14. *T:rif kItou tou tauruv ar^a-TiCfiaTos, * directly above,' iii. 4. 41. E; alToi 01 (TT^a-Tiurixi , . el^oivTo, * of their own accord,' vii. 7. 33. Ei ccvToTs ToTs uv^^do-i ff^iy'Sotro lovfft, * with simply the men,' ii. 3. 7. 'Eav ris eiyeu vnv tri-rou to o'^oy uutb Itr^/jj, ' by itself,' or * alone,' Mem. iii. 14. 3. AvTot/s Toils ffT^ctTviyavs d^oxaXiiras, having called the generals apart, vii. 3. S5. See §§ 418. E., 472. a. CH. 4.] AvTog, 333 § O 1 O. Eemaeks. 1. The emphatic avros is joined with pronouns in both their stronger and their weaker forms. Hence it is often used in the Nominative ynth. a pronoun which is understood (§ 502). Thus, 0/ }l e-r^xnZ- Tai, 01 T£ avTov ixsivou tteCi oi aXAa/, * both his own/ i. 3. 7. Avtov tovtov fwExsi', on this ven/ accountj iv. 1. 22. Ahr^ Ifito) . . to^tt PI. Phsedo, 91a. Aur&i fAot £-oi»sv lb. 60 C. *Xlff aurog ffu ofioXoytTs i. 6. 7. 'Xlj 'i^n avros lb. 6. Auto? ffu l^ai^sva-as CEc. 7. 4. Ayro? l^xiS&vtreis lb. 7. Ayro? e//*/, flv ^rir&7s ii. 4. 16. AutoI xttlovtrtv^ they themselves burn, iii. 5, 5^ 'lair^oj; ai- Tfls TO r^oivfAM (pTiiri, * that he himself healed,' i. &. 26. Xw^sr avros, he goes alone, iv. 7. 11. AotoJ yag Iff-^sv, /or ?iJe are fiy ou7-seh'eSj PI. Leg. R36 b. 2TP. Ti's yag oSros over) rns x^ifid&^as avjj^ j MA0. A.vras- 2TP. T/'s «yT« i MA0, luK^arviS' * [Himself] The great man. What great man.? ' Ar. Nub. 218. 2. In like manner, avros is used without another pronoun expressed, in the oblique cases of the third person; as, Aw^« ayovrss etural r& xat r^ yuvetixtj \ringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 16. ^'EsrsjWi^gv . . rr^artikira.s o3s Mewwy eT;t;s, xat avrov i. 2. 20. TloXXovs filv raiv a^^a^ovreuv K^iXTiivxv, 01 Ss Kx) avrojv d^i^avov i. 10. 3. ]^OTES. a. Prom the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there was no special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of aiiros in the oblique cases, as the common pronoun of the third person. See § 502. In this tmemphatic use, al/ros must not begin a clause, /3. Sometimes (chiefly in the Epic), avros occurs in the oblique cases, with the ellipsis of a pron. of the 1st or 2d Pers. ; as, Alrm ya^ acrajXa^e^' a.(p^oe,- ^'i^ffiv [sc. yiftSv] K. 27. Avrm [sc. irs] ^. 27. §511.. 3. The emphatic avros often precedes a reflexive, agreeing with the subject of the latter. Hyperhaton (§ 329. N.) is sometimes employed to bring the two pronouns into immediate connection. Thus, ^A'^oxriTvoci x&- ytrai avros tsJ lavrov x^'Q^ ^A^rayi^injVj' and he Is said [himself] with his own hand to have slain JLrtagerses, i. 8. 24. 0/ §e "EXXjjvss . . auroi l.>,' alra triyu • . . ray (i^oroTs ^e srjj^oiros dxova'arzt ' those things I omit j but hear,' ^sch. Pr. 442. "On xat It) ra nSea, lip' oi-^s^ fiova ^oxsT h dx^airia rovs dv&pi^Tovs aysiVj avrh (Wfii" ov tvvarai ayitv, h o lyx^driia Mem. iv. 5. 9. "Off, u •^a7, eri r ovx Ixaiv xdxravav, ffi r avrdv, who involuntarily have slain both you, my son, and you, too, my wife, Soph. Ant. 1340. 5, The use of avros with ordinals deserves remark ; thus, UsQixXm . . o-r^a- rnyos ^^ 'ASmaiav Vixaros avros, Pericles being general of the Athenians [him- self the tenth] with nine colleagues, Th. ii. 13 (cf. *A^x^ffr^a.rou . . fjcir aX- X&fv tixa ffrparnyouvras Id. i. 57). 'Yi^i-s'Sffpav AvrixXia vrifx.'S'rQV avrov ffrparnyov Id. iii. 19. ^^i^Uyi T^sffCsuryts Vixaros avros H. Gr. ii. 2, 17, But, with the omission of avros, Aa^&Tos . . Xa^eb9 avrhv [i. e. rhv ag;^wv] KhfioS) 'with six confederates,' -PI. Leg. 695 c. C. Demonstrative. § 5 1 2. I. Of the PRIMARY DEMONSTRATIVES, the more 334 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [bOOK III. distant and emphatic is inHvog • the nearer and more familiar is euros or oSs (§ 150). Thus, Eav i Kit vols ^oK^, xa.) rovvovs xecKus vei^irovtri, if those should wish itj they will even injure these, PI. Phaedr. 231 c. 'Exsrvos /tb rxktiip^es, sStos ii trjofijas Id. Euthyd. 271 b. Notes, a. The two may be combined to mark the connection of the more KEMOTE with the nearek; as of the past with the present, of a saying with its illustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which is present 6e- fore us, &c. Thus, Tovr [sc. ea-t/] IxErn" ouyw 'iXiyov, this is that which I said, Ar. Ach. 41. Toot' IkiTvo • " ^Tcitr4^ Irai^ov;, f>i.h . Tmiroi yus, sj'sraj So«ir Id. Vesp. J 008.- § 5 1 4. 2.) "OSs surpasses in demonstrative vivacity ; but ouros in emphatic force and in the extent of its suhstantive use. Thus, OIA. TI rovSs ^^a.Z,us j 'AFF. Taurav, oviTE^ siVa^a?, CEd. /s thzs fAe man you speak of? Mess. The vert staNj whom you behold, Soph. CEd. T. 1 1 20. 0EP. XloTav avo^K xa) Xsys/j ; OlA. TavS', as ^a^iffTiv lb. 1126. 2yv Tarffoe Tfl?; ^et^ouffi vvv ii. 3, 19. ^JtruXi^ovrss tovo& tov avd^a ■ . . esrs) ovtos atiTos ofioXoysT vi. 6. 26. *H/4a; rouir^s XafioiiTfij, taking us who are here, Th, i. 53. Note. To the deictic power of oti (§ 513), may be referred the very fre- quent use of this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb, of place (§ 457. ^) ; and perhaps, in no small degree, the general fact, that it is far more extensively employed in poetry than in prose. §515. 3.) In the emphatic designation of \he first and second persons by a demonstrative^ ods commonly denotes the first person, as the nearer object ; and ovvog, the second. In denoting the first person, the demonstrative may be regarded as simply deictic (§ 513) ; in denoting the second^ as expres- sive of impatience, authority^ contempt^ familiarity^ &c. For the use of omog in address, which is employed both with and without (jv, see § 343. 3. Thus, M« B-vijff'^* ysre^ rayd* avo^os [_= l^ayj, ouo lya/ ^^o ffot/, do not you die for this man [for me], nor yet J for you, Eur. Ale. 690. ^avBvg ay tov^s. T^vtpos [= l|itai7J IfipavMS Soph. CEd. T. 534 (but, 'Av^^ oS* []= a-tij, u>s 'iaiXEV, lis T^t^ets lx« lb. 1 \ 60). Tsjff-Ss ys, ^atrtjs srtj at least, while I am yet alive, Id. Tr. 305. TaSs [^ vifizTs, § 450] . . w/ff-Ta xa^sTreti, xeti (pvXxxis jEsch, Pers. 1. Ouroffi awMg [== cyj oh iffccvtrireci .vis ufii uvctt t) to7s rinXivn^Koin, I am confident t/iat there is something for the dead. Id. Phsedo, 63 c, "Eh^i r) il^uv, he seemed to [say something] have reason or to be in the right, Id. Amat. 133 c. y. An indefinite form . of expression is sometimes employed for a definite ', thuSj Ei euv Tt; Tovrats v(p'i^ii tecvrov, if therefore one gives himself up to these [= if I give myself up], Cyr. vii. 5. 44. Bouy^tmtr^en, ^us ns robs elvS^as a-rtX^, to counsel, how one [=^ we] shall drive off the men, iii. 4. 40. "Kaxov fixti Tin [= a-oi] Ar. Ean. 552, E/' fziv rts i^ vif^as oL^tivcti, if one permits [= you permit] us to depart, iii. 3. 3. CH. 4.] RELATIVE. 337 E. Relative. §510. I. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as defi- nite or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the definite and the indefinite relatives. Remarks. 1. In the logical order of discourse, the antecedent, according to its name, precedes the relative, but this order may be inverted, whenever the perspicuity, energy, or beauty of the sentence is promoted by the change. 2. IsDEFiNrrE RELATIVES are formed, either from the definite relatives by adding t)s or a particle (commonly -fi»), or from the simple indefinites by pre- fixing as (in the shortened form o'-) ; thus, oirns or « a/, whoever, Wdim, of what kind soever, ovoros, how much soever, o^ot£, whensoever. See §§ 153, 317, 328. §SSO. II. The DEFINITE KELATiVE is often used for the indefinite,, as a simpler and shorter form ; and the indefi- nite sometimes takes the place of the definite, giving, however, a somewhat different turn to the expression. Thus, 5 f la^it i^ikavras xivSvtisusi9, toutous xtut a^^ovras ivoiu, whomsoever he saw willing to incur danger, these he both made rulers, i. 9. 14. ^'Exatov lea.tra. aatx, xavffifca, sa^atv vi. 3. 19 (cf. Kjxiuv cc-rasra ora £vT£'y;^;avo/£y xxuiftfiai lb. 15 ; and, "E^awrav -roitTas o^oirovs IcreXccf^Savi to xi^as vi. 5. 5). 'Of are §£ rwc Titrirxips^yovs a^iirs lyu SUw Soph. CEd. C. 1124. § 5^3. IV. The relative pronouns belong to the class of adjectives (§ 73), and, as such, agree with a substantive expressed or understood. This substantive, or one correspond- ing to it, is also the antecedent of the relative. It is commonly expressed in hut one of the two clauses, more frequently the former^ but often the latter ; and may be omitted in hath, if it is a word which will be readily supplied (§ 447). Thus, ^uvi-^i/z^J/sv avTii trTQaTieorag, oSg [sc. trT^ctTieoTasj Msvwv eT^s, he sent with he?' the soldiers, which [soldiers] Jtferao had, i. 2. 20. 'ATo'rifA-4'cci ergo; lav- Tov [sc. TO ffTpar^vfitx,^ o Bi;^tv trrfietTEv/zm, to send back to him the force which he had [what force he had], lb. 1. KV^o; Te 'ix^'' o^s t/^y}x,oi, and Cyrus hav- ing the men whom I have mentioned, lb. 5. "E/V §s «v a^ts cre^J Toffovruv, TSgJ offav ii(i7v ffx.i'^ti w^oKiiTcci'] PI. Rep. 533 e. 2. It will be observed, that when the antecedent is expressed in the same clause with the relative, it is commonly put at the end, as though the rest of the clause were regarded as -modifying it like an adjective. See § 526. ^5^3. 3. The ELLIPSIS of a demonstrative pronoun hefore the rela- tive is very frequent ; as, indeed, of the whole antecedent, when it can be sup- plied from the relative. When this ellipsis of the antecedent takes place, 'ItrT often unites with the relative to form a species of compound pronoun or adverb, remaining itself unchanged, whatever may be the appropriate number, tense, or mode. ThLlS, Ti^ohCaXXovro T^ierSti; ^^Ztov fiiv ^ti^i.Xa/v Ihuv Th. iii. 92. KaJ 'iffri f/Xv eSs ethruv KocT't- ZaXov IX. Gr. ii, 4. 6. "^(mv oua-Tivtts uv^^u-raiv riffatuf^aKet.s It) !av iv toIs o'^i'Xoi; a. 6 ; vii. 1. ^8). 'A^ragtuv Io-t) . ., oinvis WiXMJtrij it is the part of tiiose without resource^ that they should wish, or to wish, ii. 5. 2 1 . Oix ea-riv ovra fia^oSi os ^ctnTv ega Soph. Ant. 220. THotrovrov a.Xyo$, oS [== eatrri au- Tou] ^oT eh XiXntrtraij such grief, that he will never forget it, Eur. Ale. 198. ^etToixTi'i^uv TYiv Tt yuva.7x.ct, diov avh^os [=flVi TotovTov andgo;] ffTi^oiro, xa) Tov avt^cA, o'tctv [s^oVi ToiotuTTiv^ ywoClxoc xa-raX/ir&'jf ohx'tT o-^otro, commiserat- ing, both the wife, that she had lost such a husband, and the husband, that, leaving such a wife, he would never behold her more, Cyr. vii. 3. 13. 0/ Ss Setrcror/y ffrUuiriv, olotv Ix. ^ofAMv ocruXitra.v Eur. Alc. 948 (§ 425. 4). N'oTES. a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative in explanation, or the assignment of reason or purpose; as, ©aufAocffrov ^oius, OS . . S/Swf , you conduct strangely, [who givej that you give, or in giving, Mem. ii. 7. 13. ''O^rXflS xraivreci, oTs aficwovvrea •rous a^ixouvrets, they prepare arins, that with these they may repel assailants, lb. I. 14. Ka) croXsi Tifi^pov tiv\ offTis ffrifte^vsT, and send some one to the city, to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1208. ^. Relative adverbs likewise exhibit this form of attraction (cf. ^;§ 526. d, 527. R.) J as, EuSoi/jWwv ya^ fioi o «v«g l(patviTa, . . us [=fl7"i outusa uoiug xai ysvvaitas IreXsuTa, for the man appeared to me happy, that he died so fear- lessly and nobly, PI. PhEedo, 58 e. '2o(pnv ir iVgei^sv 'ExXas, w? jjV^ou xxXus Eur. Iph. T. 1180. ^333. Remark. Forms of comparison are especially- liable to attraction and ellipsis (cf. §§ 391. y, 461) ; thus, Mflvoi TE flVTEs Qf^ota. scr^ctTTov, aVgg [= ixi'tvots, bVe^] av fiir aXkuv ovng, [like things, Tvhich] things like to those which,' v. 4. 34. 'Eav /idv h -r^ei^is ? •x'apa'3'Xyiffix, olit'n^ xa.) 'n'^etrSiv Ix^tJto voig ^svots i- 3. 18. OwVe ya^ -rv^os WT avr^tav UTi^TE^ov ^iXas, o7av [== toioutou, oTov] to to.; 'AipgaJiVaj 'itjtriv Ik Yipuv "^^&fs Em*. Hipp. 530. Totrovrov Ss ^ta^i^tiv ¥)fA.as Se? rcHv ^avXaiVj'oiroy u fiuv SfluXfli eixoyrss roTs ^iff^orecis v^fjQiTovtriv, rificcs Se ■ . Ixovtxs Se? ^otuv, ' insomuch as this, that slaves,' Cyr. viii. 1 . 4. T^oo-oZrov ^tovav a-t lyiyvaa-xevj '/(Tflv r^ flVov rouTo, flc/] ' vixouav ^A^TjvetTov ttven, ' SO far as this, that I heard,* iii. 1. 45. Toy fisv avS^a raa'ovrov lyiyvuffxov, art [= oo-av rouro, oV;] sTj hf-tm /iTI V. 8. 8. ^tivoTtPos yiyovivcci t«v T&x^vjy rotrovrou, areo o (Jt,%y to. kutou ftovov l^oUi PI. Euthyphr. 1 1 d. 'EiTeI viy ta/vJe ^rXsTffTov uxniret ^xWovir, offuTip xcti Sipov^Ty flTSsv fitovTi, 'inasmuch as,' Soph. Tr. 312. TL^oek^ovris. oiroy av SfljBjf xettQos ihat its to hi-rvocroitiff^aij 'imtil,' vi. 3. 14. 344 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [bOOK III. Note, "05>.flv sTvxi, rl vrotvirotjiri'j oi eiXXoi "EaXjjvs; lb. 13. Tls SjjXo/Ji, 6vs TtfAa i. 9. 28. "H^eto, ris o ^o- QvSo; U7i, . . KaJ i^^ira, o Tt ii'v to irvv^yjfn& i. 8. 16. ^layvanrtv orfTaii, aXXai Se ip^^^vv £•^£19, aXXw errrav, UxXai ei^Tous ■jrottlv, ' for one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, &o.,' Cyr. viii. 2. 6. Murnvris Ss ravryiv riiv ti/As^av, i'/Ecv, d n/i7v Tas u^xs tS5s vuxros i/j^) (pi'Xes iTveii, toutoi iv^tjXos lyiyvSTO icriSovXiUMv ii. 6. 23. Sw euv ri/aiv oi- Kaios u al"^/;^;^z^i^£ff•tfo[/, it is therefore jitst that you should regidte us, Cyr. iv. 1. 20. Tous irotpeus • • ToXXou oio) [=^ •ToXXaw ail ifiX\ ^ar^^y^ovs XiyuVf [much is wanting in order that I should call] I am far from calling the wise frogSj PI. Theset. 167 b. 01" roffovreu yEovert fi,iiu.iTir^on Tm w^kotjitoc ttjv vfti- Tl^cnv Isocr. 300 a. In lilse maimer, Ahrou hX'iyou dtno'a.yro; xa,7a.y.ivc o v u ff i KctKOiS, that they, themselves may not be spoken ill of, Kep. Ath. 2. 18. KXue/i' eivecXxis, to be called a coward, iEsch. Pr. 868. (Cf., in Lat.j bene audhe, male audire.) 'Avri^ecvtv i/^o NiKavSgow, he [died] was killed by Nicander^ V. 1. 15 (see § 295, KTifyai). 'ESuvara . . iki7v. . . Ovto/s taXu. He was able to take it. . . It was thus taken, iii. 4. 12 (see §301. 1). 01 iKTrf^ruxorz^ 'Po- Sf'iww vera rov "hrifjiou, those of the Rhodians who had [fallen out of the city] been banished by the people, H. Gr. iv. 8. 20. "Or/ (piuyoizv o'/xo^tv ywo tou ot}- fjbov, that they were [fleeing] banished from home by the people, H. Gr. i. I. 27. *AinSiia.s (piuyovra utto MsXiTay, accused of impiety by Melitus, PL Apol. 35 d (§ 374). Karafl-ras v(f vftaiv, appointed by you, Dem. 49. 11. Cf. § 561. 2. — For the Inf. act. instead of pass.^ see § 621. ^. B. Middle. § 557. The reflexive sense of the middle voice is far from being uniform either in kind or force. It not only varies in different verbs, but often in the same verb when used in different connections. It is, a.) Direct ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Ace. of the reflexive pronoun ; as, Aovron [= Aovu eosutov], he is washing himself^ QT bathing, Cjr. i. 3. 11. TlavTts ftzv h>-iivof/.oiZ,zro, he called me his son. Soph. (Ed. T. 1021. — 'AtroSiSa^a/, to give up for one's own projitt hence CH. 5.] MIDDLE. 355 to sell ; as, Taura aWoSo/iSSVof, oUrt 2eu^?i d^Qaixsv ovn vf^Tv va, yiyyof&ivet, hav- ing sold these things, he has neither paid over the proceeds to Seutlies nor to us, vii. 6. 41. A.vofiaiij to loose for one^s self to deliver, to ransom, to redeem; as, Ei' TiVflsf \x Tuv veoXiftioiv i\utrd.firiv Detn. 316. 3. Ti^tjfAt or y^atpw vofiov, to make a law for another, rthftai or y^afofiat vofAov, to make a law for one^s self; as, ©soy; oTfitcci tovs voficovs tqvtovs voTs dv^^aJ-Trat; B^uveci, I think that the gods have instituted these laws for men, 0/ av^^a^ot etvroh; thvro, men have insti- tuted them for themselves, Mem. iv. 4. 19. 'Nof^ov ovrot 'iy^a.'^ccv^ thesemen (the Thirty) enacted a law, H. Gr. ii. 3. 52. ''Hv vo/aovs jcolXous y^a.-^e>}vra,i, if they (the citizens) should enact good laws, CEc. 9. 14. BoyAeuw, to give counsel to another, ^ovXtuo/zai, to give counsel to ones self, to deliberate, to resolve (^ 35). TifAej^s&j, to take vengeance for another^ to avenge, Tif£at^iofioti, to take vengeance for one's self to punish, § 550« c) Eeciprocal ; so that the middle is equivalent to the ac- tive "With the reciprocal pronoun ; as, lAet^of^tvot ko.) {hoctriXivs ko.) Kw^as xm ol dfiyyaSa l^ 'A&fjyuv, . . ^oXinv- ovrec 'xa,^ ccvroTs [i. e. toTs ©ugituj-i] H. Gr. i. 5. 19; 0/ f/\v ToXiriuofAivot h TccTs •ffo.r^lffi Kcd'yofious rihvTttt Mem. ii. 1. 14. ^ O 6 1 • Remarks, 1 . If the reflexive action is di7'ect or prominent, the reflexive pronoun is commonly employed ; more frequently with the active voice (if in use), but often with the middle"; as, ^'Ekuvos a.^i.ot^o^ovv etvrov Gyr. i. 4. 8. *0 B^sTos eth- Tat iXoioo^iTra lb. 9> C. r Passive- § 963. The passive voice has for its subject an object of the active^ commonly (a.) a direct^ but sometimes (/?.) an indirect object. Any other word governed by the active re- mains unchanged with the passive. The subject of the ac- CH. 5.] PASSIVE. 357 TivE is expressed, with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposi' Hon (commonly -ynro, but sometimes ano^ e^, ttw^k, or tt^o^), or, less frequently, by the simple Gen. or Dat. (§^ 381, 417), or, yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, especially Ep.), by the Dat. with vno. Thus, «. Xi&Qn^i7ro V avrh u^o rod Matrxa, and it was surrounded hy the Mdscas [= Ht^is^pti t' atiTV)y a "Mectrxas, and the Mascas surrounded it\^ i. 5. 4. Ov- Ssva x^'ivu vva wXs/ovwji f;r£(piXii(r^oiit I Judge that no one has been loved hy more \j= ^^ivu irXstov; vfttpikrjxivcci aySe'va, I judge that more have loved no one^^ i. 9- 2S. Ei S^aXaTTsjff t'l^yoivTo, if they should be excluded from the sea, H. Gr. vii, 1. 8 (§ 347). Twv y iTC-ffkav Xoipos ivsa-xW*! i. 10. 12 (§ 357). 'B^tou . . do^ijvat 01 TCCUTets TCtj sraXsij i. 1.8 (^ 404. o). Mouff'/x^v yitsi' usTo A.a.fAS'^ou •rex.ihi.vhUt having been taught music by Lamprus PI. Menex. 236 a (§ 436), 'Ey&f \vuffSnv rt rixurot ysro ffov Cyr. v. 5. 16. "SvXvih); yk^ *Hga;sX^f ras (hou$ . . vTo NjjXew?, for Hercules having been robbed of his kine by NeleuSj Isocr. 119 d. Ti S^ra . . ov xcti ffu tvttu ' ixdiTT&iv iXiyovra Th. iii. 36. 'Ek f^cctriXius SsSd/iiva/ i. 1. 6. Tlet^a •s'ccvtojv ofAoXoyuTcti i. 9. 1. *0^flXo- yitToci w^oj TetvTMv lb. 20. 'Tcra ^oXtais TZTotyfiiyotj tj u-tto tou ^utrSat ?j aXXjj Tiv) avxyK'/i xotTi^ofzivoi ii. 6. 13. T/oj y-To vSi ^s'xr^i T&^^etfifzivos, 'brought up [under] by his father,' PI. Rep. 558 d. j3. JLetT£j^flyr»6, ^oXif ^liffrai- ea.; zva^irofjiSv Tas T£ ; ra^tir^a, u /ih ^avXtritt ^Xtic^^os aTaytiv • . . ny^f^ova aWitv ^jjpov, offrts . . d^d^u, recommended, that they should immediately choose other generals, if Clearchus [is] was unwilling to lead them ; that they should ask Cyrus for a guide, who [will] would conduct them back, i. 3. 14. Tar? Si ii^o^ia. fih ^v, en ecyti ?rffl5 fiairtXia, and they had indeed a suspicion, that he was leading tliem against the king, i. 3. 21. 'E^ajJ^atrs, rig ^a^ayyiXXu i. 8. 16. 'E^sfisXtTro, Ti ^oiviiTtt ^airtXevs lb. 21. Remark. An iNFmrrrvi;, denoting an action which must be future, from the very nature of the governing word, often employs the Fut., but far more frequently the appropriate achronic tense ; thus, 2u^5r^a^£/v ii^nr^iiitro • thiiro "Si ras KUfiBts fjcvi xaitiv vii. 7. 19. 'T^itrx^uvrai v^oSvfLart^ov avreis irvffr^K nvsrixi lb. 31. M-i/^nrixi {/■nirx'i^i'Bs vii. 6. 38. 'Trr'Krxfri /"' fiovXii ffaffSxt, t^iffSai t'i /jii vfixs iKiXivinv ii. 3. 20. See § 583, A. Definite and Indefinite. §569. The indefinite and the definite tenses are thus distinguished. The former represent an action simply as performed ; the latter represent it definitely as performing. The former merely express that an action has been, is, or will be performed ; the latter present a picture of the action in the course o.f its performance. The former take a single glance at it, as one complete act conceived of as momentary ; the latter observe its progress, as begun and going forward by con- tinued or repeated effort, but not yet complete. If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line, the definite tenses may OH. 5.] DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 361 be said to present a side view of this line, so that it is seen in its full length ; but the indefinite tenses to present only an end view of it, so that it appears as a mere point. Thus, Definite Tiew. Indefinite View. ( ) ( • ) § 45 TO. Hence an action is represented, a. ) By the definite tenses, as continued or prolonged ; but by the Aor., as momentary or transient. Thus, Toy; filv ouv ^iXretcrxs sSe|avTfl oi (^a^Ccc^ot xx) I/^kxovto • EWs;Sfl dl lyyvs niretv oi ovXTTutt, £Tg«?rovT5. Kai oi fiXv ^i^ToiiTTctt iv6v5 ef^ovTooiMxovTis. The barbarians then received the targeteers (momentaiy) and fought with them (con- tinued) ; but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to flight (momentary). And the targeteers immediately followed pursuing them (continued), v. 4. 24< "Iva « . . ^(Tv^iitv 'ipcV' '^ • ' ^^(JXaxTo; X«ip^jf Dem. 45. 2. ^laXiyov, x«l fi.ah -r^aJTov Tms iiffiv, converse with thetrij and learn first who they are, iv. 8. 5. 'Ecreidaw a.-ffacvra, ocKouffftn, x^/vars, xett (ati ^^on^ov ^^oXtufAQxv&TS Dem. 44. 2. Ao^tivai ol ravrcts rag ^oXiis f^ciXkov, ^ Tiirira(ps^vm ci^pc^iv otV' Tuv i. 1. 8. AetQu)), hamng taken (YQ.0Ta.&DX3xy). "E^i^^wvj Aauingr (continued), i. 1. 2. Notes. 1. Any dwelling of tlie mind upon the agent, mode, or circum- stances of an action, and any attempt at graphic description, commonly lead to the use of the definite tenses; thus, 'AwEKg/vavra (KXm^p^os S*'£Xsysv), they an- swered(and Clea?-chus was the speaker)^ ii. 3. 21 (cf. ii. 5. 39 ; iii. 3. 3). "EXe^s '^tvo(puv, h^{^'Aviv& Se Ti/^niTihos v. 4. 4. See § 576- 2. In the Ijuperative, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculiarly favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression ; thus, 2y ouv cr^os S-iaiv crv(j.^ovXtvffov vi(^~v ii. 1. 17. 'A.xovffoe,ri ouv fiou cr^oj Bsaiy V. 7. 5 "l^Xi-^ov," tipr}, " ^^os rci o^rj, xa.) I'Ss us UStzrec ^avras \ KoTES. a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny the attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action ; thus, K.x'ia^;;^os ohx a,vitt^aZ,iv Wi Tov Xo^ov, Clearchus did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 10. 14. Szvo(pcjv Tohs fitly 'jn.Xva.ffTo.s oux. ^yzv iii. 4. 39. 'EcteJ Se olaus av- TtXiytv, sTw'Ev iii. 2. 38. 'EirsJ Se ou^lv uipiXif^ov 'iXiytv, o^avros tov iri^ov xa- TBff Ts^avj ' I bid you peremptorily,' Eur. Med. 271. n.if£.ci/^ec S' oiov 'i^yov %^avv o/"E>.X«vss, Xs'iTovfi S^ xcti Tov Xopov 01 iTTiTs • ou /X.7JV BTt aS^oot, aXX' a'kXoi aXXoSiv • \'\^i\ouro S' Xo(p'); Tuv iTTiuv • TiKos oi xec) TavTi;_ aTt^eu^vurocv. '0 ouv K.XietQ^oi oux ccvitiQcc^iv iTi TOV Xo(pov, ccXJC utq aurov irr:^tfxs to irT^&TiVfia. Tif^TBi A.vxtoy TOV '2>v^a.xofftov xai aWov i^t tov Xotpov, xat xiXluu, xetnoovTCCS tx v-Ttlp tov Xo- (pou, Tt iffTiv, aTayyuXat. K«J o A.uxio; fjXetffi ts, xat thsov aTayyiXXsi, on (pivyouo'iv otva. k^xtos. ^^saov 3' otz tolutbl ^v, xou ^Xios iSyera. 'EvTau^a S' SffTrifrav at "EXAjjvEj, xa) 3-i/Aivot ra oTXa xv&TavevTO • xai elfzet fitv iffetvftet^aVy oTi ov^ctfiov Kw^flf (pctivoiTo^ oi/o etXXos eiT* avTou auSe/j Tallin i- 10. 13— 16. See iii. 4. ^-27, 38, 39; i. 8.23-27; iv. 7.10-14; v. 4. 16, 17; vi. 1. 5-13. 4. There is no precise line of division between the ofiices of the definite and indefinite tenses. In some cases it seems to be indifferent which are employed. And the definite tenses, as i\i% generic forms (§ 566. a), often occur, where the indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate. The use of the Impf. for the Aor. occurs especially in Horn, and Hdt. 364 SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [bOOK III. 5. In verbs in which the Aor. was not formed, or was formed with a differ- ent signification, the Impf. remained as both the definite and inde6nite past tense ; as h and £p»» (tt S3> 55, § 301. 7), which are more frequently used as Aor. B. Indefinite and Complete. §577. I. The indefinite and the complete tenses are thus distinguished. The former represent an action as per formed in the time contemplated ; the latter represent it as, at the time contemplated, having already been performed. In the former, the view is directed to the action simply ; in the latter, it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to the state consequent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of the complete tenses ; the one to mark emphat- ically the entire completion or the termination of an action ; and the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an action. Thus, Toixvrx filv ?B*£cra/?j»E, such tilings has he 'done (and is now upon trial for), i. 6. 9. "E^TEiT* avayxa^fti ^aXiv l^SfisTv arr av KSxXoipaitrl fjLov, ' whatever they may have stolen from me (and may have in their possession),' Ar. Eq. 1147. '^Hx^av ot 'Iv^oi ix Tuv voXtf^iav^ ovs l^s^ofiipn Ku^a; IsrJ xetritffxoT^f xeti fiXeyflv, en WpoTffas f^sv riysfcci/v . . ^^Tjfctvos s'lti rav •jroXifj.'iiuy • oiooyftivov xgSa/jWol'a iTE^i ^VfLlAOL^'tm Cyr. vi. 2. 9. IIe^I fxXv ouv !5, cSvrsp ovvtx \XnXvSa., 211. ''Hx^e; Ti xctTO. r'l ; Ar. Nub. 238. Note. The use of the Aor. for the Perf. is especially common in the Fart. C. Future. §581. I. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion for precise fornfs to mark the state of the action. It is com- monly enough to mark the action simply as future. Hence the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the indefi- nite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures^ if they require 366 SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [bOOK III ' to be distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participle and substantive verb ; as, Zkv^os i%a.^xoZru. fiot 'iffTai rs XetToy, Sct/ros shall hereafter content me (contin- aed, § 570) Sopli. Ph. 459. To;VS' 'Urxi fi'ao« Id. (Ed. C. 653. "AvSj« xx. Txxxmris 'ic-iirh, you will have .slain a man, vii. 6. 36. Ta Vmra, iri/ii$« iyvaxirss, xai kiym /ixrxlm xanXXxyfiim Dem. 54. 22; § 58S. II. The Future Perfect expresses the sense of the Perf. with a change of the time ; that is, it represents the state consequent upon the completion of an action as future. As it carries the mind at once over the act itself to its com- pletion and results, it is sometimes used to express a future action as immediate, rapid, or decisive, and hence received its old name of paulo-post-future (paulo post futurus, ahout to be a little after). In verbs in which the Perf. becomes a new Pres., the Fut. Perf becomes a new Put. (§§ 233, 289). Thus, ''Hw Sg i^n yUnraij f/.a<7m l^oi xixXxviriTxi^ but if there should not be, I shaU have wept in vain, Ai. Nub. 1435 (§ 564. 3). OJSs!; . . (i.sriyy^a(priirirxi, aXV, ucT'ffio ^v TO 'jr^Zrov, iyyiy^x'^iTxi, no one shall be enrolled (the simple act) elsewtiere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of enrolment) as he was at first. Id. Eq. 1370. j«^£ xxi triTr^xltTxi, speak and it [shall be done at once] is done, Id. Pint. 1027. "Orxv Sij /ih triivu, ■jefTexiiira^xi, ' I shall desist at once,* Soph. Ant. 91. No|Mi^s7-£ ev tv^i ta frfii^ci if^B rs xxrax£xo^£ir6xt, xxt iificis ah 'z'oXii If^oii vtm^ov, ' shall be imme- diately cut down,* i. 5. 16. 'Eav yxp x^x \[i,o'l ^o?,^ tjvx . . xItixx fix\x ^uv Tihxsxi, Tilm^ii oSros, ' he shall be dSad,' i. e. ' he shall die instantly,' PI. Gorg. 469 d (cf. ^artxycos aa-rxi, An III. A future action may be represented more expressly as 071 the point of accomplishment, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, pur- pose, &c., by the verbs fiix>.cj, iiiXm or BiXu, fieuXofcxi, ^iT, Xi^> '^"•i '^^^^ ^^^ Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor., or Fut., according to the view taken of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness (§ 568. R.). Thus, 'ISav ^xi^x . . f.ti\XovTx u^ohv/irxuv, seeing a boy about to die, vii. 4. 7. *0 ffTxSfLoi %vSx if/.iXXi xxTxXvtiv i. 8. 1. ^UxXnirxvTx ri TTxhTv Cyr. vi. 1. 40. E/ fth ^XoTa 'icritrSctt f/.iXXit ixavx, if there are to be vessels enough, v. 6. 12. Ol/x i&'tXbi iXdiTv, X am not willing to go, or X will not go, i. 3. 10. 'Eyw ^iXtii, u xyd^ti, otaCi^xffxi vf/x5 iii. 5. 8. ^ouXiUZffSxi, o n ^^y] TOtiiy i. 3. 11. Eemaeks. (a) The ideas of destiny, purpose, &c., are often expressed by the simple Fut. Especially is the fut. Part, both with and without is, used continually to express purpose (§ 635). Thus, 0/ £?; tyiv ^xaiXixh Tt^ynv •^xidzvofizvai . . t/ ^lafpi^ovffi rSv l^ uvxyxr,; xuxo^xSovvrbiv, it yt ?T£i- MYtrrovtri xxt di^Yio-evirt xx) ptyMtrouiri xxt xyaVTTvTjirovirt, ' if they must hunger and thurst,' Mem. ii. 1. 17. To.. c^SS; f,il,iriit.iyn, he that would live well, PI. (jorg. 491 e. '^.uXXxi^^xyzt Kv^ov u; x-roxTtveHv, he apprehends Cyrus [as about to put him to death] with the design of putting him to death, i. 1.3. "F^Tt/i^i CH. 5.] USE OF MODES. INTELLECTIVE. 367 vtva EfoyvTa, he sent one to saif, ii. 5. 2. Tls/uiphi; vra^x ^a.in\'icii-- xiKiuTcriv ii. 1. 17. M«;j;oi;^s«o,- ronii i. 10. 10. See v^ 531. «. — (i) Instead of the Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote purpose, according to § 573, especially witli verbs of motion ; thus, Tat/T inttxa^ajv '^x^ow, / went to avenge this wrong, Eur. Suppl. 154. § 5 S-d;. IT. A future action, in view of its nearness, its certainty, its rapidity, or its connection with another action, may be conceived of as now doing, or even as already done (§ 5G7) ; and may hence be expressed by the Fres., Aor., or Per/. Thus, Kxxot rixu Tiii, evil is coming upon some one, Ar. Kan. 552 (cf. ^cairii ris ^Ixm lb. 554). 'A^ToiXofziir^' a.^\ il kxxov T^oa-oio-o- fiiv viav ^ecXaiai, vr^iv toS* e|»lvTXjjx£va/ Eur. Med. 78. Ei' fit To^citv iyx^x^h' ctiir^'^fftTcci, oXaXu, xcct A or^oir'Siaiph^ei), if, while possessed of the bow, he shall discover me, I am undone, and I shall destroy you besides. Soph. Ph. 7 5. E/ 2s Sj] xaTaKTSyUTi /AS, v'ofAOS dvsiTBCt Eur. Or. 940. Oyx Ei ^vvi^^aiv, mix' ii ci(ra)cr(Ai6a xiivou (iiav iTAiiravro;, « oi^ofistr^' afia ; Soph. Tr. 83. 'ATritrraXxec trot Tovts Tov ^oyov ^aj^os Isocr. 2 b. — Eor presents 'vvhich are commonly used as futures, see § 200. b. § «> 8 5. v. The FUTUKE sometimes occurs for a present or past tense, as a less direct and positive form of expression, or as though the action were not yet finished; thus, Tobftov V iyu . . oTr't^fA ihTv fii>v\mofjt.a.t, 'I shall wish,' i. e. ' am resolved,' Soph. CEd. T. 1076. XOP. littita Tthaffi x-'C' H-^'r^^^ ff'ihv. 'IA2. O'ifiQi, Ti X'l^iis J "Ii? ^' a-jraiKtffx;, ymcti Eui'. Med. 1309. TiZ; ip-ris ; ri xii,£is % "^-; f^' a.vu\'.ita.;, yma.i Id. Hel. 780. This exclama- tory use of t; XsIsj; for t; Xiyn; or t'i 'ixi^x!, as though the communication were not yet finished, belongs particularly to Euripides. IV. Use of the -Modes. § 5 8 6. For a classification and designation of the modes according to the character of the sentences which they form (§ 329. N.), see ^ 27. A. Intellective. ^587. Intellective sentences express the actual or the contingent (<§ 329. N.). The idea of contingency is expressed in two ways ; by the form of the verb, and by a particle, com- monly ar (Ep. x6 or xsV, Dor. xa). The two ways are often united for the stronger expression ; and they may be both neg- lected, if the idea is either not prominent, or is too obvious to require expression. The forms of the verb which in them- selves express contingency are the Subjunctive and Optative modes (§ 169). Intellective sentences not employing these modes (either because they are actual, or because their con- tingency is simply expressed by a particle or is not expressed at all) employ the Indicative, which is the generic mode (^§ 177, 330. 1). Kemabks. 1. It may be said in general, that the Tnd. expresses the actual; the Subj. and Opt., the contingent. But it must be understood that this, like 368 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [bOOK III. all similar statements in grammar, has primary reference to the conceptions of the mind, rather than to the reality of things ; that is, to employ the techni- cal languase of philosophy, it must be taken suhjtctivdi/, rather than nhjecticili/. The contingent is often, from strong assurance or vivid fancy, spoken of as actual ; while, on the other hand, the actual, from diffidence or courtesy or some other cause, is not unfreqnently spoken of as contingent. This state- ment is also limited by the generic use of the Ind., as mentioned above. 2. An action which is now future has, from the very nature of things, some degree of contingency ; and therefore, in the Fut. tense, no distinction is made hetween the Ind. and the Subj., but .any rule requiring in other tenses the Subj. in this requires the Ind. And even the use of the Fut. opt. appears to be limited to the omh'o obliqua, in which it takes the place of the Fut. ind. in the orufio recta (§§ 607, 608^. *§ OSo* 3. The particle of contingence, ecu, may commonly be dis- tinguished from the conjunction «v for sav (§ 603) by its position, as it never stands first in its clause, which is the usual place of the conjunction. It chief- ly occurs with the past tenses of the Ind. and with the Opt., to mark them as depending upon some condition expressed or implied ; with the Subj. after various connectives ; and with the Inf. and Part., when the distinct modes to which they are equivalent would have this particle. It is e.\tensively used •with the Subj., in cases where it would have been omitted with the Opt., for the reason, as it would seem, that the separation, in form, of the Subj. fi'om the Ind. was later and less stronglj' marked than that of the Opt. (^ 177). The in.sertion or omission of «» for the most part follows general rules, but in some cases appears to depend upon nice distinctions of sense, which it is diffi- cult te convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with which civ is connected are commonly translated into Eng. by the potential mode. § 5 8 0. Contingency is viewed as either present or past ; that is, a contingent event is regarded either as one of which there is some chance at the present time, or merely as one of which there was some chance at some past time. Present CONTINGENCY is expressed either by the Subj., or by the pri- mary tenses of the Ind. ; and past contingency, either by the Opt., or by the secondary tenses of the Ind. The tenses of the Subj. and Opt. are therefore related to each other as premnt and past tenses, or, in sense as well as in form (^§ 1 68, 196), as primary and secmulury tenses ; and the rule above may be thus given in a more con- densed form : — - PliERKXT COXTIXGENCY IS EXPRESSED BY THE PKIMABT TEKSE3 J PAST CONTIXGEXCY, BY THE SECONDARY. Note. Future contingency is contained in present ; for that which wiU bt contingent, is of course contingent now. § •iSO. Remarks. \. It cannot be kept too carefully in mind, that the distinction above has no reference to the time of the occurrence of an event, but only to the time of its cmamgenci/. Thus, in the two sentences, " I can go if I -wish," and " I could go, if I wished," the time of the going itself is in CH. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 369 both the same, i. e. future. But in the former sentence, the continc/enci/ is present, because it is left undecided what the person's wish is, and therefore there is still some chance of his going ; while in the latter, the contingency is past, because it is implied that the person does not wish to go, and therefore, although there was some chance of his going before his decision, there is now no chance. Hence, in the former sentence, present tenses are employed ; and in the latter, past. 2. The limits of past are far wider than those of present contingency ; for there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there was some chance at-some distant period in past eternity. The dividing line between present and past contingency may perhaps be thus drawn ; whatever is supposed with some degree of present expectation, or in present view of a decision yet to be had, belongs to the head of present contin- gency; but whatever is supposed without this present expectation or view of a decision, to the head of past contingency. Past contingencj', therefore, includes, (1 .) all past supposition, whether with or without expectation at that time ; (2.) all supposition, whether present or past, which does not imply expectation, or contemplate a decision, that is, all mere supposition; (3.) all supposition, whether present or past, in despite of a prior decision. Thus : A. PEESEKT CONTINGENCT. I will go, if I can have leave (and I intend to ask for it). I think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish^ that you may go. a. PA^ CONTIHGENCT. (1.) Past supposition. I thought, that I might go, if I could have leave. I wished, that you might go. (2.) Present supposition not implying expectation or contemplating a de- cision. / would go, if I should have leave (but I have no thought of asking for it). T could go with perfect ease. I should like to go. (3.) Present supposition in despite of a prior decision. a. In regard to the present. I would go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore I shall not go). /3. In regard to the past. / would have gone, if I had had leave (but I had none, and there- fore did not go). §591. 3. As the difference between the Subj. and Opt. is one of time, rather than of essential office, some have chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and offices of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the EngHsh potential modes becomes somewhat more obvious (see ^ 33). Ac- cording to this classification, which desej-yes the attention of the student, 370 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [bOOK III, although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the old phraseolo- gy, tlie Present Subjunctive becomes the Definite Present (or the Present) Conjunctive. Present Optative " " Detinite Past (or the Imperfect) Conjunctive. Aorist Subjunctive " " Aorist Present (or Primary) Conjunctive. Aorist Optative " " Aorist P.Tst (or Secondary) Conjunctive. Perfect Subjunctive " " Perfect Present (or the Perfect) Conjunctive. Perfect Optative " " Perfect Past (or the Pluperfect) Conjunctive. 4. Contingent sentences, Wke actual (§§ 566-568, 576, 584, 585), are liable to an interchange and blending of tenses. Past contingency is often conceived of as present ; and present, as past. Hence, primary tenses take the place of secondary, and secondary of primary. This interchange may be observed particularly between the Subj. and Opt. modes. § 592, The Subj. and Opt. occur, for the most part, in dependent clauses ; and indeed some grammarians have re- fused to regard them as being ever strictly independent. It results from the principles already laid down, that, in their use as dependent modes, the Subj., for the most part, follows the prunary tenses ; and the Opt., the secondary. To this gen- eral rule, however, there are many exceptions. Note. In the application I5f this rule, the tenses of the Imperat, as from its very nature referring to present or future time, are to be regarded as pri- mary tenses ; those of the Inf. and Part., as primary or secondary, according to the finite verbs, whose places they occupy, or, in general, according to those upon which they themselves depend. § 59S. In the expression of contingency, the Ind. is properly distinguished from the Subj. and Opt. by the greater positiveness with which it implies or excludes present anticipa- tion. Thijs supposition with present anticipation is expressed by the primary tenses ; but there is here this general distinc- tion, that the Fut. Ind. anticipates without expressing doubt, while the Subj. expresses doubt. On the other hand, supposi- tion without present anticipation is expressed by the secondary tenses ; but with this general distinction, that the Opt. supposes, either with some past anticipation, or without regard to any de- cision, while the secondary tenses of the Ind. suppose in despite of a prior decision. , Remarks, x. In the expression of contingency, the Impf. ind. has com- monly the same difference from the Anr. and Flap., as, in English, the Impf. ind. and potential from the Plup. In respect to the time of the action, therefore, the contingent Impf. ind. commonly refers to present time, and the Aor. and Plup. to past. See §§ 599, 601. S, 603. S. /3. We may, say in general, that supposition as fact is expressed by the ap- pro|)nate tense of the Ind. (V 587, 603. a); supposition tliat may become fact, by the Subj. ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Opt. ; and sup- position contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the lad. ; while in these tensca CH. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 371 there is this distinction, that the Impf. expresses supposition contrary to present fart, but the Aor. and Piup. coiitrury to past fact. y. The Epic sometimes joins xi with the Fut. ind., when it depends upon a condition expressed or understood ; as, E/ V 'OSys-su; 'ixht . ., at^^ei -az . . iirnTiiiiTxi {. 539. A similar use of an in the Att. is r^re and doubtful. ^ 0"4:« 5. Indefiniteness constitutes a species of contingency. Hence (1.) the construction with the relative indefinite (§ 606) ; and (2.) the use of «» with the past tenses of the Ind. to denote an action, not as occurring at a definite time, but from time to time, as the occasion might occur, or, in other words, to denote a habitual action ; thus, IlflXXaxi; yu^ 'iipvi fiiy civ «/aJ, xcei ouK av a^vtjhifiv, I confess, and [would not] will not deny it, Dem. 576. 17. 'Axx' oukit xt xii^m/n Ai.Flnt. 2Si. MEN. Oix £v /ahi- ftnv. nP. OvV 'iytay a.<^rnTo[j.Dt.t Eur. Iph. A. 310. — This use of the Opt. is particularly frequent in the first person. y, TVoi p>oJ 1 va, ffTu ', VI xiya ; Whither [can] shall I go? where stop ? what say? Eur. Ale. 864. EiVw^Ev, Si ffiyu/av, ^ Ti'B^tiirofitv ; Id. Ion, 758. 'Eiliriiv vi ^iiirsis, H ffT^et froi^)S*, ti IjSoyXsTOj iBuvaTO av tuutcc l^of^aT^v vii. 6. 23. § 60S* Remarks. 1. A past purpose, still continued or conceived of as present (§ 591. 4), may be expressed by the Subj. ; and on the other hand, a present purpose, viewed as doubtful or as connected with something past, distant, or contingent (§ 590), may be expressed by the Opt. The Subj. for the Opt. may be remarked particularly after the Aor. used for the Perf. ^^ 580), and in indirect quotation (§ 610). The two modes are some- times both used in the same connection. Thus, *EtriV?3S='j tn ouk 'iysi^ov, "va 0)5 ii^ttTTa oisiyyis PI. CritO, 43 b. 'E^i^X^ov dofio/v, fz^ (Aoi ti /zlfc-xpijtr^i Eur. Med. 214. "ili^^iTo wq'ktGsis ayoua-a, o'itsq ra tr^ETi^a (p^da-aa-iv Th. vii, 25. Tl^'jo-EXhTv IxiXEvov, El Tif e'it} . ., 'ivx d^ayyEiXeoo't ii. 5. 36. Compare l-n^aTv- TQ and iTtSuvTai iii. 4. 1, 34. "Xvus oi woy « a-roffxa'r'rEt vi -^ d-ffom^'il^Et, as a'sre^os i'lij « o5of ii. 4. 4. ^ttJo-ov fis xd^f^^ViroVj ais vrvSoifAiSa Soph. Q2d. C. 1 1, £.iT$Ty vXoTa, as d'ro'rXioiiv • . . ^if/,\}/ai ol x_a.) •^r^oxaraXnypo/n.Eyous Ta ax^eCf oViws f£^ ^Sdirafft i. 3. 14. Tlf vQ^iv ^Ei^afAEv A.iyiir^ou Bsois, yaov; nr dipEitjv Eur. El. 58. 2. After words of fear, the final conjunction fiv^ lest, is commonly used, but Bometimes also the fuller a^at (tn, or some other connective ; thus, 'E^oCot/vTA QH. 5.] IN FINAL AND CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 375 fih WidoTvT-o atiToTs . . 01 traAs,uia/, thet/ feared [lest the enemy should attack] that the enemy would attack them, iii. 4. 1. AsSi&if, ^sj XxSaiv fis iUiiv IvtSn i. 3. 10. 0eCt>iJf/.cii Se, ft^ Ttvus Tt^ovas ri^ovxTs iii^r.ffo/iiv havr'tet; PI. Phil. 13 a. £i^oZi7TO . . fin oil ovvatTO iii. 1. 12. Klvojvo; fiT] XdSa}iri vii. 7. 31. AsSoiv' ovofs ftvt Ttv^ofAatj I am afraid [as to this, viz, how I shall not find] that 1 shall Jind^ Ar. Eq. 112. "Owws \aSu, SeSojxa, I fear [as to this, viz. how I may es- cape] thai X cannot escape, Eur. Iph. T. 995. M>] r^'mrti?, otus c'i ti; . . a-ro- ffTBLffu, fear not that'any one will tear you. Id. Heracl. 243. ]M« SsiVjis cro^', us - . c^iTici Soph. El. 1309. 'E^oSsiVo, SVj i(pi^(rsirtlxi !^sX/E Cyr. iii. 1.1. Os- Sov/iivot o\, ^as ^^ri ccvuXouvti iivotxovroci lb. iv. 5. 19. 'Araa floras, si Vl'iffiti %iff'jroiva,v Eur. Med. 184. 3. A verb of attention, care, or fear, is sometimes to be supplied before ovais or [An * as, "O-jtus ovv snirh auSgsf [sc. o^ars, itkovutz, or ea-i^sAErff-^s], see t/ie« that you be men, i. 7. 3. Asr[sc. irxiurs?!'] r, oras iraT^ii Ssi^sis £» ij^Cfor?, «"? i^ o"oo Vga^jjS Soph. Aj. 556. 'AXV oV o-aihtrofAKr^a Eur. Hel. 1059. (/3.) Hv yaf TovTO Xa€w/d£v, oh ^vvvurovreci fiivuv, for if we take this, they wW not be able to remain, iii, 4. 41. "Hn "SI (pivyviy vif^sTs Iku sr^as Tavrcc (houXivero- f/.i$a I. 3. 20. 'Eai; f£.oi ^uo-^viTS, . . •r^ori/nno-iffh i. 4. 14. See lb. 15. — {a. and ^.) Oux aga 'in fjccc^iiTat, u Iv Tavrats oh fi-ap^iiTai fi,Bv^ iifitu; Se? . . WuiS]- ff-Ki i. 7. 7 (^ 583). Kan tovt, e'^Jj, VixafUVj ^civff' rifiTv vrEnro'ifjTcn i. 8. 12 (§ 584). (y.) Ohx civ ovv B-ctUf£a,^otf/.i, it oi ^roXifiiot . . i^ee.xoXov0a7£v, I should nntj then, wonder if the enemy should pursue, iii, 2. 35. E/ ovv o^Mr.v u^as ffairrt^tov Tt ^ouXtvofjLivovSy 'iy^SoifAi av w^os Ufiai iii. 3. 2. (d.) E/ f^iv tai^MV dcr/t^ovvra,; Ufceis, Tour av Iffxoirovv . » 'EcrsI Sfi opu, x. t. X., If I saw you in want^ I shmild be considei'ing this . ., But since I see, &c., V. 6. 30. Ofx oiv tTai'/jtrtv ^A.yeta'ias TavTce., it f/,y} lyca ahTOV iKiXtvtra, A^gasias would not have done this if I had not commanded him, vi. 6. 15. E/ Ss rovro fTscvTi? Ittoiov^iv, u-TrctvTts uv d'TTioXofAi^a. V. 8. 13. Ei f^vi ii/UrU; tiX^BTt, iTaetvo- fj.i$et a.v ii. 1. 4. — (^y. and o.) E/ f/.lv T^offhv h^HTTtifiTiv, eh^* olv erw/ixoXovSnira troi • xati vvv a.'TUfiu Ohoi ya^ olv M«ooxa? fil o (^ccfftXths \'ffa.ivo'i7i, tl i^'.?,auvotf£t Tous zhioyiTag. Had I known this before, I had never accompanied you ; and now I shall depart. For King Medocus tcould by no means commend me, sliould I drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 1 1. (e.) E? ifou ffn^'/iSM Soph. OJId. C. 1443. — 'The use of u with the Subj. is almost entirely confined to the Ion. and Dor. (^.) E( fuv I'Tix.tvZ ahTOV, oixaiafs av fis xcci alriooirSi, xa) (/.itroiTt vii. 6. 15. E/ Oi xat Suvij^iTTi TO. TB 0|0»7 xX't^ai . ., TJ^iTi Icrt tovs ^oTafcovs (cf. 'Eip' av bX- 6oiTi av, Bi T0v"AXuv Sia€fit.'«T£) V. 6. 9. E/ 'i^oifii, as Ta^iffTa o-rXa Itoiqu f/-9]v Cyr. ii. 1, 9. Oux av •s'^oQa.iTiv tov 'srooa tov btb^ov, il /zh Taur dx^i^ai^n- ffBrai Ar. Eccl. 161. Ei yao yvvalxt; s; toS* ij^ovo'iv S-^dirauij . . 'ffap oVSit avTal; yiv av oXXuvai •ffoo'iis EuT. Or. 566. (jj.) Ei ouv tiBiiiv TOVTO . ., 'iivro av l^ri tov; •ptovovs . ., xa) xaTi^yd^ ^aivTo av auTTiv Ven. 12. 22. Afiivan av eJ'jj, bI vuv (/.'bv . . ffvyyvajfAnv . . 'i^X^oiTB, \v QB Toi TBo); XC^^V ' * ^'"■^dro) ixoXdZ.tTt Lys. 179. 32. E/ /*£» {tAoTik BiTiffSai fitXXBt ixava . ., '/ifz-B?; av TXioijiBv ' Bi oi uiXXoiftt*' v. 6. 12. Oux dv > . dyoQBvsff, ohoi xi . . dvtBi'/]s j3. 184. (S\ 'Yj-^roQBuofiijv, "va. b'i Tt oboitOj uipiXor/iv avTov I. 3. 4 (§.601;. 'EfTifouXEw. ovffiv, u;, 9)v ouvojvTai, d^oXBO'&iiriv Hi. 1. 35. EiirEVj e/ avT^' ooin i^^tas X^Xioug, OTi . > xaTaxdvoi av 1. 6. 2, § 004. Remarks. 1. The condition is often («,) under- stood ; or (/?.) instead of being expressed in a distinct clause, is incorporated in the conclusion ; or (/.) is expressed by a relative clause, or by an independent instead of a dependent sentence. In all these cases, the form of the conclusion is CH. 5.] IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 377 properly the same as if the condition had been formally ex- pressed. Thus, (a.) "Kn ouv uv yivoio rci ifAu £^s,X^e^ ^oXifiios, If^it Se (p/^oj ; Would you tJieit [if I should now forgive youj be in future an enemy to my brotlierj and a friend to me? i. 6. 8. Notes, a. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possi- biUty with inclination ; since these are the two great conditions of human con. duct. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with av to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition ; thus„ Ow» av ^vvtcira^ he would tiot be able {if he should wish), i. e. he could not, i. 9. 23. OySfi TOUT a» Tig I'lvotf nor could any one say this, i. 9. 13. Al/roi filv av Wo^itiSviffa-v., tliey could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen], iv. 2. 10. *ilfitxs §' av 'itpfiviyeo'ys xS*^^^'i ^^^ Z might have said that we ought, iii. 2. 24 Oi/V avrov uToxTtTvai av yiXoifitzv, nor should we wish to slay him (if we could), ii. 3. 23. "HJifl-r' ay dKov(rKifiij J should most gladly hear (if I might hear), ii. 5. 15. Tsjv Ixtvh^iatv IXo'ifAviv civ i. 7. 3. 'Oxvoiyjv fch ecv i. 3. 17. 'ESoyXo/Ajjv y av, I should have wished, PI. Phaedr. 228 a. b. To the use of the Opt. with av just noticed, may be refen-ed its em- ployment to express permission, or command in the softened or indifferent lau' guage of pef mission; as, 2y fxXv Kofiti^ots av tnecuTov, you may now betake your- self [might if you wished], Soph. Ant. 444. "AyoiT civ fx.aTatov a.vl^^ Ik^O' ^av lb. 1339. Xat^oTs av u'trea ' fAViv, nBvvar av T^aTTEiv a ISouXiTa Mem. i. 4. 14. "Avzu tov to, Totavrx %X^'^ [== it [Ml ra ToiavTa £t;^EvJ, . . aux dv oTa; t «v PI. Phiedo, 99 a. N/- xavTls fAiv ovYive^ av xaTaxdvottv, viTTTt^ivTOiv %\ avTuv ov^it; av }^ii(p6z'in iii. 1. 2. "^iffTi^ av o^dfioi Tig wegi v'mtjs i. 5. 8. "A^rsg av av§^eaTQi £v i^tifc'ia •rocniriiBc.Vj iiXXas ol oix av ToXfi^iv V. 4. 34. \y-J "OffTIS o\ TOVTUV irVVO^iV [= i7 TtS iTVVUdEit}^ avT^ VfUCpUfCSXnxeilSj TOUTOf lya> ovvDT av tvoaifAovitraifn ii. 5. 7. § 00 O* 2. The place of the Opt. in the conclusion is sometimes supplied by the Ind. expressing such ideas as possibility, propriety, necessity, habit, or uvjinished action^ commonly without av • as, Ohx. nv Xet^ilv, ti fitvi , . 9-n^cjiiv i. 5. 2. €)vot ya^, il ^dvv v^oSvf/.olTOy p/f^tov «v iii. 4. 15. Ei' ti; ali- Toa (pavt^of yivetTo iTihstKvvirSai ^ovkofiivoi, wsgl ^dvTos I'Totdro i. 9. 16. See lb. 18, 19, 28 ; ii, 3. 1 1 ; iv, 1. 14 ; and § 594, "Hiktu^ov, il aXutreivro i. 4. 7. Aitr^oov ya^ «v Ta fiilv Ifia ^la'^&T^a^Sai, * for it would have been base,' vii. 7. 40 (§ 604. jS). 3. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, to which its verb con- forms; as, *Ea» S* XfAi 'iXvi, 'i j«£v \.i Eur. Bac. 173. See § 500. a. 3. Such familiar imperatives as ays, EiVs, i^i, and (pioi, may be used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are addressed ; thus, "Aye H, «»auffa!Te Apol, 14. ^ EiVs ^o/, tI vrois^ir, wiio^is ; Ar. Pax, 383. 4. An act of the will may respect either the real or the ideal. Hence in Greek, as in other languages, the Imperat. may be used to express supposition or condition ; thus, "Of^as Ti il^YttrSej ftoi, but yet [let it have been said by me] stippose me to have said^ Mem. iv, 2, 19. IIXtfUTSj re ya^ . ., tuti Z,n Soph. Ant. 1168. C. Incorpokated. § 6 1 4* I. The Greek has great freedom in respect to the employment of distinct or incorporated sentences, and in respect to the mode of their incorporation. Thus {m.) a de- pendent clauge may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (,?.) its subject or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in 382 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [bOOK III. the leading clause, leaving it otherwise distinct; or (/.) its verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive; or (5,) its verb may be incorporated yet nnore closely as a Participle. The union often becomes still closer by an attraction, which renders the subject of the Inf. or Part, the same with the subject or an adjunct of the principal verb. This attraction has three forms ; in the first (s.), the principal verb adopts the subject of the de- pendent clause ; in the second (^.), the Inf. or Part., referring to the same person or thing with the principal verb, adopts the same grammatical subject ; in the third (?;.), the Inf. or Part. adopts for its grammatical subject, an adjunct of the principal verb. E. g. a. "Hiirhro, cTi to ^liva/vos ffr^uTsuf^iz yjdvi iv l^iXixia. «!', he perceived^ that ilie army of Meno luas now in Cilicia^ i. 2. 21. Aiycvtrtv, qti Wt tovto 1'^;^ov- rcti Cyr. i. 2. 6. Hec^iffxtva^ovroj oVwj xara xo^viphv la-^aXoZatv Th. ii. 99. (h. "Hiffhro T6 Ti ^livcovos ffr^a.riv(tit^ ort «'S>; tv Ki>.ixiet ^v, he perceived the army of Menn, that it was now in Cilicia^ i. 2. 21 v. I. '^xiyovro t/vbsj as yiyvaia-Koutri Vect. i. 1. See §§ 425. 4, 551. — -a and /3. For examples, see § 551. K. ^ y. AlaSav'ofttvog atrovs fiiycc •^a.^u, (htx.fft'ktl ^a^ti&i ovvaix^ai, perceiving thetn to have great influence with King Darius, Th. vi. 59. fla^ia-Kiuci^tTa (ionhTv Th. ill. 110. Yittrroli •PTifi'ffsi iTTiffKO'Tiiv CEc. 4. 6. '^Hx^ev . . (ionhTv rj? ^ra- Tji'S/ Ages. i. 36. §. Oy ^uvoificct . . ffl aiff^itr^eci ^zi^afAtvoVf I cannot perceive ynu attempting^ ii. 5. 4. Ha^£a-»tva.^£To ya,^ To^EVfrofiivos H. Gr. iv. 2. 41 (§ 583. a). "E-Viff^i Ttyae, l^ovvrx ii. 5. 2. *E^;^;a^£^fli . . (iori&riffevTis rovv ^oXifLomTuy^ he was not at all displeased with their being at war^ i. 1. 8 (cf. 'S.tiidv)? Tt ^;^hro etbrco vii. 5. 7. See §§ 372. «, 406). 'P-,- £>^ovTos lUe^as Iftod Soph. Tr. 394 (§§ 375, 377. 2). Sometimes the Ace. occurs fur another case with the Part., if its use is analo- gous to that of the Inf. ; as, 2s f^lv tu tr^aerffovr Wt^'^'Q^ Sojih. Aj. 136. "Hff-^jjv . . luXoyevyrx cri Id. Phil. 1314. Cf. § 406. § 61 8. II. The relations of dependent sentences are ex pressed with greater expliciiness by the distinct modes with their connectives; but with greater brevity^ and often greater energy and vivacity^ by the incorporated modes. There are few of these relations which cannot be expressed by the latter. Hence, in the wide ransjje of their use, these modes may ex- press the subject^ the direct or indirect object^ the /me, cause^ purpose, manner, means, condition, restriction, preliminaries, result, &€., of the verbs with which they are connected. EemakivS. 1. The use of both the incorporated modes is far more exten- sive in Greek than in English. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf and Part, hy finite verbs with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, ify altltnuc/h, because, since, in order that, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, the Inf. and Part, are intei'changed in translation ; as, Ta Vi tuv (p'lXuv fiovos £%TQ tihivoti paa-Tov ov d(pukeixT£c XctftQaviiv, bat he thought that he alone knew it to be most easy to seize the unguarded property of friends, ii. 6. 24. Xl^wrtviiv va^ eJ; ISovXito Iccutov ., Iv u • . ^y' sTva/ ^afffictTZ PI. Rep. 614 b. (i. ^AyyiX'ku /^t^KvXXldcc;, on vix.eitv rs av A-otxitxifioviQi, xeti etVTcjv ju,\v viSvavai oKT-u H. Gr. iv, 3. 1. , 'O.S fiiv ffT^ciTviynffovTa i/Lts . . jtijjSs/s vfce^v Xt- •j/ET&j . . • &i? o£ •^rziffofcai i. 3. 15 (§ 640). ' ATnyytXXov toi Ku^is;, ©Vi TocrccvTce I'i'n iv$ov dyaPu, oacc . . (xti civ Iw/XsiVE/v Cyr. V. 2. 4. See § 628. Note. "On and wj are sometimes even followed, after an intervening sen- tence, by an Inf. or Part., instead of a. finite verb'; as, ET^re Se, en, "" I-tth^o.* Tu^tTTo. « ffT^aniet X«^>j, ih^u; dcfo<7rifA-\pgtv eturav" iii. 1. 9. 'Kvefitiinv orty ti Tt ovTos fO'a.Soi^ aUTO; ccv XetSiTv Cvr. v. 4. 1. '12,ya/ ya.^, =y iffS oti, a>s IftauTov '?nl6ca, , . £^6 iJvai Touruv 'iva. PL Gorg. 453 b. AlffSdvaf/.ai ovv eov • ., on, 09roj- Caious H. Gr. ill. 5. 5, 'A.yTiTeitr^iiv oi ov^i)s Kiv^Dvos ii. 5. 17. /'A^^avTS? tou otetSecivnv i. 4. 15. Tv^f] toiix^' ewea'ts;, S-itvf/,a.(roi.t ftsv a^tct^ iT'Vov^TiS yz f^tivTot TTJs iftvjs ohx. a^'iOi Soph. CEd. T. 776. J^uXutrut tou xahm l-TriovTees i. 6. 2 (§ 347). Ou» iKuXvi [icttrtXihs to Ku^ai/ a-T^cCTBUfioi ^taSetivitv 1. 7. 19. 'AcTsyyaiKEvai tou fAci^Eirdai lb. A/a tov I'^jo^xbTv ii. 6. 22, 'HyciXXiTO tSi i^ecTCiTxv ^vyctirScci., toi •ffXdffa.ffSai ■x^eySS? lb. 26. Mav^avE/v ya^ ^ko[aiv Soph. OCd. C. 12. ^oQoufAEVoi oh^ fl/iSs fiovovj xXXec. xcci to xeCTctTiosTv iii. 2. 19. A/a TO ToXX^ohs 'i)C^iv u-TTvi^trcts xctt oio. Tm i-^rtfAiXsixv i. 9. 27. Tls ^oXs/,c£7v TS IxECVot I'miTCLt i. 1. 5. ^Afiy,^c&vo$ ilffiXSuv ffTpa.Ttvf/.aTi i. 2. 21. ^ayitv Jg/wfls, a terrible fellow to eat, vii. 3. 23. Asivos X'lyuv ii* 5. 15. 'O^aw o-tu- yvos ^v, xa) t^ ^0To~5, srXwv ovofzdiron, 'in nothing except name,' Eur. Ph. 501. § G31. Notes, a. In some cases it seems indifferent -whether the Inf. is regarded as the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used impersonally. See § 546. ^3, y. j3. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. is often used, where the Inf. Pass. might have been used with reference to a neai'er, more explicit, or more natu- ral subject; as, Twctte/v ^a^i^ovTCLj giving himself up [for beating] to be beaten, 33 386 SYNTAX USE OF MODES. [bOOK III. PI. Gorg. 480 d (of. Tlx^iirxj ■ • S-i^ciriuimxi Id. Chann. 1 57 b). ITa{i- XovTts hfioLs abrovs tu -roiiiv ii. 3. 22. Aituiri ^ovxoXoiiriv iK^uvat {i^icpos Eur. Ph. 2,5. T^oi; parrois ivTvy^avuv, the easiest things to meet with, Mem. i. 6. 9. A.KoiJirat fi\v ttras Tiirh ajjSw, ptj^iivcci V oiix ccffVfi rou; 'ivhiKot it) 6S7« Remarks. 1. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. considered simply as such. ' If, on the other hand, (a.) the subject of an Inf. has a prior grammatical relation^ it may be in any case which this prior rela- tion requires. If it is the same with the subject of the principal verb, it is seldom repeated, except for special emphasis or distinction (^ 614. ^) ; and is then commonly repeated (as in other emphatic repetitions) in the same case (cf. § 499). Not unfrequently (/3.) there is a mixture of constructions which may be referred to ellipsis or anacoluthon. Thus, a.. ^Hx^ov l-TTi Tivcc Tajy ^oxovvrajv iro^aiv i^vat, I came #0 one of those who were thought to be wise, Pi. Apol. 21 b. Toys outsv) iTiTpi-^ovra.s xcexai eTva;/, who will permit no one to be bad, iii. 2. 31. Nyw tro) 'i^zimv, a Ssvo^wv, av^p) yt- viffScLt vii. I. 21. 'OfiaXoyiis oZv •pct^t if^l ccoikos \_=^ ahtjcov o-e] ytyivni^^cii \ Do you confess then [to have been unjust] that yqu have been unjust to me 9 i. 6. 8. TouTo §' iTToiit IK Tou ^xXt-To; iiveti, and this he effected by being severe^ ii. 6. 9. 'lao-^fli/ ccvTo; TO TQocuf/,a. (pn; iruvBtvTtia'ai, riding up to meet him, i. 8. 15. LioTctfios 'too'outos to (^a,4os, atg f^^dl tm oo^otTOi u-xi^k^nv iii. 5. 7. Tiff fAv a-vvzXovTt [sc. Xoyy] iWuv, [so as to speak with a discourse bringing all together] to speak comprehensively, to say all in a word, iii. 1. 38. 'ilj S* ev ^^a^u iWiTv, but to speak in briefs Ag. 7. 1. 'H? 'i-ros siteTv, so to speak, PL Gorg. 450 d. "P^s y& ovtoiit) Vo^ai Id. Eep. 432 b. '11? fAta^h f/.iya.X^ iixa.ovay yivffonrdai tavr^ xetretXi'^av \j= ToirauTov fiovov etrov ecv ysvtraiTo], leaving for himself so much only as [he could taste] to taste, i. e. merely enough for a taste^ vii. 3. 22. "Nifiofnyoi ts to: auruv 'ixxtrroi offov d.voZ,^v^ 'merely enough for subsigtence/ Th. i. 2. 'Exs/Vsra t^? wxtqs oa-ov trxoTalovs ^nXhTv TO crsS/iJv iv. I. 5. "Off'x fitivrot ^n ^axtlv ccuro^, but so far as [seemed to him] he could judge at present, Th. vi. 25. "Oirov yi ^' ttViveti Ar. Nub. 1252. "0 Ti xccfi^ eiyivett Id. Eccl. 350. § 699. Reimaeks. 1. It will be observed, that, in some of the ex- amples above, there is an ellipsis before the connective, and that in some the connective itself suffers attraction. From the frequent use of oJa; as above, with an ellipsis of its corresponding demonstrative (§ 523), it seems to have been at length regarded, especially in connection with te, as a simple adjective of quality, and to have been construed accordingly; thus, "OTfl/ te etrta-h 3a* 390 SYNTAX -^USE OF MODES. [bOOK III. hfih irvfiT^a^ai vre^i Ttjs ^loSou ;" 0/ Ss e/Vov, on '^txavot itr/itv lU '■«'' X'" ^ctv Eia-^aXXuv.^^ " S/iuU you be [such as to] able to cooperate with us respecting the passage ?" A nd they replied, " We are able to make an irruption into the coun-' try. V. 4. 9. '0 ya^ o7o? -rg ajv yiyvaiiTKUv te Toug aiipzXif^ov; ccutos;, xai T0UT0V5 luydftsvo; vronTv l-^i^Df^iTv aXX»jXc& fisyct i\vct,i, Kai fiv} oiav viuTipM {hauXivi with Ti or o ti, to form an intensive (and often severe or sarcastic) ' why* or ^because ; thus, T/ ya,^ fAa,6ovr' 1; tou; 9-toi;; u^^i^irTiv -, For having learned what new wisdom did you insult the gods ? i. e. Why did you insult them ? or, What possessed you to insult them? Ar. Nub. 1506. T; ^ethva-ect . . ti%a.^'r^?i V^^ ^^ Wf'ong in beginning war, Th. i. 53. *^XX£i'^£a-^ai eo "Troiav Mem. ii. 6. 5. EiVsg tvTup^^^iro^iv . . IXovrss Eur. Or. 1212. 'H ^oXis avroTg oux. i'^i'rpi-4'ii VapaZtx.'iVOVirt ~iym, you cannot tdl me too soon, i. e. tdl me at once, Mem. ii. 3. 11. "AxXa y« in liv^ia 'friXiiau kiyait PI. Phil. 26 b. § G34:. Notes. «. With these verbs, the Part, av is sometimes omitted (of. § 547) ; as, "SSs "ah [so. oit\, know that you are safe. Soph. CEd. C. 1210. El ysjaii Kv^Z lb. 726. 21 JnXiair/a naKn [sc. SVra] lb. 783 AoXorro yinnfC a/iiv Id. Ant. 471. 'Svv V iy^oTri ruyx^'" W- ^^- ■^'^* /3. Many of these verbs likewise take the Inf. ; but often with this distinc- tion from the Part. ; viz. that the Inf. denotes something dependent upon the action of the verb, but the Part, something which exists independent of it. Thus, "All ffiira? /iiSu/itv a^yai ^m, if we should once have learned to live in idleness, iii. 2. 25. "Ivx lialy r(i(piirTtis at, that he may learn that he is a schemer, .^sch. Pr. 61. Tvcf r^itpuv tJjv yXu/rirecv i]irv^oiTi^a.v, 'learn to keep, Soph. Ant. 1089. 'EsTEjSan yyZirDi iiriaToifiitoi, when they perceive that they are distrusted, Cyr. vii. 3. 17. 'M.iftmlm d»nf aya.tos Hvm, let him remember to be a brave man, iii. 2. 39. Me^Kv^/iai . . axovircts ^ots, I remember to have once heard, Cyr. i. 6. 3. Toura fiiv aitx aitr;^vvofiai Xiyuv • too\.. atirx^vot- /im oi» xiyuv, I am not ashamed to say this (which is said) ; but I should be ashamed to say that (which from the shame is not said), Cyr. v. 1. 21. y. The complementary Part, sometimes occurs with an impersonal expres- sion, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple verb. When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is sometimes implied in the Part. Thus, 'Eiao) v^imi £v /^xXtirTiL imfiiXiifi.iva>, it would become me most of all to attend, CEo. 4. 1. OiV ovTi aVa| £Xt~iftovffi)t clftzivov ifl-ra/, whether it would be better for them to go to war, Th. i. 118. Mso-tm m ^viitufi,iws, I was sated with passion, Soph. CEd. C. 768. AiiXo; ^v avteifitvos i. 2. 11. KaraSjjXfli yiyvovTai cr^off-TToiou- fisvai |K£» iSimi, ilVoTis Ti t'uViv PI. Apol. 23 d. See §§ 551, 614. s. § 635. 4. Prospective Part. This appears chiefly in the Fut. Part, denoting purpose, commonly translated by the Inf. (§§ 583. a, 618. 1). § 636. 5. The Definitive Part, is equivalent to a relative pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently translated by these. It is often used substantively, and may not unfrequenlly be translated by a noun. It occurs chiefly with the article, but sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. Thus, Auh; 5e tiyti/rof^ivo; aii^us 'iffTai, and again there will be no one who wiU guide us, ii. 4. 5. Oi avro/ioXriffecvTSS (cf. 0/ Jjitts^ov \\yiip^nra,v) i. 7. 13. Tot/5 Xx'^ri'jrTuxiiTot;, those who had been banished, or the exiles, i. 1. 7 (§ 556). ToTs ysivKfcsvots (cf. T^oTs yovsZiri) Apol. 20. ^uvayxyav . . tsus T^otriXSavTaf avTM xai Tojv ccXXaiv tov ^ou>.o[ai\ov, ' and of the rest [him that wished] any one that wished^ i. 3. 9. 'H Aiof*0tta Xtyo^ivn avciyxi], the so-called necessity of Diomed, PI. Rep. 493 d. ''I/, uirvri^ ixuvos %x^* ^vvuf^tv Tm a.'^ixKffavirav xai xecTa^ovXa/ffafAivTit aVaswTflij Toy; "ExXjjvaf, ouTai TTtv autrovirav Vf^zTs KasJ (ioviSritrovaccv u-TCcbtnv Irol/^tiv t^ifiTt Dem. 101. 10. "A-TeLVTCt ya^ ToXfiaia-t dsivu (paivzreti, for every thirty appears fearful to tliose who are venturing, Eur. Ph. 270. ijiTtvSivui . . IIS fiXaSm f!(iiii, to have suffered [what tends to harm] CH. 5.] PAETICIPLE. 393 any injury. Soph. CEd. T. 516. A/aflfs/ Si «ifim>.u fixiitv fi.ii fixSctras, xa) i yi/|tjvai Soph. Aj. 588. HsXe/ ^iTca-iuhU ^Sch. Ag. 392. IloXXa XZ^/^"-'^^ '^X°^^^ avti^^axarssj [having plundered many things we have them] we have plundered many things, i. 3. 14. "A vvv KXTKffr^f^auivos 'i^tis vii. 7. 27. Ta lirjTflSfi/a ^avra eT;^ov avajxExa- ftifffitvot iv. 7. 1. Ta EcTfT^Seia ek tovtois xvaKSKofiiirftlvat ntrttv lb. 17. Tov X'oyov d\ trou va.7.Kt ^ctvfitiffas t/C"^ PI- Phsedr. 257 C. Tov fi\v VffOTifacs, Tov S' cCTifcdffm 'i^zt Soph. Ant. 22. Hn^v^avr e^siv lb. 32. * KA&t5 [sc. ovTos'\ ii. 1.19. "E^fifl-T/ (ptuvsTy, at; iftov /zovtis TTiXets Soph. CEd. C. 83. 'Hj v(pyiyviTov nvos Id. (Ed. T. 1260. 3. The use of the Ace. for the Gen. absolute chiefly occurs after us (§ 640), or when the subject is a neuter adjective (cf. § 432. 2). CH. 5.] PAETICIPLE. 395 ^64:0. IV. A Part., whether absolute or depende^it, is often preceded by ag (or a similar particle of special appli- cation), chiefly to mark it as subjective, i. e. as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intent-ion, or statement of some one, whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part, thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf. Thus, TIuQ^yytiXB ■ ., &IS i^TiSov^svovTos TLiO'tra(pipvovs, he gave command [as Le would give command, T. plotting] as if Tissapkemes were plotting^ or under pretence that T. was plotting^ i. I. 6. 'TLtovro ocffoXuXivoti, us iecXuxviets ttjs wcXfiiy;, they thought they were lost, inasmuch as the city was taken^ vii. 1.19. 'ExEXeyiTS . ., us its Tlna-t^ets (iovXefitvos ffr^etTivtcr^etij us TQccyfta.ruv ^aQS^ov- Taiv TlEifft^uv i. 1. 1 1. *ilj Ifjiou ovv iovros, • • ovrat t^v 'yveCft.Tjv t^trEj [as if then I should go, so have your opinion] be assured, then, that I shall go, i. 3. 6. "EXsys ^et^pitVj us Kcc TovSe xXuouffccv oTxrof JP,Rrh . Cho. 410. "T^io-Ti fAoi B-^eta-os, . • xXuavffetv Soph. El. 479. *H^r» [= tificuv, § 412] S' aurs xecre»Xdff^ij i^iXov viro^, ^sktxvtuv ipSoyyov i, 256, For other examples see § § 344, 459, 627, 639. fl. "AxXat re r^o-^eo vrti^a.ira.vrgSt •««J ^>;;i;ai'^y ir^air^yayov 111. iv. 100. 01 (TTPCCTtjyo) IffTccvioiZaVj KXiiivuQ ftlv xoit ^^vylerxof ■ygoj Siu^jjv ^ouXof^tyat eiyitv . . • TifActffiuv ^\ v^oh^v [AiTr.o vii. 2. 2. *flf tv^oi vavs "»?* w^ao-cri 396 VERBAL IN -liog. PARTICLE. [bOOK III. nuirx, « Jii ri (piiynv, « aXXy ia-iirX 6ot/, to (cf §§ 1 50, 322) ; as, OuXu/im^i'it A. 425 (cf. U^os "OXv/iTs, 420). "Ax«. Js A. 308 (cf El's ciXx 314). "Ai'SasSs [= £j if^'i 'ra Sqtj lb. 22. Kara ^ttXvS^txv ufixou Yu. CH. 6.] PREPOSITION. 399 2. 28 'Tr avra Tx Tsixi »y"» Cyr. v. 4. 43. — (i.) Of Specification (§ 437). Actftv^a. xiti xxT* of^fta xai ^vfftv Soph. Tr. 379. Kara yvai/mr %s Id. CEd. T. 1087. ^ G50« Notes, a. It is common to explain many of the uses of the cases mentioned in Ch. I. by supplying prepositions ; when, in reality, th» connection of the cases with tlie prepositions is rather to be explained, as above^ by reference to these uses, and to the principles on which they are founded In many connections the preposition may be either employed or omitted, a/ pleasm'e ; as, "flo-srsj Ys rts ayaX^irxi Wi ^so/rsCita . ., otlrej M.$va/v ^yaXXsr ru i^a^aTav ^uvuffffai ii. 6. 26. Ka) x^ecuy^ ^roXXw WiS-ffiv i. 7. 4. 2yv tas lb. 761. ^5 v5 !.• y. In the connection of the preposition with its case, we are to consider not only the force of the preposition in itself, but also that of the case with which it is joined. Thus ?nt^x denotes the relation of side or near- ness ; and with the Gen., it signifies from the side of, or from ; with the Dat., at the side of, or beside, near, with ; with the Ace, to the side of, or to. E. g. Tawra oixoviravTls, on ou tpotiji 'jrai^a ^et^iXiec ^o^svstr0ai, i^'^viirccv • sra^a Si Ssyiou xaj YLecffiuvos vXsiotJi rj oiff^iXiot, XtuSovTis ra. o^Xa Ktxi tx crxivO' ^o^a, ttrr^xToviOEuraVTo •7'flSf a ^X&xq^&i i. 3. 7. , , S. An elliptic use of the adjective after a preposition deserves notice ; thus, *lXa^at ^e oivTi CKuS^&iTuv [sc. yvyxtxuv, or = avr) TotJ ai/ras eTvcti ffKvioia- woys] flrav, xa) avri iitpo^cufiivuv Eaurajj ijdicits aXXnXas iu^uv, they were cheerful instead of [being] downcast, ^c-, Mem. ii. 7. 12. '£| ixS'iur iiZi^'" 'iioiiirxi ^Ut Soph. Tr. 284. E. The omission of the preposition with the second of two substantives having a similar construction will be observed, not only after a conjunction, but also in the case of the relative, in the questions and answers of a dialogue, &c. ; as, *A5ro re raJv vteHv xa) Tm yni H. Gr. i. 1. 2. 'Ew tu ^^ovm, u bf^Zv axaua/ Symp. 4. 1 (cf. 'Air' ixtivov yet^ .E/'ayf jj onr^iXtot i. 3. 7, *E6aai xa) (ia^Ga^txa/s xat '^XXiivtxius i, 8. 1, Eemakks. 1. By like parts of a sentence are meant words and phrases of like construction, or performing like offices in the sentence, and which united by conjunctions form compound subjects, predicates, adjuncts, &c. Some con- nective adverbs also may sometimes be regarded as uniting hke parts of a sen- tence. 2. Like parts of a sentence are commonly, but not necessarily, of the same part of speech and of similar form. In many cases, it seems to be indifferent whether we regard a conjunction as connecting like parts of a sentence, or (sup- plying an ellipsis) as connecting whole sentences. ^ CH. 6.] CONJUNCTION, CONCLUDING REMARKS. 401 3. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word or phrase in it; thus, n^aff-CaXXoytri . . xetrctXiVovris atpo^ov to7s ^oXi/^ioi;, si (ioU' XfliVTfl (psvytiv iv. 2. 11. § 655. 4. A twofold construction' is sometimes admissible, accord ing as a word is regarded as belonging to a compound part of a sentence, or to a new sentence ; thus, Tlkouina/ri^&> fih olvj si Iir6)(p^avsi5, ^ l^aJ l^i'Savs Cyr, viii. 3. 32. 'E» ^nvori^aiy tj roiuvlt itrathirixv Th. vii. 77. ToT; Ss via»T£^ois xai ^SXAov KK/iAd^at/ffiVy « lyof [sc. ax^wa^w], ^ot^aivai Isocr. 188 a. 'l^fiuv Ss «/*£(Vov, vi \x.i7)/otf TO jttfiXXov iTgofl^w^evwv Dem. 287. 27. Ouaaf^ov ya.^ Iffriv 'Ayojarav *K6tiva.7ov ^yc&i^ u ^ctffvQovXov Lj'S. 136.27. 'E|£- ffTi S-', aff^sp '^yiXo^oSf nftTv xiystv Ar. Ran. 303. 5. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admissible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms are some- times blended. See §§ 461. 3, 609, 619. N., 628. 6. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be employed in English ; e. g., when tto^vs is followed by another adjective ; as, TlaXXa n Koi Etr/T^jSs/a ^nXiyovro V. 5. 25. ^650. 7. The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often employ the more generic for the more specific connectives (§ 330. 1), or instead of other forms of expression; as, 'Ex^av^ave • tr^o^h Sb ^Xiiav « 9-(x&i <^a^iffri ftoi^ ' [and] for I have more leisure,' ^sch. Pr. 817. Tuyx^^t^ te xX«^^' awacwa- ffTou trwXs)? ^etXa/ra, :tcti fis (pSoyyo; oikbiou xeixou (iaXXu ot ^reov, ' jUSt as I am drawing the bars, there strilies,* Soph. Ant. 1186. Katl ^'^« t' 'h Iv ru t^'itm ffTctSfiZy xet) 'K.u^itro^os ccuto/ l^etXf:ra.y0fi iv. 6. 2. ^v^ of/.ciCi}5 '^n-TToirixa.a'i, xou "OfAvi^os (cf. § 400), tJmf have not composed in the same manner [and] as Homerj or with Homer, PI. Ion, 531 d (cf., in Lat., similis atque^ &c.). Note. The student will not fail to remark, — (a) The frequent use, in the Epic, of Se for yag, and in general of coordination in the connection of sentences, for subordination. — (6) The frequent use of yd^ in specification, where we should use that, namely., now, &c. ; as, Ta/Ss SJJ>.flv viv * rj) ftXv yu^ ^^otrhv «^6- ^a . . ixiXivi ii. 3. 1* D. CoNCLyciNG Remarks. § 637. I. In Greek, as in other languages, the different classes of particles often blend with each other in their use. Thus, («.) adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ; (/J.) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad- verbs ; (;'.) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as a conjunction, or as a connective and a non-connective ad- verb. E. g. ». For examples, see §§ 347, 349, 372. y, 394, 399. — Horn, uses siW and tffca as protracted forms for tU • thus, "Ayys/Xow . . "XXtov tiirw XI. 145 (cf. E;V *lA;ay 143). *Aya.yi^ffiv etrat xXiirjtiv fl. 155. ^. ''H /im xtXeurx, xx^riSmv^u n v^is [sc. cauTai], ' in addition to tliis,' 'besides,' jEsch. Pr. 73. !!{« V in iii. 2. 2. 'E» i't [sc. rdrois], and mean- while. Soph. (Ed. T. 27. .S4* 402 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [bOOK III y. Kufov Se (conjunction) ^£To!T£^ir£Ta; . .• xai (rr^tcrnyl^ ^\ (adverb) au- vh a^i^tt^t i. 1. 2. *ns Sf vuv %x^'' A^^^etov, s/, aiof^svot Iv t« 'EAX«5/ xai STa/vflW xa) T/^?f Tsu^EfT^a;, auT; Se tovtoiv ovh' of^oioi rots a.X\oi5 lffo[/.iSa. VI. o. 16. 2»^ai'»eTs» Se Toi' '2ruiJ!.:poiXm, y.x) (conjunction) 2? and the Inf. instead of another mode (§ 629. 2). This construction is less Attic. §658. II. Both adverbs, and prepositions with their cases, are often used substantively. An adverb and a preposi- tion governing it are often written together as a compound word. Thus, ^Orav Se rovrtnv aXis ^x^"^^' ^"^ when you have had enough of this, v. 7. 12. Eis fih ol^ct^ xcti Pi^xxvv x^°'"'^' f^^ ^'^^^ ^^ ^ short time, Dem. 21. 1. E/V iZv PI. Tim. 20 b. ^ixs' i'-rxuia v. 5. 4. Tl^i'rxXxi Ar. Eq. 1155. "E/i- rr^oirhv iii. 4. 2. Ha^xuriKa Cyr. ii. 2. 24. '"Hv . . usrgj nfiuru -rod oXou ffT^KTEvf^aTo; 'A^xa^ss, above half of the whole army were Orcadians, vi. 2. 10. AtTsT aiiTov sU ^itrxtXiavs ^svovs i. 1. 10. 'E» rm afi(p} ravs [iu^tovs V. 3. 3. SwiS^a/iAov us us l^raxoiTiovs H. Gr. iv. 1. 18. ^uvuXsyf^csvaiv sis t«p ^ukhv sreg/ ivraxoirioi/s lb. ii. 4. 5. ^639. III. One preposition or adverb is often used for another (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by reason of something associated or implied. This construction is termed, from its elliptic expressiveness, construetio prmg- nans. Thus, a.) A PREPOSITION of motion for one of rest, 01 \» rns ayo^as . . 'iipvyov [ex for iv, by reason of 'itpvyov following], tltose in the jnarket fled [from it], i. 2. 18. Ai ^£ wjyat auTod iitriv ix tmv fioLffiXi'ioiv lb. 7. 'Atpixvovvrxi tuv ix Tou x^^'otJ r^us civ^^ss V. 7. 17. Tor^ Ix TluXov XtitphTri, those taken at Pylus and brought thence, Ar. Nub. 186. 01 d.'^o ruv xaratrT^cdfLBtruv rots dxavrt- ots . . £;(^^&'vrfl Th. vii. 70. E/j livayxTjv Kiif/.iSa, we have come into necessity, and lie iliere, Eur. Iph. T. 620. 'Ev Ss r^ v^s^CoXti ruv o^m ruv us ro vrttiov, i. 2. 25. /S). A PREPOSITION of rest for one of motion. 'Ew AtvxciSict dvjtffuv [iv for us, to imply that they were still there], had gone to Leueadia, or were absent in L., Th. iv. 42. 0/ S' ev ru 'Hfa/s* xa.ra,^iipiuy'oris (cf. E/'s 1\ ro "Hga/ov x«- Tttpvyov) H. Gr. iv. 5. 5. 'Ew ro/ ^orttfic^ sTTurav Ag. 1. 32. y.) An ADVERB of motion for one of rest, TSv h^a^iv [for htoy'] ris eifftvty. Karoi Ar. Plut. 228. Mira/xsjff'/j rov ro'TTOv rev UHvSi us ecXXov rovav PL CH. 6.] ELLIPSIS. 403 Apol. 40 c. Ilor xxxZv i^ni/,ia.v tS(a ; ' Wliither can I go to find ? ' Eur. Here. 1157. S.) An ADVERB of rest for one of motion. "Osrou [for oVw] fiiStixiv, olSs/s otie, no one knows where [for whither] he has gone. Soph. Tr. 40. Tia.nra.x''' vrfiiTQivifafjt.iv At. Lys. 1230. '^660. IV. In the doctrine of particles, especially con- nectives, the figures of syntax hold an important place ; thus, A. Ellipsis. Ellipsis here consists either (a.) in the omission of the par- ticles themselves, or (/5.), far more frequently, in that of words, and even whole sentences, connected or modified by them. «. Among the particles most frequently omitted are copu- lative and complementary conjunctions (§ 329. N.) ; as, TLoSov iTflsTg/Sa/v, yovlaiVf yvietiKuv, •gaitaiv iii. 1. 3. "E;^;£iS ^oXiv, e;^^'^ T^irj^ttij 'i)C-'^ XZ^f'^'^'^t ^X^'^ avS^aff roffovrovs vii. 1. 21. OyVs ■^XtvSvtpti^ oa- fjLov5 •^^offi'iKou; ^trav, oh [for tiuri\ ^vXov^y'tocv iEsch. Pr. 450. ^Oft.vvu lifMV S-iovs ■xa-ira.i xai ■jrxs'ast [sc. ort] n^f^tTiv . . \Suo{im vi. 1. 31. *A. 3.) With as, especially in expressing comparison, design, pretence, possibility, &c. ; as, ©mttov jj [sc. eurtu vu.^] ws ris av c^iro, quicker than [so quick as] one would have thought, i. 5. 8. MiiZcm tiynrkfuvot i7mi Si 404 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [bOOK III. us W) Uturi^as rhv ^cc^eta-Kivvv, thinhing that the preparation was greater than [so great as] it would be against the I^tsidiuns, i. 2. 4. B^a^vri^a. viKOvri^ovy »i as i^iKviTff^on, hurled [a shorter distance than so as to reach] too short a dis- tance to reach, iii. 3. 7. ^^(pdvn xovia^ros, ala-9ri^ vt^iXn Xey«« !• 8. 8. 'ils t'ts f^^xm •^u^iffKiucfffffiivost aiTayed as [he would array] for battle, lb. 1. Ewixa^cTTEv, a/s lit ttUKXutriv lb. ^3. ^l^tvyov^tv dva. k^uto; a>s w^off "Tfiv et-ro^ Tou ^orctfiov 'iK^ectTiv iv. 3. 21. 'A^^oi^iij us £t) rovrous i. 2. 1. "il^'^z^ o^y^t ixi),.iufft i. 5. 8, 'Xlf Ik TbJy vrot^ovrwv [sc. i^uva.vro'}, ^vvra^ofitvoi Th. vi. 70. KfigarouvT/o/, a>s av xa.) lu^ecxoTEs to ^ctp* IccvtoTs 'JT^ayfAU, oiltrccvrtSt the Cera- simtians alarmed^ as they would natwalbj be having seen what had happened among themselves, v. 7. 22. 'Hj SwJ to iroXv, as things are for the most part, commonly, iii. 1. 42. See §§ 410, 525. a, 640. Notes, (a.) From the frequent use of us with the accusative after verbs of motion to express the purposed end of the motion (■^ 429), it came at last to be regarded as u. mere preposition, supplying the place of tr^ac or e/?, but chiefly before names of persons ; as, no^aJsra/ us {ienriKm, goes to the king, i. 2. 4. (6.) Tls is often used to render expressions of quantity less positive; as, "J^^uv [sc. oilrof cToXXovs'] us wevTxxQirloas, having such a number as 500, i. e. about 500, i. 2. 3. § 6G3a 4.) With adversative conjunctions, with which we must some- times supply the opposite of that which has preceded ; as, Kec) fith fi' ecTifAov TjJirS* d-PTOffTsiXi^Ti yt^Si dXX.' d^p^^iTXovTov xa) xitraa'T£CT9]v ^o/zuv [sc. Se^atr^i] Soph. El. 71. E/ f/Xv (iovX&Tutf ti^iro) • tJ S' [sc. fih fiov>.BTai], o n {iovXireHf TovTo •^oisiru PI. Euthyd. 285 c. 5.) With «, before which there is sometimes an ellipsis of ftuXkov • as, Zjj- Toucrt xi^^cttvziv [sc. fAccXXov]^ n iiftcis ^bi^biv Lys. 171. 8. T^v r^s Vfun^us sToXicus Tupi^yiv av iXoifiTjv, . . ») Trjv Ixtlvov Dem. 24. 16. See § 466. 6.) With conditional conjunctions ; as, E/ fih eru ti 'ix^'^t " M^SofraSsf, W^S vif^eis Xiyiiv [sc. Xsyi S»i] • e/ Se fiij [sc. i'.^tTl'f], Vi^i7s v^os a\ 'i^of^^v vii. 7. 15. Ei'rE aXXo Ti B-iXoi x^nc^eti, t'lT scr' A'/yu-rrov (tt^cctivhv, ffvyxecTtx,- ffT^typatvr a.v uvr^ ii. I. 14. Ka) vuv, av fAv o Ky^oj (^ovXijTai [xaXws s;^;;s/] • tl Sfi fiTi, ufitTs yi T7]v Ta;^;(VTj)v Tcc^tcrTi Cyr. iv. 5. 10. "Kxaiov xa,} X'^^^ ^"""^ il Ti aXXo x^^"''/^"^ M'' [sc. 'ixotiov tovtoI \. 6. 1 (e'Z tis so used is equivalent to oirris). 0/ Zl aXXoi d.-ruXovro V'TQ ts tuv rroXtfiiuv xa) X'°^°^» **' ^'^ "^'^ votrco V. 3. 3, 'ETE/Vovra, -TrXhv I'l tis ti 'ixXi^iv iv. 1. 14. Eyvo/ ncav, TXyjv xa- Soffov ti TTiv "StxiXiav movto ahrovs ^ovXuffi(rSai Th. vi. 88. "AxXot f^tvioueri . . ■ tl oi xa) avTo) [sc. oh fitvioutri}, ^tvyovraiv I. 45. E/ S' ayi [=_8i S^ (iouXti, ayi, but if you will, come'\ A. 302, and often in Hom. Note. When two similar clauses are connected, a pronoun, preposition, or other word is sometimes (chiefly by the poets) omitted in the first clause, and, for the sake of emphasis or the metre, or by reason of other ellipses, inserted in the second; as, Zuy^u, 'At^eo? vU, ffvV a^ia Vi^ai ci^otva Z. 46. 'E« XluXou a^u afiuvTo^as • •, « oyi xa) "S-^a^Tijhv j3. 326. See § 650. /3. B. Pleonasm. § 004. Under this head we remark, 1.) The redundant use of negatives. This appears chiefly, a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all regularly combined with a negative ; as, OSTrort i^iT obtiis i. 3. 5. Ou^iv) cvoafti} ouhafius ovtifA,iav xoivuviav '^x^' ^^' P^^'Hi. 166 a. CH. 6.] PLEONASM. 405 /3.) In divided construction ; as, Ovx a.}ff^vviffh otlrs S-say? our a,v6^ai^ovs li. 5. 39. MflSsi* TsXsirej ftnrs t/x,o) ^jJte ^XXoif vii. W^* ^" y^S tariv 'dims «v^gons. ivtxa Th. viii. 92. Ti'vo? Va x'^i** 'ivtxa Pi. Leg. 701 d. See §§ 461. 3, 609. u, 619. N.. 628, 655. 5. C. Attraction. §66 8. The influence of attraction sometimes passes even beyond a connective ; as, Ou^Ei' yi uXXo \ffr)vt ov i^aJinv oi xv^^co-^oi, ti tou ayct^ou [for to a.yaSov through the attraction of ay] PI. Conv. 205 e. 'H^iouvj A't-^r^tov ftXv (ih oi-ro- 'hovvai (cot/f Aa.xi^aifiov'iovi), u fi?} (iouXovrcci * avccScivTis [for ocvoiQeivrats, by attraction to the subject of (ioijXovTO!.i'\ Ts . ., a,-ffof^o(ra.i Th. v. 50. 'E^^ox^a- rous Kdt II TOU aXXov •^u^ovruv (see § 663. 6) Th. vii. 21. See § 627. 2. D. Anacoluthon. " § 660. Anacoluthon is frequent in the connection of sen, tences. The clause completing the construction is often either omitted or changed in its form. Hence, also, the regular cor- respondence of particles is sometimes neglected. Thus, 'Vis yoi^ iy&> • • nxova-d tivos, oti ^Xiavd^o; o l» ^u^avTtou ocof^oerThs /iciXXii ^^Siv [for wj Tjxouira., K.Xiecy^^os ^sXXsv, or nxeuffcty oti KAsavS^o; jceEXXs/] vi. 4. 18. 'A.vh^ o§' a; 'iotxiv ou vifittv [for iws 'iaixsy, ou vtfiiiy OV toixiv eu vifciTvj Soph. Tr. 1238. 'AxXa. f^hv, — ■e^iw ya^ xat Tavree, l^ eSv 'ix^ IX'^'idag, xai erl (iovX^crtcrPcii (p'lXov vifiTv uvai • ——■ oi^a fi\v yd^ [for aXXa. f^hv, l^Si ya.^, fliSa, or fflXXi fx.'/iv l^oj • otto, yd^l ii. 5. 12. See iii. 2. 11. Twk Ss 'A^yivcti&iv 'irux^ ya.^ rT^iff^ziOi •T^'ori^ov iv ri? Aaxioct'ifiovi te^I aXXsjv Ta^ovaot, xa.) . . 'i'So^iv CLvrot; Th. i. 72. Ou* eV^' Ti f^aXXoVj Z av$^zs 'A^jjvosra/, cT^SiTE/ outu?^ as Tov TOiouTov avS^oJ In Tl^VTavsico o-iTiiff^ui [for Ti ftZXXov erasers;, ?;, or a Ti •JT^i'Tll OUTUS^ Ofs] PI. ApOl. 36 d, ElOOTES OUX CC.V OfiOIOJS dUV71^£VT£S, XO.) £1 Ix TCifv MiZv 'pr^o; •Toi.^zffKtuaa-fAivQVs IxSiSd^otiv, 'h [for xou £/'] xccTa ytjv tovris yva>ffhi>]. 'E.], there come heralds; the 7-est barbarianSt but [there was] one of them Phalinus, u Greeks ii. 1. 7. See i. 10. 12. Tlet^nfitsXaw ovtes civroixof CH. 6.] ANACOLUTHON. COMBINATIONS. 407 otlrs ya^ . . ^thovTts [for oSr& SiSavTS?, 01* oSn ya^ ihttoffocv. The construction might be made regular by repeating ira^»i^£>.oyv] Tb. i. 25. See ^ 641, /3. ^GTl. V. The Greek especially abounds in combina- tions of particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of particles. The use of these sometimes extends farther than their origin and structure would strictly warrant. A few ex- amples of these combinations and phrases are given below, but the subject in its details belongs to the lexicographer rather than the grammarian. 1. uXXoi yaQf xa) ya^, SCO § 661. 2. 2. aXX* ^ ^from ceXXg ^' or o^XXos n\j other tharif except; as, ^A^yv^iov /Av ovK 6;^A'» aXX' n fnK^av Tt vii. 7. 53. Oi)txf*ov . ., aXX' tj ko.t «UTijv t^v oSo» iv. 6. 11. 3. aXXus Ts xa/, hoth otherwise and in particular^ especially ; as, Oiihh vo- fii^eo avogi, aXXats te xa.) a^^ovrtj KO^XXTdv tivat xvijftec vii. 7. 41. 4. S^Aov art, it is evident that ^ evidentli/j ili oTS' oriy o7^* oTt, ffciia. 'iXKit Ar. Nub. 232. 11. oh fAivroi dxXxj oh f^viv dxxdj yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless, or nay rath* er; as, '0 ^-r^og •x-'i^ni zU yovArxy xcci fiix^ou xdxzTyov i^ZT^x^nXifftv • ov uviv dxx' l^ifisiviv }£.u^os Cyi\ i. 4. 8. 12. oux on, fih on, ov^ offov, ovx o'^e»s, /xh oVw?, oux otov, I do not say that, not to say that, &c., i. e. not only, or not only not (the three first phrases usu- gjly mean not only, and the three last not only not) ; as, Oh^ on fiovos o K^/- Tofv lit « 4. 8 ; and, OS-rt^ avros trtxa 1. 9. 21. 4. A particle is sometimes placed in one clanse which belongs more strictly to another (cf. §616); as, Otix* tT^ at u srurm/ii [foT oTi*, e/ ^uffaifA sr] Enr. Med. 941. 5. In emphatic address, the sign a is sometimes placed as follows ; *E;E€a; 5 ^amcTXTn Soph. Aj. 395. 0au/i,in' u 'K^irat PL Euthyd. 271 c. Tl/ut ^ri Z Tgis Alt! Milun Id. ApoL 25 u 35 BOOK IV. PROSODY. JLschylus, Eumen. , /AavUstvu (^§ 290); xXtvo) (§269); aXytvaj, oSv^o/zai (§ 270). But tKava (§ 292), r'ta, f^f»« Ep., fUtm Att. (§ 278). ii.) In the liquid Fut, and in the 2d Aor. (§ 255. t), the doubtful vowels are short, but in the liquid Aor., and in the 2d P«r/'., they are hng ; thus, xj?- sai, wXyval, i'xgrva, tTXHva (^ 56) J JXct^av, i6tyov, lcrOffif.tnv (§ 290) ; Ecrayjjv, i/uym, e^wyjjv (§ 294); XiXoLkx, x'sx^Tytx, /Ai/iDxa (§ 236. 2). — Except 2 A. lay>i» (§ 294 ; Att. a, Ep. commonly a). See, also, § 236. E. C. Derivation. ^685. Rule IV. Derivatives follow the quantity of their primitives. This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives. In applying the rule, observe § 307. E. Thus, S-n^xu, F. ^vi^mu, Pf. P. rM^S/ixi ■ S-njan. fiag, 3-Jj^a/ia, 9->jjar»];, ^n^drds • v^oSvf^os (wgo, ^S/Aoi), 'ivrifios (gv, tT^jj). Notes, (a) For the quantity of the different terminations of derivation, see ^ 62, §§ 305 — 321. For T paragogic, see § 150. y. The iinal / in com- pound adverbs (§ 321. c) is likewise sometimes long. (4) For the lengthen- ing of an initial vowel in the second part of a compound, see § 326. R. In some compounds, a is lengthened without passing into « ; as, Xoxxyis (.xi^'s, "ay at). D. Dialect. § 6 8 G. The Doric « for rj is long ; and a, where the Ionic uses ij, is commonly long (§ 44. 1). See also § 47. ' E. Authority. §©87. For doubtful vowels which are long, and which are not determined by the rules already given, observe the usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the lexicons. Among the most familiar examples are "arjj, destruction, ot^^o;, follower, f(ppdy%, seal, r^d^^s, rough, ipXvd^os, talkative, etixtu, outrage, ' avtot (^'t'), grief, aKplQ'/ls, exact, a^%9i, axe, Sju?), whirlpool, xafcTvos, oven, xlv'tai, to move, »x1v>j, bed, Xifios, hunger, /jlIk^cs, small, vjKtt, victory, ofitXo^, crowd, trry^, silence, ^a- XTvoi, bridle, ccyxS^a, anchor, ysfij^a, bridge, euduyti, account, Ir^v^'os, strong, xivSuvos, danger, Xysrjj, grief, ''X^> soul. 35* 414 QUANTITY. [book IV. Note. VowoIb, whose quantity is not dotormlnod by goneial or epecial rules, are said to bo long or sliort by authority, i. o. tlio authority of tho posts. II. Local Quantity. § 688. Rule V. A vowel before two con- sonants or a double consonant is long (^^ 61, 677. N.) ; as in o^ya|, IXni^ovTS? [idij). Note. This rulo of position holds, when either one or both of tho conso- nants are in the same word with the vowol ; and commonly, also, when both consonants or the double consonant begin the next word. § 689. Exception. When tho two consonants arc a mute followed hy a liquid in the same simple word, the quan- tity of the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic po- etry. Notes. 1. This exception results from tho easy flowing together of the mute and liquid, so tliat they produce the effect of only a single consonant. 2. In the Att., the quantity of tho vowel is commonly not aW^ctod, if tho mute is amooth or roughs or, if middle^ is followed by g. A middle mute ful- lowed by any liquid except f commonly renders tho vowel long. Thus, tho penult is regularly short in iriwXof, Texvay, ^or/aotf ^t^^axf^et, yici^X*;, Mi^tJ^' y^otf ^a^ii'S^a • and long in ffr^lZXct, ecyvog, 3. According to Person, the tragic poets sometimes leave a vowel short be- fore the two liquids /iv. ^ 690. Remark. A -short vowel is sometimes length- ened iefore a single consonant or another vowel, esprjcially in Epic poetry. This occurs chiefly in the following cases ; 1.) When the consonant maybe regarded as dovJikd in pronunciation. Thlg appUes especially to tho liquids, and in tho case of these (chiefly initial f, cf. §-64. 1) sometimes extends even to Attic poetry ; as, AloXcu [as if -axx-"] X. 36, Jr nipnf A. 274, -rcXXiC Xirirc/iivn E. 3.'58, iftf ytfoti Soph. (M. T. 847, i/LtyS fixii JEsch. Pr. 1023. 2.) When the dipamma (§ 22. J) has been dropped ; as, yite 'Um [Fiht, §§ 142. 4, 143. /3] 1.419, x'v i xint X. 42, w^sV clxct [FcTxn} I. 147.— Epic usage appears to have been variable in runpect to the digamma. It some- times appears to have had the force of a consonant, and sometime? only that of a breathing. 3.) Before a masculine caaura ('j 699. 4), and sometimes, without a cajsura, by the mere force of the araia (§ 69.5) ; as, Svofi& • Ollny i. 366, iirS* 'iim Z. 62, i^si^fy *. 283, 'UtamrSi ill J. 309, SmyxrU/l lit E. 871, V lXS«ri A. 342. Note. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short between two long syllables, and a short syllable at tho beginning; of a lino, must of necessity be made long. Tho second cose sometimes occurs in tho theaie (§ 69.5). Thus, 'a«»ii.o6t Ttirpif. A. 30. TTss, i ftlv KtsktsB, i V a;' Eufursi! 'Axro^imos. B. 621. 2. This rule does not apply to the Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama, as there the hiatus is not alloTied. 3. A long vowel or diphthong is sometimes shortened before another vowel, in the middle of a word;. as, %it,^a,tov ». 379, oTas (o)') N. 275, roloZras Soph. Ph. 1049, 'SsiXxUs Ar. Pint. 850. See also § 150. y. 4. Some explain this shortening by supposing the long vowel («, a, = ei, m, § 29. or _„„_w-_w- _)• Note. In versification, the elementary combinations of syllables are termed FEET ; regular combinations of feet, verses (versus, a turn) ; and regular combinations of verses, stanzas, strophes (^irr^iiipri^ turning round), or SYS- TEMS (§ 700). § 09S>. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is termed aksis {ugaig, elevation), •while the alternate weaker tone is termed thesis {S-dais, depression). These terms are also applied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. In the exhibition of metres, the arsis (also termed metrical ictus) is marked thus ( ' ). Notes, a. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substi- tution of J, ^ for j_ in the arsis, and of _ for ^ ^ in the thesis, may be made without afiecting the rhythm. In this way, as the short syllables have more vivacity, ease, and lightness, and the long syllables, more gravity, dig- nity, and strength, the poet has the power of greatly varying the expression of the verse ; while, at the same time, the facihty of versification is very much increased. S. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot receives the ictus upon thej^rst syllable ; while, in Iambic and Anapaestic verse, every foot receives it upon the second^ except the anapaest and proceleusmatic, which receive it upon the third. § 696. In the series j_„„^„„X"-5 the thesis is equal in time to the arsis (§ 676), and the rhythm is termed equal or quadruple (_ ^ „ = 4 breves) ; but in the series j_ ^ _L ^ _L ^, the thesis is half the arsis, and the rhythm is termed triple (_ ,., ^ 3 breves). Re&iarks. 1. Of these, the former is the more stately in its movement, and the more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed from common discourse ; while the latter has more nearly the movement of common conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds of verse, and to dialogue. 2. Not only do the equal and triple rhythms differ from each other in ex- cH. a.] RHYTHM. FEET. 417 pression; but the same rhythm has a different expression, according as it commehces mth the arsis or the thesis. In the former case {^Dactylic j_ ^ ^ I J. ^ _ I _!^ , , and Trochaic _L „ I J- - | _L _)) the movement, passing from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and vivacity ; in the latter (Anapcestic __J_|_„_l|„„J_i and Iambic ^ ,i | L | _ J-)i the movement, passing from the lighter to the heavier, has more decision, em- phasis, and strength. 3. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, or by prolonging the thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling the arsis, we obtain the rhythms, ^_L_L.,J._L„J._L-^> ^^^ ^ ^ J. -L ^ .^ _i_ J ^ „ J. JL ^- Of these, the first, according to its division into feet (§ 697), is Cretio j l|_L^_l|j.-^J.. Bacchic ^ _L. _L | ^ _L J. | i_ J_, or Antibacchio J._L„|j.j! 1_LJ_^; and the second, Chori- ambic _L„„J.|_L„ l|j..-.^-Li Antispastio . lj l^-t. J-w \ ^ J_ j_ ^, Rising Ionic ^ . L_!.|. L J- \ ^ ^ J- J-' "'' Falling Ionic ! ^|j_J_„,^l_LJ.^„' Verses, in which the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logacedic {knyaniiixis, from Xiyos, discourse, and aaiSvi, sang; see Rem. 1 above). The most irregular kindi of verse are termed poly- schematist {^^o>^vif^nfji,oirnrros, multiforni) and asynartete (uffuvd^rtiras, disjointed), § 697. Feet of the same metrical length are termed isochronous (laoxQovog, of equal time). In the table of feet below, the measure of Class I. is two breves ; of Class II., three ; of Class III., four, &c. I, Huffixi's, Pyrrhic, w w f^ln. II. 'IxfiSas, Iambus, Iamb, , f^ivat. T^o^a7ogj 'X.o^uoij Trochee, Choree, _ ^ fiijxos- T^ie^aXt'S, Tribrach, w- - fiiVOfitV* m. C^aKrvXoSf Dactyl, ^ daitr 6Tt. *Av«fraiirrflf, Anapaest, w — _ y'i^a). SsTflvSera?, Spondee, ira^a. 'Alt-fii^xX^vs, Amphibrach, eSwxsi', Tl^oKtXtvff^ariKos, Proceleusmatie, _s^-- Xeyfljasvof. IV. *A.fiv. Air^ox,xiti;, Ditroehee, „ ,^ eciVio'aiTB. 'la/yixos a.^0 fi.u^BU5y Falling Ionic, ^ ^ ^QvXtmri, *lcavtKSS ocjr ikaffffoyoSj Rising Ionic, ^ ^ IhX^irti, "Hlo^iirAsj Molossns, (/.vvi and nh ai, which are always pronounced as one syllable. — (d) In some other combioations in which the first word is », n, pi, IWi, or lyd • as, /^h iiSimi Ear. Hipp. 1335, lya iifb Soph. Ph. 585. 3. Hums. Hiatus between words was admitted the most freely in Epic poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of the di- gamma (§ 22. S). It was the most stndionsly avoided in Attic poetry, es- pecially in the Tragic Trimeter (§ 712), where it was scarce allowed, except after the interrogative ri, and some interjections, or words used in exclama- tion ; as, 0? iya 1 iyu ! .^Gsch. Ag. 1257. § 7 O 3. 4. In the following exhibition of metres, the division of feet win be marked by a single bar ( I) ; the division of dipodies by a double bar (II ) ; and the verse-csesura by an obelisk ( t ). sometimes doubled ( t ). A base is denoted by B. In the examples which are ^ven, the accents and breathings are mosliy omitted, that they may not interfere with the marks of quantity ; and these marks are employed alike to denote the metrical quan- tity, whether natural or local. Hence the common syllable at the end of a line (§ 692) is marked according to the rhythm in which it occurs. Some examples are added of analogous metres in our own language. A. Dactylic Veese. § 703. The place of the fundamental dactyl, is often sup- plied by a spondee (_ ^ ,., = ). § 704:. I. The common Hexametee or Hekoic Verse consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spondees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a spondee. Eemabks. 1. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spmdaic, and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables. 2. The favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim, which is almost equally masculine and feminine (§ 699, 4). After this, the most frequent cse- suras are the masculine hephthemim, and the pastoral (§ 699. 5). — Even when the penthemim is not the principal verse-caesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot-caesura. It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines have the masc. penthemim, 315 have the fem., and only 6 have neither. 36 422 VEKSIFICATION. [book IV. 1. 2. 3. 4. Z.^- ^-w ^t^ + _ ^+„ / , f / + Scheme aso Examples. _ _ + AXkci xx\xa>s 'a^/lir.t »^aTt\^oy S' Vcrl' j ftu^ov "tlrsX^^sv. A. 25. '^TEfifioiT 'c|;^;&Ji' *rv I ^i^ffYv f '/Ix^foXow I 'AcroXJX&Ji'of. A. 14. Ar xfv I era's 'aglvaiv Kyi(r\fftis f arly&iv te" TflXer&iw. A. 66. H'TflJ" *oy* I *ais irlwcwv xar* 'ag | 'f^^fTC ■ j| ToTiri S* 'a\vEffTii. A. 68. Bm ds" xotT* OyXy/«(ir(!ro xalgjji'ftiv, "fj ^uifAS\vos xtJQ. A. 44. Coleridge s " Someric Sexameter Described and Exemplified." Strongly it | be&s us alldng f in I swelling and I limitless 1 billows, Ndtliing belfdre and I nothing be|hind, f bnt the | sky and the I <5cean. ^ 705. II. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two dactylic penthemims {^ 699. 4), the first containing two dac- tyls or spondees with a cassural syllable, and the second two dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plain- tive song, the Elegiac Metre. Scheme and Examples. / f _/_ w w '£ivx,^fil\viti f/.oX I kXvSI^ f xa\xsis S* 'atro I xjjga? "al^aXxs". S^r ^fv ! ToiJTOt Bt\cct tl iff^TK^Zvf ilfitoi Si ^r[yiit. Theog. 11 - Described and Exemplified by Coleridge. 'In the Hex|dmeter | rises f the [ fountain's | silvery | column ; 'In the Penlt^meter ] aye fl falling in | melody | back. § yO©. III. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a.) Pure, con- sisting of dactyls only ; (b.) Impure, consisting of dactyls and spondees ; (c.) Molic, containing, in place of the first foot, a mere base (§ 698. p) ; (d.) Logaadic (§ 696. 3), in which dactyls are united with trochees. Thus, 1. DiMETEK. (a.) MSa-To'Solxos iofios. Ar. Kub. 303. (b.) Adonic (_l^« | j )• Tlo'rvtci, j B-Oftdv. Sapph. 1. 4. (b.) Hypercat., Dactylic Penthemim. 'A.>./i.ii\f>T& ■rS\(i'y. J5soh. Sup. 844. 2. Trimeter. (b.) TLoXXx ya.^ \ 'mitt 'xxa\pxvTcs. Soph. Tr. 112. (c). Phereckatic(B. |^„w | J )• "'ExS£|«r fiA.5» ( 'sirof. Find. 0.1. 6. GltconiC. To irov 1 ToT ^a^^l^slyfi 's'x^''7 (B. |_L«^ r_Lw^) Toi* B-QV \ ^aTfzovv, I TOV fftv, '« CH. 2.] DACTYLIC AND A^fAP^STIC VERSE. 42& ^d.) 'Mfrh 'S\^s (fiSlyeTfi "S.V. JEsch. Pr. 907. (a.) Hypercat. IlSf-XS. /3jJ|t<;» im\/iiiS(Sfct\vx. JEseh. Sup. 543. 3. ^TRAMETEB. (a.) Alcmanian. 'MSr, 'ayl, | KiXXnlarei S-Sytelrfj Atls- Alan. (b.) Spondaic. ZeDs trliXv\dvS^os \ ^df^iplt yUlvxixos. ^sch. Ag. 62, (c.) TkBKS\«!K(Sy 'x\/iS;^ei>Sy | "ojtrsTjv. Sapph. 20 (37). (d.) Lessee Axcaic (_!_^v-|^^^|_i_^|_!..-)- Xfuff-oxol^a Z£ipO\^M [jut\yiTiTa.* Ale. 5 (24). (a.) Hypercat. Tail' ^c~^£|a.w ASwUt ' im\x\v)Xfii/,i^\s,i. Soph. Aj. 225. 4. PentAjHetek. (b.) 'ArftrlSKs /c«;ijl'l^(ii!5, f '/Silii h.S.ya^otXTi$, iEseh. Ag. 123. (c.) Orwf, I 'a ^iXg I irar, t A-fys'lraf, xai!' '&|>.s^£«. Theoo. 29. 1. (d.) 'Dr !r8X?;, I 'm yiit\S TaiA.arvse, | »i7v «". Soph. El. 1314. Ili/jipSjoj I "o's TOTf I ^ar»(!^s'|v« liiy | '5{^k. Soph. Ant. 135. Sapphic (j_-|_L;i|i.--|j_-|-Ll). Kar ya.^ [ a.1 (^iO\ylT^ 'Ta,^\Si^ S/jaJ^E)', Ar Si* I ^wg« [ fL^ "hixiT-y I 'aXX& | tufflt. Sapph. 1. 21. I^HAKECIAir (B. I _L _ ^ I _L ^ I i_ „ I _L „ ). Tgy A£riovTt»jWa[;(^av, rov [ 'd^ul;^;grja. TheOC. Ep. 20. 5. Hexameter. (_a.) Ilgos rt yelveraSilf, I 'aJ ^i'A.of, ] 'ai ^SxilfiaHrcirSs \ *"EXXaSj'. Eur. Sup.277. (b.) 'AXX* 'ai j iravrorlaf ipiXolrijrQS *x\fz,slSSfis\vccT ^a^Yv. Soph. El, 134. (c.) K/XSlfictr TivA I Tdv ;^a^t\tyrciM£\yc!ivK xcc\XsirffxT^ Alc.49. (d.) H" 9r»Xa\fia Tivi I rav SycS | Xairo'v 's\x?i rts \ 'aj;^;«v. ^sch. Pr. 165. B. Anap^stic Verse. § TOT. The place of the fundamental anapsest is often supplied by a spondee or dactyl, and sometimes, though very rarely, by a proceleusmatic („„_= z=z - = § 708. I. The Anapsestic, from its strong, even move- ment, was a favorite metre for marching songs ; and it was greatly employed in systems, by the dramatic poets, as inter- mediate between the Iambic of the common dialogue, and the lyric metres of the choral odes. Eemaeks. 1. The general distinction (to omit modifications and excep- tions) was this. The Iambic portions of the drama were spoken while the performers were stationai*y ; the lyric, while they were dancing ; and the Ana- paestic, while they were coming in, or going out, or marching to and fro. 2. These systems are scanned continuously (§ 692. N.), but are usually ar- ranged, so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of this species of verse, the Anap.estic Dimeter). They uniformly close with the dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs {^rx^mftixi), the parcemiac verse (see § 700. 1). The use of the parcemiac, however, is not confined to the close of regular systems. 424 VERSIFICATION. [book IV 3. This verse requires a ccesura after each dipody, except in the parcemiac. This caesura is sometimes deferred, so as to foUoir a short syllable at the begin- ning of the next dipody. 4. In respect to the feet, the following should be observed, (a). An ana- paest must not follow a dactyl in the same dipody, and rarely follows it in sue* cessive dipodies. (i) A dactyl rarely follows an anapsest or spondee in the same dipody. (c) The third foot of the parcemiac is regularly an anapaest ; so that the system may close with the cadence of the common Hexameter. A spondee, however, is occasionally admitted (cf. § 704. 1). Scheme ash Examples. 1. ^ ^ _/_ ./, w Dimeter Acatalectic. 2. 3. _ ^tll _ ^ _X^+ll_i- 4. •L ^^ 1. WW./. ^ w Parcemiac. 2. 3. w w X II - w ^ _ ^ll(- J.) 4. *AxXce If *5 I Mafas til ^Sfji^atlos *Biva% 'S^tV^sTs I xxTiX^v til ^SCi^u\cisf 'fVsr AXyiv, I sTKj' c/io! II 'iiSox^\(mT. Eur. Med. 759. ^iX^ai' I cixis 1 11 aTxT\x7irTy. Msch, Pr. 93. "H^a-r^ j ^S^iXn^WrSs t "£'** '«v I XoTa-jj. Soph. Aj. 146. Though her ^ye | shone out, t || yet the lids | were fiix'd. And the glance | that it gave t II was wild | and unmi'x'd With aught 1 of change, t II ^^ the ^yes | may sedin Of the restlless who walk 1 11 i" a troub|led dr^am. ByrmCs Siege of Corinth, §709. II. The combination of the regular dimeter with the paroemiao (cf. §§ 713, 717) forms the Anap^stic Tetra- meter Catalectic of comedy, also called, from its use by the great master of comic verse, the Aristophanic. 1. WW./. 2. Scheme and Examfi;es. 3. 4. 5. ww.lJI|wwX 6. WW./. 7. Iww/ wwXtJIww^ _ x+ll _ 1. _Awt|l_Xw Ear ^^w I ivUvs y t 11 ^civ^ /SffiXl^Siuv J II m^t rvis | '&^;^^s II 'asfUSsTl^a? T«f 'al/iiTl^as t II 'iHs cvl^sftiiis 1 11 'jfTTan I 'firTlv U ^S.ir1Xu\a,s. Ti" ya-Q gUlSaT^fUi* t II *«** /i^xa.\^Tff,ov\ vVv 'sff\\rt ^xafflroUf *H~ Tg£'^e'|g^Vfi,\9t!!n\\xav. Find. 0. 13. 1. Dim. Hypero. Tote" /isv \ vl^tiraf^/iiToins | xxi "xi'!r\\rSs. Eur. Here. 1018. Trim. Brachyc. Sa" /^"v eVv \ xaTaXiO^vofiSv, '£!i\fAi&^ti |1 xii|To5 'tjliSna ; \ mliv. Eur. Ion, 1447. 3 An., 2 lam. Aoxr^ov [ ^e'v 'aer | xotTa iravlrai S^ | rgoiroi'. Ar. Av. 451, 4 An., 1 lam. 'loTSlTi' ya^wv, 1 "ote rsw [ 'o//.o^&\T^iav, iEsch. Fr. 558. C. Iambic Verse. §711. The place of the fundamental iambus may be supplied by a tribrach („ _ = „ ^ „), except at the end of a line. To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of a dipody is very often lengthened to a spondee, and not unfre- quently .to a dactyl or an anapsest. Note. The comic poets admit the anapaest in every place except the last of a verse or system. The same license exists in tragedy in proper names containing two short between two long syllables. § 7 1 S. I. The Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic (often called the Senarius, § 697. /?) is the principal metre of dra- matic dialogue (§ 708. 1). Kemaeks. 1 . This verse has for its ca2sura the penthemim or the heph- themim, the former much the most frequently. The latter is sometimes an- ticipated by the elision of the syllable after which it would properly fall, form- ing what has been termed by Forson the qitasi-cff-sura. Lines occur, though rarely, which have neither of these caesuras. 2. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last; the spondee in the 1st, 3d, and 5th places ; the dactyl in the 1st and 3d ; and the anapeest in the 1st. The feet which are admitted only in comedy or in proper names (§ 711. N.) are placed within parentheses, in the following scheme. * 36* 426 VERSIFICATION. [book IV. Scheme and Examples. 3. 4. 5. 6. _t s. 'EV-w I S* 'aToxll^of iX\(i.t t o'Dyllyj'ifn | ;&i'ov. iEsch. Pr. 14^ 2»tJ^ji'v 1 Vj oill^ov, t 'aCalrov £7? || Vg^l^rsv. lb. 2. Xlavro'; I 5* 'avffiyjJKM t Tft/vlSE* (aoJ j] TO^fcav \ ff^SiTv* lb. 16. TsTff '(Jfl^oCoolJXoII 0£''/i6rlSo5 t arKcry^JflTa srat. lb. 18. 4. 5. „t / ^ _/_ ^t^^ w ^ w „ + ^ /. "zti vov t ir^Off I /STav I ;t;£rgflD [ fiSyov. lb. 353. ^SfiiiovT t 1 *66frs"l|o'T£rXi"v [ flTaTflj. Soph. CEd.C.1317» I (pirSCrl' ■ 1 1 's>«i II 'VeVo-» I nSffv. Enr. Hec. 387. yyuftas 1 'y^a'lj tfrwiTaj | iro^as^ Soph. Aj. 1091. Love watchling M4d||nes3 t witli I unfl||ter^|ble mien. Byron's Childe Harold. § 7 1 3. II. The Iambic Tet;kameter Catalectic is pe- culiar to comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cat- alectic (cf. §§ 709, 717) ; and has commonly a caesura after the first dimeter. Note. The same metre (foUowing of course accent and not quantity) is a favorite verse of modem Greek poetry. In our own language, it is chiefly used in comic songs and ballads. Scheme and Examfles. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. wi^ w^w w^^ w^^T w^w ^^w _ J_ _ _i_ _ J_ _^w _Xw _A^ >w' ww/ ^w' ww/T ^ ^ / ^w' 7. 8. / in propA V*-- *-' i name*. / 'O" S£irl?ro"T«f |[ ya^ (pulfffv *i7\\f£as *^\^£a>s [| 'ot^avlrccs. At, Plut. 260. Aur6|ra ris||es o'er i the hills, f || by gracelfal Hours 1| att^nd|ed, And in | her train, || a m^rlry troop f || of bright-) eyed L6ves || are bMndjed FercivaVs Classic Jifelodies. § 7 1 4. III. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in sys- tems of the common form (§ 700. 1) ; as, Tdtrr^'l^s x«r )] toTs 'Cvlri^ors Kaf rafs J xokarst "Xstras I xoA.£ II Tov 'avjS^. At. Eq. 453. CH. 2.] IAMBIC AND TROCHAIC VEESE. 427 § 7 1 5. IV. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds of Iambic verse (for the iambus in logaoedic verse, see § 710). Mouom. Hypere. 'EV«r|/«o"{ 'SfiWvm. Find. P. 6. 7. Dim. Brachyc. 'Xrerlrt /toT || S-ixtSs. Sopli. El. 479. Dim. Hypere. 2u ra \ rv vox {{ xaT»l|C«iJ|(ras. Soph. Ph. 1095. Trim. Cat. 'QTt «r|i'ii 'im^j^xfi' I o^i^^s || K^ot,T A *-• *— 1. w ^ *-. w ^ t X w i w w X ^ si, w w X J_ X _ ^ w _ ^w_ U-- / .^ w x*^ «- X^w _£.w w 0. prop, nan 163.) Tous r^\vovs xixT II T«i» Si'|«rTS» t ll trtf^^tv [ 'f^^£[jflEVTs£|'rflPf. Ar. Vesp. 1101. Small re|fl&tion || and in|sp&tion, 1 1| n&ds it, | fri6ida of J| mine, to [ s&, I'n the I w&ps and || us yom- | chorus, 1 1| wondrous | simi||liri|ty. MitcheWs Translation, § 7 1 8. 11. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of the common form (§ 700. 1) ; as, Tw ^gi'lsTi', II rm V VlXafwl', TjrvSf I vBvl T»» Silov (rfoo-llsWaJTl'. Ar. Pax, 578. 428 VERSIFICATION. [bOOK IV. § y 1 9. III. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds of Trochaic verse (for the trochee in logaoedic verse, see § 706). Trim. Aaigi'If ^dS' ^sch. Sept. 79. ^ « 55 1. • Note. An aniispast (JiVTtff'prce.trrosy drawn, in contrary direc- tions) is a combination of an iambic with a trochaic rhythm, and admits in the first part any foot which is admitted into Iambic verse, with the appro- priate ictus ; and in the second part, any foot which is admitted into Tro- chaic verse, with the appropriate ictus. The addition to this combination of a long syllable (which, in connection with other rhythms, may be resolved into two short) forms a dochmius (Sop^ju,/o;f oblique, crooked), which has con- sequently a triple ictus, with great variety of structure. Thus (1.) ^ J__L»_ _L; (2.) „j,.j.-,x; (3.)-j.j.^^j-;(4-)-^-i^_j.;(50_-!-i.^j.; ^6.) _ i^^j . L ; &c. CH. 3.] ACCENT. 421» CHAPTER III. ACCENT. ^799. In every Greek word, one of the three last syl- lables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. Kemabks. 1. This tone is commonly spoken of amply as the tone, or the accent. Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have re- sembled, in some degree, but with important differences, that which we call accent in English orthoepy. That it never fell upon any syllable before the antepenult, shows that the Greeks felt the same difficulty in the utterance of a long train of syllables after their accent which we feel after ours. See also § 733. 2. 2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity with- out regard to accent ; that of the modem Greeks is founded upon accent with- out regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from this, that in the ancient language the distinction of quantity was the more prominent to the ear ; while in the modern language the reverse is strikingly true (§ 19). At the same time, the distinction of accent was evidently the more intellectual in its character (§ 734) ; and, if less marked by the ear, was far more so by the understanding. 3. To those who pronounce the Greek in the usual method, according to quantity, the study of the accent is still highly useftil, as serving, — (o) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the same word ; as ilfci (en- cHtic, § 732), to be, ti/£i, to go; o, the (§ 731), a, which; vrars ; wlien? jrari (end.), once; u^Xa, other thijigs, aXXa, hut; Xt^o^oXosj throwing stones, Xt^i- SaXas, thrown at with stones (§ 739. b). — (6) To distinguish different farms of the same word ; as the Opt. fioi/Xsiirxi, the Inf. ^aaXwirxi, and the Imp. ^cvXiMtci (^If 34, 3.5). — (c) To ascertain the quantity of the doubttul vow- els (§§ 681, 726). — (d) To show the original form of words. Thus the cir- cumflex over TifiS, fixS, ^kxS, marks them as contract forms of the pure verbs -ri/ixai, pxia, itixiu. — (c) To show how words are employed in the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained by pro- clitics and enclitics (§§ 730 - 732). 4. TTpon some of the minute points of accentuation, authorities and critics diSec. But this only furnishes another point of analogy between the Greek accent and our own. Indeed, there is no subject, either in grammar or in any other science, upon all the minutise of which there is a perfect oneness of opinion. § 733. In accentuation, a long vowel or diphthong in the ultima, and often in the penult, is regarded as forming two syllables (§§ 29. o, 676). — We may say, in such cases, that the vowel or syllable forms two accentual places. Remark. In accentuation, the inflection-endings at, and ot are not treated as long vowels, except in the Optative (cf. §41). 430 ACCENT. [book W. Note. This treatment of final ai and m as short vowels appears not to have prevailed in the earliest form of the language, nor in the Doric dialect, which was characterized by its closer adherence to old usage (§ 735. a). In the Opt., it seems not to have prevailed from the natural dwelling of the voice upon the termination (§ 177). Traces of the old usage appear in the accent- uation of so many Inf. forms upon the penult (§ 746) ; although the circum- flex accent is not here excluded (cf. 726. E.). § 734. 1. Accentual places are counted according to the following method. The ultima is counted as the 1st place, if its vowd is sliort, but as the 1st and 2d places, if its vowel is long. If the ultima forms two places, the penult forms, of course, the 3d place, and completes the number which is al- lowed. If, on the other hand, the ultima forms only a single place, then the penult forms the 2d place ; and, besides this, if its vowel is long, it always forms in disayllables^ and sometimes forms in polysyUabhs, the 3d place also. If the ultima and the penult form but two places, then the antepenult is the 3d place. In the following words, the numbers denote the accentual places; 1 21 3 21 2 1 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21 &ei, Tiaig, Xoyov, Xoyd;, nXoviov, nXovrog, nXovToi, ngoaanoigf 321 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21 321 321 ngoaoinov, ixovaaig, ixovaa, kxovaai, noX^/AOvg, noXiftog, noXsfiot. 2. An ascending line ( ' ) was adopted by the Greek grammarians as the mark of an accented place, and a descending line ( * ) as the mark of an un- accented place. A syllable in which an accented was followed by an unac- cented place received, of course, a double mark ('*). The words above, in which the accentual places are numbered, are all accented as far from- the end as possible. If, therefore, all their accentual places were distinctly marked, they would be written thus ; Ss'g, Tidlg, Xoybv, Xoyog, nlomov, nXoiiiog, nXovTol, Ttgoawn'olg, nQoaoinhv, ixovaalg, ixovaa, ixovaal, noXs/xovg, noXs/iog, TioXffiol. 3. But it is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark unaccented syllables, and when the two marks (' " ) fall upon the same sylla- ble, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one C^, or, as rounded for greater ease in writing, ~ or ~ ). Dropping, therefore, the marks over the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus ; ■&ig, Ttcug, Xoyov, Xoyog, nXovrov, nXoinog, nXovroi, TiQoatoTioig, ngoaainov, ixovaaig, ixovaa, sxovaai, noXifiovg, noXf/xog, TtoXcfioi. 4. The following words are accented upon the first place ; ^os, 3-*Jg, B-tj^/i X^i^t tra/Sos, yuvcti^i, jixffiXivS' The following, upon the second ; {iovs, (p^St ^ufi^ iro(poUj vtfjcviSj vioSf viol, Xoyl, ipiXot, ^uvxt, Tt//.v%, oimov, [ietiriXtEs, viCtvrt. The following, upon the third ; Xoyuv, craiOE? , yvvaTKot, aZfj-u,, eufiaTos, ffufiU' T&iVj Xei^oi, XU7rofx.lv, Xlt'Souffi, 'iXti'Vov, XikoiTx, IXiXoi'^siv, XsTts. % VfSS, A syllable is termed acute, if it simply forms an accented place ; circumflexed, if it forms an accented followed by an unaccented place ; grave, if it receives no accent ; as the final syllables in Si^gi, ^aaiXcvg ' aocpov, ti/u^? ' Xoyt, awfta, . A ■ ( OxYTONE, \ C Acute. A word IS J Peuispome, > if its Ultima is < Circumflexed *^™«'^ ^° ( Barytone, 7 I Grave. CH. 3.] GENERAL LAWS. 431 4 „ J • ( Pakoxytone, \ e ■, ti u • f Acute. A word IS I „ ' > if Its Penult is < ^i- a a t A \ Peoperispome, j ( Gircumnexed. I Proparoxytone, if its Antepenult is Acute. Notes, (a) The teims above ai'e formed from the words tovos (Lat. ac- centus), iffnCy b^vs (Lat. acutus), sharp, ^t^itr^&ifi&vos (Lat. circmnflexus), bent round, ciTcumfiexed, (iet^vs (Lat. gi'avis), heavy, grave, iraga, near, and irgff, before. (6) The paroxytones, properispomes, and proparoxytones are all in- cluded in the general class of barytones. § 72©. To the principles of Greek accentuation which have now heen given, may be referred, almost throughout, the following general laws of accent and accentual changes. I. General Laws of Accent. 1. One accent, and only one, belongs to each word. Hence ffvv and oSaj, compounded, become truvo^og • truv and ^ega;, av[jt.<^i^it>. — For apparent exceptions, see §§ 731, 732. 2. The accent never falls upon any syllable before the ante- penult. Hence ovo/^ee, /isys^os become, in the Gen., ovofiaros, fiiyihos. 3. The antepenult can receive only the acute accent, and can receive this only when the ultima is short. Hence ^ixaffffa, avS^wros, v^tiirwTov, become, in the Gen., B-aXKffcrtiij avS^u- vrov, ij, and compounds in «^7js is paroxytone ; as, r^i^i^eiuv r^m^ai/, 4.) The Subj. pass, of verbs in -/n, and of Perfects used in the sense of the Pros., is often accented as though uncontracted ; thus, TiStDfzxi, rif/t, riSnTut • "^iiufiut • KixToiftxi, fiifivuftat (§ 234). And, on the other hand, the Opt. pass, of these verbs is accented by many as though contracted ; thus, nhToj Note. In diaresis, or the resolution of a diphthong, a circumflexed sylla- ble is resolved into an acute and a grave ; as ^xis cralV. b. Ckasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word is omitted. The accent of the second remains without change, except as required by § 726. 6 ; as, ravio, for to uvto ' T«AAa, for t« aXla (yet some write t«U«). c. Apostrophe. When an accented syllable is elided, the accent is thrown bade upon the penult, as acute ; thus, Ssiv tni], for dsira snrj ' noli.' 'inu&ov {noXka). — Except in preposi- tions, and the particles aJlAa, jwtjSs, ovSi, and the poetic riSi and I8i • as, nciQ ifioi, aXX iya. ^729. IV.) The connection of words in discourse, as follows. A. Grate Accent. Oxytones, followed by other words in closely connected discourse, soften their tone, and are then marked with the grave accent (§ 14) ; as, inl t« xala xal aya&d. Exception. The interrogative tU, and words followed by enclitics (§ 732), never take the grave ; as, T/s sT ; Who art thou 1 Notes, k. In the application of this rule editors vary. The best usage, however, retains the acute accent only in the case of unconnected words or phrases, and before the period, colon, and such other pauses as require to be distinctly marked in reading. /2. The syllable over which the grave accent is written is still regarded as acute, although its tone is softened, and the word to which it belongs is still termed an oxytone. Syllables sfricfli/ grave are never marked, except for grammatical illustration, as in § 724. § 730. B. Anastrophe. In prepositions of two short syllables, the accent is usually thrown hack upon the penult, when they follow the words which they would regularly pre- cede, or lake the place of compound veris, or are used adver- bially ; as, dofxair vnsg, for vniQ doftwv ' oXtaag ano i. 534, for anoliaag (§ 653) ; nagn, for nagsajL " i Sva, for dvdartj&i, (§ 653. s) ; Tidgi, in the sense of exceedingly (^ 657. /J). This 37 434 ACCENT. PROCLITiLfa, ENCLITICS. [bOOK IV. change of the accent is termed anastrophe {avaar^ocp^, iwnmg lack)'. Notes, (a) Grammarians except S;a and ati. (except for avao-rjitf/), to distinguish them from the Ace. AU, and the Too. «»« (It H, 16). (6) Both in anastrophe and in the common accentuation of prepositions (§750. 2), the attraction of the accent towards the word upon which the preposition ex- presses its force will be observed. §731. C. Proclitics. A few monost/ZZaWes, heginning with a vowel, are commonly connected in accentuation with the following word, and lose, in consequence, their proper accent. They are hence called atonies {axova, toneless), or, with more precision, proclitics (nQoxUvoi, to lean forward). They are, (1.) the aspirated forms of the article, 6, ^, ot, at • (2.) the adverb ov, not ; (3.) the prepositions ds, into, if, in, tf, out of; (4.) the conjunctions el, if, ag, as. KoTE. The proclitics retain their accent when the}' close a sentence, or follow the word which they would regularly precede. Hence, oti lUrx • but, trwff yccp ov • as B-ios, but, ^eos oj; • ix xaxa/v, but, xaKciJii 'i^. § 733. D. Enclitics. Some words are attached, in accentuation, to the ^rececZiMg' word, and are hence called en- clitics {iyxXniKog, from tyxUvw, to lean upon). They are, — (l.) The following oblique cases of the personal pronouns ; 1st Pers. fxov, fiol, fts ■ 2d P. oov, aol, as ' 3d P. ov, ol, i' ■ vlr, offiui, acpt. For other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, see U 23. (ii.) The indefinite pronoun ilg, in all its cases, and the indefinite adverbs jtcu^, na, nri, nol, nov, no&l, Tio&ir. TioTs (fl 63). (hi.) The Pres. ind. of ui.il, to be, and cprj/ji, to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. — (iv.) The particles ys, vvv, ■niij, Tf, xol • the poetic -d^riv, aiiv), vi, ^a ' and the insepara-- bIe-5£.— See § 152. 2. Eemaeks. a. (a) An enclitic throws back its tone, in the form of the acute accent, upon the ultima of the preceding word ; as, xrS^uns Xcn • IsT^n fiot ' It Tis Tivii fnffi fioi -Trct^sTvai. (6) If the ultima of the preceding word has already an accent, the accent of the enclitic unites with it, and disappears ; as, at«g VIS • (ptXu -«> -«''' (U '7) ; o5o{!, -^, -ol, -at, -dig, -ovg, -to, -oiv (U 9) ; yuTiraj', -dlv (^ 11). Kxcept in the pecaliar datives Xiioi, /ioij irol (1[ 23, § 141). B. Accent in Comparison. ^ 745. Comparatives and superlatives, whether adjectives or adverbs, are accented as far back as the general rules of accent permit ; thus, ■^dvg, rjdtcav, "jSiov (^ 743. 5), jjStaTog. C. Accent in Conjugation. § 74:6. Verbs are accented as far back as the general laws permit, with the following exceptions (see && 723. N., 734. c, d). 1 . These forms are accented upon the penult ; — (a) All Infinitives in -vtti ; as, f^sGoukttJxiyat, jSayXsy^^na;, tiTTxvKt, lo-rxvatt (^ 48). Except dialectic forms in -^sva/ (§ 250). — (b) The Inf. of the 1st Aor. act. and 2d Aor. mid. ; as, fhouXivtrm, Xf^iffSat (^ 37). — (c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Fa7t,; as, (^tSouktvffffxi, (i£Q■ and <^ denote the change, by contraction or otherwise, of the words or letters at the opening into lliose at the angle. The sign X <^e- notes opposition or distinction. The abbreviation cj. stands for conjugation, contr. for contraction, const, for construction, cp. for comparison, dec. for declension, der. for derivation, end. for enclitic, ins. for inserted, num. for numeral, pos. for position, r. for root, w. for with, &c.] a, 1 3 : 24 ; a > i, a, », u, 28, 44, 203. /3, 259, 266 f; «&]>■« and «, 29. a ; a <[ V, 50 ; con- tr. w. other vowels, 32f, 45 ; contr. of a for v, 34, 45. 5 ; < J, 59 ; Dor. 2, 6, 44f, 95f ; « in neut. pi., 80 ; in Deo. I., 1 fi : 86, 92 f ; in ace. of Dec. III., 1 00 ; conn, vow. in cj., U 31 : 178 f, 203 f ; changes in r., 259, 266 f ; added to r., 287 ; -x- in der, 305. b ; i,. privative, 325, 383 ; copulative, 325 ; a F ^ ecv, «,2i\S, 117,267.3. aya-SoSt cp., 1 60. iyyiXXai, 1[ 41 : 217, ayd^u, cj., 268. [277. a. ccyri^aoSy ^ 17 ' 98. aytCfi.!, cj., 294. a.yxh -"W* cp., 161. 2, 163, X ; w. gen., 394. ayai, cj., 194. TS., 236. c; &.yi, 613. 3. ahxx^u?, dec., 136. ». -As in der., 310. a. "A/S»if, dec, 124. «. »S,»«, T 17 : 130. ^S» < as/Ss), cj., 260. as/^tjj^ ee'i^ei), cj., 268. -iZ^ m der., 3lHf. asjS/wv, dec, 123. at. oiTiHtrtra), cj., 275. «. a>7fHf Kstriti CJ. 288. «^ added in 2. aor., 299. 'A«»iiir(, 320. 2, 421. fi. aif elided, 41 ; <^aixt as, 45. 5,86, 132.2 ; > j in augm., 188. 2; conn. vow., 205 ; final in ac- cent., 723. K. ai^o/Atxtf -iofzxtj cj. 288. a;S), aXXa r/, 541. b ; ecXXos ccXXov, 542. aXXea; T£ »«/, 671. 3. i'Xj, dec, 105. aXuirxo;, cj. 27.S. 0£* eiX^avatt CJ., 289. aXaStrw^, dec, 101. ;8. a>.ai?, dec, 124. y. £ftx, w. dat., 399 ; w. part., 616. a. xfm^Txvuj ci., 289. xfjifiXiirxM, -oaij cj., 280. xfAt'ivuv, compt., 1 60. d^si^ai, -i^Uy cj., 282. dli.iii, \ 12 : 106. 1. 442 GREEK INDEX. a^^e;^;w, cj., 300. KfcjrXnKtirKiijj CJ,, 296. a.fjt.'Tvuu^ cj., ^64. cifjivvb)^ cj., 299. uftipi, const, 648 ; al a.l^su, w. gen., 347. osviij, ^ (2; 106 J ave^, 742 ; in address, 443; dvyj^f (wf'/j^, 39. av^* avy because, 5.30. avoj'yw, -yy/fii, cj., 294. dvTij const., 648 ; deriva- tives, w. gen., 394 ; w. dat., 405. J. avyw, -yT«, av(w, CJ., 272. ^, 246. ^e ; eivuffiAS as adv., 457. y, 632. a»- -SfiA, -a, -ay, 95, 3. d^aru^, neut. pi. 1 30. /3. ^crosu^^aa, cj., 296. d-ffaipliiKCii, cj., 296. »«Sf«», T[ 57 : 227, 285. ae:r£;^^a^a:/, -dvofAxty cj., 289. dvX'eai, 'CVS, \ 25. 4 ; cp., 156. b. [562. d-TTa, const, 648; w. pass.; diroht^ofiat, sell, 285, 558. 'A^oXXa/v, dec, 105. R., 107, N., 742. d-rox,Z9i, 28-^. 5. S.'jtTu, cj., 272. Kfoi ^ aj, 48, 2 ; pos., 673. a ; «» as pres., 567. d^et^lffnu, cj., 285, \y. ii^xs, n 22: 109, 132, d^UxM, cj., 279. [268. "AjJis, dec, 114.N., 116 d^tirrdu, pf., 238, ae. [a. d^nrros, Superl., 1 60, d^fto^a}, -TTHf, cj., 275. JJ. ajvas, ^ 12 : 106, 1. -o!fa,- in der., 314. h d^Sai, cj,, 219. d^crdt^bf, cj., 276. agarail, ra ag-rasxr/xai", 1.30. a; cp., 158, ccfftin, 1[ 17 : 105. 1, aj;u»», adv. acc, 440. i'SZ'^i <3-> 222 ; -w. gen., 350 ; d^y^ofAivos as adv., 632. -as in der., 139, 308, 314. afftrta <^ dttrira/, 260. diTTri^, -T^dffl, 59^ 7. diTTii, % 14: 113. 2 airaf, ^ 24: 149 ; com pounds, 144, ^50; cp., 261. 2 ; w. dat. of as- soc obj., 418, R. ; w. compt. and superl., 464 ; use, 508 f ; as pers.pron., 5 10. ce ; a avToSf thesajne, 508. II. ; w. dat., 400 ; Ctl/Toi iir/JLlV, 510 ; OiKUTOS «iTat, 511.5, [144 auToZ -<^ eaturotj, ^ 23 ' oi^SafAatj cj., 222, a. d^o/jCai, -vufttct, cj., 286, a;^^/ au, 530. -da in der., 3 1 8 f. aar, breathe, dtu, diffSa/, cj., 288. du, satiate, cj., 29S. [3. -&UV, ^ -Sfl/v, -av, -wv, 95, /3, n 3: 49,2; /3a->-^, 51 ; )3t> ITT, li^y-ipf, 52 ; /3/» > ^^, 53 ; ^jb > ?. 6 1 ; ,«{, ^X > fi?(, fiSx, fix, 64, 2. fialrai, oj., 278 ; sf »», f 57 : 227 ; /3sfor;8J^/,210.N. fidXXu, cj., 223, 277. It. fid^Tui, cj., 272. fioLffiXlv; (sc. a), 485. « J cp., 261. 2, fidtrxu = fiaivaj, 278, fiiXrim, &c, 160, fiiC^uffxu, cj., .285 ; /Ss- iias, 238. 0!. -j8/a&;, -uffxouai, CJ., 280 fiXd^, cp., 158. a. fiXdVTa, cj., 272. fiXaffTavtu, -iu, cj., 289. fiXyj^dofiCtt, cj., 287. a. fiXirffa, cj., 275. S7. fiXaxrxoi, CJ., 281. J. asrat/, -o!Ta ■<^ -vrat, -vTe,^ fiappxs, ^ 7 : 94, 96. at. 60, 213. 2, 248./. j/3aV«4,, cj. 222. 1. art^os = irt^ns, 39. N. 2. fiei/Xsua, T 34 f ; trans- "AtXu!;, dec, 109. 1. I lated, f 33 ; fisuXivaii, 'Atjei'Sb,-, K 7 : 92f, 310. | t 22 : 109, 132, aTToL, aTTa^aTivtHynvd, fiovXoftcti, c]., 222. 2; use, If 24 : 152f. I 526, y, 583, 611, 3. ai> duinaugm., 188. 2. /BaZJf, H 14 : 112f, 117. 0!?, a.ZSi5, pos., 673.0:. ^fi^ec^vs, cp., 159. i. aiiffl, -,1143: 222,289. /Sjtras, dec, 123. /3. GREEK INDEX. 443r P^vxao/ixi, cj., 287. ^uvsat, fiusu, cj., 292. •y, double office, 1[ 3 : 49. XT, y ;(;^, 52 ; yx > yaXa, dec, lO.'i. If. ya-fjiXu^ cj., 2SS. yaj, w. art., 490 ; in specification, 656. i ; in- trod., 661. N. ; pes., 673. a. yaiTTiif, dec, lOS. 2, (J. ys, affixed, 328 ; pos., 673. a. ; end., 732. ysyuvsai, -'htku^ CJ., 296. yiXoiia, CJ., 219. «. ysXs/j, dec, 104. 7-%«5, H 14: ll4f. ysyw, w. acc. and gen., "w. 2 acc, 430. yn^d-u, -trxa/^ CJ., 279. y'lyts, 1 13 : 109. yiyiifl^a/, yiiiofieti,CJ.,286, 238. a ; w. dat., 408 w. part., 637. yiyycutrxett, yivucrxtdf cj., 285 ; 'iy»m, t 57 : 224. 2, 227 ; TT. part, and inf., 633, 634. /3. j/Xix"^' dec, 107. K. Vi-cls, \ 16: 126. 2. yXwcfl-a, ^ 7 : 92. 1 . ysBLU, cj., 287. yovy, dec, 123. y. Vo^yuj -uv, dec, 123. a. y^xui, U 14: 34. a, 114 117, 121./. y^ifa, T 36 : 217 ; use in mid., 558, 559. d. yuvjj, dec, 101. y, 63, 742. yi^, 1[ 11 : 83f, 101 r«eji/«,t7:93.N'.,96.a. J, t 3 : St > (TT, y > 0-^, 52 ; S^ > ff^ 53 ; S dropped before ay,1f 12: 105.1,57.4. iaivVfil, cj., 295. laiofiBii, cj., 267. 2. ia/o', cj., 267. 3. Saxvi, 24 ; e > /, «, B, £u, 28, 44.3, lllf,118f, 259. b ; s > £1, 44. 4, 203. a, 206. /3, 242. b ; ££>«and£(, 29.0!, 36f, 44. 4 ; £ < 0-, 50 ; £ < »■, 300 ; contr. w. other vowels, 32 f; ins. after contr., 35, 98. /3 ; by Ion., 48. 1, 120. 2, 242. a ; sign of plur., 83, 1 72 ; charact,, changed, 1 lof ; conn. vow. in pron., 141; in cj., 175, 203 f; in augm., 1 73, 1 87 f ; in redupl., 190f; ins. in opt., 1 84 ; in fut,, 200^ 3, 245,2; before dose affi, 444 GREEK INDEX. 222. a ; changes in r., 259,268, 270.10; >» in 2 pf., 236 ; added to r., 287 f; lot in plup., 179,203. N.; sF > «", s, u, u, 22.5, 117, 121.3, 220, 264. [e/, 603. ix>, compos., >■ Hi, civ, X i«j, dec, 108. N. Xkvtou ^ ecuToVj *[ 23 : 144; use, S04f; for other pronouns, 506 f. sa«j, cj., 189. 3, 218. iS)7v, see (iKivu. Xyyli;, cp., 163. /J; w. gen., 394. lysifia, cj., 268, 238. (3. 'iyya/Vf See y/yvwff'Kiy. syXiXv;, dee., 119. 2. lyia, H 23; 141 f; use, 502 f; 'iyuys, 732. d. s^uv, see Suvof. 2S4/, cj., 298, 246. /3. E^fl^a/, cj., 275. ^. iiiXa,, cj., 222. 2 ; w. inf., 583. 'ih> for oS, t 23 : 142. 3, yiZ^, cj., 297. ci <^ tt, 29. a, 36 ; ]> «/, 46 ; in 2 pers., 37. 4 ; in augm., 189. 3 ; in re- dupl., 191; connect, vow. of plup., 1 79, 203 ; > m, 286; eiainopt., 184, IS, 205. 3. .!(, adv. in, 321. ij, proclit., 731; u yi^, iih, II, 597, S99f, 625. ;3 ; EJ X 'Ui, 603 ; w. subj., 603. £ ; s'/n;, 663- 6 ; £(' fih ti, 667. 2 ; t, Si, s/'Ss/t!), 663.6,671.6. -iia in der., 308. a, 311 it^D^ai, eTSok, cj., 301. 4 ; =;%, t 22, 5f 58 : 112. X, 132. 1, 301. 4; ;$£, 613. 3, 747. c. sW£, 732. £; see tl. tixa =^ 'ioiKBCj 273. a. uxx^a, 1 88. N., 273. a. ei'«a(r((v), ^ 25 : 66. a. i'/jjiu, cj., 188. 3, 2S9. f', 722. a; w. gen., 364 f, 384 ; w. dat., 408 ; omiir- ted, 547, 634. a, 639.2; auxil., 637 ; 'iirrtv o'l, ocr»5, &c., 523; 'iifri,viv, w. pi. nom., 5^9. 6; «» as aor., 576. 5 ; £Tv«i w. verbs of naming, &c, 434. N. ; as inf. of spe- cif., 623. N. £1^1, go, U 56 : 231 ; dial., 252. 7; as fut., 231, 301.3; Ei'foriV/, 210.N. iiliri, 273. «. iWm, -a, U 53 : 301. 7 ; £/■«, 613. 3, 747. c. il'^yyvfyti, itpyal, CJ., 294, 299. Ei^fljaa/, -urauj CJ., 298. Eljar, CJ., 301. 7. A, If 21 : 105. I, 137; w. gen., 362. y; w. dat.. 400 ; w. superl., 452. y. -lis, adj. in, 56. 4, 5, 3 1 5. f. i'ls, is, der. and constr., 648, 659. OS ; w. num., 137. £ ; proclit., 731 ; £iS OTS, ow, 65 1 . ^. ii'ffK&i, cj., 273. 0!. £'/o- U, 68. 1 ; proclit., 730; cp., 161. 2; w. pass., 562 ; w. gen., 648 ; for !», 659. a ; e? -otou, 530. E|aiV»ij; w. part., 616. a. E'iajvo; w. ace, 424. 1. £?oir absolute, 638. -£o; in der., 315. c. eWk, cj., 273. «, 238. |S; const., -615; soiy^Ev, 238. /3. eojtoJs), augm., 189. 5. iwaug/VaOjWOfi/, CJ., 296. 'eVe^vov, CJ., 274. S. £!ri, const., 648 ; w. num., 137. e; pos., 652. 1. WlxXm, monopt., 1 27. I'jriXyitrf/.uv, cp., 158. j3. X-rt^iXofji.at, -lOfLBLi, cj.,28S, w. gen., 376, S. t'jr'iffra.f^a.i, pref., 1 92. 3. icri^^ec^ts, cp. 158. I'jft^u^tos w. gen., 391. a. £!r^iaj«>iv, see ■jr^iairSat' WTiTsjs, -jris, 134. /3. eVw, cj., 300. i^ya.^cftat, augm., 1 89. 3* i^'Su, cj., 276. i^itxai, cj., 265. i^l'iTfo}, cj., 269. i^y;tfofx.ai, fut., 298, 'EoiKBoif, -S(, f 7 : 94. GREEK INDEX. 445 !{«•<», augm., 189. 3. 'ippai, cj., 222. 1. iffoi/iiios, Cp., 156. y. l^uyyavb)^ CJ., 290. i^iai, nude forms, 246. «. 'i^X'."-'", cj-, 301. 3, 238. /S; w. fut. part., 637; U^l oxyt., 747. c. «{«;, £?jD«oi, ^ 53 : 301. 7. Sjias, dec, 104. i^wrtiatj cj., 298. irS'iu, 'iirSai, cj., 298. iirriizfii, augm., 189. 3. ifTus, t 22, f 48 : 131. /3, 237. Jir;j;ii!Toj, cp., 161. 1, 2. IraT^osj cp., 161. 2. sw <; sa, sow, &c., 45. 3, 121. a, 142. c, 243. eJ, augm., &e., 193. tuysojs, dec, 1 33. fi. iSia, cj., 222. 3. iM(s), 67. 2 ; w. gen., 373; w. part., 616. a. si^Uxa, cj., ' 296 ; £u{£, oxyt., 747. c. Hi, iii's, dec, 136. 3. -trJs in der., 306. c, 309. illz^e'f, f 17 : 102 f. -EUix in der., 318. i^' », If' a n, 530 ; -w. inf., 628'. 8;e^eof, cp., 159. [298. e^^oj, -ai'^ai, -^xlvajf cj., %X", cj., 300 ; augm., 189. 3 ; w. adv., 55S. a ; and gen., 363. /3 ; auxil., 637 ; e;i^titv fXua^sTs, i^],u, cj., 222. [632. N. -£«, -iofVf Ion. gen., 95 f. -SIX in der., 318. tiuSj dec, 123. y. F, 21f; in dec, 117; in cj., 220, 264, 267. 3 ; sign of pers., 143. I. IT 3 : 51. N. ; > tt, 70. 1 ; > ffj, SS, S, 70. V. ; in r., 273f, 282. ^xai, cj., 280. y, 33. a. ^suyvVfci, cj., 294. Zeus, Za«, IT 16: 123. y. Z,vyoSy ^vyoVf dec, 1 25. a. ^avvvficit cj., 293. 2|ii!s, dec, 135. I, IT 3 : 24 ; X s, 24 ; Ion., 44. 1 ; > ti, 29, 37. 2; contr. 31 f; in plup., 203. N. ; in subj., 204 ; ins., 222. » in der., 305. b. », w. compt., 461, 463f ; omitted, 461. a ; pleo- nastic, 461, C ; « KKTtXj n ^^oSj h us, k WITTS, 463 ; w ay, -666. ^. JV h'i, 491. K. [301. N. ■pii>, IT 58 : 203. N., 237, nS«, monopt., 127. Wus, IT 19: 112f, 117. N., 132. 1 ; cp., 159. TToejj -afAxt, cj., 290. ^xifTos, superl., 160. tjxai, w. adv. and gen., 363. ;3; asperf., 579.?. i^-lxo;, IT 63 ; in condens., 529. ?^a;, IT 59 : 275. ?. n^uj, dec, 103. N. iifc! ibr ^>I|k/, 228. Sifu-, use of compounds, 140. y. m <^ lai*, 603. miyxa, 9]vtyxoy, 301." 6. Jsraf, IT 11 : 103. 'S^xxXinu IT 14: 115. /3, 121.4. TiQS/AX, cp. 161. 2. 9i^iyevnst -v£ o-T, »» > ^3, 52 ; 3^> ir/t, 53; .& dropped before a-, 55 ; before x, 61 ; sign of gen., 84; of pers., 172; ins. in da. and pi., 174 ; changes of in cj., IS I, 210; 3~addedtor., 282; S-a annexed, 182 ; 3e, 9«ff, tense-signs, 1 98 f ; 38 a omitted, 199. n. ®xXJi;, dec, I 24. a. daXXu, pf. riSitXx, 236. 2 ^aiixriiti, use, 374. N. SasTTiu, cj., 272. ^ciffffcov, -TToiv, compt., 159. /3. ^XTS^oy, -av, 39. N. 2. S-oiUfiaa'Toy inrov, ^avfjta- ffrats aiSi 5.38. x, Sti'via, cj., 2G8. [583. ^iXa, cj., 222. 2 ; w. inf., 0£^i5, dec, 1 23. y ; ^i/iis Iffrij ib. Jiv, gen. in, 91, 320. 1. ^ggasrwv, dec, 123. y. ^sir/£osy dec, 125. a. &ins, dec, 119. 1 . 9-Ea,, run, cj., 220. [732. 9-))\, pos., 67"3. « ; end. &j7f, IT 12 : 57. 3. ^n^xu, cj., 218. S/yyairiu, CJ., 290. avsiVxa, cj., 281, 237, 239. X ; pass, of xre/yoi, 295, 556 ; use of tenses, 578. y. [y. ^^xcrifca <^ vx^xffffu, 274. S-feci/w, ins. of IT, 221. x. »^il, IT 1 1 : 101. /3. S-jusTTw, cj., 272. ^^eirxa, cj., 281. S. S-vyxrn^, dec, 106, 742. ao'ea, IT 7 ; 93. dial, cj., 219. » 7 and s; in r., 269 ; i in redupl., -/, adv. in, 321. [283. -ix in der., 308, a. "lawns, dec, 126. 2. -tin) in der., 319. I . ;?£!"», 2aor., 301. 4. -iSsis in der., 312. d. -Hm, -Hills in der., 3 1 0. '/§;o; w. gen., 391. x. iS^iu, contr., 244. a. 446 JKEEK INDEX. j'SfiJa, cj., 275. |. iS^iys, dec, 104. k^is w. gen., 391. a. iZ added to r., 297. -iZii in der., 318. y^w, -avw, cj., 27^. ^. iV;, 1[ 54: 229, 284; "!/««i w. gen., 373. 2. 'JfiirotJs, dec., 126. 2. -('««, adv. in, 321. 2. iKvlofioti, 't'xbtf -civaij cj., 292. -«ot in der., 314, 315. ixnvo;, dec, 124. /3. iXaiTKOfiatt cj., 279. ->^o5 in der., 314. c. Vva, const., 601 ; I'va t/ ; 539. a. -iv!j in der., 310. b. tvos in der., 315. -M» in der., 312. -to; in der., 315. iV«i!f, iri4,ir 16: lllf, 121.3. Itr^aT^mpiiu, redupl., 193. 'iTt'raifjt.a.ty cj., 287. -;5 in der., 309 f. iitx. added to r., 296 -la-Kc;, -VI, in der, 312. b. iWji^;, IT 48; 224f, 284; £o-!r»x«, 233 f, 237; tiTTui, IT 22 ; 132. (3; (rra for a-Ta^;, 210. N. ; iffT^^at, 239 ; eVrsjiTfl! X SlTTiiVy 257. ^. iV;t;"i cj., X ix", 300. ;;C«t, IT 14 : 83 f, 117. Iz'^e, dec, 107. N. -I'lav in der., 310. b ; quant., 683. 3. -iiiv,: in der., 310. b. .,1^3 :x;s>g,51 ;xS> yS, x^ > ;);^, 52 ; x/i > y^, 5.5; changes be- fore ;», 61 ; X {')>x> 65 ; K annexed, 66. 2 ; jc iixi, aor., 194. 3. xt^ivvuf.tl, -aai, CJ., 29.3. A!%«s,4ll :104,121.e,5. xi^o;, cp., 261. 2. xsu^a, cj., 270. 9. xiaX7is, const., 369. /3. xn^vtrtrii, SC. o xn^v^, 546. Xiy;^;ai'&', CJ., 290. Kiovnf.^i> cj., 293. xi»SK»£uii< w. gen., 395. S. xi^vnf.t.1, -a.ti3, cj., 29.3. x/s, IT 14 : 117. xi^t^vti}, -£&i, cj., 290. "'Ziif: cj.j 284. w/iu, 2 a. in -a^av, 299. xXxSss, dec, 124. ji. XACt^ai, cj., 277. a. xXettcJ, xXoiu, cj., 267. 3. xXt/f, IT 1 1 : 104. xXiiot, xX^a, cj., 270. 10. xX£5rr«s, cp., 161. 2. xXefTTia, cj., 272. xXiva/, cj., 269. xXuu, 2 aor., 227. y ; as pass., 556. xvi(pa.s, dec, 1 23. ji. xcivos, gram, term, 7 ; w. gen., 391. a. «o;viyvap, dec, 124. /3. x»^iX«^, IT 40 : 273. 2. xomfii?;.!), cj., 297. xirra, cj., 272 ; xi^ra- fiui, bewail, 561. u. xoe«i Til: 101. xa^EvvEJ^/, -ea;, cj., 293. xo^virir&t, cj., 275. 91. -xit in der., 315. b. xea?i^a;/, ^x. TJl^a;, 191. 3, 234. XTiivat, -vV/il, xTtvvvfii, cj., xte/s, dec, 105. i. [295. xTyWE^y, cj., 288. xvxeav, dec, 107. N. xvXiv^&r, -iar, xvXteu, cj^ xi/»£ii/, cj., 292. [288 xv^a, -icii, cj., 288 ; w. gen., 370. xias, IT 12 : 106 ; cp., 261. 2. xaia;, dec, 123. (3. X, ir 3 : X < «, 54, 277. a ; X(r, 56, 59. Xact;, XSj, dec, 124. a. Xay;t;ai'ia, CJ., 290 ; W. gen., 370. Xttyus, dec, 123. y. Xa^oficai, -vfiXl, cj., 290. Xiii^x yr. gen., 392. I . XaXos, cp., 1 56. y. XetfA^civca, cj., 290 ; X«Ct oxyt., 747. c. Xa.fji.'jfu, cj., 222. Xxvlxvui, cj., 290 ; with part., 633. y-iirxti, cj., 273. a,. GREEK INDEX. 447 Xiya, pf., 191, 236. a. Xi'tru, ir 37 : 217, 236. 1, 246. /3, 290 ; Xti-rt- fcm, w. gen., 349. R. Xi^,, t 13 : 109. XiXaiofitetit Xcca/f cj., 286. Xi>n»,iri2: 105.1,57.4. Xi/ivdyeif = XtiTTat, 290. ^iVdc, monopt., 127. Xiriiy, If 22, K 37 : 109, 132, 747. b. Xiyas, t 9 : 86. -Xfls in der., 31 5 f. Xovuj cj., 260. Xv^vast dec, 125. fls. Xiia, 2 aor., 227. y. X^a/v, Xa/o-raf, IfiO. ^, IT 3 ; changes before, 53 ; |kX > p,X, 64. N. ; signof Ipers., 143, 171; changes of in cj., 181, 209. Iti, X »», w. ace, 426. J; fia TflK — ^, 484. -lix in der., 306. 2. ^^yjs^j;, dec, 119. 2. fiaixixQf -xxj^ot, 134. 0, fiax^aSj cp., 159^ s. ^aX«, cp., 1 63. a ; ^^X- Aov, fzaXitrra in cp., 460 ; ficcXXov omitted, 653. 5. fixXns, monopt., 127. flxvdavdJt cj., 290 ; Ti fjLO. Sii i 631. N. ; w. part. and inf., 634. /3. [>iaoy,cctt /mUfcatj CJ., 278, fix^crToi, cj., 272. fia^rvst dec, 123. y. Mao-xSs, dec, 126. 2. /Aa;^af^£it, CJ., 222. a. ftcyas, IT 20 : 135 ; cp., 159;/jE;?xis, n^s, IT 9 : 98, 728. 1. .»?;, IT 14, ir 16: 34. «, 114, 117, 121. 6. mirm, T 7 : 92 f. n added to r., 292. vinrcs, superl., 156. 5. vi/iiu, cj., 222. 2. via,, cj., 220, 282. «»;, ir 9 • 98, 728. 1. n, X i^a, w. acc, 426. S. v>]- privative, 325. a. vnSu, via, CJ., 282. Vi^w, ciVraj, cj., 275. ^. tixiia,y7. 2 acc, 433, 435., »«, acc, IT 23 : 142. 5, 143. y ; use, 507 ; end., 732. vnfiiZui, w. dat., 419. N. vios, snus, 119 : 98, 728. 1. -«o; in der., 314, 315. virpv, -Zoi, w. gen., 347. vt>, added to r., 293 f vi(y), 66. X. ; pos., 673. X ; end., 732. nil, dec, 102. a. tm, vu, ir 23 : 141 f. vcj/ixai = viftu, 287. v&fTdV, v&/ra;, dec, 125. aCi I, IT 3 ; < xir, yy, ;(;ff, 51 ; > X, 68. 1 ; Dor. 448 GREEK INDEX. for a, 245. 1. Siuofav, IT 13 : 109. Im = ■ la and ou,29.«, 36,44.4, 244; contr. w. other vowels, 32 f, 45 ; conn. vow. in Dec. II., IT 6 : 86 ; in cj., 17 31 : 175, 203f; charact, changed, llOf; ins., 222, (3; in pf., 236; changes in r., 259, 269 ; oF > o", o, 22. S, 117. i, IT 24 : 97, 147f; era- sis, 39 ; proclit., 731 ; X 0, 722. a ; w. gen., 362,0!; early use, 467 f use as art., 469 f ; use as pron., 490 f; w. inf., 622 ; jU£v, ^E, ya^^ 490 f. S; pron. and adv. begin- ning w., IT 63 : 317. oStx^o), -ojLtai, cj., 273. /3. JSs, 17 24: 150; X oJ";, 513f;^adv.,514.N.; = eyaiy 515 ; oo/, 150. y. oSo;, IT 9 : 744. oSoi/s, IT 13 : 109. a.. oSy^Ojttot/, cj,; 270. •OSi/o-«i!s, ir 16: 121. 3. o'JiK, cj., 222. 1 ; w. gen., 391. S. -o/tv, gen. in, 91, 320. •oil, dat. in, 90, 320. cSovviKct, 40. S ; const., 530, 671. 13. 01 <^ oil, o«, 37. 3 ; <^ 006, o£, 45. 5, 86 ; "^ aj augm., 188. 2 ; < si in pf., 236, 1 ; final in ac- cent., 723. -01, dat. in, 90. 4, 320, oTS«, 1T58: 237, 301. N.; olo' OTlt 671. 4. oloicjj -Mivoit, -dvo/, cj., 291. OaVo«,iri6: 123, 124, 136. 2. etKsTosy w. gen., 391. ». oTxos omitted, 385. y. olfiu^eoj cj., 27?". S. -0(0, gen. in, 99. [3, y. olofjtui ^ oifixt, cj., 222. ojos, IT 63 : 521 ; in con- dens., 529 ; = or/ Toi- oE/Toj, 531 ; in exclam., 536. /3; w. inf., 628 f; oVos Ts, 629. oTj, IT 14: 114. 2, 121. /, 74L 6. 0/0-^' ^^affav ; 612. 1. o]ffr^tu^ augm., 189. 4. oiVw, fut., 301. 6. o'l^ofAut, cj., 222. 3 ; as j)f., 579. X, ; w. part., 637. [295 o\lx.ia = 0>.Xufiif 246. N., 0^/yof , op., 1 60 ; sXiyot X 0' oA/yoi, 488. 5 ; l\'iyou i^iiv), 623. oX(o'^(£i'&', -6xiv6if cj., 291. oXXvui, cj., 295. oXoXu^eo, cj., 274. S. '0^9)^a», in Homerj 421. a. ofivDfiiy cj., 295. ofitaios ilf^i, const., 615. ofio^yvvfii, cj., 295. oW^, dipt., 127. ov£/^ov, -0,-, dec, 124. /3. mivnjii, cj., 284. ovo^a in periphr., 385. S. ovo^a^&i, cj., 275. ^. ovoficit, cj., 298. OB*-, pron. and adv. begin- ning w., 317, 519. 2. oToy, 0^01 * ffou, iror* oy, oT, IT 63 ; w. gen., 363 ; interchanged, 659. 'iinZs, IT 13 : 109. 2. oVoj;, const., 601 f. 0^0.01, cj., 301. 4. ooiyu, -yyij/jLt, CJ., 295. o'j»;;, dec, 123. y. o^vUfjti^ cj,, 295, h^iiriru, redupl., 191. 2. o^tpus, dec, 123. y. OS, rel., IT 24: 147f,468, use, as rel., 5 1 9 f ; as complem ., 5 3 5 f ; w. modes, 606 ; xoti 05, 491. R. ; uv fiiv, Ss, 493. R. ; « /3oi!a.£;, 525. /3. OS possess., IT 24 : 151 , use, 503 f. [326. OS in der., 305, 306, 308, oVos, IT 63 : 521 ; in con- dens., 529 ; w. adj. of admiration, 538. a ; w. inf., 628 ; oirot as indecl., 450. S; as adv., 529. /3; oVov oy, 532. ^. oo-o-E, dec, 127. [728. 1. oo-TEov, -ovv, IT 9 : 98, ?o-Tis, Tr24! 153,519.2; irreg. forms, oVoy, oVw, ccTTot, oTojy, oronri^ IT 24 153; interchanged w. OS, 520 ; complem. use, 535 f; w. modes, 606, 608 f ; T/ //.ctSavj 'jroi- ii',, 631. N. -oirris, adj. in, 138. 2. oir^poitvoftai, -a,of/.cti, cj., or£ w. modes, 606. [291. oTi, not elided, 42. « ; w. superl., 525. N. ; re- dund., 609 ; w. inf. and part., 619. K. ; repeat- ed, 667 ; pos., 673. /3 ; ort Ti ; 539. a ; oV/ (lvi^ 671. 9. ou <^ 00, 29. at. \ ^10, ofi, 00,36; i, 647 ;redund., 664f; OV fi^^yf* subj. and fut, ind., 595. S, N., 597, 1 ; OV N^, 51 ; irS > ;3S, vS > ipl, 52 ; w^ ^ ^^, 53 ; w*x ^ 61 ; 5r (') > ^, 65 ; sr > », 69. n. ; < if, 69 a ; pron. and adv. be ginning w. a-., IT 63 MiXa, cj., 276. [317. ^-a;"?, ir 11: 102, 741. a. «■«/'», cj., 222. 3. waXaias, cp., 156. y. :rx^Xy const., 648, 651. y, 652. 1 ; w. pass., 562 ; ^a^et for crtt^tim, 653. s, 730. tra^omid, pref., 192. 4. troi^flv, absol., 638. srSs, IT 19 : 109, 132, 683., N., 738. c ; -nr. 2 pers. imp., 613. 2 ; trav- T£s, w. rel., 520. a, TtxiTctci}^ cj., 275. vt, viirx"' cj., 281. £, 238. ;3 ; Ti !ra('iav ; 631. N. vtoiToiiriruj cj., 274. y. ^aTiafxaif CJ., 288. ir«Ti)j, IT 12 • 106, 742. IlarfoxX/is, iri6: 121.4. rriir^taSf dec, 124. y. !Tai!s<, ins. of c, 221. a. B-sW«, TT 39 : 217, 238. /3, 269. vfiivKUj contr., 33. a. IIsifaKi/'t, IT 14: 116. /3. «/'{«, cj., 268. [281. s. •rilra/ixi, fut., IT 39 : and vri}cria>t vi'ixu, cj., 298. ^.Er»« as indeol., 450. S ; ^XiTovj vrXutrra in cp., !rA.£xai, cj., 259. [460. vrXsovsxTtjs, cp., 157. K. (irXiu, cj., 220, 264. N. TfX'iaiSt dec, 135. !rx«i', w. gen., 349 ; as connect., 657. y \ vXnv El, 663. 6. ^Xk'i", cp., 161. 2, vX^fforuj cj., 274. y, -irXm, num. in, 138. 4. •jrXvvuy cj., 270. ^rXfuof, cj., 264. Wioi, cj., 220, 264 ; w. gen., 391. S. ir»i/|, dec, 123. y. filial in periphr., 425. 5. !roA.,f, IT 14, IT 16: 111. 2, 113f, 118, 121. ^oXu^xK^vs, dec, 136. a. ■xoxifovs, dec, 136. 2. mXi/'t, IT 20 : 135 ; cp., 159 ; w. x£s/, 655. 6 ; voXXoi X o\ ^sXXoi, 488. jraj^Esi, cj., 288. Ta^iZai, cj., 297.. •jTo^pu^ w^araif w. gen., 347, 363. X. 'roQ- E, 50 ; ]> 6, 300 ; J- > T, Dor., 70. 2 ; chang^es of Unguals and liquids w. rr, 70. I ; y ff (T^, 52 ; rfAy> a-f^, 53 ; dropped before ff-, 55; bef. Xj 61 ; Tr <^ tra; 70. 1 ; r in neut. Un- guals, 103; sign of pers., 143, 147, 171 ; changes of in cj., 181, 211 ; added to r., 2 7 1 f ; pron, and adv. beginning w., ir 63: 317. TiiXas, cp., 158. TUfix = iyca, 477. |G. TctfAias, ^ 7 ; 86, 93. TBCK, monopt., 127. Ta.-^a.ffffaiy CJ., 274. y. Td^retpesj dec, 125. et Tatrffci), TOLTTOit cj., 274, y rauToVf TBCVTOj 97. N. Ta^u;j-ius,cp,f 159,162 raais, -uv^ dec, 124. y. TE, affixed, 328 ; pos 673, a; end., 732. -TE, adv. in, 321. 2. TSi'vJ, cj., 268 ; 217. a. -TE/^ot in der., 306. N. Tuxoi^ ^ 14 : 113. 2, '■ 115. 1. TEXEyTftJi-, as adv., 457. «, 632. teXew, cj., 219, 221. riXos, adv. ace, 440. TS^VW, TO-fJtVb)^ cj., 277. ^ -TEof, verbal in, 314 w. dat., 407.« jconst., 642 f. TE^oi?, dec, 104. T£g»jv, dec, 132. 2, reirira^is, TiTTcc^tSt ^ 21 * 137; TE^gicrcraf, 65. K GREEK INDEX. 451 rsTjaivai, cj., 236. nixa, cj., 270. 9. Tnxci, cj., 266. Tii}^iKavras, -offSB, ^ 63 : 150,516.' [308.309. -r»f, -ms, in der., 806, -Tri^mv in der., 307. -Tiifio; in der., SH. b. TiVs'Sj dee., 119. 2. r»n^;, 1[ 50 : 224 f, 284. TlxTia, cj., 272. li. Ti/idai, 1 45: 216, 218 ; Ttftauv^ \ 22. Ti^n', H 7 : 93, 744. rifi^tts, Ttf^ii;, 109. 2. r/vftj, cj., 278. t);, indef., ^ 24: 105. j3, 152f; end., 732; irreg. forms, rou, t&I, asrTa, 152, 153. x;' affixed, 328 ; use, 517f; w. 2 pers. imp., 613. 2 ; ri as indeoli, ^50. S. T/j, interrog.. If 24 : 152. 2 ; 729. E. ; use, 535 f; w. art., 480. a ; in con- dens., 528. 1 ; Tt ya.^ j ri Ss i &c., 539. 1 ; :wi. 5. [N. -T{/os, -Tj<; in der., 306. r^/axovTouTj)?, -T/j, 134. /3. T{//3oo, cj., 269. [728.3. ■re«e»is, t 14: 112, lis, r^tTovst dec, 136. 2. r^tTovnfjtiTiikayToyj 140.y. -Tfo» in der., 307. b. TQoTtSf dec, 119. 1. T^vai, T^i^aii cj., 282. r^uyait cj., 267. 3. Tvyy^a.vu^ cj., 290 ; W. gen., 370, 380. a ; w. part., 633. TUVVOUTOff, ^ 63 : 150. OS. riiTTU, cj., 272. rivals, dec, 119. 2. Tii^s;, cj., 270. Tu^ats, dec, 124. y. TUf tf{ereforej 492. )3. -T6/^ in der., 306. b. u^iXiv, t3 : 22. «, 24f; V init., aspir., 13. 1 ; contr., 34, 36 ; " < F, 50 ; y ^ c and su in r., 270. vS^iirryi;, cp., 157. E. i'SVo!j, dipt., 127. [648. ywE^, cp., 161. 2 ; const., v'TTrtKoos, w. gen., 377 ; w. dat., 405. ». [292. u^io■;^^v£o^ai, -^o/4tzi, cj., y^o, cp., 161. 2; const., 048 ; w. pass., 562. Vtrri^as, cp., 161. 2. U{paiv6lt cj., 267. ?>, H 3; ?»• > ■i^, 51 ; ipT > iTT, fS > /3S, 52 ; ififi ^ (£6^, 53 ; ipx'^ ^, ipaysrv, 2. aor., 298. [61. ^oj/.a, If 42 : 267,236.2; fojvs/'f, If 22 : 109, 132; ,/il, If 53: 228, 284. R., 301. 7; end., 732: ?f>>i, 552 ; t(fiiv as aor., 576. 5. I^otvs;, cj., 278 ; w. part., .I^i/joj, cj., 268. [633, fiivu, ipiiai, cj., 278. 'ii's, dec, 123. y. ■,£y£^iu, cj., 29ts (pki^, If 11 : 101. ^o^£4;, (p^ia/j cj., 301. 6 >aJ«o, cj., 275. Z- _ lairirai, (p^ccyiiDfAtj cj., 294. ?f£o!j, dec, 104. N. _/»>i, -?, dec, 124. a,. 'i ^■,X''> I 51 ; Xr > XT, ;t;^ > 7^. 52 ; ;K^ > y/i, 53; x" > ;C, 61 ; ;c. ins-, 90- 3 ' added to r., 282. X-iZ'", cj., 275. Z- X^k"! <3-> 267. ;^avS(Ki'iy, CJ., 290. ;eo!e/£/!. t 19: 57, 109, 132; cp. 157. Xiss, % 11: 102 ; x'i- (IV, w. gen., 372. y; pos., 674. XKirxaj, x^-'^^^i 9i'» 281. E. Xdi, 112: 123. y. X^'i^h ^c^iQiffTOs, 160. Xs}^.i^aVf dec, 123. a ;i;eft;, cj., 264, X^vsj dec, 123. y. ;^0Af, ff inserted, 221. a. 452 GREEK INDEX. ■ ENGLISH INDEX. ^^xai, Xi^'l^"'', <3-> 218. a, 284 ; contr., 33. a. ; X^do/iaij w. dat., 419. 5. X^'^ost dec, 1 23. y. XS«, impers., cj., 284. 4 ; w. aec, 430. E. ; w. inf., 583. XsiZ'', cj-, 284. 2, 4 ; w. gen., 357. N. XZ«I^'^ in periphr., 385. s ; '■' xi^F'"- > ^^y ^ 432. N. [1 ;Cec/iri»!, 118 : 131, 728 ^gyroKEjwf , dec, 136. 1 . Xius, dec, 123. y, 104. i//, i[3;<, -ftiviiK in der., 313. uvioftat, cj., 301. 8 ; w. gen., dat, and ace, 374. a, 399. «. uvTi^ concrete^ Acatalectic verse, 698. [305, E. Accent, 722f ; marks of, 14, 22. a. ; principles, 722f ; uses, 722. 3 ; gen. laws, 726 ; changes, 721 { i in apostr., contr., eras., 728 ; determination of, 734f; hist., 734 f; in dial., 735; in declens., 736f; in Deo. I., 736, 740. 1 ; in Dec n., 728. 1, 737 ; in Dec. m., 728. 2, S, 74i f ; in fem. adj., 740. 2 ; in comp. pron., 732. S ; in interrogatives, 152. 2, 535 ; in compar., 745 ; in conj., 728. 4, 746 f; in compos., 739 ; in particles, 750 ; showing quant., 681. Accentual places, 723f ; changes, 727 f. Accusative, 78, 84, 339 ; changes in, 34, 63. E,, 84, 96. 4, 97, 100, 102 ■y, 107, llOf, 114f ; in appos. w. sent., 334. 8 : expr. dir. limit, 339, 422f of dir. oif. and eff., 423f ; w. verbs and verbals, 424 ; w. verbs gov. gen. and dat., 424. 2 ; by attr., 425, 427. 9 ; in periphr., 425. 5, 6 ; w. verb omitted, 426 ; with v«, vui, /.la, 426. 5; omitted, 427 ; of dir. obj., 428 1; w. verbs of motion, 429 ; w. causa- tives, 430 ; w. Se? and xi^i 430. E. ; of effect, 431 f; of kind, noun, 431 ; w. adj., 431. 1 ; of nent. adj., 432; of defin. noun, 433; double, 434f; w. verbs of making, &c., 434 ; doing, &c., 435 ; asking, cSbc, 436 ; of spe- cif. or synecd., 437 f, 563 ; in ex- clam., 438. S ; of extent, 439 ; adv., 440f; of rel., attr., 526; w. inf. and part., 617, 626f ; abs., 638f ; w. verbal in tmw, 643 f; w. prep., 648 f. Acephalous verse, 698. Achronio forms, 365. Active tioicc, 165, 174, 555 1; as in- trans. or reflex., 555 ; as pass., 556 ; w. reflex, pron., 561. I ; interch. w mid., 561 ; verbals, 305 f, 314, 392 ENGLISH INDEX. 453 Actual sentence, 329 ; mode, ^ 'J7 : 177, 587. Acute accent, 14, 722f ; > grave, 729 ; sytl. 725. Address, nom. in, .^43. 3 ; voc. in, 442 f; sign of, 443. Adjective, 73; declens.,^ I7f: 128f; of one term., 129; of two term., ^17: ISO; of three terra., If 18f: 131f; irreg., 135f; num., 137f; compar,, 155f ; deriv; 31 4 f, 458.3 ; compos., 324, 326, 458. 3 ; si/rtt., agreement, 444 f; in comp. const., 446; used; subst., 447f ; use of neut., 449f; for abstr. noun, 449. a ; in adv. phrases,' 449. /3 ; w. words of diff. gend. and numb., 450; in pi. for sing., 451 ; w. impers., 546. «: ; agreeing w. idea, 1 453 ; agreeing w. gen. implied, 454; attracted, 455 f; for adv., adjunct,' &c., Abl \ in anacol., 459 ; use of degrees, 460 ; w. prep., 651. S. I Adjective clause, 329, 492. 1, 522. 2; pronouns, 147 f; synt. 44 4 f, 494 f. « Adjunct, 329 ; complem. X circumst., expon. X nude, 329. Adonic verse, 706. I . Adverb, num., f 25 : l;i9; compar., 155, 162{; deriv., 320f ; synt, 646f, 657 f; w. art. = adj., 475; attr., 526. 1, 527. K., 531. £; as prep., as conn, and non-conn., 657 ; used subst., 65« ; in const, prsegn., 659. Adverbial clause, 329; ace, 440f; phrases, 478 ; inf., 623. .Siolic dialect, 1 , 3, 6 f ; digamma, 22. S; opt., 184. X, 205.3; verse, 706. Affixes, open X dose, 82. i; of de- clens.,^5t: 80 f; analyzed, f 6: 83. 3; in dial., 95 f, 99, 120f; of pers. pron., 141 f; of verb, ^ 28 f: 171 f, 195f; classes, 195; orders, 196; elements, T[ 31 : 197f; union w. J., 216f; in verbs in -^i, 224f; in complete tenses, 233f ; dial., 181f, 24 If. Agrnt, deriv., 306. 3 ; w. pass, verbs and verbals, 380, 407. x, 417, 462, 642 f. Agreement, 329; of subst., 331 f; of adj., 444 f; of pron., 494 f; of verb 543 f. Alcaic, 698 ; lesser, 706. 3. Alcmanian verse, 706. 8. Alexandrine dialect, 8. Alphabet, "f 1 : lOf, 21 f ; Hebrew, 2l. Anacoluthon, 329 ; in synt. of appos., 333. 7 ; nom., 344 ; adj., 459 ; compt., 461 ; art., 4S4 ; verb, 609 ; inf. and part., 619. N., 627 f; part., 638 f, 641; verbal in -tm; , 644 ; particle, 669. Anacrusis, 698. ^. Analysis, forms of, ^ 65 f. Anapsest, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696 ; verse, 697. (3, 707 f. Anastrophe, 730. Anomalous nouns, 122f; adj., 135f; compar., 160f; changes in r. of verb, .301. Antecedent, def. or indef., 519; in clause w. rel., or omitted, 522 f, 525; in case of rel., 527 ; clause united w. rel. clause, 524f, 528f ; w. complem. clause, 538. [accent., 726. Antepenult, in pronunc, 18. 5 ; in Antibacchius, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696. 3. Antispast, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 721. Antistrophe, 700. 2. Aorist, 167 f, 178; second, 178. 2, 180, 199, 255 ; in pures, IT 57 : 227 ; sign changed in, 56, 201 ; X pros. and impf., 569 f; imp., 570. 2 ; used achronically, 575 ; X perf. and plup., 577 f; for perf. and plup., 580 ; for fut., 584 ; X impf., as conting., 593 ; X pres.,w.^>i, 598. 1 ; accent, 734.d, 746 f. Aphseresis, crasis referred to, 38. Apodosis, 329, 603 f. Aposiopesis, 484. Apostrophe, 1 6, 30, 4 1 f ; accent, 728. o. Appellatives, der. of fem., 311. Apposition, 331 f; for part, const., 360. Appositive, 329, 331 f. Aptote, 126. N. Argive dialect, 1 ; ti in, 58. /3. Aristophanic verse, 709. Arsis, 695 ; affecting quant., 690. 3. Article, 1124: I47f; in crasis, 39; used to mark gend., &c., 74. /3 ; pre- pos. X postpos., II 7; sijnt., 467 f; Ep., Ion., and Dor. use, 467 f ; as an art., 469f ; how translated, 469. 1 ; w. subst. in its full ext., abstr., inf. 454 ENGLISH INDEX. prop, name, &c., 470f ; w. subst. def. from lim. word, 472 f; position, 472 ; w. pron., 47.'5, 480, 483, 528. 1 ; pos. w. oSts;, 0%, ixsTvos, 474. j3 ; w. ad- verb, 475, 478 ; used subst., 476f ; w. a/jtipi or crif(, 476. N. ; in periplir., 477 ; inady. phrases, 478 ; w. subst. def. from prev. ment., &c., 479 f; = poss. pron., 482 ; without a subst., 484 ; omitted, 485f ; marking subj. of sent., 487. 4 ; doubled, 489. 9 ; as a pron., 467f, 490£; w. fiU, Vt, 490 ; w. yaj, xxl, 491 ; in its t- fonns, as demonst. or pers., 492 ; as rel., 493 ; w. inf, 622f. Aspirate, 1 3 ; asp. or rough mutes, IT 3. Associated consonants, ^ H. Asterisk, 16.4. Asynartete verse, 695. 3. Asyndeton, 660. Atonies, 731. Attenuation of vowels, 28 f. Attic dialect, 1 , 4 f ; old, middle, new, 4 ; Atticists, 8 ; declens., 98 ; gen., 116. J; redupl., 191. 2, 283 ; fut 200 ; opt., 205, a ; forms in imp., 213. 3. Attraction, 329 ; in synt. of appos., 333f; ace, 425,626; adj., 445f; pron., 524f, 538; verb, 5S0f; inf. and part., 614f, 626 ; particle, 659, Attribute, 444. «. [668. Augment, 173, 187f ; syll. 187 ; temp., 187f; in comp. verbs, 192f. Augmentatives, deriv., 313. Authority in prosody, 6S7. Auxiliary verbs, 1 80, 234, 58.'3, 637. ■Bacchias, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 720. Barj'tone, 725 ; verb, 216. a. Base, in cj., 202. a ; in vers., 698. ;8. Boeotian dialect, 1. Brachycataleotic, 698. Brackets, 16. 4. Breathings, f 3 : 13 ; marks of, 22. a. Breve, 676. N. Bucolic caesura, 699. 5. Byzantine dialect, 8. Csesura, of foot, verse, rhythm, masc, fem., &c., -al pause, syll., 699 ; af- fecting quant., 690. 3. Cardinal numbers, 1[ 21, If 25 : 137. Cases, dir. X indir., casus recti X ob- liqui, 78, 83 f; hist, of, 83 f; use of. 338 f ; relations of, dir., indir., subj., obj., resid., 338 f ; in Lat., 340. /3. Catalectic, 698 ; in sijU., &o., 698. a. Causative verbs, 319 ; w. ace, 430. ' Characteristic (last letter, or letters, of root), 92f, 98, lOOf, 170. /3, 216f ; Chief tenses, 168. [exponents, 329. Choral odes, 700. 2. Choriamb, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 730. Chronic forms, 565. Circumflex accent, 14, 724 f. Circumflexed syll., 725 ; vow. long, 678, 726. 4. Circumlocution, see Periphrasis. Circumstance, 329. Close vowels, 24 f; affixes, 82. t. Cognate vowels, 26. 5 ; consonants^ 49 ; in dfal., 69. Collective, w. plur., 453, 497, 548. Common dial., 4, 7f; gend., 74. Comparative, 155f, 316 ; w. gen., 351, 461 ; w. dat, 419 ; w. j? and oth. particles, 461, 463f ; ellip. and mixed const., 461. 2, 3 ; w. ix^itas, oiovTos, w xtfrd, 91 mim, &c., 46.3 ; w. reflexive, 464 ; two, w. i', 464. 5 ; abs., 465. Comparison, 1 55 f, 316 ; of adj., 155f, 316. 2; of adv., 162f; of other words, 161 ; by use of adv., 460; double, 161, 460 ; accent in, 745. Compellative, 329, 442. Complement, -ary adjunct, conjunc- tion, pron., adv., 329. Complete tenses, 11 26 : 168; hist, of, 179, 186; four formations in act., 186; as indef., 233 ; inflection, 233 f ; older and more used in pass, than act., 240, 256, 578 ; most used in part., 578. /3; X indef., 577f. Composition, 323 f; form of 1st word, 324f ; 2d word, 326f ; close or prop. X loose or improp., 327 ; accent in, 734. f, 739. Compound word, 303 ; form, of, 323 f; verbs, prefixes of, 1 92, _ 3 ; cori^,, 329, 446, 496. c, 544. Conclusion, forms of, 603 f. Concord, 329. Concrete case of thing possessed, 391. y, w. o^a, &c., 391. S ; objective, w. verbals, 392f ; w. abstracts, alnos, &c., 393; of loc. and temp, relation, 394 ; of reference, &c., 395; w. part., 617. 6; abs., 638 f; w. prep., 648 f. Glyconie verse, 706. 2. Government, 329. Grave accent, 14, 724, 729 ; syllable, Hebrew Alphabet, 21. [725. Hellenistic dialect, 8. Hephthemim, 699. 4 ; anticipated. Heroic verse, 698, 704. [712.1. Heteroclites, 122, 124. Heterogeneous nouns, 122, 125. Hexameter, 698. 3, 704. Hiatus, how avoided,. 30 f; in early Greek, 89, 117f; in poetry, 701. 3. Historical tenses, 168 ; present, 567. a, 576. History of orthog., 21 f; declens., 83f, 117f; pron., 143f; conj., 171 f; root of cj., 254f; formation, 302; accent, 722f, 734. Homeric dialect, 2. Hyperbaton, 329, 426, 511, 672. Hypercatalectic, 698. Hypodiastole, 16. 2. , Iamb, 697 ; -io rhythm, 696 ; verse, 697. |3, 71 If. [cal, 695. Ictus, in pronunc, 18. 5, 19; metri- 39 Immediate verb X oaus., 560. Imparisyllabic, 82. N. Imperative, 169, 177, 61 2f; wants 1 pers., 170, 598. 1 ; perf., 235 577; in depend, sent., 612. 1; w. vra; and tis, 613.2; expr. supposi- tion, 613. 4. Imperfect, 167f, 178 ; generic use, 566. a ; for pres., 567. y ; X aor., 569 f; X aor. and plup., as conting., 593. Impersonal, 546, 564. 3, 617 ; part., in ace. abs., 638. Improper diphth., 25 f; redupl., 283. Inceptive verbs, 319. Incorporated sentence, 329 ; modes, IT 27 : 614f ; w. adjuncts, 616. 4 ; X distinct, 618; wide range of, 6 1 8 f ; how translated, 618. 1 ; in oratio ob!., 619; w. oTi and as, 61 9. N. Indeclinable, 126. 1. Indefinite pron. and adv., f 23 f, 1[ 63 . 146, lS2f, 317, 517f ; art., 518. a; rel, 51 9f; tenses, If 26 : 168 ; X def, 569 f; X complete, 577. Independent, nom., 343. Indicative, 169, 177, 587f; X subj. and opt., 587 f; expr. conting., 593 ; habit, w. av, 594; wish, 597f; pur- pose, 601 f; in condit. sent., 603 f; expr. possibility, &c., w. Sii, 604. a ; without a», 605 ; in quot., 609 f. Indirect cases, 78, 83f, 338 f; obj., 397 f; quot., 607 f. Infinitive, 1 69, 1 76, 6 1 4 f; synt., 6 1 4 f ; impers., 617; construed as neut. noun, 445, G20f; act. = pass., 621. /3 ; w. art., 622 f; as ace., 622 f; of spe- cif and adv., 623 ; abs., 623 ; re- dundant and omitted, 624 ; in com- mand, exclam., &c., 625 ; resem- blance to dat, 626. N; w. acc,6-i6f; w. other cases, 627 ; w. ue, uitts, o7o;, otros, 628. f ; w. t^iv, ^^tv ij, &c., 629. 2, 6.57. N. Inflection, IT 4f : 72 f; three methods in nouns and verbs,- 1 8.5. Inscription, nom. in, 543. 1. Inseparable particles, 150, 325. Insertion of e in contr., 35 ; of cons., 64; to prevent hiatus, 89, 117f; of and < smooth and rough, 52; inserted, 64. 2; voice, 165f, 180, 553 f; interch, w. pass., 554 ; w. dir. reflex, sense, 557 ; indir. 558 ; recipr., cans., 559; subjective, 560 ; w. reflex, pron., 561. 1 ; as act. or pass., interch. w. act., 561 ; root, 254. Modern Greek, 8 ; pronunc, 19. Modes, t 27: 164, 169; hist, 176 f, conn, vowels, 203f; use, 586f; in- telkctive, 587 f; in desid. sent., 597 f; final, 601 f; condit., 603 f; rel., 606 j complement., 607 f; voMve, 61 2f; incorp., 61 4 f. Monometcr, 698. Monopody, 697. ^. Monopt<)te, 127. /3. Monostichs, 700. Motion, movable, 74. S, Multiples, IT 25 : 137f ; w. gen., 352. Mutes, 1 3 ; changes of, 51 f, 69f : m. and liquid as affecting quant., 689 ; in Dec. III., f 1 1 : 101 f; verbs, ^ 35f : Names of letters, 2 1 f. [ 1 70. |3, 266. Nasals, f 3 : 49f, 53f, 64. 2. Nature, long or short by, 677 f. Negative pron, and adv., ^ 63 : 137./3; subject. X obj., 647 ; as interrog. or affirm., 647. N. ; redund., 664f ; w. inf., 665 f. Neuter, 74 f; dec, 87 ; in adj., 130f ; in syllepsis, 446 ; use of, in adj. and pron., 449f, 496; plur. w. sing, verb, 549 ; impers., 546. a. New root, 254. Nominative, 78, 84, 339 f; for voc, 81, 343. 3 ; in appos. w. sent., 334 ; as subject, 339f, 342, 543 ; by attr., 551, 614 ; independ., 343 ; in ana- col., 344 ; of rel., attr., 526. /3. Noim, declens., IT 7f; 92 f; anoma- lous, defective, &c., 122f; deriv., 305 f; compos., 324, 326. Nude, 224 f, 237 f; inflection, 84, 175, 208 ; adjunct, 329. Number, 77, 83, 85; signs of, 83f, 172; in verb, 164, 170f; use and interchange of, 335 f. Numerals, t 21, t 25: 137f; how combined, 1 40 ; letters as, IT 1 : II. Obelisk, 16. 4. Object, 338 f; indir. in dat., 339, 397 f; dir. in ace, 339, 422 f. Objective a^es, If 30f : 195, 209 f; voice, I74f; cases, 338f ; gen., 392;, dat. 397. ENGLISH INDEX. 459 Oblique cases, 7S. ,8 ; as adv., 320. Odes, choral, 700. 2. Old root, 254. Onomatopes, palatals in -?», 273. 1. Open vowels, 24 f; afBxes, 82. s. Optative, 169, 177, 587f; X ind., 587, 593 ; fiit. 587. 2 ; X subj., 588 f; follows sec. tenses, 592 ; w. a», for pres. or fat. ind., 595 ; expr. wish, 597 f ; purpose, 601 f ; for subj., 602 ; in condit. sent., 603 f ; expr. possibility, command, &c., w. av, 604; in rel. sent., 60G ; in indir. quot., 608 f. Oratio recta X obliqua, 607 f. [5. Ordinals, IT 25 : 137 f; w. abri;, 511. Orthography and Orthoepy, 1[ 1 f : 1 f ; hist, of, 2 If. Orthotone, 733. Oxytone, 725. Pseon, 697 ; -ic verse, 720. Palatals, If 3 ; changes of, 51 f; in Deo. m., T 11 : 101 ; verbs, 1[ 38. Paragogic consonants, 66 ; i, 1 50. N. Parisyllabic, 82. N. Paroemiao verse, 708. 2. Paroxytone, 725. Parsing, forms of, f 65f. [487. Parts of sentences as joined with art., Participle, 169, 176; declens., ^22: 128f ; st/nt, 614f, 630f; as adj., 444f; expr. purpose, 583. a, 635, 640 ; impers., 615. 5 ; prelim., 631 ; circnmst., 632 ; = adv. or adjunct, 632 ; complem., w. verbs of sensation, chance, anticipation, &c., 633 f; X Inf., 634. (3 ; w. adj. and verb, &c., 634. y; prospect., 635 ; defin., 636 ; W. Uf^lj tX'^y S^XO/AeCIt c'/^OfAOH, &c., 637 ; abs., 638 f; w. as, &o., 6'^0 ; anacol., 641. Particle, in compos., 325, 328 ; synt, 645 f; as affected by.ellips., 660 f; pleonasm, 664 f; attr., 668 ; anacol., 669 f; combinations, 671; position, 672 f; accent, 7.50. [N. Partitive gen., 358 f; adjectives, 362. "assive, I65f, 180, S53f; w. gen., 381 ; w. dat., 417 ; interch. w. mid., 554 ; how construed, 56-^ ; pre- fers dir. to indir. obj., pers. to thing, 563; converse of mid., 564; impers., 564. 3. Pastoral ciesura, 699. 5. Patrials, derivation, 309, 315. a, e. Patronymics, derivation, 310. Paulo -post-futm'e, 582. Pentameter, 698. 3, 705. Penthemini, 699. 4, 704. 2. [726. Penult, in pronunc, 18.5; in accent.. Perfect, 167f, 179, 186, 233f; com- monly wants subj., opt., and imp., 169. /S ; as pres., 233 ; pt. in dial., 253; X aor., 577 f; both past and present, 579 ; for fut., 584. Periphrasis, 329 ; in synt. of gen., 385, 453. £; acc, 425 ; art., 476f; verb, 637. Perispome, 725 ; verbs, 216. ». Person, 143; signs of, 143, 171 ; in verbs, 164, 170f; change of, 500. Personal pronouns, IT 23: 141 f; w. yi, 328 ; use, stronger and weaker forms, 502 f; implied in affixes of verb, 545. Phaloecian verse, 706. 4. Pherecratic verse, 706. 2. Pindar, dialect of, 3 ; metre of, 700. 2. Pleonasm, 329 ; in synt. of gen., 395 ; adj., 458 ; compt. and sup., 460f ; art, 468. b; pron., 499; verb, 552; inf., 624 ; prep., 652 ; particle, 664 f. Pluperfect, 167 f, 179, 186, 233f ; in tx > J), 179, 203. K ; as aor., 233 ; X aor., 577 f; X impf., as conting., 593. Plural, 77, 83. 85, 172 ; for sing., 336; w. dual, 337 ; w. sing., '450, 453, 497, 548 f. Polyschematist verse, 696. 3. Position of art., 472 ; of particles, 672f ; in prosody, 677, 688 f. Positive degree, 155 ; added to superl. and doubled, 462 ; for compt. and superl., 466. Possessive pron., ^ 24: 151, S02f; gen., 390. Postpositive article, 447. ' Precession of vowels, 28 f, and page v. ; in dial., 44 ; in r, of verb, 259, Prefixes .of verbs, t 28: 173, 179, 187f; in dial., 194. Preposition, w. ca.5e, &c., as adv., 322; synt., 648 f, 657 f; omitted and ins., 650, 651. s; w. adj., 651. S; in compos., 652 f ; as adv., 657 ; w. 460 ENGLISH INDEX. case, used subst, 658 ; in const, prsegn., 659 ; position, 672 ; accent, 730 f, 750. 2. Prepositive vowel, 24 f; article, 147. Present, 167 f, 178; as generic tense, 566 ; historic, 567, 576 ; X aor., 569 f; for perf., 579. ? ; for fut, 584 ; X aor. w. .kii, 598. 1. - Preteritive verbs, IT 58f ; 233 f. Primary icf«s, 18. 5; tenses^ 168, 173f; X sec. in expr. conting., 589 f; folr lowed by subj., 592 ; affixes, % 31 : Primitive, 303. [196. Proclitics, 731. Prohibition w.^i), 598. Pronominal correlatives, IT 63 : 317. Pronoun, IT 23f: 141f ; subst, 1 23 141 f; pers., 141 f; reflex., 144; recipr., 145 ; indef., 146 ; adj., ^ 24 147f; def., 148f; art., rel., 148; iter. 149 ; demonstr., 150; poss., 151 ; indef., 152f; compos., 144f, 149f, 153, 328; art. as, 467f, 490f; si/nt., 494 f; masc. for fern., 495; w. subj. implied, 497 ; attr., 498 ; repeated, 499 ; change of numb, and pers., 495, 500 ; spec, observ. on, 501 f; jpers., poss., and reflex., stronger and weaker forms, &c., 502 f; use of ou. &c., 503 f; tciiTos, 508f ; demonstr., 512f ; as adv. of place, 514. N. ; for pers. pron., 515; indef., 517 f; for def, 513. y ; relative, 519 f; inter- changed, 520 f; w. antec. in same clause, or omitted, 522 f; w. iim, 523; attraction, 524 f; of words be- longing to the antec. clause, 525 ; of rel. by antec, 526 ; of antec. by rel- 527 ; w. ellipsis of subst. verb, 528 rel. omitted, 528. 1 ; = demonstr. and conn, particle, 530 f; w. another conn., &c., 533 ; repetition of, avoid- ed, 534 ; complem., 535 f; in con- dens., 538 ; interrog., 536, 539 ; ccX- Xos, 540 f. Pronunciation, Eng. method, 17 f; Mod. Gr., 19; Erasmian, 20 ; an- cient, of vowels, 24. y, Proode, 700. 2. Proparoxytone, 725. Proper diphthong, 25 ; name, w. art, 471. 6; redupl., 283. Properispome, 725. | Proportionals, 137 f; w. gen., 352. Prosody, 67 5 f. Protasis, 329, 603 f. Punctuation, 15. Pure nouns in Dec. ni., IT 14 : 110 f; verbs, f 45f: 170. /3. Quadruple rhythm, 696. Quantity, 676f; marks of, 16. 4; natural, 677f; local, 677, 688f ; in dec, 682f; in conj., 682, 684; m deriv., 685 ; in dial., 47, 686. Quasi-C£esura, 712. 1. Quaternarius, 697. /3. Quotation, direct X indirect, 607 f. Radicals, 302. Reciprocal pron., IT 23 : 145 ; use of mid., 559. Redundant nouns, 122 ; verbs, 257. 3. Reduplication, 179, 190f ; Att., 191. 2, 283; in comp. verbs, 192f; in root, 283f ; proper, &a, 283. Reflexive firoK., IT 23 : 144, 502 f; w. compt. and superl., 464 ; of 3d pers. for 1st and 2d, 506 f; for rjcipr., 507. 7 ; w. auTflf, 464, 511 ; sense of mid., 165f, 557f. Regimen, 329. Regular affixes of verb, IT 29f : 215. Relative pron. and adv., V 24, IT 63 : 148, 153, 317; synt., 519f; sen- tences, modes in, 606. See Pronoun. Residual cases, 338f ; dat., 414f. Resolution of diphthongs, 46. Rhythm, 694f ; kmds of, 696; cassura of, 699. 1. Rising Ionic, 697 ; verse, 696. 3, 720. Romaic language, 8. Roman letters corresp. w. Gr., HI: 12. Root of noun, how obtained, 79 ; of verb, 170. a. ; union with' affixes, 2I6f; old, middle, new, 254 ; tenses aiTanged in respect to, 255 f; changes of, in verb, IT 61 : 254f ; euphon.,'' 259f; emphat., 265f; anom., 301 ; pnmary, 302. Rough breathing, 13 ; w. init. ^ and £>, 13. 1, 2; mutes, V 3 ; ^ smooth, Sampi, IT 1 : 11, 21 f. [62, 69, 263. Sapphic verse, 698, 706. 4. Scanning, 701. 1 ; continuous, 692. Second tenses, 178, 180, 186, 236, 255, 257 ; more inclined to introus. sense, 257. /3; X first, 199. II. ENGLISH INDEX. 461 Secondary ictus, 18. 5; tenses, TT 26 : 168, 173f ; X prim, in expr. con- ting., 589 f; followed by 'opt., 592; expr. wish, 597 f; affixes, IT 31 : Semivowels, Tf 3 : 63. [196. Senarius, 697. jS, 712. Sentence, kinds of, 329 ; words in ap- pos. w., 334. Short vow. and syll., IT 3 : 24f, 29, 676, 679 f; > long, in dec, 92, llOf ; inoompar., 156 ; in verb, 183, 218f,224, 266f; in compos., 326. R. Sign, see Tense-sign. [der. of, 304 f. Simple vowels, IT 3 : 24 ; word, 303 f; Singular, 77 ; for plur., 335; w. plur., 450, 453, 497, 548f. Smooth or soft breathing, 13 ; jEoI. and Ep. for rough, 13.4; mutes, % 3 ; > rough, 52, 65. Sounds, abrupt and protracted, 17. N. Special application, sign of, 332. 3, 640. Spondefc, 697 ; -aic verse, 704. 1. Stanza, 694, 700. Strophe, 694, 700. Subject,